Volume 2 Part 3 - Mechanical Specifications

RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT PLOT C33
YAS ISLAND, ABU DHABI - UAE

EMPLOYER:
TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
MAIN WORKS CONTRACT
VOLUME 2 - PART 3
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MARCH 2023
KHATIB & ALAMI (CONSOLIDATED ENGINEERING COMPANY)

P.O. BOX: 2732, ABU DHABI - U.A.E.
Main Works Contract Project No. AD21016
Mechanical Specifications Residential Building at Plot C33-Yas Island
_________________________________________________________________________________
RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT PLOT C33

YAS ISLAND, ABU DHABI - UAE
MAIN WORKS CONTRACT
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 05 19 METER AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING

21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 05 48 MECH. SOUND AND VIBRATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
21 08 00 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 11 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 12 26 FIRE SUPPRESSION VALVE AND HOSE CABINET
21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
21 13 39 FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
21 20 00 NOVEC 1230 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING

22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING SYSTEM
22 05 48 MECH. SOUND AND VIBRATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
22 11 13 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS
Table of Contents
-i-
_________________________________________________________________________________
22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

22 12 00 FACILITY POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
22 14 00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
22 33 30 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
22 40 00 SANITARY FIXTURES
22 51 00 SWIMMING POOL
22 52 00 WATER FEATURES-MEP
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
23 05 00 COMMON WORKS RESULTS FOR HVAC

23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
MECH. SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
23 05 48
EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION
23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 34 00 HVAC FANS
23 35 00 SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 40 00 AIR CLEANING DEVICES
23 64 26 SCREW CHILLERS
23 72 00 AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
23 73 30 OUTDOOR EXPOSED AIR HANDLING UNITS
23 81 00 DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 82 00 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
Table of Contents
-ii-
_________________________________________________________________________________
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION FACILITY CONTROLS
25 50 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION FACILITY CONTROLS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 05 10 GENERAL NATURAL GAS REQUIREMENTS

33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
33 52 00 SNG SYSTEM
ANNEXURE-I - LIST OF APPROVED PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS

FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
End of Table of Contents.
Table of Contents
-iii-
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approvals
1.2 Requirements
1.3 Codes and Standards
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers
2.2 Trolley Foam Fire Extinguisher
2.3 Trolley Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher
2.4 Fire Blanket
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Maintenance Schedules
3.2 Approved List of Manufacturers
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 10 44 00
Fire Protection SpeciaIities
10 44 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approvals
1.1.1 No items shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local Fire Department
regulations. In all access, however, installation shall comply with National Fire Codes
(NFPA latest editions), or indicated otherwise.
1.2 Requirements
1.2.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings all materials specified as per the
capacities and ratings indicated on the drawings.
1.2.2 All gaseous fire suppression systems shall have zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP=0).
1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the performance/manufacturing
standards of items mentioned in this section shall confirm to the applicable portions of the
latest editions of the following codes, standards and regulations.
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of

Standard Standard
1. Underwriters Laboratories UL - -
2. National Fire Protection Association NFPA - -
3. Loss Prevention Certification Board LPCB - -
4. Fire Offices Committee FOC - -
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers
2.1.1 Extinguisher shall be from ISO 9001, LPCB certified manufacturer rechargeable
multipurpose ABC dry chemical type CO2 type as shown on drawings.
2.1.2 Each dry chemical unit cylinder shall be coated internally by electrostatic PVC risen,
suction tube of Aluminium. It shall be complete with a frame for hanging, to the wall, 36
cm. long hose, discharge valve and pressure gauge. Extinguishers shall be tested to BS
5423 and approved by F.O.C. or equivalent.
2.1.3 CO2 extinguishers shall be seamless extruded of high grade steel light construction to BS
5423 and approved by F.O.C. or equivalent and to have a rating of 55B. Extinguishers
shall have permanent leak proof shut-off safety disc, non metallic horn, flexible hose and
wall hooks.
2.1.4 Foam type extinguisher shall be mild steel CRI quality. The extinguisher shall be
multipurpose foam (AFFF). It shall be constructed to BS 5423 Standard, with flexible hose
and wall hooks.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 10 44 00
10 44 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 Trolley Foam Fire Extinguisher
2.2.1 Trolley mounted Fire Extinguisher shall be of capacities shown.
2.2.2 Extinguishers shall be mounted on an easy moving wheeled carriage trolley and suitable
carrying handles.
2.2.3 Wheel Carriage shall be as per IS-13386. The fitting shall ensure that the lowest part of
the body remains minimum 100 mm above the ground, when it is in vertical position.
Carrying handle shall be clamped to the body, minimum 16mm in diameter with a clamp
for holding the handle shall be provided. The wheel carriage shall be provided with rubber
wheels of size 250 mm × 50 mm × 25 mm and axle of stainless steel rod of minimum 25
mm diameter. Wheel rubber hardness shall be minimum 100 shores with supporting leg.
2.2.4 Cylindrical body Shell shall be made of 4 mm minimum thickness hot rolled Mild steel
sheet.
2.2.5 The cap shall be made of brass, threaded for effective length with parallel threads
conforming to class A of IS 2643 (Part 1).
2.2.6 Discharge hose shall have a bore of not less than 12.5 mm and a length of not less than 3
m.
2.2.7 The discharge nozzle is designed to adopt maximum aeration during the performance.
2.2.8 Foam making branch and other discharge fittings shall be such that when the extinguisher
is set in operation, it shall be capable of discharging the foam required.
2.2.9 The CO2 gas cartridge shall be contained in high pressure CO2 gas cartridge of IS 4947,
have quick release to operate and discharge gas.
2.2.10 Drain plug shall be provided on the bottom of body with neoprene rubber washer.
2.2.11 The Foam Compound shall be provided as per IS: 4989 (Part 2). Foam Compound shall
be manufactured within six months at the time of supply of fire extinguisher.
2.2.12 Fire extinguisher shall be complete with snifter valve (breathing device) designed such
that when variation in atmospheric temperature is within ± 10°C there shall be no spouting
of liquid through nozzle; Liquid Level Indicator for the solution inside the container; Safety
Pressure Release Valve mechanism by which if the pressure inside the container exceeds
17 kg/cm², the safety pressure release valve will release the internal pressure
automatically; Plunger Rod & Piercing Mechanism of anticorrosive material as per
requirement of IS:13386, spring, piercing device.
2.3 Trolley Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher
2.3.1 Trolley mounted Fire Extinguisher shall be of capacities shown.
2.3.2 Extinguishers shall be mounted on an easy moving wheeled carriage trolley and suitable
carrying handles.
2.3.3 Wheel Carriage shall be as per IS-13386. The fitting shall ensure that the lowest part of
the body remains minimum 100 mm above the ground, when it is in vertical position.
Carrying handle shall be clamped to the body, minimum 16mm in diameter with a clamp
for holding the handle shall be provided. The wheel carriage shall be provided with rubber-
wheels of size 250 mm × 50 mm × 25 mm and axle of stainless steel rod of minimum 25
mm diameter. Wheel rubber hardness shall be minimum 100 shores with supporting leg.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 10 44 00
10 44 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.4 ABC Dry Chemical trolley fire extinguishers shall be manufactured and conformed to BS
EN 1866 standard under strict ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management System.
2.3.5 Cartridge and cylinder external paint shall be specially designed to ensure the best
protection against the highly aggressive salts marine environment.
2.3.6 The head cap shall be brass forged with a spring loaded auto safety release mechanism
to prevent an unsafe situation above 21 kg/cm2 as a result of overfilling or during
accidental unscrewing from the cylinder neck gear.
2.3.7 Fire extinguisher shall be complete with specially designed ergonomic patented pistol to
ensures a steady flow of powder with a very low drop in pressure; Discharge device with a
highly flexible 5m hose EPDM rubber.
2.4 Fire Blanket
2.4.1 Fire Blanket shall be made from textured woven glass fibre, impregnated both sides with a
special high temperature resistant silicon rubber. The fibre blanket shall have an
approximate finished weight of 565 gm/m2 and shall confirm to BS 6575. The blankets
shall be packed in white rigid self-extinguishing PVC container, with instantaneous release
tape to function as handle when the blanket is pulled for the container.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Maintenance Schedules
3.1.1 Maintenance schedules shall be provided with each type of extinguisher. The schedules
shall be in protective covers and shall detail all aspects of maintenance of extinguishers
including details of weight checks, pressure test, discharge tests, internal and external
visual checks, time periods for checks and action to be taken on finding a fault. The
schedules will also contain full details for repairing, recharging and resetting extinguisher
contents and re-ordering instructions.
3.2.1 For acceptable Products, Manufacturers and Suppliers, refer to Annexure I.
End of Section 10 44 00
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 10 44 00
10 44 00 - 4
DIVISION 21
FIRE SUPPRESSION
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General Requirements

1.2 Application
1.3 Scope of Works
1.4 Quality Assurance
1.5 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
1.6 Approvals
1.7 Engineer's Drawings
1.8 Shop Drawings and Data to be submitted for Approval
1.9 Approved Materials
1.10 Abbreviations
1.11 Workmanship
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 00
Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 05 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The work of Division 21 shall be governed by general conditions of contract and sections
of Division – 21.
1.1.2 It is the Contractors responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above documents, and further assure that all Subcontractors are
equally informed.
1.1.3 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits.
1.2 Application
1.2.1 This section applies to and is part of all Sections of Division 21
1.3 Scope of Works
1.3.1 The works covered under this contract include the supply, installation, testing, adjusting
and putting into operation systems, components of systems, and individual items of
equipment, and work related thereto, in accordance with the project Tender Documents.
Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of those Works shall
be provided.
1.3.2 Any NFPA or Civil Defense requirement or approval shall be the Contractor responsibility
and shall be included in the Tender price and any future requirement either shown on the
drawings or specifications shall be done without any additional cost implication to original
contract.
1.3.3 All Firefighting work shall be carried out by Specialist approved by Civil Defense and it is
the Contractor responsibility to obtain Civil Defense drawings approval before the work
commence.
1.3.4 Fire and life safety requirements from Civil Defense shall be strictly followed as per latest
edition of UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of practice and other rules and regulations from
Civil Defense.
1.3.5 All materials relevant to Fire and Life safety, shall be approved and listed by “Individual
Emirates” Civil Defense.
1.3.6 Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system.
1.3.7 Fire standpipe shall not be used in any way to provide water for other purposes.
1.3.8 All valves and risers shall be securely supported at each floor.
1.3.9 All valves and risers shall be located where readily accessible.
1.3.10 All local alarms shall be linked with the electrical fire control panel as shown on drawings
and or specified in such a way that whenever any local alarm is initiated, a corresponding
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 00
21 05 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
pilot and alarm shall be actuated on the main fire control panel to indicate occurrence of
fire in the particular zone.
1.3.11 Where Fire Command Centre is there, remote (repeater) control panels should be
provided to monitor and override the normal logic or sequence of operations in case of
emergency for all Fire Fighting systems.
1.4.1 The manufacturers of all materials and equipment must have at least ten years of
experience in the design and manufacture of their products.
1.5.1 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in
this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim.
Section 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialists

Section 21 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loop for Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 05 23 - General Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 05 29 - Hangers, Supports and Seismic Control for Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 05 48 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control for Fire
Suppression Piping and Equipment.
Section 21 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression System
Section 21 12 26 - Fire Suppression Valve and Hose Cabinet
Section 21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
Section 21 13 39 - Foam Fire Extinguishing System
Section 21 30 00 - Fire Pumps
1.6 Approvals
1.6.1 No item shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local fire department regulations.
In all cases, however, installation shall comply with National Fire Codes (NFPA Latest
Edition) or indicated otherwise.
1.7.1 The Drawings are based on design and include general layouts and typical details of
various systems to be installed. The Contractor shall make the installations in a
workmanlike manner to conform to the structure, to avoid obstructions, to preserve head
room, and to keep openings and passage ways clear without additional instruction and
without additional cost to the owner.
1.8.1 The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings showing the exact routing and locations of all
the piping, ducting, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and according to the
dimensions of the approved manufacturer. Shop Drawings scale shall be 1/10, 1/20, 1/50
and 1/100 as applicable and as approved by the Engineer.
1.8.2 The Contractor shall submit catalog cuts and brochures of products with reference to
proper paragraph in specifications. All submittals shall be binded in one Booklet.
1.8.3 The Contractor shall submit at the beginning of the project a schedule of submittals for
materials and shop drawings to the approval of the Engineer.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 00
21 05 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.9.1 All materials shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications.
1.9.2 The naming of manufacturers in the Specifications shall be strictly adhered to in all
circumstances.
1.9.3 Substitution of materials other than those named shall not be submitted.
1.9.4 Materials shall be delivered in unbroken packages bearing the brand and maker's name,
and shall be stored on platforms and properly covered to protect them from moisture, heat
and dust.
1.9.5 All materials shall be supplied from the main factories in the country of origin of the
manufacturer. Any deviation from this, like supplying equipment assembled in another
different country under a license or another name is not accepted unless approved by the
Engineer.
1.10 Abbreviations
1.10.1 The following abbreviations have been mentioned in the specifications.
AGA American Gas Association.

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Associations.
ANSI American National Standard Institute.
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
ASA Acoustical Society of America, American Standards Association.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
AWWA American Water Work Association.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
LPC Loss Prevention Council.
BSI British Standards Institution.
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
UL Under Writers Laboratories.
BTU British Thermal Units.
NPC National Plumbing Code.
1.11 Workmanship
1.11.1 All workmanship required to accomplish the work mentioned in Mechanical specification or
shown on related Drawings, shall conform to the highest standards, and as required by
the Engineer.
1.11.2 The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
End of Section 21 05 00.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 00
21 05 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipe Expansion Joints
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Pipe Installation
3.2 Cleaning of Piping Systems
Section 21 05 16
Expansion Fittings and Loop for
Fire Suppression Piping
21 05 16 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Pipe bending shall not be resorted to except in extreme cases and only after the written
approval of the Engineer.
1.1.2 Piping shall be designed with Loops to take the thermal expansion. Wherever this is not
possible for physical reasons, expansion joints with guides shall be used.
1.1.3 Installation of pipes shall be complete with all cutting, patching and making good of walls,
slabs, partitions, etc., due to fixing, supporting and anchoring of pipes.
1.1.4 Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and/or at the highest
points in the lines.
1.1.5 Pipes and fittings shall both be manufactured according to one single standard unit of
measurement, either both English or both metric.
1.1.6 Provision shall be made for flushing the system.
1.1.7 All piping shall be installed so that the system may be thoroughly drained.
1.1.8 The piping shall be pitched in the direction of drainage.
1.1.9 Drain valves shall be provided where necessary, where shown on the Drawings and at all
sectional valves to help draining the major part of the system. On all risers 4" (100mm) or
larger, drain valve shall be 2" (50 mm) size, on 2½" (65 mm) and 3" (80mm) risers, 1¼"
(32 mm) valves shall be used and on small risers, ¾" (20mm) drain valves shall be
provided.

Section 21 11 00 - Fire Suppression Piping
Section 21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
Section 21 22 00 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 21 05 16
21 05 16 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
standards of items mentioned in this section shall conform to the applicable portions of the
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of Standard

Standard
2. British Standards BS BS3169 Specification for first aid reel hoses for
fire fighting purposes
BS5839 Part 1 Fire detection and alarm systems for
buildings.
Code of practice for system design
installation and servicing.
3. National Fire Protection NFPA 14 Combined Stand Pipe & Hose System
Association with Sprnklers
4. American Water Works AWWA - -
Association
5. Loss Prevention Council LPC - The LPC rules for automatic sprinkler
installations
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Supply and install expansion joints wherever pipes cross structural expansion joints and
wherever required to prevent undue stresses caused by thermal expansion of the pipes.
2.1.2 Expansion joints shall be of the packless-bellow type with flanged or welded ends as
suitable for the pipe application.
2.1.3 Bellows shall be of stainless steel and suitable for a pressure of 125 psi (860 Kpa ) or the
design working pressure, whichever is greater. Expansion joints shall be provided with
guides to prevent any unnecessary misalignment of the pipe. Guides and anchor
arrangements shall be per the recommendations of the expansion joints manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.2 Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 50mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe.
3.1.3 Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces; sleeves
through outside walls to project 15mm. on each side of the finished wall; and floor sleeves
to project 25mm. above finished floors.
Section 21 05 16
21 05 16 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.4 Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with cement.
3.2.1 Plug all opening ends of piping, valves and equipment except when actual work is being
performed to minimize accumulation of dirt and debris.
3.2.2 Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is to receive a hydrostatic test
with clean water.
3.2.3 Remove dirt and debris collected at screens, strainers and other points from the system.
Section 21 05 16
21 05 16 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approvals
1.2 Requirements
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Pressure Gauges

2.2 Flow Meters
2.3 Approved List Of Manufacturers
PART 3 EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
Section 21 05 19
Meters and Gauges for Fire Suppression Systems
21 05 19 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approvals
1.1.1 No items shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local Fire Department
regulations. In all access, however, installation shall comply with National Fire Codes
(NFPA latest editions).
1.2 Requirements
1.2.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings all materials specified in the
capacities and ratings indicated on the drawings.

Suppression Piping and Equipment
Section 21 05 19
21 05 19 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
2. National Fire Protection NFPA - -
Association
3. Loss Prevention Council LPC - The LPC rules for automatic
sprinkler installations
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Pressure Gauges
2.1.1 Bourdon-tube type with 120 mm. diameter cast aluminium case with moisture-proof and
dustproof blowout discs. Panel mounted gauges to have steel or aluminium hinged rings;
direct mounted gauges to have back flange, black numerals on a white background face.
2.1.2 Pressure gauge shall be furnished with a lever-operated gauge cock, and shall have
snubbers installed between the gauge cock and the gauge to eliminate pulsations.
2.1.3 Bourdon Tube shall be Phosphor bronze, (beryllium copper bellows).
2.1.4 Socket shall be Stainless steel.
2.1.5 Accuracy shall be at least 1% of scale range, shall be equal to twice the rated working
pressure of the unit (pumps, chillers) reading shall be in psi. and Kpa.
2.1.6 Gauges for combined pressure and vacuum service to have compound seal.
2.2 Flow Meters
2.2.1 Supply and install flow meters at the pump test flow line, as shown on drawings. The
meter connections and cocks shall be carried well above the line. Install the flow meters
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation, as per Authority and Fire
Department regulations.
2.3 Approved List Of Manufacturers
2.3.1 For acceptable Products, Manufacturers and Suppliers refer to Annexure I.
PART 3 EXECUTION
(NOT USED)
Section 21 05 19
21 05 19 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Flow Switch - Electric Type
2.2 Gear Box and Monitor
2.3 Siamese Connection
2.4 Branch Orifice
2.5 Dead Weight Fire Valve & Accessories
2.6 Gate Valves
2.7 Pressure Reducing Valves
2.8 Strainers
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 21 05 23
General Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping
21 05 23 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
provided.
1.1.2 All valves controlling the water supply shall be located where readily accessible.
1.1.3 Provision shall be made for test connections and valves.
1.1.4 Control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 24 VDC maximum.
Section 21 05 48 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control for Fire Suppression

Piping and Equipment.
Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
Section 21 05 23
21 05 23 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
Reference Code Abbre Applicable Title of Standard

viation Standard
buildings.
3. National Electrical NEMA MIG Part 14
Manufacturers Association
4. National Electrical Code NEC - -
Association with Sprinklers
6. National Fire Protection NFPA 13 Sprinkler System
Association
installations
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Flow Switch - Electric Type
2.1.1 The water flow alarm device shall consist of an electrical switching device actuated by
means of a vane extending inside the pipe so designed that when water flows inside the
pipe the moving vane shall close the circuit in the motor switch which shall complete the
circuit and actuate an alarm.
2.2 Gear Box and Monitor
2.2.1 Supply and install gear box with internal monitor switch for each monitored type isolating
valve in the sprinkler system.
2.2.2 The box and the switch shall be UL listed and approved by FM. The switch shall be two
single pole, double throw type and it shall be connected to the BMS and the fire alarm
panel so that the movement of the valve disc. from the full open position will register an
instantaneous warning in the BMS and fire alarm panel in order to restore the integrity of
the system.
2.3 Siamese Connection
2.3.1 Siamese connection shall comply with BS 336 and to be installed where shown on
Drawings at a convenient height from finished side walk level and shall be chrome plated
extra heavy cast brass complete with the following:
2.3.2 6" x 2½" x 2½" x 2½" x 2½" (150 x 65 x 65 x 65 x 65 mm) as shown on drawings Siamese
connection with drain cock and check valves to suit local practice.
2.3.3 All chains, caps and screws used for fixing.
Section 21 05 23
21 05 23 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.4 Recessed wall box housing the Siamese connection of 2mm stainless steel mirror finish
type 316L, GR7 sheet with wired glass door marked in red from inside: "FIRE BRIGADE
CONNECTION" in both English and Arabic.
2.4 Branch Orifice
2.4.1 Branch Orifice Plate should be installed as required by LPC or NFPA.
2.4.2 Select orifice flange for circuit flow range and minimum pressure drop across the orifice.
2.4.3 Orifice type of flow station to be inserted between flanges. Cast iron body suitable for
operating pressures to 2069 kPa at 121oC. Readout valves of brass construction with
integral EPT check valve. Calibration plate mounted on unit.
2.5 Dead Weight Fire Valve & Accessories
2.5.1 Dead Weight Fire Valve & Accessories supply and install wherever shown on the drawing
and wherever specified fire valves. The fire valve shall be a weight-operated glandless
cast iron rotary plug-type screwed valve, internally lubricated. The valve should not leak,
stick or jam, and shall be unaffected by the pressure in the system. The valve shall be
suitable for use with pressure up to 1379 x 103M/m2. (200 lbs./sq.in.).
2.6 Gate Valves
2.6.1 Gate valves for fire protection are used for on/off operation.
2.6.2 Valves design and shall be leak free and shall conform to AWWA C515, and Working
pressure of 300 psi (21 bar)
2.6.3 Valves must be the same size as the water service line.
2.6.4 The valve body shall be bronze for sizes less than 2" (50 mm), and cast iron or ductile
iron for sizes above. All components that to be corrosion resistant
2.6.5 The stem shall be of high strength bronze or stainless steel with tight seal arrangement
with EPDM ductile iron wedges.
2.6.6 Valves shall be FM Approved and UL Listed valve or other equivalent international.
2.7 Pressure Reducing Valves
2.7.1 Pressure reducing valves shall be of the direct operated type.
2.7.2 Each valve shall be constructed of cast iron body, with stainless steel spring and shaft and
nylon diaphragm.
2.7.3 The spring shall be designed to provide the pressure reduction indicated on the Drawings.
2.7.4 The valve shall be designed for a work pressure of 300 psi (21 bar) or as shown on
drawings and shall be threaded or flanged ended as the pipe connecting to it.
2.7.5 The valve shall be of the self contained type without any control lines with all internal parts
being accessible by removing spring chamber and without dismantling the valve itself.
2.7.6 The valve shall be designed to operate smoothly and quietly without chattering or any
water hammer problems.
Section 21 05 23
21 05 23 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7.7 The valves shall suitable for fire fighting applications and shall be FM Approved and UL
Listed valve or other equivalent international.
2.8 Strainers
2.8.1 Water strainer shall be supplied and installed at the suction connection of all pumps, and
ahead of all automatic flow control valves.
2.8.2 Strainers 2 1/2" (65mm) and smaller shall be Y-pattern type with bronze body, screwed
cover, brass basket and screwed ends.
2.8.3 Strainers 3" (75 mm) and larger shall be of cast iron body, brass basket and flanged ends.
2.8.4 Basket shall have 1/32" (0.8 mm.) perforations for water service.
2.8.5 Strainers shall suitable for fire fighting applications and shall be FM Approved and UL
Listed valve or other equivalent international
PART 3 EXECUTION
with clean water.
internal diameter at least 50mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe for un-
insulated lines or of the insulation for insulated pipes.
3.2.4 Sleeve construction:
- Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron.

- Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe.
3.2.5 Sleeves shall be fire-stopped in gap between pipe and sleeve in all fire rated structures to
Building Regulation E14 using asbestos-free fire proof material and without restricting
pipework movement (with any thermal insulation sections stopped short each side).
3.2.6 Sleeves shall be caulked in gap between pipe and sleeve in external walls using
asbestos-free, weather and vermin proof material.
Section 21 05 23
21 05 23 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 23
21 05 23 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 29
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Hangers and Supports, Anchors and Guides
2.2 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule
2.3 Isolation Mounts
2.4 Inertia Bases
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 21 05 29
Hangers, Support and Controls for Fire
Suppression Piping
21 05 29 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 29
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and it’s requirements.
The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in
1.1.1 Section 21 05 48 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Control
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to to be provided provided to the
approval of the Engineer and as per the code and standard requirements. Do not use
wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe, weight of
fluid and weight of pipe insulation.
2.1.2 Piping to be securely fastened the structure without overstressing any portion of the
supports or the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to concrete by
means of inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel
fishplates embedded in the concrete.
2.1.3 Hangers to be arranged to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and
supports.
2.1.4 Piping and tubing to be supported at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at
all changes in direction. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm.
2.1.5 Pipe hangers and supports to be furnished complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels,
couplings, brackets and all other components and accessories, to allow installation to
freely expand and contract.
2.1.6 Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with adjustable
attachment to hanger rod.
2.1.7 Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger, steel pipe
clamps to be provided.
2.1.8 Trapeze hangers to be provided where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the
same level. Trapeze shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for rod
hanger at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to
each other by the use of either clamps or clips.
2.1.9 Roller supports to be used where provision for expansion is required. Rollers shall have
cast iron adjustable bases.
Section 21 05 29
Suppression Piping
21 05 29 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.10 For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive 3/8" (10 mm) rods, to be
used, and for piping 2 ½" (65 mm) thru 5" (125 mm) use 5/8" (16 mm) rods, and for piping
6"(150 mm) thru 12" (300 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) rods to be used.
2.1.11 Additional steel members to be provided where required for hanging piping systems in
areas with special conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are
required other than those provided in the structure.
2.1.12 Lateral bracing to be provided for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every
fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to slab or beam.
2.1.13 Pipe roll stands to be provided for expansion..
2.1.14 For supporting horizontal piping from wall steel J-Hook to be provided for pipe located
close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500 lbs (680
Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
2.2.1 The spacing for fire protection piping support (unless spwcififed elswhere) shall be as
follows:
.1” & 1¼” (25 & 32 mm) steel pipe ------------------------ 3.7 meter.
.1½” – 8” (40 – 200 mm) steel pipe ------------------------ 4.6 meter.
.1½” (40 mm) PVC pipe ------------------------------------- 2 meter.
.2” (50 mm) PVC pipe --------------------------------------- 2.5 meter.
.2½” (65 mm) PVC pipe ------------------------------------- 2.7 meter.
.3” (80 mm) PVC pipe --------------------------------------- 3.3 meter.
2.2.2 Vertical spacing of PVC pipes shall be twice as those of horizontal spacing.
2.2.3 Vertical spacing of other pipes - at every floor level.
2.3.1 Isolation mounts shall be used between equipment and concrete base and at the loading
points of the equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3.2 Spring Mounts
2.3.2.1 Shall be of the restrained steel spring mountings and shall incorporate hold down bolts to
limit vertical movement.
2.3.2.2 The isolator shall include an acoustical barrier of rubber pad bonded to the base plate to
prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise and be corrosion protected
when installed outdoors.
2.3.2.3 The spring should be designed to provide horizontal stiffness at least 75% of vertical
stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load, and safe solid stresses.
2.4 Inertia Bases
2.4.1 Each Fire pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall be consist of pre-
engineered welded steel frames suitable for concrete pouring, welded-in-concrete
reinforcement, equipment mounting bolts and vibration isolator brackets. Base shall mount
on spring vibration isolators which shall be of high deflection, free standing, un-housed
Section 21 05 29
Suppression Piping
21 05 29 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
large diameter, laterally stable steel springs assembled into an upper load plate and
leveling assembly and into a lower load plate and noise isolation pad assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Approved List of Manufacturers:
3.1.1 For accepted products, Manufacturers and suppliers, refer to Annexure I.
Section 21 05 29
Suppression Piping
21 05 29 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION FOR

FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.3 Reference Standards
1.4 Submittals
1.5 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.6 Guarantee
1.7 Acoustic Design Considerations and Specification
1.8 Specified Noise Levels
1.9 Noise Attenuation
1.10 External Area Noise
1.11 Vibration Control
1.12 Vibration Isolation, Structural Noise and Equipment Bases
1.13 Piping System Vibration Isolators
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Isolation Hangers

2.3 Inertia Bases
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General

3.2 Noise Tests
3.3 Hangers and Supports Performance Test
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
Mechanical Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control for
Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment
21 05 48 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION FOR

FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
[This part shall be read in conjunction with Acoustic Specialist Report Specifications. Any
discrepancies between the contents of this section and the acoustic specialist report, the report
specifications shall take presidence].
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The Contractor shall consider all necessary acoustic data to determine the actual surface
area to be acoustically treated. Acoustic calculation sheets along with the Contractor's
proposals shall be provided, clearly showing that the specified “Reverberation Time” (RT)
will be achieved by using the type of acoustic treatment, for the approval of the Engineer.
1.1.2 The Specialist Sub-Contractor should have successfully supplied, installed and completed
similar projects for a period of not less than 10 years.

1.3.1 Reference Standards shall conform to the following performance criteria determined by
testing full assemblies (component tests are unacceptable) of identical materials and
construction, using factory standard finishes in accordance with relevant codes and
standards:-
1.3.2 Fire Performance Characteristics:
1.3.2.1 Provide panels with surface burning characteristics to UBC42-2 and ASTM E-84 by a
testing organization approved by the Engineer.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
21 05 48 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
UBC42-2 Fire Hazard Classification Acceptable

ASTM E84 Fire Hazard Classification Class-A
Flame Spread 25 or less
Smoke development 450 or less
1.3.3 Acoustics Performance Characteristics:
1.3.3.1 Provide acoustic materials with acoustical absorption characteristics as specified

elsewhere by a testing organisation acceptable to Engineer. Approved testing authority
must be independent of the manufacturer.
1.3.4 Toxicity Characteristics
1.3.4.1 Acoustic materials used in the project should have toxicity characteristics in accordance
with article 15, Part 1120 of the New York state uniform fire prevention and building code
MEA classification ME 123-92-M
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Shop Drawings
1.4.1.1 Submit to the Engineer, three (3) complete sets of shop drawings prepared on CAD.
(Hand produced drawings shall not be acceptable). The drawings shall show all necessary
details and dimensions required which will subsequently be field verified and revised as
required for the Engineer’s approval.
1.4.2 Samples
1.4.2.1 Submit two (2 sets) of the manufacturers samples, 2# samples per set. Each individual
panel (wall and ceiling) to be actual size with relevant fixing components for the approval
of the Engineer. Product shall be original production material in fabric or vinyl finish as
specified.
1.4.3 Certification
1.4.3.1 Submit a certificate of compliance to specify acoustical and fire performance criteria as
per this specification, signed by the manufacturer. Attach independent laboratory test
results, showing that the products supplied as complete assemblies meeting or exceeding
the specified requirements.
1.4.4 Manufacturers Approval
1.4.4.1 The Acoustic Specialist supplying and installing the material shall be an approved agent of
the manufacturer. The manufacturer will certify that said contractor is an officially
appointed agent having sufficient experience and expertise to complete the project in a
satisfactory manner.
1.4.5 Single Source
1.4.5.1 All materials as for as possible shall be from a single supplier.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
21 05 48 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.1 Deliver fabricated units and related components to the site for installation to meet a
reasonable schedule and to suit the approved project construction programme. On-site
storage shall be such as to ensure that all panels and associated materials are protected
from damage and the outside elements.
1.5.2 Prior to installation the site must be free of wet and dusty trades and the climatic
conditions stabilized to normal operational levels. Acoustic elements shall be allowed to
stabilize on site 24 hours prior to installation.
1.6 Guarantee
1.6.1 The Acoustic Specialist shall furnish in the Client’s name, a written guarantee covering the
product supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal operating
conditions for a period of one year from the date of completion of acoustic works. The
Contractor shall pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the
manufacturers and acoustic sub-contractor of individual members of the system before the
completion of the project.
1.6.2 Provide to the Engineer in the Client’s name, sound test results. Sound test results should
comply with this specification, which is to achieve the indicated Reverberation Times (RT).
The sound test is to form an integral part of the specialist acoustic sub-contractors scope
of work.
1.7.1 It will be the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the internal acoustic ambient levels
are in accordance with this specification.
1.7.2 Where the contractor fails to meet these specifications he will be expected at his own cost,
to carry out all remedial work necessary to remedy the situation.
1.7.3 It will be the mechanical services sub-contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the noise
generated by the plant, including airborne noise through the structure, do not exceed the
noise criteria levels for the various types of areas specified.
1.7.4 The Specifications shall be read in conjuncture with the relevant clauses of the
Mechanical Specifications Volume 3. In case of any discrepancies the more stringent of
the two or as approved by the Engineer shall be applicable.
1.8.1 The optimum NC/NR noise levels for the various spaces refer to Table 1
Section 23 05 48.
1.8.2 The optimum vibration levels for the various spaces refer to Table 2 – Section 23 05 48.
1.8.3 The noise and vibration measurement time parameter (T) shall be representative of the
source being measured and at least 1 minute for steady-state noise and vibration sources.
If sources are intermittent or cyclic in nature, the noise and vibration measurements shall
be of sufficient duration to capture 10 cycles of the source.
1.8.4 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the vibration levels are
achieved and to demonstrate and certify that the same have been achieved.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
21 05 48 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.9.1 The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation, where necessary and as shown on
drawings to reduce the airborne noise transmission through Mechanical systems so that
the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.
1.10.1 The external noise levels of any installation shall not exceed NC/NR 45 at 3 m at ground
and upper levels for normally operating building services plant.
1.10.2 During periodic testing of equipment, noise levels shall be limited to NC/NR 55 at the site
boundaries during daytime testing and NC/NR 45 during night-time testing.
1.13.1 All mechanical, Fire Pumps shall be analysed for vibration and for noise breakout to areas
adjacent and above or below to ensure that the specified noise criteria ratings are met.
1.12.1 The contractor shall be responsible and include for the supply, installation and testing of
the complete system necessary for vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all
structure borne vibration generated by the electro-mechanical equipment as described in
this specification and as detailed on the scheme drawings.
1.12.2 It is the Contractors responsibility to carry out a full vibration and structure borne noise
study as detailed in the mechanical specifications.
1.12.3 Where Fire Fighting equipment units are located at roof level or inside a room the
selection of vibration isolation systems shall take into account the effect of the
unsupported span between building columns and the subsequent deflection of the slab
under the point loads. The spring type isolators shall have a static deflection of not less
than 50mm under the load of the units supported. This static deflection is to provide an
isolation efficiency of at least 95% and higher deflections are to be used if the calculations
so indicate. The Contractor shall also check the installation for airborne noise through the
structure that could affect accommodation areas immediately below or adjacent and if
necessary recommend the use of acoustic floating floors to contain the noise. A report of
the study and recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
proceeding with the installation. The cost of the study, implementation, erection and any
rectification of the original design shall be carried out at the Contractors own cost.
1.12.4 The vibration isolators shall be positioned in accordance with the manufacturer
recommendations for the equipment load distribution.
1.12.5 The equipment shall be loaded exactly over or between the mounts without any overhang.
1.12.6 The static deflection of the vibration isolators shall be determined by the specialist
acoustic engineer, but should not, be less than that recommended by CIBSE GUIDE or
ASHRAE handbook.
1.12.7 The vibration isolators shall be treated against corrosion. The steel components shall be
PVC coated. The nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electro plated.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
21 05 48 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.13.1 All piping connected to rotating machinery shall be supported by hangers and supports
including vibration isolators and shall be connected to the equipment by means of acoustic
flexible connectors.
1.13.2 The first three hangers from the equipment shall provide the same deflection as the
equipment isolators; the remaining hangers shall be spring or combination spring and
rubber incorporating a spring with at least 20 mm deflection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Refer to Section 21 05 29.
2.2.1 Refer to Section 21 05 29..
2.3 Inertia Bases
2.3.1 Refer to Section 21 05 29.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General
3.1.1 The tests of the reverberation time in the areas specified shall be in accordance with (BS
5363-1993) “Measurement of Reverberation Time in Building Space and Auditoria”.
3.2 Noise Tests
3.2.1 It will be the responsibility of the contractor to employ an independent Acoustic Specialist
to carry out proving tests and to prepare noise test certificates for all acoustically important
areas of the project.
3.2.2 For items of plant the noise level shall be taken at a point equivalent distance to the
largest radiating surface of that equipment.
3.2.3 Tests shall be carried out to establish the required performance standards and shall
comply with the sound attenuation recommendations as detailed in the sections below.
3.2.4 Vibration Tests
3.2.4.1 All vibration isolation systems shall allow no more than 5% transmissibility to the structure.
All equipment provided shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from excessive vibration.
Any minor vibration, which may occur, shall not be transmitted from equipment into or
through the supporting or enclosing structure. Should the engineer consider that
excessive vibration is present, such as to warrant the need for specialist testing apparatus
and personnel, then the contractor shall engage and employ such specialist services. The
contractor shall bear the cost of rectification of the installations as well as the cost of the
specialist services in order to meet the design requirements.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
21 05 48 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1 Brackets and hangers shall be tested to sustain a load of eight times the actual operating
load.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 05 48
21 05 48 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Valve Chart Locations

2.2 Identification of Pipelines and Services
2.3 Sign and Accessory Fastening
2.4 Nameplates
2.5 Painting
2.6 Piping
2.7 Iron Work
Section 21 05 53
Identification for Fire Suppression System
21 05 53 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 To be read and governed by general conditions of contract and its Sections. This section
includes the identification of all pipe works, equipment etc.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete above works based on
specifications and consultant’s approval of samples.

Suppression Piping and Equipment
BS 1710 Identifications of Pipe Lines and Services

BS 4800 Paint Colours for Building Purposes
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
Drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing its function.
Two copies of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass
and framed, shall be mounted in the building as directed by the Engineer.
Section 21 05 53
21 05 53 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
2.2.1.2 All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating conditions.
2.2.1.3 Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours with code
indications.
2.2.1.4 Code indication shall include safety colours and service information. Information shall be
given regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe by using the following systems,
individually or in combination:-
i - Name in Full.
ii - Abbreviation of Name
iii - Chemical Symbol
2.2.2 Legend
2.2.2.1 The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be by
means of a lettered legend naming the material conveyed by the piping in full or
abbreviated form. Arrows shall be used to indicate the direction of flow.
2.2.2.2 The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be applied close
to valves and adjacent to changes in direction, branches, where pipes pass through walls
or floors and as frequently as needed along straight runs to provide clear and positive
indication. Identification maybe applied by stencilling, tape or markers.
2.2.2.3 Pipe marking should be highly visible.
The Type & Size of Letters
Outside diameter of Length of colour Height of letter

pipe or covering (mm) field (mm) (mm)
(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm

(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
(200 to 250) mm 600 mm 63 mm
over 250 800 mm 100 mm
2.2.2.4 Colour
2.2.2.4.1 The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend. The
application of colour bands shall be done by: Painting, Adhesive colour bands or
equivalent colour clips.
2.2.2.4.2 Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.2.2.5 Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows:
Section 21 05 53
21 05 53 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
Colour Code
Basic colour Identification
Fire quenching materials

(water, FM200, etc.) Green Red
2.3.1 Warning and instruction signs, wherever specified or otherwise required, shall be securely
fastened where shown or directed with bolting anchors herein specified for masonry
construction or round head chrome plated brass wood screws and washers for wood
construction. Signs shall not be hung loose on chains or by any other method wherein the
sign will be free to move. Sign shall be installed in a conspicuous well lighted location
adjacent to the equipment it refers to and shall be easily read by occupants in standing
position on floor.
2.3.2 All accessories such as wrenches specified to be hung on chain adjacent to the
equipment they serve, shall be arranged for stowing in a rigid manner and shall not be
hung loose, or otherwise, that may permit the chain or wrench to move or rattle.
2.4 Nameplates
2.4.1 Each unit of equipment shall be identified by a permanently attached nameplate made of
brass or other corrosion-resistant metal. Plates shall be not less than forty (40) by eighty
(80) mm. Plates shall bear information pertaining to the unit as follows:
a. System and unit designation from schedule of equipment.

b. Manufacturer's name and address.
c. Serial and model number.
d. Rated capacity.
e. Temperature, pressure or other limitations.
2.5 Painting
2.5.1 General Requirements
2.5.1.1 Surface requiring prime painting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rust, loose scale, oil,
grease and dirt. Use wire brushes and solution for this purpose.
2.5.1.2 No painting shall be applied to damp or frosty surfaces in wet, foggy or freezing weather.
2.5.1.3 Paint shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops, runs or
sagging.
2.5.1.4 Shop coated surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and retouched where necessary.
2.5.1.5 Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus.
2.5.1.6 All items that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be re-cleaned or
repainted upon request of the Engineer.
Section 21 05 53
21 05 53 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.1.7 Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on BS 1710 and BS
4800 recommendations after being submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
2.5.2 Machinery
2.5.2.1 All machinery installed under this contract such as motors, pumps, etc. shall have a shop
priming coat.
2.6 Piping
2.6.1 Ferrous piping (galvanized or non-galvanized) including flanges, bolts and valves in
trench, partitions, below tiles, or underground shall be painted with 2 coats of emulsified
asphalt. All metal surfaces located within or directly adjacent to fresh air intake louvers
except fresh air dampers shall be painted with 2 coats, of emulsified asphalt.
2.6.2 Paint all exposed (in shafts, above and below false ceiling, on roof, etc.. ) ferrous piping
(including galvanized steel) system components including pipe, fittings, unions, flanges,
valves, hangers and supports as follows before wrapping or insulating the pipes (if
applicable).
2.6.3.1 Applicable to galvanized pipes :
a. Prime Coat: Zinc Chromate.

b. Finish Coat: Ironhide gray metal paint or as approved by the Engineer.
Applicable to all other ferrous pipes:
Prime Coat: Red lead Primer, 1.5 to 2.0 mils thick.
2.7 Iron Work
2.7.1 All iron work within the building, not otherwise specified such as pipes hangers and
supports, and supports for apparatus, shall be prime painted with one coat of red lead.
Section 21 05 53
21 05 53 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 08 00
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 Specialized Parties for Testing Balancing and Communications
1.4 Controls
1.5 Maintenance During Defects Liability Period and Guarantees.
1.6 Extend Defects Liability and Guarantees.
1.7 Codes and Standards.
Section 21 08 00
Testing and Commissioning of Fire Suppression
21 08 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 08 00
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the relevant subsection of the
specification.
1.1.2 Labour, materials, instruments, power etc., required for testing shall be furnished by the
Contractor unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of the Specification.
1.1.3 Test shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such other
parties as may have legal jurisdiction.
1.1.4 In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping system only, before connection of
fixtures, equipment and appliances. In no case shall any piping, fixtures, equipment or
appliances be subjected to pressure exceeding the ratings as prescribed by the
manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances or accepted engineering standards
for piping and fittings.
1.1.5 All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated
until the particular system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction, and at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.1.6 Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced,
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.1.7 The duration of tests shall be as determined by all parties having jurisdiction, but in no
case less than the time prescribed in each subsection of the specification.
1.1.8 In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made other than normal running
adjustment, the test shall be void and shall be repeated after the adjustment or repairs
have been made.
1.1.9 When pipes, valves, equipment etc., are to be covered or embedded; their specific tests
shall be carried out on them before any covering is applied. These tests shall not relieve
the contractor of any of his responsibilities and he shall take all necessary precautions to
insure the safety and protection of such tested items until the termination of the work.
1.1.10 Three copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Section 21 08 00
21 08 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

1.3 Specialized Parties for Testing Balancing and Commissioning
1.3.1 Unless indicated otherwise, major equipment such as Fire Pumps Sets shall be tested and
certified as UL listed/ FM approval and Civil Defence Regulations.
1.4 Controls
1.4.1 All controls shall be tested for proper functioning in accordance with the requirements of
the Specification.
1.5 Maintenance During Defects Liability Period And Guarantees
1.5.1 Starting from the date of issue of the Substantial/Provisional completion certificate the
contractor shall be responsible, for the duration of one year, to provide the following
services free of charge, at his own cost:-
1.5.1.1 The training of operators assigned by the client for operation of all major equipment and
controls as decided by the Engineer. Training should be provided by original suppliers of
equipment for a period of at least one week and or when requested by client through out
the liability period.
1.5.1.2 The replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or installation
defects during operation.
1.5.1.3 Carry out routine preventive maintenance (fortnightly, monthly, quarterly, half yearly and
yearly as applicable to the approval of the Engineer) including provision of labour, parts
and supply of consumable materials such as Lubricants, required for the safe operation of
Fire Pumps and guarantee of performance of all the systems.
1.5.1.4 Necessary staff to carryout the above shall be resident on the job site during the said year.
1.5.1.5 Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects for
a period of one year.
1.5.2 At the end of defects liability period the contractor shall be responsible for final handing
over of all installed systems in a perfect condition to the satisfaction of both Engineer and
client.
1.6 Extended Defects Liability and Guarantees
1.6.2 The Contractor shall issue in favour of the client all original manufacturers extended
guarantees as required by specifications or by Engineers approval conditions or by
manufacturers initial proposal prior to final handing over to the client.
Section 21 08 00
21 08 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
2. British Standards BS BS3169 Specification for first aid reel hoses

for fire fighting purposes
BS5423 Specification for portable fire
extinguishers.
buildings.
5. National Fire Protection NFPA - -

Association

Association
Section 21 08 00
21 08 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 11 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 Tests
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fire Suppression Pipe
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
Section 21 11 00
21 11 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 11 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
provided.
1.1.10 No direct interconnections shall be made between sewers and fire drain systems.
1.1.11 Fire piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes.
1.1.12 All valves shall be located where readily accessible.
1.2 Tests
1.2.1 The system shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test, to the satisfaction and in the
presence of the Engineer. Pressure shall be 50 psi. (345 Kpa) more than the maximum
static pressure in the system, (but not less than) 300 psi (2070 Kpa). Test shall be
maintained for two hours as a minimum.
Section 21 11 00
21 11 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.2.2 If leaks develop during the test, the contractor shall make all necessary repairs and shall
retest the system at no additional cost to the Employer.

Section 21 05 48 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control for Fire Suppression
Piping and Equipment.
Section 21 08 00 - Testing & Commissioning of Fire Suppression

Standard
BS5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for
Part 1 buildings.
3. National Electrical NEMA MIG Part
Manufacturers Association 14

Association
installations
Section 21 11 00
21 11 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Pipes above ground shall be of the ERW type galvanized steel pipes to B.S. 1387
"medium weight" or ASTM A 53-88a Sch. 40. All pipe fittings elbows, tees, crosses,
unions, reducers, etc. shall be of the same quality and weight as the pipes.
2.1.2 Pipe fittings 2" (50 mm) and smaller shall be suitable for threaded connections, 2½" (65
mm) and larger shall be flanged / grooved fittings.
2.1.3 Unions and grooved fittings, flanges shall be installed at all valves inlets or outlets, on all
pipe branches and in general, every 15 metres of pipe run.
2.1.4 Unions shall be used on all screwed pipes and shall be of the same quality and service.
Grooved fittings shall be used on all pipes above 2½” and shall be all steel construction to
ASTM or BS Standards.
2.1.5 Contractor shall rectify any damage to the pipes from the processes of grooving to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.1.6 Pipes under ground shall be HDPE; Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be PE-100-SDR-
9 suitable for 25 bar pressure and manufactured as per ISO 4427. The pipes shall be UL
listed and FM approved.
2.1.7 HDPE Pressure testing shall be 1.5 times the working pressure of the system. Fittings for
the pipe line shall have pressure rating of 16 bar and shall be manufactured as per ISO
standards jointing method shall be electro fusion and butt fusion welding method as per
manufactures recommendations.
2.1.8 If flexible s prinkler d rop s ystem i s u s e d to locate the sprinklers at ceiling tiles and
walls, the drop system shall be flexible stainless s teel, UL 2443 listed, used for
sprinkler services of 175 psi (1206 kPa).The drop shall consist of a braided type 304
stainless steel flexible tube, zinc plated steel Male threaded nipple for connection to
branch-line piping, and a zinc plated steel reducer with a female thread for connection to
the sprinkler head. Hoses shall be factory-pressure tested to 400 psi. (2760 kPa).
The flexible stainless steel Sprinkler drop shall be UL approved listing for (5) bends at
36” length Union joints shall be provided for ease of installation. The flexible drop shall
u s e s p e c i a l b r a c k e t a s p e r t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s . The
bracket shall allow installation before the ceiling tile is in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 21 11 00
21 11 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
with clean water.
End Section 21 11 00.
Section 21 11 00
21 11 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 12 26
FIRE SUPPRESSION VALVE AND HOSE CABINET
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fire Hose Cabinet
2.2 Fire Hose Cabinet (Exposed Cabinet Type)
2.3 Hose Cabinet Equipment and Accessories
2.4 Fire Hose Landing Valve
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 21 12 26
Fire Suppression Valve and Hose Cabinet
21 12 26 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 12 26
FIRE SUPPRESSION VALVE AND HOSE CABINET
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 To be read and governed by general Conditions of Contract and its Sections.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to confirm and seek the approval of the fire
department or persons having jurisdiction and the approval of the Engineer before
ordering the materials.
provided.
1.1.8 Fire fighting piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes.

Section 21 12 26
21 12 26 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________


Standard
2. British Standards BS BS3169 Specification for first aid reel hoses

for fire fighting purposes
BS5839 Fire detection and alarm systems
Part 1 for buildings.
5. National Fire Protection NFPA 14 Combined Stand Pipe & Hose
Association System with Sprnklers
Association
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fire Hose Cabinet
2.1.1 Cabinets are as detaield on Architectural drawings.
2.2 Fire Hose Cabinet (Exposed Cabinet Type)
2.2.1 Supply and install Fire Hose Cabinets wherever shown on drawings and to the details
indicated on the drawings.
2.2.2 Cabinet shall be constructed of steel 16 – Gauge for “Trim, 18 – Gauge for “Tub” and 20 –
Gauge for “Door”. Cabinet size shall be in accordance with the details shown on
drawings. Cabinet door shall be flush, pull handle and tension latches and shall be
equipped with full length plan hinges on the right or the left as conditions requires.
2.2.3 Cabinets shall receive an approved shop coat of paint inside and outside.
Section 21 12 26
21 12 26 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 Hose Cabinet Equipment and Accessories
2.3.1 Each Fire Hose Cabinet shall include the following:-
2.3.1.1 Fire hose diameter 1" (25 mm), 100ft.(30 m.) long, light weight made of red rubber with a
working pressure of 150 psi. (1030 Kpa).
2.3.1.2 Hose shall comply with BS 3169 Type A.
2.3.1.3 Hose reel of the swinging type, up-to 180 degrees full swing complete with guide arm.
2.3.1.4 Chromium plated diameter 1" (25 mm) fog nozzle capable of complete shut off, straight
stream or any degree of solid conical fog.
2.3.1.5 Diameter 1" (25 mm) pressure reducing valve and gate valve with die cast non-ferrous
alloy housing with machined water way.
2.3.1.6 Fire hose: 2 ½” (65 mm) dia. 100 ft. (30 m) long, light weight made of single jacket cotton
rubber lined and shall carry UL Listing, with polished chrome plated brass couplings.
Hose shall be in the cabinet with no permanent connection at the riser.
2.3.1.7 Hose rack of the swinging type up-to 180 deg. Full swing complete with guide arm. Rack
shall be steel backed red enamel.
2.3.1.8 Chrome – plated. All purpose nozzle 2 ½” (65 mm) dia. with adjustable spray head and
capable of complete shut-off, straight steam or any degree of solid conical fog.
2.3.1.9 2 ½” (65 mm) dia. bronze angle hose landing valve with quick press-type compiling
adpator cap and chain (for areas not served by staicase landing valve).
2.3.1.10 Dry chemical fire extinguisher with spray hose and nozzle as shown and as per the
Authority requirements .
2.3.1.11 CO2 fire extinguishers with spray hose and nozzle as shown and as per the Authority
requirements .
2.4 Fire Hose Landing Valve
2.4.1 Fire hose landing valve shall be in accordance with B.S. The valves shall be angle type,
300 psi (2070 Kpa) with built-in pressure reducing and globe valve with polished, chrome-
plated brass body and trim, red cast iron wheel handle, bronze stem, renewable
composition disc, FLANGED 2 ½" (65 mm) inlet and quick coupling outlet with polished
brass chrome plated cap and chain.
2.4.2 For valves with integral pressure reducing valve, the pressure regulator shall be spring
loaded with springs made of zinc plated steel and chamber of chrome plated bronze. The
regulator shall have stainless steel adjusting and lock screw and ball, bronze piston and
Nitrile rubber low pressure seal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 21 12 26
21 12 26 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
with clean water.
Section 21 12 26
21 12 26 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 13 13
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 Tests
1.3 Signs
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 Sprinkler Head-Upright
2.3 Recessed Extended Coverage Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler.
2.4 Side Wall Sprinkler
2.5 Sprinkler Heads-Pendant (Recessed)
2.6 Sprinkler Alarm Test Station
2.7 Sprinkler Zone Control Valve
2.8 Pre-Action Riser Assembly and Related Accessories
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Pipe Sleeves
Section 21 13 13
Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
21 13 13 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 13 13
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.6 Sprinkler installations shall comply fully with the requirements of NFPA section 13 and/or
the rules of the loss prevention council / BS 5306 Part 2 latest edition.
provided.
1.1.11 No direct interconnections shall be made between sewers and sprinkler drain systems.
1.1.12 Sprinkler piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes.
1.1.16 Protection areas and maximum spacing (Standard spray upright / pendant sprinkler) for
light hazard is 18 square meter and for Ordinary hazard is 12.0 square meter as per NFPA
13 and this shall be subject to authorities having jurisdiction
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.1.17 Protection areas and maximum spacing (Side Wall Sprinklers) for light hazard is 18.2
square meter, 9.29 square meter for Ordinary hazard and for external coverage light
hazard is as per NFPA 13 Table 8.8.2.1.2 and Local Authorities having jurisdiction.
1.2 Tests
1.2.1 The system shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test, to the satisfaction and in the
presence of the Engineer. Pressure shall be 50 psi. (345 Kpa) more than the maximum
static pressure in the system, (but not less than) 300 psi (2070 Kpa). Test shall be
maintained for two hours as a minimum.
1.2.2 If leaks develop during the test, the contractor shall make all necessary repairs and shall
retest the system at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.3 Signs
1.3.1 Provide at sprinkler test valve a metal sign 100 x 200 mm size with white letters on red
background, reading "SPRINKLER TEST VALVE". Letters shall not be less than 50 mm
in height.

Section 22 12 00 - Facility Potable Water Storage Tanks
Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
buildings.
Association
installations
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Pipes above ground shall be of the ERW type galvanized steel pipes to B.S. 1387
"medium weight" or ASTM A 53-88a Sch. 40. All pipe fittings elbows, tees, crosses,
unions, reducers, etc. shall be of the same quality and weight as the pipes.
2.1.2 Pipe fittings 2" (50 mm) and smaller shall be suitable for threaded connections, 2½" (65
mm) and larger shall be flanged / grooved fittings.
2.1.3 Unions and grooved fittings, flanges shall be installed at all valves inlets or outlets, on all
pipe branches and in general, every 15 metres of pipe run.
Grooved fittings shall be used on all pipes above 2½” and shall be all steel construction to
ASTM or BS Standards.
2.1.5 Contractor shall rectify any damage to the pipes from the processes of grooving to the
2.1.6 Pipes under ground shall be HDPE to ISO 4427, PE 100 resin all fittings shall be
electrofusion and butt fusion types.
2.2 Sprinkler Head-Upright
2.2.1 Sprinkler heads shall be bronze or brass construction, spray type 135o F (57o C) rating,(or
as per Civil Defense requirements) with thermosensitive glass bulb. Head located in
finished areas shall be chrome-plated.
2.2.2 Not less than 12 spare sprinkler heads shall be provided together with sprinkler head
wrenches, all supported on steel clip in a suitable steel cabinet with hinged door and latch.
Cabinets shall be finished in red enamel with white letters on door reading: "SPARE
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SPRINKLER PARTS". Cabinets shall be wall hung and in compliance with all authorities
having jurisdiction. Location of cabinet shall be as directed by the Engineer.
2.2.3 All sprinklers shall have a normal orifice 15 mm and rated for ordinary hazard.
2.2.4 Sprinklers shall be rated for a working pressure of 175 PSI (1207 Kpa).
2.2.5 This type of sprinklers shall be installed in car parking and areas where false ceiling is not
provided.
2.3 Recessed Extended Coverage Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler
2.3.1 The sprinkler head shall be of the quick response horizontal side wall chrome plated
recessed type with deflector and 3 mm frangible glass bull spray type 135oF (57oC)
rating,(or as Civil Defense requirements).The glass bulb of the fast thermal response shall
consist of a controlled amount of special fluid hermetically sealed inside a precisely
manufactured glass capsule.
2.3.2 Spare sprinkler heads with wrenches and cabinets to be provided as described above.
2.4 Side Wall Sprinkler
2.4.1 The sprinkler head shall be of the quick response horizontal side wall chrome plated type
with deflector and 3 mm frangible glass bull spray type 135oF (57oC) rating,(or as Civil
Defense requirements). .
2.4.2 The glass bulb of fast thermal response shall consist of controlled amount of special fluid
hermetically sealed inside a precisely manufactured glass capsule.
2.4.3 Spare sprinkler heads with wrenches and cabinets to be provided as described above.
2.5 Sprinkler Heads-Pendant (Recessed)
2.5.1 Sprinkler head shall be bronze or brass construction, spray type 135oF (57oC) rating with
thermo sensitive glass bulb with maximum 3" (76 mm) diameter chromium-plated
escutcheon, adjustable for a minimum of ½" (13 mm) for ceiling variations. Sprinklers
shall be chromium-plated with maximum projection of ½" (13 mm) below ceiling.
2.5.2 Not less than 12 spare sprinkler heads shall be provided together with sprinkler head
wrenches, all supported on steel clip in a suitable cabinet with hinged door and latch.
Cabinets shall be finished in red enamel with white letters on door reading. “SPARE
SPRINKLER PARTS”. Cabinets shall be wall hung and in compliance with all authorities
having, jurisdiction. Location of cabinet shall be as directed by the Engineer.
2.5.3 All sprinklers shall have a normal orifice 15 mm and rated for ordinary hazard.
2.5.4 Sprinklers shall be rated for a working pressure of 175 PSI (1207 Kpa) or 250 PSI (1724
Kpa) for high rise buildings.
2.6 Sprinkler Alarm Test Station
2.6.1 Sprinkler alarm check valve with trim
2.6.1.1 This valve is a part of sprinkler alarm test station and servers a dual purpose of preventing
reverse flow of water (non-return) and provides a hydraulic fire alarm independent of
electric power supply.
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6.1.2 Valve shall be UL listed and FM approved for a working pressure of 175 PSI (1207 Kpa).
Valve shall have a ductile/cast iron body with internal pins, sprinkler and nuts of stainless
steel and brass seat. The valve clipper shall be of Teflon coated steel with EPDM rubber
clapper having stainless steel rubber faced retainer. The clapper assembly shall be hinged
to access cover for quick removal and easy servicing. Valve shall be available in flanges,
grooved or combined connection versions. Valve shall have necessary tappings for
pressure gauges, alarm devices, drains, etc., Valve shall be suitable for horizontal or
vertical installation.
2.6.1.3 The alarm valve shall be complete with external by-pass trim to minimize clapper
movement and prevent false alarm. Trim shall include drain and test valve, retard
chamber for variable pressure systems, pressure gauges at inlet/outlet, strainer, electric
pressure switch, restricted drain orifice, water motor alarm and alarm motor stop valve.
2.6.1.4 When water flows through the Alarm valve, the water will raise the clack disk, and flows to
the system with a small amount passing thru a special groove to the alarm motor and
gong and initiating the alarm.
2.6.1.5 The clack will remain in the raised position until there is no flow of water thru the control
valve then the stop valve will be closed.
2.6.1.6 When sprinklers are in operation during a fire, the alarm gong may be shut off by closing
alarm motor stop valve.
2.6.1.7 An electrical pressure switch connected in the flow of the alarm gong shall also initiate an
electric alarm in the main fire control panel.
2.6.1.8 The drain and test valve is to drain the sprinkler installation of water after a fire has been
extinguished and before replacing the sprinklers that have operated. It is also used to test
the running pressure of the water supplies.
2.6.2 Water motor alarm and gong
2.6.2.1 Water motor alarm and gong shall comprise a weather proof, hydraulically driven
mechanical bell that automatically sounds a continuous alarm when the sprinkler system
activates. It shall be installed not higher than 5 or 6 meters above the valve and it shall be
tested at least once a week.
2.6.3 Isolating Valves (OS & Y Resilient Wedge Gate Valves)
2.6.3.1 The valve shall be provided upstream and down stream of sprinkler control station and
shall be located in such a place to be always readily visible and accessible to authorized
persons. Valves shall be secured open by a padlocked or riveted strap.
2.6.3.2 The valve shall confirm to the latest revision of A.W.W.A Resilient Seated Gate Valve
Standard C-509 and be UL listed/ FM approved.
2.6.3.3 All internal parts shall be accessible without removing the body from the line.
2.6.3.4 The wedge shall be cast iron, complete encapsulated with resilient material. The resilient
sealing material shall be permanently bonded to the cast iron wedge with a rubber tearing
bond to meet ASTM D429.
2.6.3.5 NRS stems shall be cast bronze with integral collars in compliance with A.W.W.A. OS & Y
stems shall be bronze. The NRS stuffing box shall have two O-Ring seals above the
thrust collar. These rings shall be filed replaced without removing the valve from service.
2.6.3.6 There shall be low friction thrust bearings above and below the steam collar. The stem
nut shall be independent of the wedge and of solid bronze. The waterway in the seat
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
areas shall be smooth, unobstructed, free of cavities and for valves 4” (100mm) and larger
at least 0.19” (4.8mm) greater in diameter than the nominal valve size.
2.6.3.7 The body and bonnet shall be coated both interior and exterior with a fusion bonded heat
cured thermo setting material meeting all the application and performance requirements of
A.W.W.A. C-550.
2.6.3.8 The gasket seal between two surfaces shall employ the use of composition ring type
gaskets retained to prevent the possibility of blow out.
2.6.3.9 Each valve shall be hydrostatically tested to the requirements of both A.W.W.A. and
UL/FM.
2.7 Sprinkler Zone Control Valve
2.7.1 Butterfly Valve (indicating type)
2.7.1.1 Butterfly valve shall be of the flangeless type, lug or wafer style, it shall be rated 1380 KPa
bi-directional, with a 1380 KPa dead end service rating. The body material shall be shock
resistant ductile iron with extended neck. There should be no exposed fasteners in the
waterway to pin the disc to the stem. The liner shall be molded in or captive boot design.
Top and bottom stem bushings of dissimilar material are required with a positive retention
mechanism for the stem.
2.7.1.2 Butterfly valve shall be gear operated and shall be secured open with a padlock. It shall
be provided with supervisory tamper switch to give signal to BMS (if specified) and to the
fire alarm station.
2.7.2 Waterflow Alarm Switch
2.7.2.1 The water flow alarm devices consist of a vane type water flow switch for use on wet
sprinkler systems, it shall be UL listed and FM approved. The unit shall contain two single
pole, double throw, snap action switches and adjustable, instantly recycling pneumatic
retard that delays actuation of electrical switches to reduce possibility of false alarms.
2.7.2.2 The unit shall be enclosed in a die-cast housing, the cover shall be held in place with two
tamper resistant screws.
2.7.2.3 Unit shall be installed on sprinkler branch line to detect water flow exceeding 38 Litres
downstream of the device. When activated, the snap action switches shall operate a local
electrical alarm bell (under electrical specification) and indicate signal to fire alarm panel
and BMS.
2.7.3 Combined Drain and Test Valve
2.7.3.1 Drain and test valve shall have a body of brass, bronze filled Teflon seal, stainless steel
stem, and zinc plated steel handle, it shall include an orifice plate signed for a flow of one
sprinkler and a sight glass. Test and drain valve shall be tested once a week and it shall
be connected to a separate drain riser.
2.9 Pre-Action Riser Assembly and Related Accessories
2.9.1 General Description
2.9.1.1 When one electrical thermal detector senses the presence of fire, the electrical releasing
control panel activates fire alarm devices and latches the solenoid releasing valve in the
open position. The solenoid valve, when closed, is preserving supply water pressure in
the inlet of the Deluge Riser Assembly. Actuating the solenoid valve releases that water
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
pressure, allowing water flow into the sprinkler system in readiness for the subsequent
operation of a sprinkler.
2.9.1.2 To fully operate the system, two electrical detectors shall activate and a sprinkler shall
open. During the early stages of a fire, smoke or heat activates the first detector which
causes the control panel to produce a local alarm and an alarm at the main fire alarm
panel. Electrical relays inside the releasing control panel can be used to shut down air
moving equipment when the panel goes into the “first alarm” condition. Subsequent
activation of a second, nearby or adjacent, detector shall cause the panel to energize the
solenoid valve open and release water into the sprinkler piping. Water flowing into the
sprinkler piping will simultaneously produce water pressure that causes the transfer of
contacts in the pressure switch mounted in the Riser Assembly. The flow of water into the
sprinkler piping effectively converts the dry system into a wet pipe system. In the event the
fire subsequently produces sufficient heat to operate a sprinkler head, water will flow from
that sprinkler, controlling or suppressing the fire.
2.9.1.3 The solenoid valve is a supervisory valve and its circuit is supervised.
2.9.1.4 Pre-action riser assembly shall consist of the following:
- Manual Emergency Releasing Station Valve

- Supervised Isolating Valve
- Solenoid Valve
- Water Flow Alarm Pressure Switch
- Alarm Test Valve
- Automatic Drain Valve
2.9.1.5 The system shall be complete with the following:
- Control Panel
- Electric Emergency Station
- Fire Alarm Bell & Trouble Alarm Bell
2.9.1.6 Open Sprinklers (Spray Nozzle)
2.9.1.6.1 Sprinkler head shall be bronze or brass construction chrome plated pendant recessed
type with chrome escutcheon.
2.9.1.6.2 Sprinklers shall be of non-automatic fixed pattern and solid cone discharge type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Pipe Sleeves
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
with clean water.
End Section 21 13 13.
Section 21 13 13
21 13 13 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 13 39
FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.3 System Description
1.4 Performance Requirements
1.5 Submittals
1.7 Extra Materials
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipes and Fittings

2.2 Valves
2.3 Proportioning Tanks
2.4 Foam Concentrate
2.5 Pressure Gages
2.6 Discharge Devices
2.7 Detection Devices
2.8 Alarm Devices
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Proportioning Tank Installation

3.2 Piping Applications
3.3 Piping Installation
3.4 Connections
3.5 Labeling
3.6 Charging System
3.7 Field Quality Control
3.8 Demonstration
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
Foam Fire Extinguishing System
21 13 39 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 13 39
FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 The Contractor shall be an approved installer of Foam Fire Extinguishing, who is able to
conform with the relevant standards and requirements of the Local Authority in terms of
approval, replacement gas and maintenance.
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of

Standard Standard
2. Aqueous Film Foaming Foam AFFF - -
3. Factory Mutual FM - -
4. National Fire Protection Association
NFPA - -
5. American Society Mechanical Engineer
Standards ASME - -
6. British Standard BS - -
7. Deutches Institute for Normung
DIN - -
8. Amercian Water Work Association AWWA - -
1.3.1 Engineered, fixed-type, automatically actuated, low-expansion, AFFF fire-extinguishing

system for hydrocarbon-liquid fires. System includes diaphragm proportioning tanks and
devices as described in NFPA 11, Annexure I.
1.4 Performance Requirements
1.4.1 Design fixed-type, automatically actuated, low-expansion, AFFF fire-extinguishing

systems for Class B, flammable-liquid fires and obtain approval from Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction. Include use of 3 percent AFFF concentrate for 3 percent
concentrate and 97 percent water foam solution to be discharged from closed sprinklers
and other discharge devices as appropriate for areas being protected.
1.4.2 Piping and Piping Specialties: 1200-kPa minimum working pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5 Submittals
1.5.1 Product Data: For the following:
1.5.1.1 Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
1.5.1.2 Pipe hangers and supports.
1.5.1.3 Piping seismic restraints.
1.5.1.4 Valves.
1.5.1.5 Proportioning tanks and proportioning devices.
1.5.1.6 Foam concentrate.
1.5.1.7 Discharge devices. Include flow characteristics.
1.5.1.8 Detection and alarm devices. Include electrical data.
1.5.2 Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include design
calculations. Include the following for each hazard area, drawn to scale:
1.5.2.1 Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
1.5.2.2 Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
1.5.2.3 Design Calculations: For amount of foam concentrate required for each hazard area.
1.5.2.4 Plans: Show the following:
1.5.2.4.1 Foam-solution proportioning tanks and devices, piping, discharge devices, detector and
alarm devices, and accessories.
1.5.2.4.2 Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
1.5.2.4.3 Fire alarm panel.
1.5.2.4.4 Equipment and furnishings.
1.5.2.5 Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 11, that have been
approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.
1.5.2.6 Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.6.1 Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of low-expansion, AFFF fire-extinguishing systems that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
1.6.2 Source Limitations: Obtain foam concentrate, proportioning tanks, and major accessories
through one source.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.6.3 Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of foam
fire-extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system selected.
1.6.4 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
1.6.5 NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label AFFF fire-extinguishing systems to comply with
NFPA 11.
1.6.6 ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1.
1.6.7 FM Compliance: Provide components that are FM approved and that are listed in FM's
"Fire Protection Approval Guide."
1.6.8 UL Compliance: Provide foam concentrate and equipment complying with UL 162, "Foam
Equipment and Liquid Concentrates," and with systems that are listed in UL's "Fire
Protection Equipment Directory."
1.7 Extra Materials
1.7.1 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.7.1.1 Discharge Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
1.7.1.2 Foam Concentrate: Not less than 200 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipes and Fittings
2.1.1 BSP shall be black mild steel, seamless type to BS 1387 medium weight for sizes up to 6"
diameter and to BS 3601 for sizes above 6" diameter or to ASTM A-53 GR.B Sch. 40, and
all pipe fittings shall be black forged steel of the same quality and weight as the pipes.
2.1.2 All joints shall be welded by an approved welding process, each joint being of sufficient
strength to withstand the stresses imposed by internal pressure, thermal expansion and
weight of tube, fittings and thermal insulation.
2.1.3 All welded tees, branches, vent pipes, reducers, etc. shall have bevelled joints, and
finished off with a circumferential butt joint weld.
2.1.4 Welding of pipe work may be by either oxy-acetylene or electric process.
2.1.5 BSP are allowed to be used for foam system pipe work and/or as specifically mentioned in
the schedule of pipe materials.
2.1.6 Pipes fittings shall be suitable for welded connections. Butt weld fittings shall be to ANSI
B 16-9 and BS 1640 made of seamless carbon steel to ASTM A324 A grade WPB.
2.1.7 Threaded fittings shall be to BS 21 (ISO 7) made of Malleable Iron to BS and ISO 49.
2.2 Valves
2.2.1 Valves DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends according to the following:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.1.1 Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type or, if not available in size required, provide MSS 80,
Class 150, rising-stem type acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2.1.2 Check Valves: UL 312, swing-check type or, if not available in size required, provide
MSS 80, Class 150, swing-check type acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2.2 Valves DN65 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends according to the following:
2.2.2.1 Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
2.2.2.2 Check Valves: UL 312, swing-check type.
2.3 Proportioning Tanks
2.3.1 Concentrate Storage Tank: Bladder-type proportioning tank complying with UL 162 and
the 1995 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII. Include bladder, internal
piping, fill and drain, pipe assembly, glass sight gage, piping, and valves.
2.3.1.1 Orientation: Horizontal design with saddle support.
2.3.2 Proportioning Device: Venturi type complying with UL 162 and of capacity to match design
flow.
2.4 Foam Concentrate
2.4.1 Description: 3 percent AFFF liquid concentrate, complying with UL 162, for making 3
percent concentrate and 97 percent water AFFF fire-extinguishing foam solution.
2.5 Pressure Gages
2.5.1 Description: Comply with UL 393, with 90-mm minimum diameter dial, 0-to 2500-kPa dial
range, and caption "WATER" on dial face.
2.6 Discharge Devices
2.6.1 Sprinklers: Closed, non-air aspirating type complying with UL 199 and suitable for
discharging foam.
2.7 Detection Devices
2.7.1 Comply with NFPA 11 and NFPA 72.
2.7.1.1 Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow detector, with

1725-kPa pressure rating; designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two
single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A,
125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
2.7.1.2 Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753, electrical, single pole, double throw, with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open
position.
2.7.1.3 Other Detectors: Comply with NFPA 11 and NFPA 72.
2.8 Alarm Devices
2.8.1 Description: UL listed or FM approved, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless
otherwise indicated.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.8.2 Bells: 150-mm diameter, minimum.
2.8.3 Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
2.8.4 Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Proportioning Tank Installation
3.1.1 Install proportioning tanks on concrete bases.
3.1.2 Install tanks level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units
so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
3.1.3 Install seismic restraints for tanks Anchor tanks to substrate.
3.2 Piping Applications
3.2.1 Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
3.2.2 Foam-Concentrate Piping: Black-steel pipe as specified on Part 2, 2.1
3.2.3 Foam-Solution Piping DN50 and Smaller: Galvanized-steel pipe; galvanized, malleable or
cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3.2.3.1 Do not use cast-iron fittings for dry piping that may be exposed to fire.
3.2.4 Foam-Solution Piping DN65 to DN150: Galvanized-steel pipe, grooved-end fittings, keyed
couplings, and grooved joints.
3.2.5 Foam-Solution Piping DN200 and Larger: Galvanized-steel pipe, grooved-end fittings,
keyed couplings, and grooved joints.
3.3 Piping Installation
3.3.1 Install AFFF piping and other components level and plumb.
3.3.2 Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and grooved-end fittings with keyed couplings and
lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3.3 Install proportioning tanks anchored to substrate.
3.3.4 Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge devices according to requirements listed in
NFPA 11, Chapter 5, "Installation Requirements;" and in ASME B31.1.
3.3.4.1 Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13 and Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports."
3.3.4.2 Install seismic restraints for proportioning tanks and piping systems.
3.3.4.3 Install detection and alarm devices according to NFPA 11 and NFPA 72.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.4 Connections
3.4.1 Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.4.2 Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.4.3 Connect electrical devices to building's fire alarm system. Electrical power, wiring, and
devices are specified in Section "Fire Alarm."
3.4.4 Ground equipment.
3.4.4.1 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 Labeling
3.5.1 Install labeling on piping, equipment, and panels according to NFPA 11 and Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.6 Charging System
3.6.1 Fill proportioning tanks with foam concentrate after field quality-control testing is complete
and satisfactory results have been achieved.
3.7.1 Professional Engineer: Inspect installed AFFF fire-extinguishing systems, prepare

installation report, and certify that installation complies with the Contract Documents,
calculations, and comments of Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.7.2 Comply with operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 11, Chapter "Testing and
Acceptance." Include the following inspections and tests to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:
3.7.2.1 Check mechanical items.
3.7.2.2 Inspect equipment and fire-extinguishing foam concentrate, and check mountings for
adequate anchoring to substrate.
3.7.2.3 Check electrical systems.
3.7.2.4 Flush piping.
3.7.2.5 Perform acceptance test.
3.7.2.6 Perform pressure test.
3.7.2.7 Perform operating test.
3.7.2.8 Perform discharge test.
3.7.2.9 Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace

equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or does not perform as specified and
indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory
results are obtained.
3.7.2.9.1 Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.3 Perform the following field quality-control testing:
3.7.3.1 After installing foam fire-extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3.7.3.2 Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Section 8, "System Function Tests."
Certify compliance with requirements.
3.7.3.3 Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or
replacements are made.
3.7.4 Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
3.7.4.1 Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3.7.4.2 Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start systems to confirm
proper operation. Remove malfunctioning components, replace with new components,
and retest.
3.7.4.3 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.8 Demonstration
3.8.1 Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-extinguishing foam piping and equipment.
Refer to Division 1.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 13 39
21 13 39 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 20 00
NOVEC 1230 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approvals
1.2 Description of Operation and Scope of Work
1.3 Deliverables
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Material and Equipment

2.2 Detection and Extinguishing Release System
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 System Inspection and Checkout

3.2 Training Requirements
3.3 Operation and Maintenance
3.4 As-Built Drawings
3.5 Acceptance Test
3.6 System Inspections
3.7 Warranty
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
Novec 1230 Extinguishing Systems
21 20 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 20 00
NOVEC 1230 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approvals
1.1.1 The Contractor shall be an approved installer of NOVEC 1230 (Zero Ozone depletion
potential & 1 GWP) gas who is able to confirm with the relevant standards and
requirements of the local authority in terms of approval, replacement of gas and
maintenance and shall be responsible for the final design and arrangement of sprinklers.
Contractor shall submit the calculations and any authority requirements or authority having
jurisdiction to be done without any time or cost impact.
1.2 Description of Operation and Scope of Work
1.2.1 The System shall be complete in all ways. It shall include a mechanical and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, NOVEC 1230
agent, (Zero Ozone depletion potential & 1 GWP) discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings,
manual release and abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, inside and outside the
protected enclosure auxiliary devices and controls, shutdowns, alarm interface, advisory
signs, functional checkout and testing, training and any other operations necessary for a
functional UL listed Clean Agent Suppression System.
1.2.2 The system(s) shall be actuated by photoelectric detectors installed as per manufacturer
recommended/listed spacing, in both the room, under floor and above ceiling protected
spaces.
1.2.3 Detectors shall be Cross-Zoned detection requiring two (2) detectors to be in alarm before
release.
1.2.4 Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows :
a) Actuation of one (1) detector, within the System, shall :
b) Illuminate the “ALARM” lamp on the control panel face.
c) Energize an alarm bell.
d) Transfer auxiliary contacts, which can perform auxiliary system functions such as:
Operate door holder/closures on access doors; Transmit a signal to a Fire Alarm
System; Shutdown HVAC equipment.
1.2.5 Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall :
a) Illuminate the “PRE-DISCHARGE” lamp on the control panel face.
b) Energize a pre-discharge horn/strobe device.
c) Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d) Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds).
e) System abort sequence is enabled at this time.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.2.6 After completion of the time-delay sequence, the Clean Agent System shall discharge and
the following shall occur:
a) Illuminate a “SYSTEM FIRED” lamp on the control panel face.

b) Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment.
c) Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge occurred.
d) Energize a “SYSTEM FIRED” audible device.
1.2.7 The operation shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices located at
each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the sequence description
above except that the time delay and abort functions shall be bypassed. The manual
discharge station shall be of the electrical actuation type and shall be supervised at the main
control panel.
1.3 Deliverables
1.3.1 Drawings and Documents and computerized hydraulic calculations to be submitted by

Contractor to the approval of the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Material and Equipment
2.1.1 The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of the
supplier’s latest design and suitable to perform all functions intended. When one or more
pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be duplicates produced
by one (1) manufacturer.
2.1.2 All devices and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved.
2.1.3 Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent, main.
2.1.4 The system design can be modular, central storage, or a combination of both design criteria.
2.1.5 Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines.
2.1.6 Each supply shall be located within the hazard area, or as near as possible, to reduce the
amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
2.1.7 The clean agent shall be stored in Clean Agent storage tanks. Tanks shall be super-
pressurized with dry nitrogen to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70oF (24.8 bar @ 21oC).
Tanks shall be of high-strength low alloy steel construction and conforming to NFPA 2001.
2.1.8 Tanks (master) shall be actuated by either a resettable electric actuator or by pneumatic
means from a nitrogen cartridge located in the releasing device. Explosive devices shall not
be permitted.
2.1.9 Each tank shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual and electric
supervision of the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall be wired to the control
panel to provide audible and visual “Trouble” alarms in the event the container pressure
drops below 290 psi (20 bar). The pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide an easy,
visual indication of container pressure.
2.1.10 Tanks shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates before the internal
nominal pressure exceeds 730 psi (50 bar).
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.11 Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided within the manufacturer’s guidelines to
distribute the Novec 1230 agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be
designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution. Nozzles shall be available in ½
in. (15 mm) through 2 in. (50 mm) pipe sizes. Each size shall be available in 180o and 360o
distribution patterns.
2.1.12 Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements, NFPA 2001, and approved piping standards and guidelines. All distribution
piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using accepted practices and quality
procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported and anchored at all directional
changes and nozzle locations.
2.1.12.1 All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burns,
mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
2.1.12.2 All pipe threads shall be seated with Teflon pipe sealant applied to the male thread only.
2.2 Detection and Extinguishing Release System
2.2.1 This Section covers Fire Alarm Systems, including initiating devices, notification appliances,
controls, and supervision devices associated with the Novec Systems specified.
2.2.2 The Fire Alarm System shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software
programming to perform the following functions:
2.2.2.1 Fire Alarm System detection and notification operations.
2.2.2.2 Control and monitoring of Fire Suppression Systems and other equipment as indicated in the
drawings and specifications.
2.3.1 General: Provide a complete, non-coded, microprocessor-based fire detection and alarm
system for suppression release applications with initiating devices, notification appliances,
and auxiliary control devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
2.3.2 Software: The fire alarm system shall be capable of 100% on-site programming to
accommodate and facilitate changes in operation. Programming shall be capable of being
accomplished via the control panel and via a laptop computer. All software operations shall
be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Loss
of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.
2.3.3 History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in
chronological order for the purpose of recreating an electronic or printable record of event
history. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase event history stored in
memory.
2.3.4 Circuit Wiring, Supervision, and Annunciation:
2.3.4.1 System wiring connections for Initiating Device Circuits and Notification Appliance Circuits
shall be Class B.
2.3.4.2 Circuit Supervision: Initiating, Notification, and Releasing circuit faults shall be indicated by a
trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Distinctive trouble LED annunciation shall be
provided for each circuit.
2.3.5. Required Functions: The following are required system functions and operating features:
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.5.1 Priority of Signals: Alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued
in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Supervisory and Trouble
events have second and third-level priority, respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority
take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower priority condition
occurred first.
2.3.5.2 Alarm Condition: A system alarm condition shall include:
2.3.5.2.1 Indication of alarm condition at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2.3.5.2.2 Identification of the zone that is the source of the alarm at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2.3.5.2.3 Operation of audible and visible notification appliances throughout the hazard area until
silenced at Fire Alarm Control Panel
2.3.5.2.4 Audible alarm notification shall provide automatic audible escalation of events and shall
operate:
- to notify first cross-zoned alarm

- to notify the release timer is active (running)
- Steady to notify the release function
2.3.5.2.5 Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders serving hazard where alarm is
initiated.
2.3.5.2.6 Unlocking designated doors serving hazard where alarm is initiated.
2.3.5.2.7 Shutting down supply and return fans serving hazard where alarm is initiated.
2.3.5.2.8 Closing smoke dampers on system serving hazard where alarm is initiated.
2.3.5.3 Supervisory Operations: Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump power
failure, low air pressure switch, abort switch, or tamper switch, the system shall operate as
follows:
2.3.5.3.1 Activate the local system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the supervisory
LED at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2.3.5.3.2 Pressing the Acknowledge key will silence the local supervisory audible signal while
maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating off-normal condition.
2.3.5.3.3 Record the event in the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical log.
2.3.5.4 Restoring the condition shall restore the Supervisory LED to the "off" condition and return
system to normal.
2.3.5.5 Alarm Silencing: If the "Alarm Silence" button is pressed, all audible alarm signals shall
cease operation.
2.3.5.6 Active Status Reminder
2.3.5.6.1 The panel shall automatically re-sound the local piezo until Acknowledged every 8 hours
as a reminder if there is any Trouble, Supervisory or Alarm condition that has not restored
to normal.
2.3.5.7 System Reset

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.5.7.1 The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. The
system shall verify all circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to avoid
the potential for re-alarming the system.
2.3.5.7.2 Should an alarm condition continue, the system shall remain in an alarmed state.
2.3.5.8 Manual Control: Manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal" condition of any
circuit shall cause a "trouble" condition at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2.3.6 Fire Suppression Monitoring:
2.3.6.1 Suppression Release: The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be [UL Listed and FM
Approved] for Automatic Suppression Release Service. The system shall be capable of
protecting up to 2 hazards and shall include the following:
2.3.6.1.1 Secondary standby power for 24 hours of standby with 5 minutes of alarm. Battery
calculations shall be done to ensure proper operation of the actuators on battery standby.
Provide battery charts or calculations showing performance of such standby and alarm
power.
2.3.6.1.2 Regulated 24VDC system power supply. In addition to power required for the Fire Alarm
Control Panel electronics and optional modules, the Fire Alarm Control Panel power
supply shall be capable of providing up to 3 Amps of power for external peripheral devices
and appliances.
2.3.6.1.3 Two Class B, Releasing Appliance Circuits (RACs) rated for 2 Amps max @ 24VDC for
control of compatible actuators for releasing device service.
2.3.6.1.4 RAC wiring shall be supervised for open circuit wiring faults and actuator coil continuity.
2.3.6.1.5 RAC wiring shall be supervised for short circuit wiring faults between the Fire Alarm
Control Panel and the actuator junction box.
2.3.6.1.6 Service disconnect switch(es), system abort switch(es), manual release station(s) and all
other accessories, as required.
2.3.6.1.7 Programmable operation for either non cross-zone operation or cross-zone operation that
requires the activation of two automatic detector zones in the hazard area for initiation of
the automatic release operation.
2.3.6.1.8 Releasing Appliance Circuit manual release delay timer programmable for 0, 5, 10, 15, 20,
25 or 30 seconds.
2.3.6.1.9 Releasing Appliance Circuit automatic release delay timer programmable for 0, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, or 60 seconds.
2.3.6.1.10 Releasing Appliance Circuit soak timer programmable for 0, 45 seconds, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7

minutes.
2.3.6.1.11 Five Abort options programmable for Immediate Release, 10 Second Delay, IRI Abort, NY
City Abort, or Reset Original RAC Delay Timer.
2.3.6.1.12 Depleted Battery Cutout operation. On the detection of a depleted battery condition system
shall be programmable to cutout or disable activation of all notification appliance circuits
and releasing appliance circuit.
2.3.6.2 The control panel shall receive AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.6.3 The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system
upon loss of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 5
minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer
to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall
be automatic.
2.3.6.4 All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be electronically
protected or individually fused at the control panel.
2.3.6.5 The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be
indicated at the control panel. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while
incoming AC power is present.
2.3.6.6 The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition, depleted battery, or
disconnection of the battery shall sound an audible trouble signal and activate a system
trouble LED at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2.3.6.7 Loss of primary AC power shall sound an audible trouble signal and activate a system
trouble LED at the Fire Alarm Control Panel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 System Inspection and Checkout
3.1.1 After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall b checked out,
inspected, and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommended procedures and NFPA standards.
3.1.1.1 All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and installation.
3.1.1.2 All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity, and resistance to earth.
3.1.1.3 The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his
representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be
operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests.
3.1.1.4 Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
procedures and test values recorded.
3.1.1.5 All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual
devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function as desired and
designed.
3.1.1.6 Each control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condition into the
system.
3.2 Training Requirements
3.2.1 Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to each
shift of the owner’s personnel. Each training session shall include control panel operation,
manual and (optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency
procedures.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 Operation and Maintenance
3.3.1 Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) complete operation
and maintenance instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system operation and
maintenance shall be detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a
written description of the system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating
control logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency
situations, troubleshooting techniques, maintenance operations and procedures shall be
included in the manual.
3.4 As-Built Drawings
3.4.1 Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of
system “As-Built” drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation details
including all equipment locations (i.e., control panel(s), agent container(s), detectors, alarms,
manual pull station(s) and abort switch(es), etc.), as well as piping and conduit routing
details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or damper installations
completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall be provided reflecting
all actual installation details.
3.5 Acceptance Test
3.5.1 At the time “AS-Built” drawing and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted, the
installing contractor shall submit a “Test Plan” describing procedures to be used to test the
control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all tests to be
performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be employed. The
tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation requirements of this specification
have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner and shall not be
conducted until the Test Plan has been approved.
3.5.2 The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended. All circuits shall be tested : automatic actuation and manual actuation, HVAC and
power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices, and manual override of abort functions.
Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and battery power supplies, shall be
tested and qualified.
3.5.3 A room pressurization test shall be conducted in each protected space to determine the
presence of openings, which would affect the agent concentration levels. The test(s) shall
cover the test shall cover pneumatic test, flow test (puff test), room integrity test and other
functional test as required by NFPA 2001. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001.
3.5.4 If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in leaks and/or
loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be responsible for coordinating
the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the general contractor or his sub-contractor
or agent. The general contractor shall be responsible for adequately sealing all protected
space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The Installing contractor shall inspect all work to
ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed. If the first
room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with these specifications, the
installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine, and correct, the cause of
the test failure. The installing contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests,
until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the
owner for his record. Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be
placed into service.
3.6 System Inspections
3.6.1 During the one-year warranty period, the installing contractor shall provide two (2)
inspections of each system installed under this contract. The first inspection shall be at the
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
6-month interval, and the second inspection at the 12-month interval. Inspections shall be
conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and the recommendations of
NFPA 2001.
3.6.2 Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) inspection shall be submitted to the owner upon
completion of each inspection.
3.7 Warranty
3.7.1 All system components furnished and installed under this contract shall be warranted against
defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which is standard
with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of system
acceptance.
3.7.2 Environmental Warranty: As a measure to insure client interests, the Manufacturer shall
provide a warranty; subject to terms and conditions: that for a period of at least 15 years
after the installation of Clean Agent Fire Suppression System, use of agent will not be
banned or restricted by any government entity or regulatory body for any of the following
environmental issues: 1) Ozone Depletion Potential; 2) Global Warming Potential; 3)
Atmospheric Lifetime. In the event that environmental regulations enacted after the
purchase of any new Clean Agent Suppression System require removal of the suppression
agent from the market for one of the environmental issues listed above during the 20-year
warranty period, The system manufacturer will replace the Clean Agent Suppression
System with a new chemical clean agent suppression system that meets such newly
enacted environmental regulations.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 21 20 00
21 20 00 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 30 00
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fire Fighting Set (Wet Riser and Sprinkler-NFPA Regulations)

2.2 Fuel Tank
2.3 Description of Operation
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Pumps

3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
3.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3.7 Guarantee and Warrantee Period
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 30 00
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible to confirm the total dynamic head of the fire pumps
and seek the approval of the fire department or persons having jurisdiction and the
approval of the Engineer before ordering the pumps.

Section 21 20 00 - NOVEC 1230 Fire Extinguishing Systems

Standard
Underwriters Laboratories UL - -
British Standards BS5839 Part 1 Fire detection and alarm systems for
buildings.
National Electrical NEMA MIG Part 14
National Electrical Code NEC - -

National Fire Protection NFPA - -
Association
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
American Water Works AWWA - -

Association
Loss Prevention Council LPC - The LPC rules for automatic
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fire Fighting Set (Wet Riser and Sprinkler-NFPA Regulations)
2.1.1.1 Supply and install wherever shown on drawings Fire Fighting Pumps (one duty and one
stand-by) of capacities as indicated on drawings. If the Fire Fighting Pumps are not driven
by diesel engine, they shall additionally be connected to the stand-by generator power.
2.1.1.2 All components of the fire fighting set shall be UL listed/FM approved for fire fighting
application.
2.1.1.3 Each pump shall be of the centrifugal type.
2.1.1.4 Each pump shall be specially tested for fire service application and meet all requirements
of NFPA 20.
2.1.1.5 Pumps shall furnish not less than 150% of rated capacity at a total head not less than 65%
of total rated head. The shut off head for pumps shall not exceed 40% of rated head.
2.1.1.6 Pump and driver shall be mounted on an extra heavy cast iron drip rim ring base.
2.1.1.7 Pumps shall be of the bronze fitted construction with cast iron casing, and renewable
bronze casing-wearing rings. Impeller shall be of the enclosed type cast bronze,
dynamically balanced and keyed to shaft with stainless steel keys.
2.1.1.8 Pump shaft shall be carbon steel with stainless steel shaft sleeves.
2.1.1.9 Pumps shall be complete with the following:
2.1.1.9.1 Eccentric tapered suction reducer and concentric tapered discharge increaser.
2.1.1.9.2 Concrete foundation blocks isolation pads.
2.1.1.9.3 Casing automatic relief valve at casing discharge set to open higher than design
discharge pressure and lower than shut-off discharge pressure to prevent overheating
when pump operates at shut-off with no discharge.
2.1.1.9.4 Open drip cone to collect and drain water dripping from the casing relief valve.
2.1.1.9.5 A flow water measuring device to test the pump capacity of water flow of not less than
175% of pump rated capacity.
2.1.2 Electric Control Panel
2.1.2.1 Electric control panel shall be completely assembled, tested and wired at the supplier’s
workshop before shipping and shall be marked "Fire Pump Controller". All components of
the controller shall be in strict compliance with Chapter 7 of Section 20 of NFPA and with
no contradiction to Local Civil Defence Authority.
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.2.2 The controller shall be of the manual and automatic control type and shall be complete
with the following:
2.1.2.2.1 Externally operable disconnect switches.
2.1.2.2.2 Circuit breakers and starters.
2.1.2.2.3 Pressure switch.
2.1.2.2.4 Pilot lights to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available, pump operating or off.
2.1.2.2.5 Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
2.1.2.2.6 Two position selector switch marked "Auto-Manual".
2.1.2.2.7 Low level float switch, in the fire storage reservoir to be interconnected with the control
panel to prevent pumps from starting and initiate an alarm in case water level drops to the
level of the float switch.
2.1.2.2.7 An automatic warning of power failure to the motor starting switch shall be given visually
and audibly at the guard control room. Power for this warning system shall be taken from
a separately switched sub-circuit to that feeding the motor.
2.1.3 Electrical Driven Pump
2.1.3.1 Electrically driven pump shall be coupled to a totally enclosed fan cooled motor through a
flexible coupling.
2.1.3.2 Motor shall comply with the provisions of the National Electrical Code and with the
Requirements of the Electrical specifications.
2.1.3.3 Motor shall be rated for continuous duty and shall not be used to voltages exceeding 110
percent of rated voltage.
2.1.3.4 Motor shall be of such capacity that at rated voltage and rated frequency, the full load
ampere rating will not be exceeded under any conditions of pump load.
2.1.3.5 Motor shall be derated according to NEMA Standard MGI part 14 for altitudes.
2.1.3.6 Motor shall be provided with watertight conduit boxes.
2.1.4 Diesel Engine Driven Pump
2.1.4.1 General Requirements
2.1.4.1.1 The diesel internal combustion engine driving the fire pump shall be of the compression
ignition type, and shall be specifically listed for fire pump service.
2.1.4.1.2 The Engine rating shall be corrected for altitude and ambient temperature.
2.1.4.1.3 The Engine shall have a brake horsepower rating not less than 20% greater than the
maximum brake horse power required to drive the pump at its rated RPM.
2.1.4.1.4 The Engine shall be connected to horizontal shaft pumps by means of flexible coupling.
2.1.4.2 Instrumentation and Control
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.2.1 The Engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor capable of regulating engine
speed within a range of 10%between shut off and maximum load conditions of the
pump.The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load.
2.1.4.2.2 Engine shall be provided with an overspeed shutdown device. It shall be arranged to
shutdown the engine at a speed 20% above rated engine speed and for manual reset.
2.1.4.2.3 Engine shall be provided with (lubricating) oil pressure gauge, and (cooling water)
thermometer, both placed on a panel secured to the engine at a suitable point.
2.1.4.2.4 Engine shall be provided with a speed-sensitive switch to signal engine running and crank
termination.
2.1.4.3 Engine Starting Methods
2.1.4.3.1 Engine shall be started electrically from storage batteries.
2.1.4.3.2 Engine shall be provided with two storage battery units.
2.1.4.3.3 Each battery unit shall have capacity sufficient to maintain cranking speed recommended
by the engine manufacturer through a 6 minute cycle.
2.1.4.3.4 Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge condition, with electrolyte liquid in a separate
container. Electrolyte shall be added at the time the engine is put in service, and the
battery given a conditioning charge.
2.1.4.3.5 Batteries shall be recharged by two means. One by the generator and the other shall be
on automatically controlled charge taking power from an alternating current power source.
2.1.4.4 Engine Cooling
2.1.4.4.1 The engine cooling system shall be of the closed circuit type, including a circulating -
pump driven by the engine, a heat exchanger, and a reliable engine jacket temperature
regulating device. The coolant shall comply with recommendation of the engine
manufacturer.
2.1.4.4.2 The cooling water supply for the heat exchanger shall be from the discharge of the pump,
taken off prior to the pump discharge valve.
2.1.4.4.4 A water jacketed (cooled) exhaust manifold shall be used to dissipate heat and to avoid
hazard to operator or to flammable material adjacent to the engine.
2.1.4.5 Engine Drive Controller
2.1.4.5.1 Supply and install engine Drive controller panel completely assembled, tested and wired
at the factory before shipping and shall be marked "Fire Pump Controller".
2.1.4.5.2 The panel shall be securely mounted in an enclosure which will protect the equipment
against mechanical injury and falling drops of water.
2.1.4.5.3 A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of the
enclosure showing exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of identifying
numbers of individual component.
2.1.4.5.4 The Controller shall be of the manual and automatic control type and shall be complete
with the following:-
2.1.4.5.4.1 Pilot lights to indicate that controller is in the "Automatic" or "Manual" position.
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.5.4.2 Separate pilot lights and a common bell to indicate trouble caused by:
a) Low oil pressure in the lubrication system.

b) High engine jacket water temperature.
c) Failure of engine to start automatically.
d) Shutdown from overspeed.
e) Individual battery failure.
2.1.4.5.4.3 An automatic warning shall be given visually and audibly at the guard control room or
where instructed by the Engineer to indicate the following:
a) Operation of controller into a pump running condition.

b) Turning of controller main switch to 'off' or `manual' position.
c) Trouble on the controller or engine.
2.1.4.5.4.4 Pressure switch having high and low calibrated adjustments and responsive to water
pressure in the fire system.
2.1.4.5.4.5 Two position selector switch marked "Auto-Manual".
2.1.4.5.4.6 A weekly program timer to automatically start the pump at least once a week to assure
dependable operation of the engine and its controller. A solenoid drain valve on the
pressure control line shall be the initiating means.
2.1.4.5.4.7 Low level float switch, in the fire storage reservoir to be interconnected with the controller
to prevent pumps from starting dry and initiate an alarm in case water level drops to the
level of the float switch.
2.1.5 Jockey Fire Pump
2.1.5.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings and of capacities indicated there
upon a jockey fire pump.
2.1.5.2 Pump shall be of the vertical multistage type with a cast iron casing and stainless steel
stages and impeller.
2.1.5.3 Pump shall be self-venting.
2.1.5.4 The impeller shall be hydraulically self-centering and no external adjustment shall be
necessary
2.1.5.5 The shaft shall be of stainless steel construction and the bearings shall be grease
lubricated ball type.
2.1.5.6 The pump shall be supplied complete with:
2.1.5.7 Electric motor of totally enclosed type, flexibly coupled to the pump. Motor shall be sized
to prevent overloading at the highest operating head specified.
2.1.5.8 Jockey pump controller factory wired and tested in one unit to (IEC) or NEMA Standards.
2.1.5.9 Controller shall include hand-off-auto switch, a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic
motor contactor and thermal overload relays with external reset. The controller shall be
furnished in a sturdy, wall-mounted enclosure with hinged door. A pressure switch
installed in the piping system and set for approximately 0.35 bars greater than the
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
pressure switch for the main fire pump when pressure in the system drops below the
preset level.
2.1.5.10 Controller shall include a minimum-run timer, to insure a 3 minutes minimum pump
operation, to prevent the jockey pump from frequent operations and shall include volt free
contacts for connection to BMS.
2.2 Fuel Tank
2.2.1 The diesel engine shall have a separate fuel pump from a separate welded steel fuel tank
complying with BS 814.
2.2.2 When filled to capacity there shall be sufficient fuel in the tank to run the engine on full
load for not less than the following periods:
2.2.2.1 3 hours in a light-hazard installation

2.2.2.2 4 hours in an ordinary-hazard installation
2.2.2.3 6 hours in a high-hazard installation
2.2.3 However there shall be a reverse supply sufficient to run the engine on full load for not
less than a further 6 hours.
2.2.4 The engine fuel oil shall be class A2 in accordance with BS 2869 or equivalent.
2.2.5 The fuel tank shall be fitted with the following:
2.2.5.1 A sludge and sediment trap;
2.2.5.2 A fuel gauge in readily visible position. The fuel gauge shall not be of the glass of plastics
tube type. Damage or fracture of any part of the fuel gauge system shall not result in fuel
spillage;
2.2.5.3 An inspection and cleaning hole, normally sealed.
2.2.6 Any valve in the fuel feed pipe between the fuel tank and the engine shall be adjacent to
the tank and shall normally be locked in the open position.
2.2.7 A filter, accessible for cleaning, shall be fitted in the fuel line between the tank and the fuel
pump.
2.2.8 Fuel pipes shall be metal. Soldered joints shall not be used. Suitable means such as
screwed plugs shall be provided to bleed the entire fuel system of air. Air relief cocks shall
not be used.
2.2.9 Pipes carrying lubricating oil shall be of steel or copper. Soldered joints shall not be used.
2.2.10 Arrangements should be made to prevent leakage or spillage during filling, of fuel or
lubricant, onto electrical control panels, or parts of exhaust system which may become
hot.
2.2.11 Engine Starting Mechanism
2.2.11.1 The Engine starting mechanism shall be as follows:
2.2.11.1.1 Independed automatic and manual starting systems shall be provided except that the
starter motor may be common.
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.11.1.2 The rated voltage of the batteries and starter motor shall be either 24 V or 12V.
2.2.11.1.3 The automatic starting system shall normally draw power from a battery reserved for this
purpose. If at any stage during the starting sequence the battery has in sufficient output to
crank the engine, further cranking shall be provided automatically from the battery which is
normally connected to provide the manual starting system. A manual facility shall be
provided to permit the preselection either better for the automatic starting system.
2.2.11.1.4 The automatic start facility shall remain functional at all times except when the engine is
rotating under its own power, and shall be initiated by the opening of normally closed
circuit by a device responding to a fall in water pressure in the trunk main or supply pipe.
2.2.11.1.5 Emergency manual start facilities shall be provided. Starting power shall be drawn from
both sets of batteries in parallel.
2.2.11.1.6 The emergency manual start push button on pull handle shall be protected by a quick
access front.
2.2.11.1.7 A manual start test button and indicator lamp shall be provided to permit periodic testing of
the manual electric start system without breaking the frangible cover over the emergency
start button. The starter panel shall be marked, adjacent to the lamp, with the wording:
2.2.11.1.8 ‘Operate manual start test button if lamp is lit.´ The manual start test button shall only be
brought on line after an automatic engine start followed by a shut down or after six
repeated unsuccessful attempts to start automatically. Either of the two conditions shall
cause the indicator lamp to light and bring the manual start test button on line in parallel
with the emergency manual start push button. The power shall only be drawn from the
manual start battery.
2.2.11.1.9 When a test manual start has been carried out, the circuit used for this purpose shall
automatically become inoperable and the indicator lamp shall be extinguished.
2.2.11.1.10 The automatic start facility shall be available, even when the manual start test button
circuit is activated.
2.2.11.1.11 The electric starter motor shall incorporate a movable pinion which will engage
automatically with the flywheel gear ring. To avoid shock loading, the system shall not
apply full power to the starting motor until the pinion is fully engaged.
2.2.11.1.12 The pinion shall not be ejected from engagement by spasmodic engine firing. There shall
be a means to prevent attempted engagement when the engine is rotating.
2.2.11.1.13 The starter motor shall cease to operate and shall return to the rest position if the pinion
fails to engage with the flywheel gear ring. After a failure to engage, the starter motor shall
automatically make repeated attempts to achieve engagement.
2.2.11.1.14 When the engine starts the starter motor pinion shall withdraw from the flywheel gear ring
automatically by means initiated by an electro-mechanical speed sensor.
2.2.11.1.15 Pressure switches, for example on the engine lubricating system or water pump outlet,
shall not be used as a means of de-energizing the starter motor.
2.2.11.1.16 Centrifugal speed switches or voltage generators used for sensing shall have a direct
coupling to, or be gear driven by, the engine; flexible drives shall not be used.
2.2.12 Starter Batteries and Chargers
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.12.1 Two separate batteries for battery power supplies shall be provided and shall be used for
no other purpose. Batteries shall be either open nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable
cells complying with BS 6260 or lead acid Plant positive batteries complying with BS 6290:
Parts 1 and 2.
2.2.12.2 The electrolyte for lead acid Plant batteries shall comply with BS 3031.
2.2.12.3 Batteries shall be selected, used, charged and maintained in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications and with any manufacturer's instructions. Batteries
shall be mounted on stands or stillages.
2.2.12.4 Suitable hydrometer, for checking the density of the electrolyte, shall be provided.
2.2.12.2 Each starter battery shall be provided with an independent continuously connected fully
automatic constant potential battery charger. It shall be possible to remove either charger
whilst leaving the other operational.
2.2.12.6 Chargers for lead acid Plant batteries shall provide a float voltage of 2.25±0.05 V per cell.
The nominal charging voltage shall be suitable for local conditions (climate, regular
maintenance, etc.) A boost charge facility shall be provided for charging to a higher
voltage not exceeding 2.7V per cell. The charger output shall be between 3½% and 7½%
of the 10 hours capacity of the battery.
2.2.12.7 Chargers for open nickel-cadmium prismatic batteries shall provide a float voltage of
1.445±0.025 V per cell. The nominal charging voltage shall be suitable for local conditions
(climate, regular maintenance, etc.) A boost charge facility shall be provided for charging
to a higher voltage not exceeding 1.75 V. per cell. The charger output shall be between
25% and 167% of the 5 hours capacity of the battery.
2.2.12.8 The following conditions shall each be indicated both locally and at a responsibly manned
location by both a red warning light and an audible alarm:
2.2.12.8.1 The use of any switch which prevents the pump starting automatically; and/or
2.2.12.8.2 The failure of the engine to start by the end of the six cyclic attempts, and
Pump running.
2.2.12.8.3 The warning lights shall be appropriately marked.
2.2.12.8.3.1 A standard kit of tools as recommended by the engine and pump manufacturers shall be
provided together with the following spare parts:
a) Two sets of fuel filters, elements and seals;

b) Two sets of lubricating oil filter elements and seals;
c) Two sets of belts (where used);
d) One complete set of engine joints, gaskets and hoses;
e) Two injector noses.
2.2.12.8.3.2 Engine tests and exercising shall be as follows:
2.2.12.8.3.2.1 Each complete engine and pump set shall be tested on the supplier's test bed for not
less than 1.5 hour at the rated flow.
The following shall be recorded on the test certificate:
i) the engine speed with the pump churning.

ii) the engine speed with the pump delivering water at the rated flow;
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
iii) the pump churning pressure;

iv) the suction head at the pump inlet;
v) the pump outlet pressure at the rated flow (downstream of any outlet orifice plated)
vi) the ambient temperature;
vii) the cooling water flow rate;
viii) the lubricating oil temperature rise at the end of the test run; where the engine is
fitted with a heat exchanger the initial temperature and the temperature rise of the
engine closed circuit cooling water.
2.2.12.8.3.3 When commissioning an installation the automatic starting system of any diesel engine
driven pump set shall be activated with the fuel supply isolated for the six cycles each of
not less than 15 cranking and not more than 15 or less than 10 rest. After completion of
the six starting cycles the fail to start alarm shall operate. The fuel supply shall then be
restored and the pump set shall start when the manual start test button is operated.
2.2.12.9 Diesel Engine Controller
2.2.12.9.1 The controller should be designed in accordance with the current technical aspect of LPC
Rules for Diesel Engine Controller, (L.P.C.) arranged for automatic and manual starting,
with a 24 volt dual battery system.
2.2.12.9.2 Enclosure is of substantial gauge sheet steel protected IP54 fitted with lockable access
door and finished in high quality stove enamel.
2.2.12.9.3 The following Components are Mounted within the Enclosure:
- Fully mechanically interlocked on load a.c. isolating switch prevent access door being
opened when switched is in ´on´ position.
- Dual independent solid state controlled battery charges.
- Circuit Breakers
- Control circuit relays
- Cam Timer
- Control circuit module housing, voltage stabilizer and Diodes
- Batteries disconnected buzzer
- Set of fully identified outgoing terminals
- Failed to Start Buzzer
- Starter motor pinion tooth abutment circuit
2.2.12.9.4 The following Components are Mounted on the Enclosure Door:
- A.C. Isolator - Batteries isolated indicating light

- D.C. Isolator - Test manual start pushbutton
- A.C. Supply Healthy Light - Break glass pattern manual start pushbutton
- Manual start control circuit healthy light - Charge rate ammeters
- Automatic start control circuit healthy light-Tachometer
- Pump on demand indicating light - Hours run counter
- Pump running indicating Light - Oil pressure gauge
- Failed to start indicating light - Water temperature gauge
(water-cooled engines only)
- Test manual start indicating - Battery auto/manual selector switch light
- Battery ´A´ healthy light
- Battery ´B´ healthy light
2.2.12.9.5 Volt free normally closed contacts should be provided for remote alarm to signal the
following conditions:
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
Pump on demand
Pump running
Fault on Controller
2.2.12.9.6 Operation of Diesel Engine Pump
2.2.12.9.7 The automatic starting circuit is arranged to fail safe by utilizing a separately fused starting
relay which under normal standby conditions is energized so that it remains in the "hold"
position. If the pressure in the fire main falls to a pre-set value the pressure switch in the
main operates and releases this relay by causing it to de-energize thus starting the pump
2.2.12.9.8 Should the wiring to the pressure switch be disconnected or an earth fault condition occur
on the wiring then the relay would release to start the pump.
2.2.13 Jockey Fire Pump
2.2.13.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings and of capacities indicated there upon
a jockey fire pump.
2.2.13.2 Pump shall be of the vertical multistage type with a cast iron casing and stainless steel
stages and impeller.
2.2.13.3 Pump shall be self-venting.
2.2.13.4 The impeller shall be hydraulically self-centering and no external adjustment shall be
necessary
2.2.13.5 The shaft shall be of stainless steel construction and the bearings shall be grease
lubricated ball type.
2.2.13.6 The pump shall be supplied complete with:
2.2.13.7 Electric motor of totally enclosed type, flexibly coupled to the pump. Motor shall be sized to
prevent overloading at the highest operating head specified.
2.2.13.8 Jockey pump controller factory wired and tested in one unit to (IEC) or NEMA Standards.
2.2.13.9 Controller shall include hand-off-auto switch, a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic
motor contactor and thermal overload relays with external reset. The controller shall be
furnished in a sturdy, wall-mounted enclosure with hinged door. A pressure switch installed
in the piping system and set for approximately 0.35 bars greater than the pressure switch
for the main fire pump when pressure in the system drops below the preset level.
2.2.13.10 Controller shall include a minimum-run timer, to insure a 3 minutes minimum pump
operation, to prevent the jockey pump from frequent operations and shall include volt free
contacts for connection to BMS
2.3 Description of Operation
2.3.1 The low level water reservoir shall be used for fire fighting purposes as indicated on water
supply layout.
2.3.2 The network is always wet and under pressure, where a jockey fire pump is used to
pressurize the system and to operate whenever water leakage in the system occurs.
2.3.3 Whenever a fire valve is opened or a sprinkler head is actuated automatically, water under
pressure from the network will flow automatically and the jockey pump runs automatically
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
for a preset time, after which it stops, and one of the fire pumps starts automatically if the
following two conditions are satisfied simultaneously.
a) The flow switch, in the main fire water stream senses the flow, and
b) The contacts of the pressure switch, in the suction line of the pump, are closed.
2.3.4 The operation of the fire pumps will ring two alarm bells one in the pump room and the
other in the main control panel located wherever shown on drawings.
2.3.5 A flow switch is installed in the main supply line to each zone; when this switch senses
any flow it should give a visual and audible alarm in the main fire control panel. In addition
the signal should be linked with the fire alarm system (supplied under Electric Section). So
that an alarm shall be initiated in that particular zone.
2.3.6 If the first pump fails to start, the stand-by pump shall start automatically. When all the fire
valves are closed, the flow switch shall automatically stop the operating fire pump.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 Pumps shall be mounted on bases with isolating pads as specified in the specification.
3.1.2 Pumps and motors shall be aligned and levelled throughout the length and width, and
wherever necessary, suitable shims shall be provided to facilitate pipe connections and
levelling.
3.1.3 Pumps shall be secured to bases with proper size anchor bolts.
3.1.4 Drains for packing glands and base shall be piped to nearest drain outlet.
3.1.5 Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly
methods must be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic interaction.
3.1.6 Provide casing connections for vents, drains, suction and discharge pressure gauges.
3.1.7 Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
3.1.8 Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.
3.1.9 Install packing rings with alternate layers staggered 90 degrees. Tighten packing for seal
while permitting prescribed amount of leakage.
3.1.10 Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.11 Each pump shall be provided with pressure gauges at suction and discharge sides.
3.1.12 Coupling guards shall be provided to all pumps.
3.2 Pump Settings
3.2.1 All pumps and motors shall be properly set, levelled, and aligned on bases and foundation
pads in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and their recommended
tolerances. This shall be done before any piping or electrical connections are made.
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2 After all connections have been made, and just prior to putting each pump into operation,
it shall be checked again for levels and alignment.
3.2.3 All necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the thrust is balanced, that shaft
rotates freely when turned by hand and that pump is quiet in operation.
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.3.1 Pumping equipment shall be tested for operating characteristics, and duration of test shall
be set by the Engineer. Apparent defective equipment shall be repaired or replaced and
adjustment made to the equipment as may be necessary, all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3.3.2 Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test all components hydraulically at 150% of
rated working pressure for ability to withstand maximum design pressure and for
tightness.
3.3.3 Upon completion of the installation, test all equipment under field operating conditions to
demonstrate capability of the equipment to meet specified requirements. Compile and
certify the following data.
a. Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.

b. Shut-off head.
c. Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.4 Spare Parts
3.4.1 The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a list of spare parts for all the
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of operation all in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturers of the equipment.
3.5 Special Tools
3.5.1 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipment supplied,
adequate for 12 months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the completion
date of the project.
3.6.1 The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate bound, A4 size,
instruction and maintenance manuals and schedule based on the instructions for
preventative maintenance or service from the manufactures or suppliers of equipment or
according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2007 or equivalent as approved by DM/ Authority containing
the following material:-
3.6.1.1 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.
3.6.1.2 Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of the
systems listed on the Drawings, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers. List
shall give system No., unit no., Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacture's Drawing no.
Parts list shall include manufacturer's recommended spare parts for one year operation.
3.6.1.3 Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
3.6.1.4 Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 13
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.6.1.5 List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
3.6.1.6 Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and wiring
diagrams of controllers.
3.6.1.7 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
connections and interlock connections of other mechanical equipment.
3.6.1.8 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
fulfilment of the specified requirements.
3.6.1.9 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion date.
3.6.1.10 All operation and maintenance manuals should have an electronic copy (CD or USB)
enclosed upon submission.
3.7.1 All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-Contractor under this
contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from the date of final
completion certificate.
3.7.2 All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
immediately provide and install a replacement unit of equal or superior performance until
such time as the original unit is repaired. Failure by the Contractor to comply within 6
hours of notification, will entitle the Employer to purchase or hire a replacement and seek
reimbursement from the Contractor for all related disbursements.
3.7.3 The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or
installation defects for a period of one year, starting from the date of issue of the
substantial completion certificate.
Section 21 30 00
Fire Pumps
21 30 00 - 14
DIVISION 22
PLUMBING
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.2 Application
1.3 Scope of Works
1.7 Shop Drawings and Data to be Submitted for Approval
1.9 Instruction Period
1.10 Instruction Manual and As-built Drawings
1.11 Abbreviations
1.12 Workmanship
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Cleaning and Adjusting

3.2 Tests
3.3 Coordination of Trades
3.4 Access Doors
3.5 Permits
3.6 Openings in Exterior Walls
3.7 Trench Bottom Grading
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing
22 05 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
of Division -22.
equally informed.
1.2 Application
1.2.1 This section applies to and is part of all Sections of Division 22.
1.3 Scope of Works
1.3.1 The works covered under this contract include the supply, installation, testing, adjusting
and putting into operation systems, components of systems, and individual items of
Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of those Works shall
be provided.
1.3.2 Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the following electrical works and materials for
the Mechanical equipment shall be supplied and installed under Division 22 of the
specification but in all respect to the requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
1.3.2.1 All control panels including door lock disconnected switches, push buttons, starters,
contractors, circuit breakers, time delays, selector switches, relays, transformers, timers,
controllers, pilot lights, set points, alarms and all other electrical equipment which are
necessary for the satisfactory operation, control and protection of all plant supplied under
this section of the specifications.
1.3.2.2 Whenever a number of starters controllers, instruments, indicating lights and the like occur
or are shown on the Mechanical and/or electrical Drawings, they shall be arranged in a
central position in a neat, easily cleaned, factory-built panel, or motor control center
assembly. The assembly shall include isolators and all necessary fuses, bus bars,
starters, instruments, relays, push-buttons, indicating lights and the like. Components shall
be mounted in a logical order based on the sequence of operation.
1.3.2.3 All control equipment including sensors, detectors, actuators, controllers, pressure level
and flow switches, annunciation alarms, remote control stations and all such equipment
needed for the proper system operation.
1.3.2.4 All control wiring for the above mentioned equipment.
1.3.2.5 Final connection, between disconnect switches, power outlets, flex outlet and mechanical
equipment.
1.3.2.6 Power cables between submersible pumps and control panel.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.3 The following electrical works and materials for the mechanical equipment shall be
supplied and installed under the electrical part of this contract.
1.3.3.1 All power supply up to and including the following:
- Disconnect switches when specified to be installed separate from the control panel.
- Flex outlet for electric water heater.
1.3.3.2 Power supply up to control panels when specified with an integral disconnect switch.
1.3.3.3 Power supply to disconnect switches when the switches are built-in the equipment.
1.3.3.4 Empty conduits with pull wires for all cables and wires classified under the mechanical
scope of works.
1.3.3.5 Control outlet boxes for all control equipment classified under the mechanical scope of
works.
1.3.3.6 Power cables and conduits or fixing arrangement between water pumps, and their control
panel.
1.4.1 The manufacturer's of all materials and equipment must have at least ten years of
1.5.1 In addition to the sections mentioned above, and unless specifically called in the
specification the following works shall be referred with the other related divisions.
1.7 Shop Drawings and Data to be Submitted for Approval
the piping, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and according to the
1.7.3 The Contractor shall submit adequate Engineering data on each piece of equipment
together with all characteristic curves, capacity selection charts and all data for testing and
balancing of the systems. In addition the Contractor shall submit manufacturer's printed
installation instructions.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
circumstances.
and dust.
Engineer.
1.9.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the training and familiarization of the Employer’s
Maintenance Staff for a period of at least six weeks on all equipment and plants he has
supplied or installed.
1.10.1 The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in electronic and hard copy
triplicate bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material.
1.10.2 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.
1.10.3 Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional components of the
1.10.4 Chart of the tag numbers, location and function of each valve.
1.10.5 Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
1.10.6 Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
1.10.7 List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
1.10.8 Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control diagrams and wiring
1.10.9 Complete, as installed, color coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
1.10.10 The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his review as to the
fulfillment of the specified requirements.
1.10.11 All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial completion date.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.11 Abbreviations
AGA American Gas Association.

ANSI American National Standard Institute.
ASA Acoustical Society of America, American Standards Association.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
AWWA American Water Works Association.
BSI British Standards Institution.
NPC National Plumbing Code.
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code.
UL Under Writers Laboratories.
1.12 Workmanship
the Engineer.
1.1.2.2 The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 All apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in operation. Finished
surfaces shall be restored if damaged and entire installation shall be delivered in perfect
condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Systems shall be adjusted and
balanced to operate as shown in the Drawings and herein specified.
3.2 Tests
3.2.1 All piping and equipment shall be tested as specified under the corresponding section of
the Specifications and to meet local and specified requirements. Provide anemometers,
thermometers, gauges, voltmeters, ammeters, and similar instruments, not part of the
permanent installation, but required to record the performance of the equipment and
systems. Labor, materials, power, etc.., required for testing, shall be furnished by the
Contractor, unless otherwise indicated under the particular section of the Specifications.
3.2.2 Tests shall be performed in the presence of representatives of the Engineer and such
other parties that have legal jurisdiction and all results shall be recorded.
3.2.3 In general, pressure tests shall be applied to piping systems only before connection of
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
appliances be subjected to pressures exceeding the ratings as prescribed by the

manufacturers of fixtures, equipment and appliances, or accepted engineering standards
case less than the time prescribed in each division of the Specifications.
3.2.7 The following tests should be furnished for but limited to the following:
a) Noise and vibration isolation test

b) Insulation test
c) Sanitary drainage test
d) Pump tests
e) Noise and vibration measurement
f) Water heaters
g) Area storm drainage
h) Domestic water supply test
3.2.9 The Contractor shall coordinate the work to ensure orderly, timely installations of the work
of applicable trades within the various spaces indicated.
3.4 Access Doors
3.4.1 Access doors shall provide ready access to concealed control valves, traps, cleanouts,
motors and other items requiring operation, adjustment, or maintenance.
3.5 Permits
3.5.1 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections and tests, for
the proper installation of his work, as may be required by the various administrative
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5.2 Certificates of inspections, tests etc., with the proper approval certified thereon, shall be
secured by the Contractor and these documents shall be delivered to the Engineer before
the work in question will be accepted.
3.6.1 Openings in exterior walls, particularly at or below grade shall be kept properly plugged
and caulked at all times, (except when being worked on) to preclude the possibility of
flooding due to storms or other causes. After completion of work, openings shall be
permanently sealed and caulked in the manner herein specified.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.1 All trench bottom grading required for plumbing work shall be done under the
requirements of this section of the Specifications. The bottom of all trenches shall be
trimmed by hand method to receive pipes at their respective finish levels. Trenches shall
not be excavated by machine below levels as above specified.
3.7.2 After the pipe lines have been tested and approved, backfill shall be compacted
thoroughly by hand tampers below center lines of pipes and to at least 300mm above it.
No backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to cause damage or misalignment to the
pipes or protective coating if used. Backfill material under such conditions shall be earth or
gravel above the top of piping and hubs.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.3 Valves Pressure Rating
1.4 Quality Assurance and Control
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gate Valves

2.2 Check Valves (Spring Loaded Type)
2.3 Float Valves
2.4 Automatic Air Vents
2.5 Backflow Preventers
2.7 Butterfly Valves
2.8 Balancing Valves
2.9 Water Pressure Reducing Valves
2.10 Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve
2.11 Strainers
2.12 Flexible Connectors
2.13 Accessories (Free Fall Device)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Valves

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
General Duty Valves for Plumbing
22 05 23 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Valves shall be installed only in vertical or horizontal positions unless otherwise required
by the Drawings.
1.1.2 All valves shall be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for
maintenance.
1.1.3 Valves shall be full-line size.
1.1.4 Valves 2" (50mm) dia. and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 21/2" (65mm) dia. and
larger shall have flanged ends.
1.1.5 All threaded end valves shall be installed with unions to facilitate the removal of the valve
from the pipeline.
1.1.6 Gate valves shall be installed on both sides of every piece of equipment for all pipe-
system connections, and where shown on the Drawings.
1.1.7 All valves 21/2" (65mm) and larger shall have internal epoxy coting suitable for drinking
water application.
Section 22 05 00 - General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing

Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation
Section 22 11 13 - Facility Water Distribution Piping
Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping and Fittings
Section 22 11 23 - Domestic Water Pumps
Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage
Section 22 13 16 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 22 14 00 - Facility Storm Drainage
Section 22 14 29 - Sump Pumps
Section 22 33 30 - Domestic Water Heater
Section 22 40 00 - Sanitary Fixtures
1.3.1 Unless specified otherwise all valves, strainers, flexible connections, etc. shall be selected
for pressure rating at least 1.5 times the operating pressure.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.2 Contractor shall submit a schedule of all valves, strainers, etc., showing the required
pressure rating for each fitting and shall indicate its location and service.
1.4.1 All valves shall be marked to the applicable standard shown.
1.4.2 All valves shall be full line size.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gate Valves
2.1.1 Gate valves shall be of non rising stem. Valves 2" (50 mm) and smaller, shall be all
bronze, screwed ends and bronze wedge disc faces and seats. Valves 2½" (65 mm) and
larger, shall be cast iron or ductile iron, flanged ends with, bolted bonnet and wedge disc
faces and seats. Valves design and shall be leak free and shall conform to AWWA C515.
2.1.2 One gate valve shall be supplied and installed:
a- At the supply and return from each equipment.
b- At the discharge and suction of each pump.
c- In general at all points shown on the Drawings and/or specified.
2.1.3 Copper alloy gate valves shall conform to BS 5154.
2.2.1 Check valves shall be of the non-slam spring loaded, globe type with the capability to
absorb and dampen the shock wave from the piping system water hammer. Check valves
2" (50 mm) and smaller, shall be all bronze, screwed ends. Valves 2½" (65 mm) and
larger, shall be cast iron, flanged ends.
2.2.2 One check valve shall be installed:
a- At the discharge of each pump.
b- At all points shown on the Drawings and/or where specified.
2.2.3 Copper alloy check valves shall conform to BS 5154.
2.3 Float Valves
2.3.1 Float valves 2" (50 mm) and smaller shall be all bronze, screwed ends, float operated.
Valves 2 ½" (65 mm) and larger shall be cast iron body, flanged ends, float operated.
Float shall be all copper and mounted at the end of a brass or copper rod, which actuates
valve operation.
2.3.2 Copper floats shall conform to BS 1968.
2.4.1 Supply and install all automatic air vents as shown on the Drawings and wherever
specified in this book of specifications.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.4.2 Automatic air vents of the spherical float type shall be installed at all high points in the
piping. Vents shall have cast iron housing and bolted cover with gasket. Float shall be
constructed of stainless steel. Vents shall be suitable for a maximum operating pressure
of 150 psi (1030 Kpa). A ½" (15 mm) lock shield valve shall be directly installed ahead of
each automatic air vent, and a ½" (15 mm) drain line shall be provided to discharge at a
convenient point.
2.5 Backflow Preventers
2.5.1 This type of valve shall be used on domestic water systems, wherever applicable.
2.5.2 Valve shall combine the double check valve protection effect together with an air gap
venting to the atmosphere, working on the reduced pressure principle.
2.5.3 Valve shall be suitable for 125 psi (860 Kpa ) steam and 200 psi (1380 Kpa).
2.6.1 Expansion joints shall be provided wherever pipes cross structural expansion joints and
2.6.3 Bellows shall be of stainless steel and suitable for a pressure of 125 psi (860 Kpa) or the
2.7.1 Valves shall be designed for a minimum of 700 kPa differential pressure with the down
stream flanged removed through 300 mm size. Factory test date on differential pressure
rating is required. Valves shall have cast iron body, conforming to ASTM A126 Class B
body, aluminium bronze disc, in accordance with ASTM B148 alloy 954, and EPDM
rubber seals. Valves 65 mm through 150 mm shall be provided with lever. Valves 200
mm and larger shall be driven by a worm gear operator or screw driven operator with
position indicator. Operators shall be fully enclosed in cast iron housing, watertight, and
require no more than 150N rim pull. Operators shall be designed to withstand, without
damage an input torque of 1.3 KN. Valves shall be rated for 1,000 kPA water working
pressure.
2.7.2 Electric motor operated valve shall be provided with a motor reducer combination with an
operating speed to suit the changeover operation. The operation shall have a high torque
motor specifically designed for valve control service, limit switches, torque switches, local
position indicators and provision for manual operation in case of power failure. Should
power failure occur, valve disc position should be changed by positioning the clutch lever
and using the handwheel. Electric operation should override manual. The housing shall
be completely weather-proof.
2.7.3 The CV of the valve shall not be less than 1980 when 90 degree open.
2.8 Balancing Valves
2.8.1 Supply and install balancing valves of double regulating effect with provision for
connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Each meter connection shall have
pressure temperature read out ports. Valves shall be of the Y-pattern style design which
can be installed in any direction without affecting flow measurements.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.8.2 All valves upto 2" (50 mm) shall be of copper alloy. Valves of 2 ½" (65 mm) and above
shall have cast iron body with all other metal parts of nonferrous copper alloy.
2.8.3 Each valve shall provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing and positive
shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc.
2.8.4 Each valve shall have multi-adjustment turns of hand wheel for maximum setting with
hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision tamper proof balancing
setting. Number of turns shall be 4 for valve up to 2" (50 mm), 8 between 2 ½" (65 mm)
and 6" (150 mm), 12 for 8" (200 mm) and 10" (250 mm) and 16 for 12" (300 mm).
2.8.5 All valves up to 2” (50 mm) shall be supplied with polyurethane container.
2.8.6 One set of computerized balancing instrument shall be supplied with the valves. The
instruments shall be a read out meter, programmed with the valve curves and with a
conversion formula for Cv to read the flow in gpm directly. The instrument shall also be
provided with temperature measurement probe.
2.8.7 A chucking device shall hold the valve disconnects firmly and a built-in flat seal shall give
it maximum tightness.
2.8.8 The valves shall be globe style design and all metal parts of non-ferrous pressure die-
cast, non porous metal: copper alloy.
2.8.9 The valve shall be suitable for installing in any direction without affecting flow
measurement and shall provide four functions:
- Precise flow measurement.

- Precision flow balancing
- Positive shut off with no drip seat and teflon disc.
- Drain connection with protective cap.
2.8.10 The valve shall have four 360 deg. adjustment turns of the hand wheel for maximum
vernier type setting with hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision
tamper-proof balancing setting.
2.9 Water Pressure Reducing Valves
2.9.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings and as specified here-in-after water
pressure reducing valves of the direct operated type.
2.9.2 Each valve 2" (50 mm) and smaller, shall be all bronze, screwed ends. Valves 2½" (65
mm) and larger, shall be cast iron, flanged ends, with stainless steel spring and shaft and
nylon diaphragm.
2.9.3 The spring shall be designed to provide the pressure reduction indicated on the Drawings.
2.9.4 The valve shall be designed for a work pressure of 1720 KPa and shall be threaded or
flanged ended as the pipe connecting to it.
2.9.5 The valve shall be of the self contained type without any control lines with all internal parts
being accessible by removing spring chamber and without dismantling the valve itself.
2.9.6 The valve shall be designed to operate smoothly and quietly without chattering or any
water hammer problems.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.10 Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve
2.10.1 This valve shall be used on domestic hot water lines wherever applicable.
2.10.2 Temperature and pressure relief valve shall be self-closing type with test lever and
screwed connections.
2.10.3 Valve shall be suitable for a pressure of 75 to 150 psi (520 to 1030 Kpa ) service and shall
be supplied with temperature relief set at 210 deg.F (100 Deg.C).
2.10.4 Valve shall be AGA and ASME rated.
2.11 Strainers
2.11.1 Water strainer shall be supplied and installed at the suction connection of all pumps, and
ahead of all automatic flow control valves.
2.11.2 Strainers 2 1/2" (65mm) and smaller shall be Y-pattern type with bronze body, screwed
cover, brass basket and screwed ends.
2.11.3 Strainers 3" (75 mm) and larger shall be of cast iron body, brass basket and flanged ends.
2.12.1 Flexible Connectors shall be, stainless steel, easy flexing, long cyclic life connectors, to
protect mechanical equipment by relieving piping stresses, caused by piping
misalignment, sagging pipe hangers, and thermal expansion.
2.13 Accessories (Free Fall Device)
2.13.1 The valve shall be weight-operated with mercury switch devices opens on fusible link
failure and shuts off the fuel oil supply pumps and the equipment is feeded by fuel oil such
as boilers, incinerators, generators, etc., and so arranged that the weight falls freely,
doing no work during the first part of its travel. By the time the weight is called upon to
move the valve, it has accumulated sufficient momentum to overcome the inertia of the
valve plug. Where pipe run is at low level special linkage should be supplied to raise lower
position of dead weight to pipe centre line.
2.13.2 Required length of easy to fit non-corrosive, carefully selected stranded stainless steel
cable to hold the valve open or closed as required.
2.13.3 Three brass screw hooks with brass pulleys which automatically align themselves to suit
the run of the cable. Two of these shall be woodscrew thread, and one 6mm (¬") B.S.P.
thread for fitting to metal surfaces.
2.13.4 Copper tube cable connectors. Where the cable has to be cut and a loop formed, these
connectors shall be quick and effective.
2.13.5 One fusible link specially made to break when the temperature reaches a pre-determined
point. Normally the link should made to operate at 71oC (160oF) as B.S.S. 799 Part 5
1975, but other temperature should be catered for when required.
2.13.6 One heavy brass wood-screw threaded eye to secure the far end of the cable to the wall
or ceiling.
2.13.7 One engraved warning notice to hang on the cable to prevent people walking into it.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
by the Drawings.
maintenance.
3.1.4 Valves 2" (50 mm) dia. and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 2 ½" (65 mm) dia.
and larger shall have flanged ends.
from the pipeline.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.4 Inertia Bases
PART 3 EXECUTION
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 29
Hangers and Support for Plumbing System
22 05 29 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall
employ the services of an Acoustical Consultant & licensed Seismic Structural Consultant
to review equipment, piping, and to conduct sound, vibration and seismic control
requirements. Any additional improvements necessary to achieve the required design
criteria for mechanical, electrical, plumbing work shall be provided without additional cost.
1.1.1 Section 22 05 48 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Submittal shall include the following.
a) Stress analysis calculations.

b) Point loadings
c) Supports design criteria,
d) Selection of supports, hangers , design of pre- engineered steel supports , Wall and
column attachments.
e) Stress and forces on hangers from expansion and contraction of piping.
f) Selection of guides , Anchors, expansion joints and locations and locations.
g) Selection of of threaded rod, drill inserst , size of anchor bolts.
h) Furnish movement calculations based on the following criteria.
i) Expansion Joint Calculations for horizontal and vertical Risers.
· For hot water piping, allow thermal movement based on the temperature of the fluid
in the piping and the winter exterior design temperature specified herein.
· For cold water piping, allow thermal movement based on the temperature of the
fluid in the piping and the summer exterior design temperature specified herein.
· Refer to the Plumbing Drawings for additional requirements and details.
· Furnish calculations and revised equipment schedule data if changes are made to
system routing, location, size, or components or any other changes to a system are
made, and the changes impact the design parameters scheduled or indicated in the
Contract Documents.
2.1.2 Support, anchor and guide and accessories shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Do
not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe,
weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation. All steel hangers and supports shall be of hot
dipped galavnized
2.1.3 Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the supports or
the structure itself. Secure pipe support, anchors and guides to concrete by means of
inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel fishplates
embedded in the concrete.
2.1.4 Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and supports.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 29
22 05 29 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.5 Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at all
changes in direction. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm.
2.1.6 Clearance for application of specified vapour sealed insulation without cutting pipeline
covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings shall be provided.
2.1.7 Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels,
2.1.8 Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same
level. Trapeze shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for rod hanger at
each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to each
other by the use of either clamps or clips.
2.1.9 For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive use 3/8" (10 mm) rods,
and for piping 2 ½" (65 mm) thru 5" (125 mm) use 5/8" (16 mm) rods, and for piping
6"(150 mm) thru 12" (300 mm) use 7/8" (22 mm) rods.
2.1.10 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with
special conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are required
other than those provided in the structure.
2.1.11 Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every fourth
hanger with diagonal bracing attached to slab or beam.
2.1.12 Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron rests,
with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required,
provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers,
fasten stands to piers.
2.1.13 Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook for pipe
located close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500
lbs (680 Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
2.1.14 Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to pitch vapor
sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation.
2.1.15 Hangers on PVC pipes shall be of design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but
permits axial movement.
2.1.16 Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of
direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment.
Support trap arms in excess of 900mm in length as close as possible to the trap.
2.1.17 Un-insulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or
supports.
2.2.1 The spacing for piping support (unless spwcififed elswhere) shall be as follows:
.1” & 1¼” (25 & 32 mm) steel/ copper pipe --------- 3.7 meter.
.1½” – 8” (40 – 200 mm) steel/ copper pipe --------- 4.6 meter.
.1½” (40 mm) PVC pipe ------------------------------------- 2 meter.
.2” (50 mm) PVC pipe --------------------------------------- 2.5 meter.
.2½” (65 mm) PVC pipe ------------------------------------- 2.7 meter.
.3” (80 mm) PVC pipe --------------------------------------- 3.3 meter.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 29
22 05 29 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.2 Vertical spacing of PVC pipes shall be twice as those of horizontal spacing.
2.2.3 Vertical spacing of other pipes - at every floor level.
2.3.2 Spring Mounts
prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise and be corrosion
protected when installed outdoors.
2.4 Inertia Bases
2.4.1 Each pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall be consist of pre-
reinforcement, equipment mounting bolts and vibration isolator brackets. Base shall
mount on spring vibration isolators which shall be of high deflection, free standing, un-
housed large diameter, laterally stable steel springs assembled into an upper load plate
and leveling assembly and into a lower load plate and noise isolation pad assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 29
22 05 29 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION

FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.3 Submittals
1.5 Guarantee
1.9 Vibration Isolation, Structural Noise And Equipment Bases
1.11 Drainage Pipe Noise and Vibration Control
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.3 Concrete Foundation Blocks
2.4 Inertia Bases
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General

3.2 Noise Tests
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
Mechanical Sound and Vibration
For Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 05 48 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 48

FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
discrepancies between the contents of this part and the Acoustic Specialist report, the report
specifications shall take presidence].
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.2 The Specialist Sub-Contractor should have successfully supplied, installed and completed
similar projects for a period of not less than 10 years.
standards:-
1.2.2 Acoustics Performance Characteristics:

elsewhere by a testing organisation acceptable to Engineer. Approved testing authority
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Shop Drawings
1.3.2 Samples
specified.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
22 05 48 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.3 Certification
1.3.4.1 The Acoustic Specialist supplying and installing the material shall be an approved agent of
the manufacturer. The manufacturer will certify that said contractor is an officially
1.3.5 Single Source
1.5 Guarantee
1.5.1 The Specialist shall furnish in the Client’s name, a written guarantee covering the product
supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal operating conditions
for a period of one year from the date of completion of acoustic works. The Contractor
shall pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the manufacturers and
acoustic sub-contractor of individual members of the system before the completion of the
project.
of work.
1.6.2 Where the contractor fails to meet these specifications he will be expected at his own cost,
generated by the plant, do not exceed the noise criteria levels for the various types of
areas specified.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
22 05 48 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.7.1 The optimum NC/NR noise levels for the various spaces (Refer to Table 1 in Section 23
05 48)
1.8.1 All mechanical, machinery shall be analysed for vibration and for noise breakout to areas
adjacent and above or below to ensure that the specified noise criteria ratings are net.
1.9 Vibration Isolation, Structural Noise And Equipment Bases
1.9.1 The contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and testing of the complete
system necessary for vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all structure borne
vibration generated by the electro-mechanical equipment as described in this specification
and as detailed on the scheme drawings.
1.9.3 Where Plumbing equipment units are located at roof level or inside a room the selection of
vibration isolation systems shall take into account the effect of the unsupported span
between building columns and the subsequent deflection of the slab under the point loads.
The spring type isolators shall have a static deflection of not less than 50mm under the
load of the units supported. This static deflection is to provide an isolation efficiency of at
least 95% and higher deflections are to be used if the calculations so indicate. The
Contractor shall also check the installation for airborne noise through the structure that
could affect accommodation areas immediately below or adjacent and if necessary
recommend the use of acoustic floating floors to contain the noise. A report of the study
and recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to proceeding
with the installation. The cost of the study, implementation, erection and any rectification
of the original design shall be carried out at the Contractors own cost.
ASHRAE handbook.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
22 05 48 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.10.2 The first three hangers from the equipment should provide the same deflection as the
equipment isolators; the remaining hangers should be spring or combination spring and
1.11 Drainage Pipe Noise and Vibration Control
1.11.1 Where noise level is not achievable due to the noise generated by the drainage pipes, an
acoustical pipe lagging should be provided to reduce the radiated noise.
1.11.2 Alternatively, "acoustical" or "sound proof' or "silent pipes" system can be used to achieve
the same noise level required in the space.
1.11.3 The acoustical specialist shall study and give recommendations if any (or both) option(s)
could be used in order to achieve the noise level required.
1.11.4 The lagging shall be either fiberglass or acoustic foam with aluminum faced of 1” (25mm)
thick and of minimum 10d B (A) insertion loss.
1.11.5 The sound proof pipes system shall be in accordance with DIN 4109 and VDI guide 4100,
DIN 4102, B2.
1.12.1.1 Section 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping system
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Isolation hangers shall be used for suspended pipes and equipment.
2.1.2 Isolation hangers are rubber or springs or a combination of both.
2.1.3 Rubber Hangers
2.1.3.1 Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type. It shall consist of:
a. A high grade rubber block with suspension rod and an outside steel housing.
b. The steel housing will be anchored to the ceiling slab and the suspension rod shall
support the equipment.
c. The rubber shall be protected against corrosion due to oil or other damaging agents.
2.1.4 Spring Hangers
2.1.4.1 Shall be of the open mounting type and shall consist of a steel spring between a top and
bottom plate with an adjustment bolt or levelling.
stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load and safe solid stresses.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
22 05 48 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.2 Rubber Mounts
2.2.2.1 Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type with a cub shape or integrated ribbed rubber pad.
2.2.2.2 The pad shall have two bolt holes for isolator anchorage to concrete base.
2.2.2.3 Rubber mounts shall not be used for deflection requirements larger than 8 mm.
2.2.3 Spring Mounts
2.2.3.3 The spring should be designed to provide horizontal stiffness at least 75 % of vertical
2.3.1 A reinforced concrete foundation block or concrete inertia base for each piece of
equipment shall be constructed of minimum thickness as shown on the Drawings, with a
minimum weight equal to at least two times that of the equipment and in accordance with
the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and/or vibration specialist. Bases
shown on drawings or included in these specifications represent the minimum
requirements of the Engineer.
2.4 Inertia Bases
2.4.1 Each water pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall be consist of pre-
2.4.2 Other equipment which are found, by the Engineer, to require inertia bases, shall be of the
same specifications as above and shall be part of the Contractor's obligation without
additional cost.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General
3.1.1 The test of the airborne noise in each area shall be in accordance with BS 7445 Acoustics
Guide to ISO Measurement of Airborne Acoustical Noise” (BS 7458-1991, also refers).
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
22 05 48 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 Noise Tests
3.2.1 It will be the responsibility of the contractor to employ an independent acoustic engineer to
carry out proving tests and to prepare noise test certificates for all acoustically important
3.2.2 The general basis for acceptability of the installation acoustically is (tolerance + or - 2db)
at any point 1.2 meters above floor level and 1.5 meters from grilles, diffusers, registers,
terminal units etc., of the air-conditioning systems.
load.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 48
22 05 48 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.4 Nameplates
2.5 Painting
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 53
Identification for Plumbing Piping
22 05 53 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Work of this Section to be read and governed by General Conditions of Contract. This
Section includes Painting and Identification of all pipe works, equipment etc.
1.2 Scope of Work
Section 22 05 00 General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing

Section 22 11 13 Facility Water Distribution Piping
Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping and Fittings
Section 22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
Section 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage
Section 22 14 29 Sump Pumps

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2.1 General
2.1.1.1 Any pipe which transport condensate or grey-water must be color-coded differently from
pipes that are used for potable (drinking standard) water and be labeled ‘Not Suitable for
Drinking.’
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 53
22 05 53 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.1.2 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
2.2.1.3 All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating conditions.
2.2.1.4 Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours with code
indications.
2.2.1.5 Code indication shall include safety colours and service information. Information shall be
i - Name in Full.
iv - Appropriate Code Indication Colour bands.
2.2.2 Legend
2.2.2.1 The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be by
2.2.2.2 The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be applied close
2.2.2.3 Pipe marking should be highly visible.
2.2.3 The Type & Size of Letters

(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm

(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
(200 to 250) mm 600 mm 63 mm
over 250 800 mm 100 mm
2.2.4 Colour
2.2.4.1 The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend. The
2.2.4.2 Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.2.5 Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows:
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 53
22 05 53 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
Colour Code
- Cold Water Green Blue

- Hot Water Red Green/White
- Drainage - Black
- LPG or Natural Gas - Yellow
position on floor.
2.4 Nameplates
a) System and unit designation from schedule of equipment.

b) Manufacturer's name and address.
c) Serial and model number.
d) Rated capacity.
e) Temperature, pressure or other limitations.
2.5 Painting
2.5.1.3 int shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops, runs or
sagging.
2.5.1.5 Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus and
non-ferrous refrigerant piping.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 53
22 05 53 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.1.7 Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on ASHRAE or BS
recommendations after being submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
2.5.2 Machinery
priming coat.
2.5.3 Piping
2.5.3.1 All un-insulated and unwrapped Ferrous piping (galvanized or non-galvanized) including
flanges, bolts and valves in trench, partitions, below tiles, or underground shall be painted
with 2 coats of emulsified asphalt.
2.5.3.2 Paint all exposed (in shafts, above and below false ceiling, on roof, etc.. ) ferrous piping
applicable).
2.5.3.3 Applicable to galvanized pipes:
a) Prime Coat: Zinc Chromate.

b) Finish Coat: Ironhide gray metal paint or as approved by the Engineer.
2.5.3.4 Applicable to all other ferrous pipes:
Prime Coat: Red lead Primer, 1.5 to 2.0 mils thick.
2.5.4 Iron Work
2.5.4.1 All iron work within the building, not otherwise specified such as pipe and duct hangers
and supports, and supports for apparatus, shall be prime painted with one coat of red
lead.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 53
22 05 53 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents

1.2 Summary
1.4 Submittals
1.6 Project Conditions
1.7 Warranty
1.8 Commissioning of Building Services
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.2 Preparation
3.3 Testing and Balancing Producers
3.4 Maintenance during Defects Liability Period and Guarantees
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing
22 05 93 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 Summary
1.2.1 A qualified and approved independent third party appointed directly by main contractor
shall carry out and certify the commissioning. Testing must be carried out by a company
approved by Authority to conduct commissioning of buildings. Testing, adjusting and
balancing of the installed systems as per the relevant commissioning code of the British
Chartered Institute of Building Services (CIBSE), ASHRAE Standards, BSRIA or ACG
standards.
1.2.2 Major equipment such as pumps, shall be tested and commissioned before shipping to
site.
1.2.3 Testing, adjusting and balancing for all the installed systems shall include pumps, boilers,
calorifiers, noise and vibration measurement, automatic controls as per the procedure
herein after.
1.2.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to provide during installation all necessary provisions
to carry out the above works as required by the third party.
1.2.5 All costs shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.2.6 The contractor shall submit system verification check list for each type of system and
equipment being commissioned.
specification, and the requirement for commissioning method statement and test sheets
shall be review by Engineer and independent commissioning agency prior to
commencement of commissioning.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
have been made.
1.3.9 When pipes, valves, equipment etc., are to be covered or embedded or insulated; their
specific tests shall be carried out on them before any covering is applied. These tests shall
not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and he shall take all necessary
precautions to insure the safety and protection of such tested items until the termination of
the work, and flow measurement devices shall have sufficient pipe length around them.
1.3.11 Contractor shall provide access for commissioning and maintenance, including access to
valves, test points and for any plant maintenance /setup.
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Two copies of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing strategies plans to be submitted. Plans
should show step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3. Include also a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
1.4.2 Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms
certified by Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm.
1.4.3 Warranties if specified in this Section.
1.5.1 Ensure the participation of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing team members, equipment
manufacturers' authorized service representatives, Plumbing controls installers, and other
support personnel. Provide notice in advance of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.5.2 Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, Plumbing controls installers, and other mechanics to operate Plumbing
systems and equipment to support and assist Testing, Adjusting and Balancing activities.
1.5.3 Certify Testing, Adjusting and Balancing field data reports by reviewing field data reports
to validate accuracy of data, and certify that Testing, Adjusting and Balancing team
complied with approved Testing, Adjusting and Balancing plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
1.5.4 Use approved standard forms.
1.5.5 Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently as required by
instrument manufacturer.
1.5.5.1 Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.6.1 Completed areas of the project might be occupied during Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
or before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing operations to minimize conflicts with Client’s operations.
1.7 Warranty
1.7.1 Provide a guarantee on National Standards for Testing and Balancing Plumbing, Systems
forms stating that:-
1.7.1.1 The certified Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm has tested and balanced systems
according to the Contract Documents.
1.7.1.2 Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
1.8.1 The commissioning of Plumbing System shall be carried out before issuing the completion
certificate
1.8.2 Commissioning must be carried out in accordance with the CIBSE, ASHRAE, Authority
having the jurisdiction.
1.8.3 Commissioning must be carried out by a company approved by Authority having the
jurisdiction to conduct commissioning of buildings.
1.8.4 Commissioning results must be recorded and available for inspection by Authority having
the jurisdiction
1.8.5 A systems manual, documenting the information required to allow future operations staff
to understand and optimally operate the commissioned services, must be developed and
provided to the building owner or facilities operator following commissioning.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
address conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing of systems and equipment.
3.1.1.1 Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
3.1.1.2 Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow
control devices, balancing valves and fittings are required by the Contract Documents.
Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
3.1.2 Examine approved submittal data of Plumbing System and equipment.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.3 Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record
Documents."
3.1.4 Examine design data, including Plumbing System descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about Plumbing System and equipment controls.
3.1.5 Examine equipment performance data including pump curves. Relate performance data to
Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
3.1.6 Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been
performed.
3.1.7 Examine system and equipment test reports.
3.1.8 Examine Plumbing system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible
and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
3.1.9 Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
3.1.10 Pump alignment to ensure that has been installed properly.
3.1.11 Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
3.1.12 Examine motorized valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
3.1.13 Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
3.1.14 Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Prepare a Testing, Adjusting and Balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
3.2.2 Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
3.2.2.1 Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
3.2.2.2 Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.2.2.3 Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3.2.2.4 Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
3.3.1 Testing and Hydronic General Procedure
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.1 Perform testing and balancing procedure on each system according to procedures shown
hereinafter.
3.3.1.2 Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump
to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
3.3.1.3 Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
3.3.1.4 Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition
to the general preparation procedures specified above:-
3.3.1.4.1 Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
3.3.1.4.2 Check expansion tank liquid level.
3.3.1.4.3 Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
3.3.1.4.4 Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.
3.3.1.4.5 Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
3.3.1.4.6 Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
3.3.1.4.7 Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
3.3.1.4.8 Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.3.1.5 Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive
displacement pumps:
3.3.1.5.1 Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the
pump has the intended impeller size.
3.3.1.5.2 Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
indicated water flow is achieved.
3.3.1.5.3 Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
3.3.1.5.4 Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
3.3.1.6 Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated pre-settings.
3.3.1.7 Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
3.3.1.7.1 System components that have CV rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.8 Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that
is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
3.3.1.9 Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:-
3.3.1.9.1 Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
3.3.1.9.2 Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3.3.1.9.3 Record settings and mark balancing devices.
3.3.1.10 Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,
pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
3.3.1.11 Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of
balancing.
3.2.3 Procedures for Heat Exchangers
3.2.3.1 Measure water flow through all circuits.
3.2.3.2 Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
3.2.3.2 Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
3.2.3.4 Measure inlet steam pressure.
3.2.3.5 Check the setting and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.
3.3.3 Procedures for Motors
3.3.3.1 Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
3.3.3.1.1 Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
3.3.3.1.2 Motor horsepower rating.
3.3.3.1.3 Motor rpm.
3.3.3.1.4 Efficiency rating.
3.3.3.1.5 Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
3.3.3.1.6 Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
3.3.3.1.7 Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
3.3.3.2. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.3.4 Procedures for Water Pipes
3.3.4.1 Test all piping systems, including valves, fittings and joints under a pressure equal to 100
psig (690 Kpa) or 1 ½ times the working pressure, whichever is greater.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.4.2 Blank off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves, diaphragm
valve, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be damaged by test
pressure. Open, but do not back seat, all valves.
3.3.4.3 Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air. Maintain the
required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable complete inspection to be
made of all joints and connections and for a minimum of six hours, unless specified
otherwise.
3.3.4.4 Repair all leaks or defects uncovered by the tests and retest the system.
3.3.4.5 After tests have been completed, drain the system and blow out and clean it of all dust
and/or foreign matters. Clean all strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt, fillings and debris.
3.3.5 Procedures for Drainage and Sewer Pipes
3.3.5.1 Drains and sewers should generally be subjected to an internal pressure test of 1.2 m
head of water above the crown of the pipe at the high end but not more than 6 m at the
low end Inspection and tests should be made during the installation and as the work
proceeds, to ensure the pipework is properly secured and clear of obstructing debris and
superfluous matter.
3.3.5.2 When the roughing-in work is completed and before connection of fixtures, the entire
system shall be subjected to thorough flushing and then to a water test by plugging up all
openings and filling all of the lines as per tests sections. Any defects shall be corrected, at
the expense of the contractor.
3.3.5.3 After all fixtures are connected; the entire system shall be subjected to a smoke test. For
PVC piping, the correct grade of cartridge should be selected so that it is not harmful to
the pipe work or joint materials or an air test shall be performed in accordance with BS
8005 Part 1.
3.3.5.4 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the parties having jurisdiction and the
Engineer, and all results shall be recorded.
3.3.6 Procedures for Gas Piping
3.3.6.1 Before the gas piping is finally put in service, and before connecting the appliances, the
system shall be carefully tested to assure that it is gas-tight.
3.3.6.2 The piping shall be filled with air or inert gas, but not with any other gas or liquid, to a
pressure of 10 psig (70 Kpa) for a 2-hours duration without showing any drop in pressure.
3.3.6.3 All diaphragms or controls known to be incapable of withstanding the test pressure shall
be disconnected.
3.3.6.4 After piping has been checked, all piping receiving gas shall be fully purged by
disconnecting the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot valve at the appliance.
3.3.7 Procedures for Vibration Measurements
3.3.7.1 Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
3.3.7.1.1 Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
3.3.7.1.2 Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s).
3.3.7.1.3 Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm).

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.7.1.4 Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
3.3.7.1.5 Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
3.3.7.2 Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
3.3.7.2.1 Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
3.3.7.2.2 Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
3.3.7.3. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at
a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
3.3.7.3.1 Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
3.3.7.3.2. Clear the space of people.
3.3.7.4 Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is
complete.
3.3.7.5 Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
3 3.7.6 Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
3.3.7.7 Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).
3.3.7.8 Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and
building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal,
vertical, and axial planes.
3.3.8 Pumps:
a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Pump Base: Top and side.
d. Building: Floor.
e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.
3.3.8.1 For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation
blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the
differences.
3.3.8.2 Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.
3.3.8.3 Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
3.3.8.4 Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3.3.8.5 Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
3.3.8.6 For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel
to-solid distance.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.8.7 Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete
base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia
base and the floor.
3.4.2 The training of operators assigned by the client for operation of all major equipment and
controls as decided by the Engineer.
3.4.3 Training should be provided by original suppliers of equipment for a period of at least one
week and or when requested by client through out the liability period.
3.4.4 The replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or installation
3.4.5 Necessary staff to carryout the above shall be provided to the job site during the said year.
3.4.6 On call emergency services (24 hours), particularly for elevators, escalators, travelators
and fire alarm system.
3.4.7 Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects for
client.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 05 93
22 05 93 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

1.3 Schedule of Insulation Thickness
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 Pipe Insulation - Type A
2.3 Aluminium Cladding
2.4 Protective Coating & Wrapping (Fuel Oil and LPG Piping)
2.5 Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.
2.6 Pipe Sleeves
2.7 Equipment Insulation
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Protection and Cleaning

3.2 Installation of Piping Insulation
3.3 Finishes
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and SECTION

22 05 00, requirements.
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 Supply and install all insulation and lagging on piping, vessels as indicated on the
drawings or specified to be insulated. Authority regulations, Civil Defence, and
Sustainability requirements shall also be considered and more stringent specifications to
be adopted
1.1.2 All insulation material shall have Zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) and less than Five
Global Warming Potential (GWP < 5).
1.1.3 Canvas jacket and all insulating materials shall be non-combustible, or self-extinguishing
non-flame spread grade.
1.1.4 Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible, shall be protected with aluminium
cladding as specified herein after.
1.1.5 Sustainability requirements to be followed and adopted as per the project requirements (if
those requirements are more stringent)

1.3.1 The thickness of the insulation applied to pipes and equipment shall be as follows:-
Pipe Diameter Insulation

Service Location inches (mm) Thickness
inches (mm)
Domestic cold water Pipes running - All sizes for cold water. 1 (25)
exposed to sun
Cooled water supply pipes All sizes for cool water 1 (25)
Domestic hot
Water pipes -- Up to 3 (80) 1 (25)
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
latest editions of codes, standards and regulations.
Reference Code Abbreviati Applicable Title of Standard

o Standard
n
National Fire Protection NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air Conditioning and
Association Ventilating Systems.
NFPA 90B Standard for warm Air Heating

and Air Conditioning Systems
American Society for ASTM ASTM E96 Test method for water vapor
Testing and Material transmission of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Defective, damaged or
unsound pipe will be rejected. Deflections from a straight line or grade, between the center
lines extended, of any 2 connecting pipes made necessary by vertical curves or horizontal
curves or offsets, shall not exceed 12500/ D mm. per linear meter of pipe, where D
represents the nominal internal diameter of the pipe expressed in millimetres. If the
alignment requires deflections in excess of these limitations, special bends or a sufficient
number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provide angular deflections within
the limit set forth. Except where necessary in making connections with other lines, pipe
shall be laid with the bells facing in the direction of laying. Pipes in trenches-Place each
length of pipe with a uniformly distributed bearing for the bottom 0.3 of the pipe on the
sand fill in the trench. Excavate recesses to accommodate pipe bells, sleeves, glands or
other fittings. Take up and re-lay any pipe that has the grade or joint disturbed after laying.
Clean the interior of the pipe of all foreign material before lowering into the trench, and
keep clean during laying operations by means of plugs or other acceptable methods.
2.1.2 All drainage and rain water pipes running underground, under the building, shall be
encased in concrete for the whole length.
2.2 Pipe Insulation - Type A
2.2.1 This type of insulation shall apply to cold water pipes running on roof and to domestic hot
water pipes up to 2½” (65 mm).
2.2.2 Insulation shall be flexible foamed closed cell elastomeric tubular form type. Insulation
may be slipped over pipe or tubing before pipe connections are made, or may be slit
longitudinally and snapped onto the pipe and then sealed with vapour barrier adhesive.
2.2.3 Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.27 BTU / Hr °F. ft sq. per
inch thickness at a mean temperature of 75 ° F.
2.2.4 The surface finish shall be an 8-ounce canvas cloth embedded between 2 coats of vapour
barrier. Aluminium cladding shall be provided as specified.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.1 Aluminium cladding shall be of 20 gauge, it shall be used as protection against weather
and mechanical damage.
2.3.2 Aluminium cladding shall be applied on top of insulation above the canvas jacket and
vapour barrier coating. It shall be held in place by means of self tapping screws and by
using 38 mm wide aluminium straps at 300 mm centers with aluminium or stainless steel
angle rib clips, all joints shall be sealed with grey colored suitable sealant. Rivets and
screws shall not be used for cladding unless approved by the Engineer for use on elbows
and fittings. Cladding shall be overlapping at joints, horizontal seams shall be at the
bottom. Cladding on ducts shall be formed in such a way to allow for rain/dew drain off.
2.3.3 Fabricated 20 gauge aluminium covers shall be used for valves and fittings. The covers
shall be in two sections hinged together and held in place by suitable stainless
steel/aluminium clasps.
2.3.4 Aluminium cladding shall be applied to all insulated pipes (Galvanized and Pre-insulated)
running exposed on roof, outside building, inside parking floors and in plant rooms.
2.4 Protective Coating & Wrapping (Fuel Oil and LPG Piping)
2.4.1 Surfaces of pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove rust, millscale, direct and other
loose matter. After the surface is clean and dry, one continuous coat of primer (quick
drying) shall be applied and allowed to dry completely. After the surface is fully dry, wrap
the pipes with pipeline corrosion tape with backing of yellow colour or other similar
approved wrapping material. Longitudinal overlap should be 25 mm or greater according
to the specification and end laps a minimum of 150 mm. Prior to wrap over the fittings,
approved moulding putty shall be applied.
2.5 Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.
2.5.1 Provide hanger shields to protect vapor sealed pipe insulation within mechanical
equipment rooms at each support point by a 360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi,
waterproofed calcium silicate encased in a 120 deg. sheet metal shield. Insert thickness
shall be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe dia., minimum but shall
not be shorter than 100mm and need not be longer than 300mm if 6 bearing load causes
no discernable deformation. Insert shall extend 25mm beyond sheet metal shield.
100mm shields shall be 26 gauge minimum. Shields 130 to 230mm long shall be 20
gauge minimum. Shields longer than 230mm shall be 16 gauge.
2.5.2 Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors in a
360 deg., 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density, 100
psi. waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further enclosed
within the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and insulation
shield, pack annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with double neoprene
coated asbestos-free rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover the wall
penetration opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall extend at
least 25mm. beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.
2.5.3 Provide oversize hangers with blocking of the same thickness as the insulation to pitch
vapor sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation.
2.6 Pipe Sleeves
2.6.1 Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls, floors and partitions and be of
similar material to pipe except for plastic pipes where sleeves shall be copper or steel.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6.2 Sleeves shall be generally one or two sizes larger than pipe as necessary and positioned
true with pipe to provide adequate clearance and also allow for lateral movements of
pipeline if required.
2.6.3 Sleeves shall be finished flush with finishes face of wall, floor and ceilings, but project 75
mm above floors in wet areas with the cap sealed with waterproof mastic.
2.6.4 Sleeves shall be firs-stopped in gap between pipe and sleeve in all fire rated structures to
Building Regulation E14 using asbestos-free fire proof material and without restricting
pipework movement (with any thermal insulation sections stopped short each side).
2.6.5 Sleeves shall be caulked in gap between pipe and sleeve in external walls using
asbestos-free, weather and vermin proof material.
2.7.1 This type of insulation shall apply to boilers, boiler circulator, pumps, heat exchangers hot
water expansion tanks and domestic hot water tanks.
2.7.1.1 Insulation shall be semi-rigid fibrous glass with organic binder up in board form with a
minimum density of 3 lbs/ft3 (50 kg/m3) and a maximum K-factor of 0.42 Btu-in/ft2.hr.°F
(0.06 W/m.°K) at a mean temperature of 200 °F (94 °C). Insulation shall be applied over
pins welded to the vessel on 300 mm centers. All joints shall be staggered and tightly
butted. The insulation shall be covered with gauge 18 aluminium jacket.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 All insulation shall have a smooth, homogenous and lineable finished surface. All rigid
sections shall be concentric and be accurately matched for thickness.
3.1.2 All surface to be insulated shall be dry and free from loose scale, dirt, oil or water when
insulation is applied.
3.1.3 No surface imperfections in the insulation such as damaged edges, or ends, cracks and
small voids or holes shall be accepted.
3.1.4 Insulation materials shall be stored and protected from weather moisture, accumulations
of foreign matter, or possible damage in a dry and clean store.
3.1.5 Surface finishes and lagging adhesives shall not be diluted and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.6 Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of metal without causing damage to
insulation or surface finish.
3.2 Installation of Piping
3.2.1 All pipe covering 2 ½" (65 mm) or less in thickness shall be applied in single layer with
joints tightly butted together.
3.2.2 All pipe covering 3" (80 mm) and larger in thickness shall be double layer with lateral and
longitudinal joints of the second layer staggered with those of the first layer. No canvas is
to be used between the layers.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.3 All pipe covering shall fit snugly on the pipe to which it is applied. Inside circumference of
pipe covering when applied shall not vary from the outside circumference of the pipe by
more than 3mm. undersize.
3.2.4 Pipe insulation shall have factory applied jackets and secured with plastic bands at each
joint at center of each section and where sections abut upon fittings, except where
otherwise specified.
3.2.5 Insulation shall only be applied to piping after all testing has been accomplished and after
all the coats of paint have been applied.
3.2.6 Pipe covering shall be terminated at a sufficient distance from all flanges to permit easy
removal of bolts.
3.2.7 Screwed, soldered, and welded fittings and valves (up to the bonnet) on 4”(100mm) pipe
and larger, shall be insulated with block insulation or pipe covering and shall be given a
trowelled coat of finish cement to present a smooth surface. Valves shall be covered to
the gland.
3.2.8 Screwed, soldered, and welded fittings and valves (up to the bonnet) up to 4”(100mm) in
size shall be covered with field fabricated metered segments of pipe insulation equal in
thickness to the adjoining insulated pipe and finished with standard weight canvas jacket.
Where hangers are installed on the pipe covered with insulation the entire hanger up to
the rod shall be insulated.
3.2.9 Where insulated piping is subject to movement and supported on roller hangers, steel
protection saddles shall be provided and welded to the pipe. Saddles shall be filled with
OPR cement.
3.2.10 All insulated piping not supported on roller hangers and subject to movement, shall be
provided with protection shields at all hanger locations. Shields shall be of 3mm.
galvanized iron extending on each side of the hanger for a distance equal to the diameter
of the insulation and shall extend up the sides of the insulation to the center of the pipe
and shall be provided with cork pad support.
3.2.11 Where standard insulation shapes are not available, cut, score or meter segmental or flat
block to fit contour of pipe, stagger joints of adjoining segments. Fit insulation carefully
and secure with wire. Smooth with insulating cement.
3.2.12 Insulate valves, strainers, fittings and flanges with identical material, density, thickness
and finish as the piping insulation. Use pre-molded insulation material where available,
otherwise use shaped block segments wire on with all edges filled with insulation cement
or filler.
3.2.13 Insulate strainers to permit removal of the basket without disturbing the insulation of the
strainer body.
3.3 Finishes
3.3.1 All pipes running in concealed spaces shall have canvas cover, securely fixed, overlaps
firmly pasted down, secured with aluminium bands at intervals and painted with two coats
of fire retardant emulsion paint.
3.3.2 All non-cladded pipes running inside building but exposed to view shall have same
treatment as for those in concealed spaces but with one coat of gloss paint, to an
approved colour, in addition.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
cladding as specified.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
22 07 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 11 13
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Water Supply System - General Description

1.2 Water Service Main
1.3 Reference Code
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Hose Bibs

2.2 Vacuum Breaker
2.3 Shock Arrestor (Water Hammer)
2.4 Water Meter
2.5 Balancing Valves (Double Regulating)
2.6 Flexible Pump Connectors
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Water Supply System Installation Requirements

3.2 Testing of Water Supply
3.3 Testing of Drainage and Sewer Pipes
3.4 Stress Analysis and Water Hammer
Section 22 11 13
Facility Water Distribution Piping
22 11 13 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 11 13
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Water Supply System - General Description
1.1.1 Domestic cold water is supplied from the public mains and stored in underground
reservoirs as indicated on the Drawings.
1.1.2 Domestic water from the underground reservoir(s) will be lifted by means of automatic
pumps and supplied by pressurized riser lines as detailed on the relevant Drawings.
1.2 Water Service Main
1.2.1 The Contractor shall connect the water service line from the public main, in the vicinity of
the building low level water reservoirs.
1.3 Reference Code
1.3.1 All work under this section shall conform to the requirements of the National Plumbing
Code Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code, unless otherwise specified hereinafter.

Standard
National Plumbing Code NPC -- --
Uniform Plumbing Code UPC -- --
Section 22 11 13
22 11 13 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Hose Bibs
2.1.1 Hose bibs shall be finished ¾" (20 mm) chrome plated brass, compression type with
chrome plated handle and standard ¾" (20 mm) male hose connection or otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
2.2 Vacuum Breaker
2.2.1 Where indicated or otherwise required, vacuum breakers shall be installed and set at least
100 mm above the floor level of equipment or fixture rims to prevent contamination of
water supply.
2.3 Shock Arrestor (Water Hammer)
2.3.1 Where indicated or otherwise required, shock arrestor shall be mechanical pneumatic
type, stainless steel construction with hermetically sealed bellows and threaded
connection.
2.3.2 Arrestors shall be located adjacent to all quick closing valves, solenoid valves, where
required and as indicated on Drawings.
2.3.3 Proper sizes shall be determined by the individual application.
2.4 Water Meter
2.4.1 Each water meter shall indicate the water use, measure the water consumed, and indicate
the area served. The meters shall work as standalone devices as well as integrated part of
BMS. The readings shall be displayed and printed out from the BMS (if provided) to
facilitate monthly consumption records.
2.4.2 The water meter\ central monitoring system, if provided shall have the following
capacities:
· All meters must be capable of remote data access and must have data logging
capability and complying with ADDC specifications. All meters should be approved by
ADDC.
· Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual water consumption for each end-
use. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend
analysis.
· Determine 'out-of range' values to alert building operators to unusually high

consumption.
· Record peak water consumption for each end-use.
Section 22 11 13
22 11 13 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Balancing Valves (Double Regulating)
2.5.1 Balancing valves shall be complete with provision for connecting a portable differential
pressure meter. Each meter connection shall have pressure temperature read out ports.
Valves shall be of the Y-pattern style design, valves shall be suitable for installation in any
direction without affecting flow measurements.
2.5.2 All valves upto 2" (50 mm) shall be of copper alloy with NPT connection. Valves of 2 ½"
(65 mm) and above shall have flanged type cast iron body with all other metal parts of
nonferrous copper alloy.
2.5.3 Each valve shall provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing and positive
shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc and drain connection with protection cap.
2.5.4 Each valve shall have multi-adjustment turns of hand wheel for maximum setting with
hidden memory feature to program the valve with precision tamper proof balancing
setting. Number of turns shall be 4 for valve up to 2" (50mm), 8 between 2 ½" (62mm) and
6” (150mm), 12 for 8" (200mm) and 10" (250mm) and 16 for 12" (300mm).
2.5.5 Valves shall be supplied with polyurethane container that doubles the insulation after
valve is installed.
2.5.6 One set of computerized balancing instrument shall be supplied with the valves. The
instruments shall be a read out meter, programmed with the valve curves and with a
conversion formula for Cv to read the flow in gpm directly. The instrument shall also be
provided with temperature measurement probe.
2.5.7 A chucking device shall hold the valve disconnect firmly and a built-in flat seal shall give it
maximum tightness.
2.5.8 Balancing valve shall conform to BS 7350.
2.6 Flexible Pump Connectors
2.6.1 Flexible pump connectors shall be easy flexing, long cyclic life connectors, to protect
mechanical equipment by relieving piping stresses, caused by piping misalignment,
sagging pipe hangers, and thermal expansion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Water Supply System Installation Requirements
3.1.1 Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and at the highest points in
the lines (when specified).
3.1.2 Gate valves shall be installed at the base of each riser line, each branch main and on
each lateral branch to fixtures or equipment and where shown on the Drawings.
3.1.3 Drain valves with threaded hose connections shall be provided at all low points of the
piping system.
3.1.4 Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in upright position in the hot and cold water
lines at quick closing valves and at water supply branch to flush valve-operated water
closets.
Section 22 11 13
22 11 13 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.5 The minimum pipe size to be used is ¾" (20mm) diameter.
3.1.6 All electrically operated equipment, specified under this section, (like electric water, etc.)
shall be provided with the necessary length of electrical cord (including ground conductor),
with appropriate plug suitable for connection to the electrical outlet.
3.2 Testing of Water Supply
3.2.1 Test all piping systems, including valves, fittings and joints under a pressure equal to 100
psig (690 kpa) or 1 ½ times the working pressure, whichever is greater.
3.2.2 Blank off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves, diaphragm
valve, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be damaged by test
3.2.3 Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air. Maintain the
required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable complete inspection to be
otherwise.
3.2.4 Repair all leaks or defects uncovered by the tests and retest the system.
3.2.5 After test have been completed, drain the system and blow out and clean it of all dust
and/or foreign matters. Clean all strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt, fillings and debris.
3.2.6 The hot water system shall be tested for satisfactory circulation to assure water within the
required temperature limits at all points.
3.2.7 Additional tests shall be made as may be required by local authorities, or as directed by
the Engineer.
3.3 Testing of Drainage and Sewer Pipes
3.3.1 Drains and sewers should generally be subjected to an internal pressure test of 1.2 m
head of water above the crown of the pipe at the high end, but not more than 6m at the
low end inspection and tests should be made during the installation and as the work
superfluous matter.
3.4 Stress Analysis and Water Hammer
3.4.1 Contractor shall carry a stress analysis on the water supply system and shall consider all
necessary measures to ensure that the system is water hammer free. Any additional
valves, surge tanks, bellows, required to achieve this requirement shall be absorbed by
the Contractor at no additional cost to the Client.
Section 22 11 13
22 11 13 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.3 Storage of UPVC Pipes
1.4 Pipe Identification
1.5 Arrangement and Alignment
1.6 Storage
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC Pipes - Type 2

2.2 Cross Linked Polyethylene Pipes (XLPE)
2.3 Polypropylene Pipes (PP-R)
2.4 High Density Polyethylene Pipes (HDPE)
2.5 Flanged Pipe Joints
2.6 Joints Between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric isolators)
2.7 Fire Stop Collar
2.8 Piping Schedule
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Arrangement and Alignment of Pipes

3.2 Special Requirement for PVC Pipe Installation
3.3 General Requirements for Piping Installation
3.4 Connection to Equipment and Control Valves
3.5 Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Guides - General
3.6 Pipe Sleeves
3.8 Pipework Clearances and Segregation
3.9 Material Tests and Identification
3.10 Testing
3.11 Installation of Unions and Flanges
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
Domestic Water Piping & Fittings
22 11 16 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and Section 22 05 00.
1.1.2 This section describes basic materials and requirements for Pipework services
installations for building.

Section 22 05 29 - Hanger and Supports for Plumping Piping
Section 22 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing
1.3.1 PVC pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover at all times. Sun light shall not be
permitted to come into contact with the PVC materials at any time, except during
installation in trench. The pipes shall be stored on flat level ground free from large or
sharp edged stones or objects, and shall be stacked to a maximum height of 1.5 m. (or as
recommended by the manufacturer) with sockets at alternate ends, and in such a manner
as to prevent sagging or bending.
1.4.1 All pipes shall be indelibly marked at intervals of not greater than 3m. The marking shall
show the manufacturer's identification, the standard name and number, and the nominal
size and class. Adhesive labels alone shall not suffice. All pipes complying with British
Standards shall be kitemarked.
1.5 Arrangement and Alignment
1.5.1 Install piping in a neat, workmanlike manner and the various lines shall be parallel to
building walls wherever possible.
1.5.2 Install pipe groups for plumbing parallel with pipes of other trades.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.3 Space pipe supports, arrange reducers and Pitch piping to allow air to be vented to
system high points and to allow the system to be drained at the low points. However,
where obstructions exist, automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket points and
1/2" (15 mm) drain gate valves shall be supplied and installed at all low points and riser
legs.
1.6 Storage
1.6.1 PVC pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover at all times. Sun light shall not be

Standard
American Water C601-68
Works AWWA C501-67 FIBERGLASS PIPE DESIGN MANUAL
Association M45
American Society for Testing ASTM ASTM C425 Specification for compression joint for
and Materials vitrified clay pipe and fittings.
ASTM A53-88a Specification for pipe, steel, black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
ASTM B88 Specification for seamless copper water
pipe.
ASTM B280-88 Specification for seamless copper tube
for A/C and refrigeration field service.
ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
Studs. 60,000psi tensile strength
ASTM D1785 Specification for poly (vinyl chloride)
(PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80, and
120.
ASTM D3517M Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass–
Fiber-Reinforced Thermo-setting–Resin)
Pressure Pipe.
American Standard ASA ASA 40.1 -
Association
ASA B16.22 -
ASA B1618 -
ASA B9.1 -
ASA B35.5 -
British Standards BS BS 4514 Specification for unplasticized PVC soil

and venting pipes, fittings and
accessories.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
BS 5255 Specification for thermoplastics waste

pipe and fittings.
BS 5254 Specification for polypropylene waste

pipe and fittings (external diameter 34.6
mm, 41.0 mm and 54.1 mm.)
BS 3505 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl

chloride (PVC-U) pressure pipes for cold
potable water.
BS 4346 Part 1 Joints and fittings for use with

unplasticized PVC pressure pipes.
Injection moulded unplasticized PVC
fittings for solvent welding for use with
pressure pipes, inluding potable water
supply.
BS 4346 Part 2 Mechanic joints and fittings, principally of

unplasticized PVC.

chloride (PVC-U) pipes and plastics
fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160 for
below ground gravity drainage and
sewerage.
BS 5480 Specification for Glass Reinforced Plastic

(GRP) Pipes, Joints and Fittings for use
of Water Supply or Sewerage.
BS 5481 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe

and fittings for gravity sewers.
BS 1387 Specification for screwed and socketed

steel tubes and tubulars and for plain and
steel tube suitable for welding or for
screwing to BS21 pipe threads.
BS 2871 Specification for copper and copper

alloys, tubes.
BS 864 Part 2 Specification for capillary and

compression fittings for copper tubes.
BS 3601 Specification for carbon steel pipes and

tubes with specified room temperature
properties for pressure pipes.
BS 21 Specification for pipe threads for tubes

and fittings where pressure tight joints are
made on the threads.
American Society for ASHRAE - -

Heating, Refrigeration and
Air Conditioning Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
Deutsches Institute for DIN DIN 19534 -

Normung
American National ANSI ANSI B18.2.2

Standards Institute
ANSI B31.1
ANSI A21,10,11 -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 UPVC pipes-Type 2 (Un-plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride) pipes shall be to BS 3505 latest
edition Class E 15 Bar (1500 Kpa) working pressure at 68° F (20° C) fluid temperature
and 103° F (40° C) ambient temperature or ASTM specification D 1785 Schedule 40 for
inside the buildings, and as per ASTM specification D1785 schedule 80 for the risers.
2.1.2 The pipe shall be homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign
inclusions or other defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
color, opacity, density and other physical properties.
2.1.3 All fittings and accessories shall be of same material and quality as the pipe and jointing
up to 2 ½" diameter shall be of the spigot and socket cemented type where solvent
cement is applied to both parts all in compliance with B.S. 4346: Part I: 1969 joints and
fittings for use with un-plasticized PVC pressure pipes, Part I : Injection moulded PVC
PVC fittings for solvent welding for use with pressure pipes. After pushing the pipe into the
socket, the joint shall be allowed to set for at least 10 hr.
2.1.4 Jointing for all pipes buried underground outside buildings and for all pipes above 3"
diameter shall be of the rubber ring integral socket type to BS 4346 Part 2.
2.1.5 Expansion joints with guides as recommended by manufacturer shall be installed on long
run solvent cemented pipes every 30 meters of length, and wherever shown in the
specification.
2.1.6 Bending PVC pipes is only allowed in non-critical application at room temperature and
after the approval of the Engineer.
2.1.7 Before bending, the pipe should be heated at the section to be bent to a temperature of
about 275-300° F (135-150° C).
2.1.8 The bore should be supported by packing with sand or by insertion of thick rubber pipe,
the heating being carried out in a hot air oven or by immersion in hot oil or glycerine.
Overheating should be avoided, and the pipe should not be held at the bending
temperature too long.
2.2 Cross Linked Polyethylene Pipes (XLPE)
2.2.1 XLPE piping system shall be basically consist of the following components:
2.2.1.1 Cross linked polyethylene pipe pulled in coloured (red for hot water blue for cold water
application) corrugated conduits of polyethylene material.
2.2.1.2 Ring main line fittings and valves of bronze or DZR brass construction.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.2 Pipes
2.2.2.2 The inner pipe shall be made of cross linked polyethylene which can withstand upto 95
degree C fluid temperature inside it at a maximum pressure of 10 bars. Pipes shall be
able to withstand short time temperature loading upto 110 degree C at a maximum
pressure of 10 bars.
2.2.2.2 All pipes shall be stamped at equal intervals with clear marks showing clearly the name of
the manufacturer along with the pressure and temperature ratings, pipe diameter and wall
thickness, pipe standard DIN 16892/93 and the country of origin of manufacturer.
2.2.2.3 All pipes shall be laid so that they can be easily replaced, whenever necessary by fast and
easy pulling from the conduits.
2.2.2.4 Pipes shall satisfy the requirement for drinking water installation and approved by a
recognized health organization DVGW or equivalent whenever specifically intended for
potable application.
2.2.3 Conduits
2.2.3.1 The conduits shall be made of temperature stabilized high density polyethylene and shall
be capable of retaining its form upto 105 degree C. Conduits shall have different colour
for different application.
2.2.4 Fittings & Accessories
2.2.4.1 One single line XLPE pipe in one single conduit will supply water to one fixture only from a
main ring above false ceiling.
2.2.4.2 Ring feed line shall have an isolating valve of bronze construction. Each pipe at its
termination above false ceiling shall be labeled with a tag indicating the fixture it is
supplying.
2.2.4.3 Pipes to be connected to the different fittings via a special wall box of reinforced plastic
fitted with bronze or DZR brass elbow suitable for ½" or ¾" threaded connection as
required. The box should be suitably designed in order to enable the replacement of
existing pipes in the event of their damage (puncturing).
2.2.4.4 All valves, wall box, elbows, tees, bends should be of bronze or DZR brass connections to
be of a cone grip unions type allowing full flow capacity, minimum pressure loss, easily
detachable with torque clearly defined for a fool proof installation.
2.2.4.5 Contractor to use proper tools for assembly as recommended by manufacturer, i.e.
assembly pliers, Ratchet torque wrench, cutters, etc.
2.2.4.6 Distribution ring shall be located above the false ceiling as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 Polypropylene Pipes (PP-R)
2.3.1 Polypropylene Copolymer Random (PP-R) pipes shall be manufactured according to DIN
8077/8078, fittings shall be manufactured according to DIN 16962.
2.3.2 Pipes and fittings shall be jointed using electro-fusion welding process. Welding shall be
made as recommended by the manufacturer. Threaded fittings shall be used to connect
to other piping systems, fixtures, etc., fitting with metal insert shall be sealed with Teflon
tape.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.3 PP-R piping system shall be installed with special pre-caution for thermal expansion
especially for exposed installation.
2.3.4 Thermal expansion shall be compensated by use of proper elbows, fittings, as

recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3.5 PP-R pipes shall not be installed or stored under direct UV light. Pipes on roof shall be
insulated and cladded.
2.3.6 Pipe bending shall be generally avoided, in extreme cases pipes may be bent by heating
with hot air without direct flames. The minimum bending radius shall be 8 times the pipe
diameter.
2.3.7 PP-R pipes and fittings shall be certified for potable water use by a recognized European
Standard, DVGW or approved equivalent.
2.3.8 Pressure rating of pipes shall be PN 20 and fittings shall be PN 25. Pipes shall be
suitable for working pressure of 10 bars at a working temperature of 60 degree C.
2.4.1 HDPE pipes shall be made from polyethylene (PE) as per ISO 4427:1996 (E) Standard.
2.4.2 HDPE pipes shall be manufactured from polyethylene type PE 100 resin, it shall contain
only those antioxidants, UV stabilisers and pigments necessary for the manufacture of
pipes confirming to ISO 4427 specifications.
2.4.3 The pipes for drinking water shall be either black, blue or black with blue stripes.
2.4.4 Pressure rating for HDPE pipes shall be SDR 11 (pn 16), nominal outside diameter and
the wall thickness shall conform to ISO 161-1:1996.
2.4.5 Fittings shall be electrofusion type for pipe upto 4” (100 mm) dia. and butt fusion for pipes
above 4” (100 mm) dia.
2.5.1 All flanged joints shall be made have compressed ring type gaskets of 1.5 mm. thick.
2.5.2 Bolts for flanges shall be of stainless steel with hexagonal heads and hard pressed steel
hexagon nuts. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A193M/ASTMA 194M Type 304
2.5.3 All bolt holes shall be spot faced.
2.6.1 Make joints between ferrous and non-ferrous screwed piping and equipment by using
Teflon or nylon isolating materials in the form of screwed unions.
2.6.2 Make joints between ferrous and non-ferrous flanged piping and equipment with insulating
gaskets and "Teflon sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts.
2.6.3 The entire insulating joint including the dielectric material shall be suitable to withstand the
temperature, pressure and other operating characteristics for the service for which they
are used.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7 Fire Stop Collar
2.7.1 Supply and install factory manufactured fire stop collar for all the plastic pipes penetrating
fire rated walls and floors. The Collar should be of heavy gauge galvanized metal to
house the intumescent insert. The intumescent shall provide a minimum of 15 times the
free expansion and shall contain no water soluble expansion ingredients and approved to
be used in combination with the smoke sealant from the same manufacturer. The collar
should be UL classified and FM systems approved to the requirements of ASTM E814
(UL 1479).
2.7.2 The fire sealant should be of non hardening compound, non water soluble ingredients,
capable of expanding a minimum of 5 times when subjected to 230 degree F to 100o F.
The sealant should be UL classified and FM system approved to the requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
2.8 Piping Schedule
2.8.1 General
2.8.1.1 Piping classes are specified for each service in the following schedule. The designations
indicated refer to detailed specifications for piping in this section of the specifications:
2.8.2 Piping Classes
Piping Class
UPVC Sch.
Service HDPE PPR XLPE
80
Domestic cold water supply running on roof and inside
the building up to chrome plated valves in Toilets, •
Bathrooms and kitchens etc.
Cold Water Supply above False Ceiling (Kitchens and
•
Bathrooms)
Pump Water Transfer Line •
Hot water supply drops inside the Bathrooms, Toilets
•
and Kitchens, etc., up to fixtures
Cold Water Drops inside Bathrooms and Toilets •
Cold Water gravity feeding risers
Hot Water Pipes inside the building •
Underground cold water supply •
PART 3 EXECUTION
½" (15 mm) drain gate valves shall be supplied and installed at all low points and riser
legs.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
curves or offsets, shall not exceed 12500/D mm. per linear meter of pipe, where D
represents the nominal internal diameter of the pipe expressed in millimeters. If the
shall be laid with the bells facing in the direction of laying.
3.2.2 Pipes in trenches-Place each length of pipe with a uniformly distributed bearing for the
bottom 0.3 of the pipe on the sand fill in the trench. Excavate recesses to accommodate
pipe bells, sleeves, glands or other fittings. Take up and re-lay any pipe that has the grade
or joint disturbed after laying. Clean the interior of the pipe of all foreign material before
lowering into the trench, and keep clean during laying operations by means of plugs or
other acceptable methods.
3.2.3 Plumbing vents exposed to sun light shall be protected by waterbase synthetic latex
paints.
3.3.1 Make all changes in size and direction of piping with standard fittings.
3.3.2 Make all branch connections with tees.
3.3.3 Use eccentric reducing fittings or eccentric reducing couplings where required by the
contract documents or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-condensable.
measurement either both English or both metric.
3.4.1 Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and control valves to
facilitate dismantling. Arrange connections so that the equipment being served may be
removed without disturbing the piping.
3.4.2 Install all supply piping, pumps and other equipment including gate valves and strainers
therein, at line size with the reduction in size being made only at the outlet piping from the
control valve at the full size of the tapping in the equipment served.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.5 Hangers, Supports, Anchors And Guides - General
3.5.1 Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and
install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval of the
Engineer. Do not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support
weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation.
the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to concrete by means of
3.5.4 Uninsulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or
supports
3.5.6 Clearance for application of specified Vapor sealed insulation without cutting pipeline
3.5.8 Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type , unless otherwise specified, with adjustable
attachment to hanger rod. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers. Pipe
hangers shall fit over vapor sealed insulated piping.
3.5.9 Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger, provide steel
pipe clamps.
3.5.11 Use roller supports, where provision for expansion is required. Rollers shall have cast iron
adjustable bases.
3.5.13 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with
3.5.15 For floor supports, provide horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron rests, with pipe
nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required, provide pipe roll
stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers, fasten stands to
piers.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.5.16 For wall supports, provide horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook for pipe located
close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500 lbs (680
Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
3.5.17 Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.
3.5.18 Provide hanger shields to protect vapor sealed pipe insulation within mechanical
waterproofed calcium silicate encased in a 120 ° sheet metal shield. Insert thickness shall
be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe diameter, minimum but shall
not be shorter than 100mm. and need not be longer than 300mm. if bearing load causes
no discernable deformation. Insert shall extend 25mm. beyond sheet metal shield.
100mm. shields shall be 26 gauge minimum. Shields 130 to 230mm. long shall be 20
gauge minimum. Shields longer than 230mm. shall be 16 gauge.
360°, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density, 100 psi.
waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further enclosed within
the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and insulation shield, pack
annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with double neoprene coated
asbestos-free rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover the wall penetration
opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall extend at least 25mm.
beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.
3.5.20 Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to pitch vapor
sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation.
3.5.21 Maximum horizontal spacing for hangers are as follows:
. ¾" and 1" (20 and 25 mm) steel pipe-----2.5 meter

. 1 ¼"-2" (32 and 50 mm) steel pipe-------3.0 meter
. 2 ½"-4" (65 and 100 mm)steel pipe ------4.0 meter
. 5"-6" (125 and 150 mm) steel pipe---------5.0 meter
. 8" (200 mm) and above steel pipe ---------6.0 meter
. Up to 1 ¼" (32 mm) copper pipe----------2.0 meter
. 1 ½" (40 mm) and over copper pipe-------3.0 meter
. 2 ½" (65 mm) and smaller PVC pipe-------1.2 meter
. 3" (80 mm) and over PVC pipe-------------1.8 meter
. vertical spacing -PVC pipe-----twice as those of hor. Spacing.
-other pipes - at every floor level.
3.5.22 Hangers on PVC pipes shall be of design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but
permits axial movement.
3.5.23 Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of
direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment. Support
trap arms in excess of 900mm in length as close as possible to the trap.
3.6 Pipe Sleeves
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
. Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron.

. Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe.
3.6.5 The space between outside of pipe or insulation and the inside of the sleeve or framed
opening shall be fire stopped to Building Regulation E14 using asbestos-free fire proof
material in interior walls and asbestos-free, weather & vermin proof materials in external
walls.
3.7.2 After installation is complete, place temporary screens at connections to all equipment and
at automatic control valves where permanent strainers are not provided.
with clean water.
3.7.5 The Contractor shall disinfect water piping before it is placed in service. The Contractor
shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfecting and shall
perform the work in accordance with the procedure outlined in AWWA Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains Designation C 601-68. The dosage shall be such as to produce
a chlorine residual for not less than 10 ppm after a contact period of not less than 24
hours. After treatment, the piping shall be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine content does not exceed 0.2 ppm.
3.7.6 During the disinfecting period, care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in
steel main.
3.8 PIPEWORK CLEARANCES AND SEGREGATION
3.8.1 Minimum clearance between uninsulated pipes, finished face of insulation on pipes and
adjacent surfaces shall be as follows:
- Walls 25 mm
- Ceilings 100 mm
- Finished Floors 100 mm
- Adjacent pipes, both insulated 25 mm
- Adjacent pipes, both uninsulated 25 mm
- Insulated pipes adjacent to conduit trunking 100 mm
- Uninsulated pipes adjacent to conduit trunking 150 mm
- Uninsulated pipes adjacent to electrical
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
cables not in conduit or trunking 150 mm

- Insulated pipes adjacent to electrical
cables not in conduit or trunking 100 mm
3.8.2 The spacing of services shall provide for the application of thermal insulation and valves
and flange boxes and increased spacing to accommodate pipeline fittings.
3.8.3 The spacing of services shall provide for access to pipes and electrical services for ease
of installation and maintenance.
3.8.4 The spacing shall be provided for cold water pipes to be away from hot pipes to minimise
heat gains.
3.9.1 In addition to the tests required for specific piping systems, the manufacturer shall test all
materials as specified prior to delivery.
3.9.2 Check all materials for defects. Identify all materials with factory applied permanent
stampings or markings designating their conformance to specified requirements.
3.10 Testing
3.10.1 Water Pipes
3.10.1.1 Test all domestic water piping system, including valves, fittings and joints under a
pressure equal to 100 psig (690 Kpa) or 1 ½ times the working pressure, whichever is
greater.
3.10.1.2 Blank off or remove all elements such as traps, instruments, automatic valves, diaphragm
valve, relief valves, pumps or any other equipment which may be damage by test
3.10.1.3 Fill the system with water and vent the system at high points to remove air. Maintain the
required test pressure for sufficient length of time to enable complete inspection to be
otherwise.
3.10.1.4 Repair all leaks or defects uncovered by the tests and retest the system.
3.10.1.5 After test have been completed, drain the system and blow out and clean it of all dust and/
or foreign matters. Clean all strainers, valves and fittings of all dirt, fillings and debris.
3.11.1 Unions and flanges shall be installed at all equipment inlets and outlets, at all valves inlets
or outlets, on all pipe branches and in general, every 15 metres of pipe run.
Flanges, suitable for welding, shall be used on all welded pipes, and shall be all steel
construction to ASTM or BS Standards.
3.11.3 Threaded flanges shall be used on all threaded pipes; when flanged valves and
equipment are connected to the pipes, flanges shall be of the same quality and service as
the pipe served, and shall conform to ASTM or BS Standards.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 13
_________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 11 16
22 11 16 - 14
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Pump Selection & Design Requirements

1.3 Pumping Equipment Operating Characteristics
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 End-Suction Pumps

2.2 Variable Speed Pumping Set
2.3 Water Pressuring (Booster) unit
2.4 Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
2.5 Control panel
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
3.7 Guarantee And Warranteed Period
3.8 Method of Control of Water Transfer Pumps
Section 22 11 23
Domestic Water Pumps
22 11 23 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The designed pump head indicated on the drawings is only approximate and the
Contractor shall confirm the exact head of the pumps after all the pump selections and the
shop drawings are approved.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall submit for approval and prior to shipment all detailed construction
drawings showing exactly in place all pumps with their concrete bases, vibration isolators,
pipe connection and power connections.
1.1.3 Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions
encountered during continuous operation.
1.1.4 Provide shaft packing or seals compatible with the pump design, and in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.1.5 Pump manufacturers should take particular note of the suction head pressure required for
each pump so as to provide casings, seals, and overall pump construction to withstand
the high pressure required for some pumps.
1.1.6 All pumps shall be designed to operate with non-overloading characteristics at

manufacturer's specified RPM.
1.1.7 All pumps shall be as much as possible selected from one pump manufacturer.
Section 22 05 00 - General Mechanical Requirements for Plumbing.

1.3.1 Pump operating characteristics shall be in such a way when operating at the speed
specified the pump motor will not be overloaded no matter what the variation in pumping
head.
1.3.2 Pumps must operate without any pulsation, vibration, or internal recirculation. Pump
characteristics shall be such that a variation of 10% in the head will result in no more than
a 15% variation in water pumping rate.
Section 22 11 23
22 11 23 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.3 Pump shall be selected so that the operating flow rate is just below, and to the left of, the
flow rate corresponding to the peak horsepower for the pump operating at design speed.
1.3.4 Performance curve data sheets shall be provided with Shop Drawings for each type and
size of pump submitted for approval.
1.3.5 The closed discharge head for all pumps shall not exceed the working head by more than
25%.
1.3.6 The pump motor shall be sized so that it operates continuously throughout the
performance range of the pump without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
1.3.7 Motor should be sized to have minimum 20% extra as safety margin on the total power
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Each pump shall be of the type specified and shall be directly coupled to an electric motor
and mounted on a common steel base plate.
2.1.2 Pump casing shall be of the close-grained, high tensile strength gray iron, with smooth
water ways and fitted with bronze wear ring. Impeller shall be bronze, enclosed,
accurately machined and statically and dynamically balanced. Shaft shall be one piece
stainless steel with bronze sleeve of ample size to carry any axial and radial thrust.
2.1.3 Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and ceramic type. Pump ball
bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all axial and radial thrust.
2.1.4 Each pump set, for domestic water supply application, shall be complete with the
following:
2.1.4.1 Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage protection as required
by the Authorities, Phase failure protection, starters, automatic electric alternators,
indicating lights and selector switches. Panel shall be made of sheet steel of dust and
splash proof to minimum IP 54 type with lockable door. Panel and door shall be rust proof.
2.1.4.2 Float switches, installed in both domestic water reservoirs, and control cables between the
float switches and the electric control panel.
2.1.5 Pump speed shall be as shown in the pump schedule.
2.1.6 Panel and door shall be rust proof.
2.2 Variable Speed Pumping Set
2.2.1 For Specification of variable speed drive, refer to Electrical Specification.
2.3 Water Pressurizing (Booster) Unit
2.3.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings a pressurizing set comprising a
pressure vessel, two pumps (one is standby), interconnecting pipes and valves and all
necessary controls to perform proper operation, all as shown on the Drawings.
Section 22 11 23
22 11 23 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.2 The unit shall be designed for intermittent operation and suitable for brackish water
application. The unit shall be mounted on a base plate and shall be fully tested at the
factory before despatch.
2.3.3 The pressure vessel shall be constructed of welded steel with rubber diaphram, epoxy
complete with:
2.3.3.1 Star delta starter with over load protection.
2.3.3.2 Hand / Auto control switch.
2.3.3.3 Cyclic change over switch, to automatically alternate, duty and standby pump to equalize
running time of pumps.
2.3.3.4 Phase failure protection.
2.3.3.5 Alarm circuit with muting button, to provide audible warning of low suction water level.
2.3.3.6 24 volts control circuit with transformer.
2.3.3.7 Low level cut-out installed in the lower water reservoir.
2.3.3.8 Phase reversal relay.
2.3.3.9 Pressure switches, to control starting and stopping of pumps.
2.3.4 The control panel shall be complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage protection as
required by the authorities, indicating lights for "Mains On", "Pump Running" and "Motor
Tripped", and mains isolator fully interlocked with the front cover.\
2.4 Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
2.4.1 Each pump shall be the type specified and shall be directly coupled to an electric motor.
Pump body shall be manufactured from high tensile grey iron. Shaft shall be stainless
steel and fitted with balance drum to reduce axial loading on motor bearing. Balance
drum of stainless steel shall run in bronze bearing in each stage piece. Impeller stage
pieces and tie rods shall be constructed of stainless steel.
2.4.2 Pump shall have mechanical seal-slf adjusting type with carbon rotating against a
stationary ceramic seal.
2.4.3 Pump/motor coupling shall be manufactured from cold forged steel or cast iron.
2.4.4 Each pump set, for domestic water supply appliction, shall be complete with the following:
2.4.4.1 Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage protection as required
by the Authorities. Phase failure protection, starters, automatic electric alternators,
indicating lights and selector switches. Panel shall be made of sheet steel of dust and
splash proof to minimum IP 55 type with lockable door,
2.4.4.2 Panel and door shall be rust proof.
2.4.4.3 Panel shall include volt free contractros for connection ot BMS 0-10v DC, 4-20 mA.
2.4.4.4 Pump speed shall be shown in the pump schedule.
Section 22 11 23
22 11 23 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Control panel
2.5.1 Electric control panel with circuit breakers, starters, earth leakage protection as required
by the authorities, automatic. Electric alternators,indicating lights and selector switches.
Panels shall be made of sheet steel of dust and rust proof type with locable door.
2.5.2 Level contol panel wherever shown on drawings and control cables between the level
controllers and electric control panel
2.5.3 Panel shall include volt free contacts for connection to BMS 0-10v DC, 4-20mA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.2 Pumps and motors shall be aligned and leveled throughout the length and width, and
leveling.
recommendations.
3.2 Pump Settings
3.2.1 All pumps and motors shall be properly set, leveled, and aligned on bases and foundation
3.2.2 After all connections have been made, and just prior to putting each pump into operation it
shall be checked again for levels and alignment.
Section 22 11 23
22 11 23 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 Pumps Testing
Engineer.
tightness.
3.3.3.1 Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.
3.3.3.2 Shut-off head.
3.3.3.3 Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.4 Spare Parts
equipment supplied sufficient for three years of oerpation all in accordance with the
3.5 Special Tools
3.5.1 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipmetn supplied,
adequate for 12 months operation shall be supplied by the Contractor at the compeltion
Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2007 or equivalent as approved by DM/ Authority containing
the following material:-
3.6.1.1 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features. The manual
shall be developed, updated as necessary, and maintained on site or in centrally
accessible location for the working life of the system equipment and component
Section 22 11 23
22 11 23 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.7 Guarantee and Warranteed Period
installation defects for a period of one year, starting from the date of issue of the final
3.8 Method of Control of Water Transfer Pumps
3.8.1 Method of Control of Pumps used for Water Supply application.
3.8.2 One pump shall act as a standby (as indicated in the pump schedule).
3.8.3 A low water level float switch installed in the lower water tank shall prevent either of the
pumps to run dry if the lower tank is empty.
3.8.4 A float switch installed in the intermediate / roof water tank with two pre-determined levels.
The high level when reached shall stop the pump automatically and the low level when
reached shall start the pump automatically.
3.8.5 Float valves will be additionaly added to close the filled tank if the transfer pump feeds
more than one water tank at the same time.
3.8.6 An electric alternator shall alternate the duty and standby pumps on every cycle. In case
of failure of duty pump to start, the standby shall be automatically started.
Section 22 11 23
22 11 23 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 12 00
FACILITY POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
1.5 Delivery and Storage
1.6 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Concrete Low Level Water Reservoir(s)

2.2 Concrete High Level Water Reservoir(s)
2.3 GRP Tank (Sectional unit)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation (for Non Concrete Tanks)

3.2 Connections
3.4 Cleaning
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 12 00
Facility Potable Water Storage Tanks
22 12 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 12 00
FACILITY POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and it’s requirements.
1.1.2 This section includes all storage tank installations as part of the domestic and condensate
water storage and distribution within the building up to and including connection to local
Authorities mains outside the building.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete approval and related
standards / specifications.
Section 25 51 00 - Swimming Pool and Fountain Works
Division 03 - Concrete
1.4.1 Potable water system complete with tanks, pipes, valves and accessories shall be
designed based on local authorities requirements.
1.5 Delivery and Storage
1.5.1 Handle and store water storage tank systems, components, and parts to prevent
distortions and other damage that could affect their structural, mechanical, or electrical
integrity. Replace damaged items that cannot be restored to original condition.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 12 00
22 12 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.2 Store items subject to deterioration by exposure to elements, in a well-drained location,

protected from weather, and accessible for inspection and handling.
1.5.3 Deliver paint in unopened containers with unbroken seals and labels showing designated
name, specification number, color, directions for use, manufacturer, and date of
manufacture, legible and intact at time of use.
1.6 Submittals
1.6.1 Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thicknesses, insulation,
finishes and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and
piping connections.
1.6.2 Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that indicated fibre
glass, potable-water storage tanks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic
forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
1.6.2.1 Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
1.6.2.1.1 The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.6.2.1.2 The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
1.6.2.2 Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
1.6.2.3 Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
1.6.3 Manufacturer Certificates: For shop inspection and data reports as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Confirm successful pressure and leak testing.
1.6.4 Manufacturer Certificates: Confirm successful pressure and leak testing.
1.6.5 Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
1.6.6 Water Samples and Reports: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
1.7.1 ASME Compliance for Plastic Tanks: Fabricate and stamp plastic, pressure water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, "Fiber-
Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels."
1.7.2 NSF Compliance: NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," and
NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects." Include appropriate NSF
marking.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 12 00
22 12 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Concrete Low Level Water Reservoir(s)
2.1.1 The low level concrete Reservoir(s) shall be as shown on drawings and as described here
or under another section of the Specifications.
2.1.2 The reservoir(s) shall be provided with float valves, having copper ball floats and bronze
valves and rods.
2.1.3 The reservoir(s) shall be provided with level indicators and contacts for low level cut out of
water pumps and contacts for low and high level alarms carried to a suitable panel
preferably in the pump room or as instructed by the Engineer.
2.2 Concrete High Level Water Reservoir(s)
2.2.1 The roof water reservoir(s) shall be as shown on drawings and as described here or under
another section of the Specifications.
2.2.2 The reservoir(s) shall be provided with a float switch, with two contacts for starting and
stopping of the water pumps. A suitable control panel shall start the pumps upon demand
from the roof reservoir and shall stop the pumps when the tank is full.
2.2.3 The reservoir(s) shall be provided with contacts for overflow and low level alarms carried
to a suitable panel located where ever shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
2.3 GRP TANK (Sectional unit)
2.3.1 Supply and install where shown on Drawings, hot pressed moulded GRP sectional water
tanks of the modular bolted sections type. Panels shall be of the insulated type with rigid
polyurethane foam 25 mm thick and resin cover on top. Panels shall be at least 5 mm
thick. The tank shall be internally reinforced by stainless steel tie rods and externally by
galvanized structural steel. The panels shall be joined by galvanized steel nuts and bolts
with a synthetic rubber sealant in between. Tank shall be covered totally and cover shall
be strong enough to support maintenance staff. Nuts and bolts for flanges shall be of
rubber capped galvanized steel.
2.3.2 Each tank shall have at least 400 mm concrete pedestal and shall be complete with:
- External and internal ladders made from UPVC or GRP.

- UPVC Air vent with COWL.
- Hinged inspection cover on top, with sealed lid overflow, and drain.
- Level indicators.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation (for Non Concrete Tanks)
3.1.1 Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water tanks.
3.1.2 Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange
so devices needing servicing are accessible.
3.1.3 Install horizontal tanks on concrete piers and factory-fabricated saddles.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 12 00
22 12 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.4 Install horizontal tanks on fabricated steel supports and saddles.
3.1.5 Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
3.1.6 Install tank seismic restraints.
3.2 Connections
3.2.1 Install piping adjacent to water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
3.2.2 Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff
valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.
3.2.3 There must be a minimum of 25 mm air gab between any potable water source and
condensate or recycled water collection system.
3.3.3 Fill non pressure water storage tanks to water operating level to ensure structural integrity
and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no drop in water level.
3.3.2 Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until results are
satisfactory.
3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Clean and disinfect water storage tanks.
3.4.2 Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:
3.4.2.1 Purge water storage tanks with potable water.
3.4.2.2 Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
3.4.2.2.1 Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of chlorine.
Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
3.4.2.2.2 Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L (200 ppm) of chlorine.
Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
3.4.2.3 Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not
present in water coming from tank.
3.4 2.4 Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows evidence of contamination.
3.4.3 Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 12 00
22 12 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 13 00
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Sanitary Drainage

1.2 Site Drainage
1.3 Reference Standard
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gully Traps (PVC)

2.2 PVC Floor Drains with Stainless Steel Cover
2.3 Flower Bed Drains
2.4 Cleanouts
2.5 PVC Roof Vent Caps
2.6 Trench Grate & Frame
2.7 Frames, Covers & Gratings
2.8 Lint Interceptor (Trap)
2.9 Bronze Floor Drains
2.10 PVC Floor Drains
2.11 PVC Floor Drains with Sealed Type Stainless Steel Cover
2.12 Oil Separators (Traps)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Internal Drainage Installation Requirements

3.2 External Drainage Installation Requirements
3.3 Manholes Installation Requirements
3.6 Excavation and Backfilling for Pipe Laying
3.7 Drainage Testing
3.8 Fixtures Testing
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
Facility Sanitary Sewerage
22 13 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 13 00
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Sanitary Drainage
1.1.1 The Sanitary Drainage Systems consist of sanitary drainage, fixtures, fittings, piping and
equipment as hereinafter specified and as shown on the Drawings. The sanitary drains
shall be carried to appropriate manholes shown on the Drawings.
1.1.2 Pipe installations shall not be concealed within the building structure until satisfactory
completion of the inspection and testing procedure.
1.1.3 Traps shall conform to BS 5572 and all relevant British Standards.
1.1.4 Plastic traps shall be to BS 3943 and of 'P' type unless otherwise specified.
1.1.5 For sinks, showers, baths, bidets and bowl urinals, traps shall be a two piece tubular trap,
and bottle trap for lavatory basin.
1.1.6 Floor drains subject to evaporation shall have a water seal of 125mm.
1.1.7 All floor drains shall be set 3 mm. below the normal finished floor, with a gradual pitch
extending away from the drain, unless otherwise noted on Architectural Drawings.
1.2 Site Drainage
1.2.1 The Site Drainage shall consist of site sanitary drainage complete with piping, manholes,
submersible pumps, keep and all ancillaries as deemed necessary and as shown on the
Drawings.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
National Plumbing Code NPC -

-
Uniform Plumbing Code UPC
British Standards BS BS497 Specification for manhole covers, road gully

gratings and frames for drainage purposes
BS4164 Specification for coaltar-based hot-applied

coating materials for protecting iron and steel,
including a suitable primer.
BS8005 Part 1 Guide to new sewerage construction.

Section 25 51 00 - Swimming Pool and Fountain Works
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gully Traps (PVC)
2.1.1 Each gully trap shall be of heavy duty UPVC construction and of the P or S-trap type.
2.1.2 Gully trap shall have either cast iron open grating cover or solid recessed cover with cast
iron frame as shown on the Drawings and/or as need be.
2.2 PVC Floor Drains with Stainless Steel Cover
2.2.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings floor drains of sizes and shapes as
2.2.2 Each floor drain shall be of the UPVC construction with 70 mm water seal.
2.2.3 Drain shall have stainless steel AISI 304 removable square tile with circular grid strainer
and stainless steel cover with minimum thickness of 1.8 mm. The open area of the strainer
shall be at least two-thirds of the cross-section area of the drain line to which it connects.
2.2.4 Stainless steel covers shall have minimum 15 years warranty.
2.2.5 Tile shall fit, as practical as possible, one floor tile of the space.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.6 Drain shall be fitted with 1" (25mm) access plug for cleaning purposes.
2.2.7 This floor drain is applicable to bathrooms, toilets, kitchens and pantries.
2.2.8 Floor drain in Domestic Washing Machine Room shall be sealed type.
2.3 Flower Bed Drains
2.3.1 Each drain shall be of uPVC with trapped sump and flat type chrome plated brass or
heavy duty stainless steel strainer.
2.3.2 Flower bed drains shall be supplied complete with stainless steel mesh enclosing the
strainer and surrounded by gravels as detailed on drawings.
2.4 Cleanouts
2.4.1 Each cleanout shall be of the same material and dimensions as the pipe to be cleaned,
and shall be placed at ceiling level, in walls, or slabs, as need be, for ease of operation.
2.4.2 Floor pipe cleanouts on PVC pipes shall have stainless steel cover.
2.5 PVC Roof Vent Caps
2.5.1 Supply and install vent caps on all vent stacks at the highest level of the stack and
wherever shown on the Drawings.
2.5.2 Each vent cap shall be of UPVC with open slots all around cowl and shall be cemented
onto the stack vent pipe at least 150 cm above roof level.
2.6 Trench Grate & Frame
2.6.1 Ductile or Cast Iron
2.6.1.1 Grate shall be ductile or cast iron, heavy rectangular, sectional bar pattern, suitable for
heavy traffic. Grate openings shall be laid in wide dimensions in a steel frame with flat bar
anchors and nailing clips.
2.6.2 Stainless Steel (For Kitchen Areas)
2.6.2.1 The grating should have an anti-slip surface. It should be manufactured from Grade 304
stainless steel. The frames shall be supplied ready for installation with all corners and
angles already built-in. All frames shall have fixing ties to ensure a secure seating
arrangement.
2.7.1 All covers and frames shall be manufactured either from Cast iron to BS 497 Part I or
Ductile iron manufactured to BSEN 124 as approved by Local Authority.
2.7.2 All castings for frames, covers, and gratings shall be made accurately to dimensions and
shall be machined to provide even bearing surfaces. Covers and gratings must fit the
frames in any position and if found to rattle under traffic, shall be replaced. Filling to obtain
tight covers will not be permitted. No plugging, burning-in or filling will be allowed. All
castings shall be carefully coated inside and out with epoxy coating complying with the
requirements specified in BS 4164. Coating surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust
before applying the coatings.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7.3 Covers of manholes located inside buildings shall be of double seal and those located
outside shall be of single seal.
2.7.4 Covers of last manhole discharging to city sewer shall be integral with GRP sealing plate.
2.8 Lint Interceptor (Trap)
2.8.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings lint interceptor of size and capacity as
2.8.2 Lint interceptor shall be of fabricated steel constructed with interior acid resistance epoxy
coating and shall be complete with the following:-
2.8.2.1 Stainless steel lint intercepting secondary screen assembly.
2.8.2.2 Permanent primary straining baffle.
2.8.2.3 High inlet and low outlet pipe connections.
2.8.2.4 Non-skid gasketed cover secured with recess and covered center securing handle.
2.9 Bronze Floor Drains
2.9.1 Supply and install bronze floor drains in all mechanical rooms and on roofs of sizes and
shapes as indicated on the drawings.
2.9.2 Drain shall have Tundish (Funnel) to receive waste water from indirect waste lines and
exposed grate surrounding Tundish to receive drain from surrounding floor area.
2.9.3 Each floor drain shall consist of cast iron body, flashing collar with seepage opening and
polished bronze adjustable strainer head with Tundish attached to the grate with
concealed screws, permitting funnel to be moved to different positions on the grate.
Tundish diameter shall be 100 mm.
2.10 PVC Floor Drains
2.10.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings floor drains of sizes and shapes as
2.10.3 Drain shall have white polypropylene removable square tile with circular grid strainer. The
open area of the strainer shall be at least two-thirds of the cross section area of the drain
line to which it connects.
2.10.4 Drain shall be fitted with 1" (25mm) access plug for cleaning purposes.
2.10.5 This drain shall be applicable to shafts.
2.11 PVC Floor Drains with Sealed Type Stainless Steel Cover
2.11.1 Supply and install whenever down on the drawings floor drains of sizes and shapes or
indicated on the drawings.
2.11.3 Drain shall have stainless steel AISI 304 removable square tile with stainless steel screw
type circular access cover or with gasket and stainless steel screws.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.11.4 Stainless steel covers shall have minimum 15 years warranty.
2.11.5 Drain shall be fitted with 1” (25 mm) access plug for cleaning purposes.
2.11.6 This floor drain is applicable for washing machine outlets.
2.12 Oil Separators (Traps)
2.12.1 Supply and install Separators where shown on drawings and where, in the judgement of
the Engineer, a hazard exists or where oils or other flammables can be introduced or
admitted into the drainage system by accident or otherwise.
2.12.2 Oil separators shall have a depth of not less than 600 mm below the invert of the
discharge outlet.
2.12.3 Oil separators shall be of coated cast iron construction with cascade bottom and shall be
supplied complete with:
2.12.3.1 Visible double wall trap.

2.12.3.2 Removable baffles.
2.12.3.3 Removable sediment bucket.
2.12.3.4 Adjustable gravity draw-off.
2.12.3.5 Vent connection.
2.12.3.6 Bolted gasket non-skid cover, with recessed lifting rings.
2.12.3.7 Flow control fitting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Internal Drainage Installation Requirements
3.1.1 All horizontal soil and waste piping shall be installed with a slope of not less than one
percent (1%) unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the Drawings.
3.1.2 All horizontal soil and waste piping shall be installed with a slope of not less than one
percent (1%) unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the Drawings.
3.1.3 All plumbing fixtures shall be individually trapped and vented. Rough in and install fixtures
at height as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Sinks directly
connected to grease traps shall not be trapped.
3.1.4 Vent piping shall not be trapped and shall be graded to drip back to waste or soil line.
3.1.5 Changes in direction of piping shall be generally made with long radius fittings.
3.1.6 Floor drains subject to evaporation shall have a water seal of 125mm.
3.1.7 Floor drains shall be clamped to flashing or to water proofing membrane. Clamping collars
shall be supplied with drains only where flashing is required.
3.1.8 All floor drains shall be set 3 mm. below the normal finished floor, with a gradual pitch
extending away from the drain, unless otherwise noted on Architectural Drawings.
3.1.9 All pipes and fittings shall be kept clean, with the exposed ends of in-completed or
unconnected work to be plugged.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.10 Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in directions, at bends, at ends of soil, waste,
sewer and as shown on drawings with a maximum spacing of 15 m. on straight runs inside
building.
3.1.11 All pipes running under building or under streets shall be encased in concrete of minimum
100 mm thickness.
3.1.12 All work done under this section shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing Code
Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code unless otherwise specified.
3.2 External Drainage Installation Requirements
3.2.1 Connections to manholes shall be watertight after installation.
3.2.2 All piping shall conform accurately to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
3.2.3 Any connections for existing systems shall be made with a minimum amount of
disturbance to the existing lines.
3.2.4 Any existing pipe lines or structures which are damaged while making connections shall
be replaced or reconstructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer without cost to the
Employer.
3.2.5 All piping shall be examined for defects. Any defective piece discovered after installation
and test shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Employer.
3.2.6 System shall be inspected and joints approved before any backfilling is placed over pipes.
3.2.7 All pipe and fittings shall be kept clean until final acceptance of work. The exposed ends of
all in-completed lines shall be closed with wooden plugs adequately secured at all times
when pipe laying is not actually in progress.
3.2.8 All piping shall be installed on a good foundation and adequate means taken to prevent
settlement.
3.2.9 Precautions shall be taken to protect incomplete work from flooding due to storms or other
causes. All pipe lines or structures not stable against uplift during construction shall be
thoroughly braced or otherwise protected.
3.3 Manholes Installation Requirements
3.3.1 Manholes shall have the minimum inside dimensions shown on the Drawings.
3.3.2 Manhole walls shall be of poured-in-place reinforced concrete. Top section must be cast
such as to suit elevation and accommodate size of manhole frame and cover.
3.3.3 Manhole floor shall be of reinforced concrete and inverts stream lined with cement and
mortar into a semi-circular path with sanitary turns and have their corners filled and sloped
towards the water path to prevent any settlements of solids as detailed on the Drawings.
3.3.4 Concrete foundation mats for manholes shall be constructed in accordance with details as
shown on the Drawings.
3.3.5 All pipes or castings to be embedded in the manhole walls shall be accurately set, and if
so required, headers shall be laid round the casting so embedded.
3.3.6 All work must be carried out in a manner to ensure watertight work, and any leaks shall be
caulked, repaired, or the entire work shall be removed and rebuilt. Attention is particularly
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
called to the necessity of keeping the water level below all parts of the foundation and
walls until the cement has obtained adequate setting.
3.4.1 All Trench Bottom Grading Required For Plumbing Work Shall Be Done Under The
Requirements Of This Section Of The Specification. The Bottom Of All Trenches Shall Be
Trimmed By Hand Method To Receive Pipes At Their Respective Finish Levels. Trenches
Shall Not Be Excavated By Machine Below Levels As Above Specified.
3.4.2 After The Pipe Lines Have Been Tested And Approved, Backfill Shall Be Compacted
Thoroughly By Hand Tampers Below Center Lines Of Pipes And To At Least 300mm
Above It. No Backfill Shall Be Placed In Such A Manner As To Cause Damage Or
Misalignment To The Pipes Or Protective Coating If Used. Backfill Material Under Such
Conditions Shall Be Earth, 20mm Crushed Stone Or Gravel Above The Top Of Piping And
Hubs.
3.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish and set level and to the proper grade, frame and cover or
frame and grating of the form and dimensions shown on the Drawings. The concrete
masonry shall be neatly and accurately brought to the dimensions of the base of the
frame. The frames shall be thoroughly embedded in mortar. All covers and frames shall be
to BS 497 Part 1.
3.5.2 All castings for frames, covers, and gratings shall be of tough gray iron, complying with BS
2789:1973 (Updated 1985). All castings shall be made accurately to dimensions and shall
be machined to provide even bearing surfaces. Covers and gratings must fit the frames in
any position and if found to rattle under traffic, shall be replaced. Filling to obtain tight
covers will not be permitted. No plugging, burning-in or filling will be allowed. All castings
shall be carefully coated inside and out with coal tar based material complying with the
requirements specified in BS 4164. Coating surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust
before applying the coatings.
3.5.3 Covers of manholes located inside buildings shall be of double seal and those located
outside shall be of single seal.
3.6 Excavation and Backfilling for Pipe Laying
3.6.1 The laying of pipe underground will require trimming and grading of trench bottoms for
pipes and will require backfilling with approved materials and tamping around all pipes to
center line of pipes as the pipe laying progresses to provide protection and stability for the
piping. Pipe laying work shall be conducted so that trenching operations are not advanced
too far ahead of pipe laying operations resulting in excessive lengths of open trenches.
3.6.2 The pipe shall not be laid in water or when the trench or weather conditions are unsuitable
for such work.
3.6.3 The Contractor shall trim the bottom of all trenches to receive pipes and shall provide
grade finish by hand methods. The bottoms of all trenches shall be rounded so that, in so
far as practical at least one-third of the circumference of the pipe will rest firmly on 200
mm. of undisturbed sand at proper line and grade. Bell holes, where required, shall be dug
to ensure pipe resting for its entire length upon the bottom of the trench. Trenches shall
not be excavated below grade by machine.
3.6.4 After pipes have been tested and approved, trenches shall be backfilled with approved
materials carefully deposited in layers not to exceed 150 mm. in thickness on both sides,
and thoroughly and carefully tamped. Backfilling and tamping in layers of 150 mm. shall
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
be continued until a depth of 300 mm. has been placed over the pipe. Backfill around the
pipes to a depth of 150 mm. shall be clean sand. No backfill shall be placed in a manner
such as to cause injury to the pipe. Where pipe crossings occur, the lower pipe shall be
laid first and the backfill thoroughly compacted to the level of laying the higher pipe.
Backfill materials under such conditions shall be earth, approved gravel or concrete as
directed.
3.6.5 Care should be taken to provide adequate cover before using power compactors or heavy
rollers.
3.6.6 All pipes running under roads and all pipes with a cover of less than one meter, should be
protected by laying concrete or precast concrete slab over the bedding.
3.7 Drainage Testing
3.7.1 If an inspection of the completed sewer or any part thereof shows any structures, pipes or
joints which are defective, the defective work shall be replaced or repaired immediately
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.7.2 The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, any tests or inspections required by
local authorities. The Engineer shall witness the tests.
3.7.3 All joints shall be inspected and an inspection of the line as a whole shall show pipes to be
true to line and grade with full circles visible at all manholes.
3.8 Fixtures Testing
3.8.1 When the roughing-in work is completed and before connection of fixtures, the entire
system shall be subjected to thorough flushing and then to a water test by plugging up all
openings and filling all of the lines as per tests sections. Any defects shall be corrected, at
the expense of the Contractor.
3.8.2 After all fixtures are connected, the entire system shall be subjected to a smoke test. For
PVC piping the correct grade of cartridge should be selected so that it is not harmful to the
pipe-work or joint materials or an air test shall be performed in accordance with BS 8005
Part 1.
3.8.3 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the parties having jurisdiction and the
Engineer, and all results shall be recorded.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 00
22 13 00 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC Pipes

2.3 High Density Polythlene Pipes (HDPE)
2.4 Piping Schedule
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.4 Pipe Sleeves
3.7 Testing
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
22 13 16 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract and requirements.
Regulations & Specifications” for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits
1.1.3 This section describes basic materials and requirements for Pipework services
installations for building.
1.1.4 All pipes & fittings shall be kitemarked.
1.1.5 All critical fittings (bends & sockets) shall have the direction of flow embossed on the fitting.
All fittings shall have a tapered socket to eliminate effluent build up.
1.1.6 Downstream sockets shall be designed as an interference fit eliminating the possibility of a
leak.

1.3.1 UPVC pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover at all times. Sun light shall not be
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
American Water C601-68 FIBERGLASS PIPE DESIGN

Works Association AWWA C501-67 MANUAL
M45
American Society for ASTM ASTM A53-88a Specification for pipe, steel, black and
Testing and Materials Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts

and Studs. 60,000psi tensile strength

(PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80,
and 120.
ASTM D3517M Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass–

Fiber-Reinforced Thermo- setting –
Resin) Pressure Pipe.
American Standard ASA ASA 40.1 -
Association
ASA B16.22 -
ASA B1618 -
ASA B9.1 -
ASA B35.5 -
British Standards BS
BS 4514 Specification for unplasticized PVC soil
accessories.

pipe and fittings.

pipe and fittings (external diameter
34.6 mm, 41.0 mm and 54.1 mm.)

chloride (PVC-U) pressure pipes for
cold potable water.

supply.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
BS 4346 Part 2 Mechanic joints and fittings, principally

of unplasticized PVC.

fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160
for below ground gravity drainage and
sewerage.
BS 5481 Specification for unplasticized PVC

pipe and fittings for gravity sewers.
BS 1387 Specification for screwed and socketed

steel tubes and tubulars and for plain
and steel tube suitable for welding or
for screwing to BS21 pipe threads.
BS 3601 Specification for carbon steel pipes

and tubes with specified room
temperature properties for pressure
pipes.
BS 21 Specification for pipe threads for tubes

and fittings where pressure tight joints
are made on the threads.
Deutsches Institute for DIN DIN 19534 -

Normung
American National ANSI ANSI B18.2.2

Standards Institute
ANSI B31.1
ANSI A21,10,11 -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC Pipes
2.1.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the unplasticized rigid type and of high density
and complete homogeneity material
2.1.2 UPVC Pipes comply with B ASTM D2665 schedule 40 for pipes, fittings and the system.
2.2.1 UPVC pipes-Type 2 (Un-plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride) pipes shall be to BS 3505 latest
edition Class E 15 Bar (1500 Kpa) working pressure at 68° F (20° C) fluid temperature
and 103° F (40° C) ambient temperature or ASTM specification D 1785 Schedule 40 for
inside the buildings, and as per ASTM specification D1785 schedule 80 for the risers.
2.2.2 The pipe shall be homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign
inclusions or other defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practicable in
color, opacity, density and other physical properties.
2.2.3 All fittings and accessories shall be of same material and quality as the pipe and jointing
up to 2 ½" diameter shall be of the spigot and socket cemented type where solvent
cement is applied to both parts all in compliance with B.S. 4346: Part I: 1969 joints and
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
fittings for use with un-plasticized PVC pressure pipes, Part I : Injection moulded PVC
PVC fittings for solvent welding for use with pressure pipes. After pushing the pipe into the
socket, the joint shall be allowed to set for at least 10 hr.
2.2.4 Jointing for all pipes buried underground outside buildings and for all pipes above 3"
diameter shall be of the rubber ring integral socket type to BS 4346 Part 2.
2.2.5 Expansion joints with guides as recommended by manufacturer shall be installed on long
run solvent cemented pipes every 30 meters of length, and wherever shown in the
specification.
2.2.6 Bending PVC pipes is only allowed in non-critical application at room temperature and
after the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.7 Before bending, the pipe should be heated at the section to be bent to a temperature of
about 275-300° F (135-150° C).
2.2.8 The bore should be supported by packing with sand or by insertion of thick rubber pipe,
the heating being carried out in a hot air oven or by immersion in hot oil or glycerine.
Overheating should be avoided, and the pipe should not be held at the bending
temperature too long.
2.3.1 HDPE be high temperature resistant (up to 95 C) shall be electro-fusion welding

conforming to EN1519, DIN 19535-DIN 19537.
2.3.2 Fittings shall be electrofusion type for pipe up to 4” (100 mm) dia. and butt fusion for pipes
above 4” (100 mm) dia.
2.4 Piping Schedule
2.4.1 General
Service Piping Class
Drainage and vent pipes above ground UPVC
Sanitary sewer under building structure UPVC
A/C Condensate drain PVC Type 2
Sump Pump Discharge PVC Type 2
Commercial Kitchen HDPE
PART 3 EXECUTION
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
½" (15 mm) drain gate valves shall be supplied and installed at all low points and riser
legs.
curves or offsets, shall not exceed 12500/D mm. per linear meter of pipe, where D
represents the nominal internal diameter of the pipe expressed in millimeters. If the
shall be laid with the bells facing in the direction of laying.
3.2.2 Pipes in trenches-Place each length of pipe with a uniformly distributed bearing for the
bottom 0.3 of the pipe on the sand fill in the trench. Excavate recesses to accommodate
pipe bells, sleeves, glands or other fittings. Take up and re-lay any pipe that has the grade
or joint disturbed after laying. Clean the interior of the pipe of all foreign material before
lowering into the trench, and keep clean during laying operations by means of plugs or
other acceptable methods.
3.2.3 Plumbing vents exposed to sun light shall be protected by waterbase synthetic latex
paints.
3.2.4 Thermal Expansions
3.2.4.1 When drainage and vent stacks exceed six (6) meters in height, approved expansion
joints, restraint fittings and offsets shall be placed on vertical risers and horizontal
branches as follows:
3.2.6 Expansion joints are recommended at alternate floors in all vertical stacks.
3.2.6 Expansion joints shall be placed in horizontal branches containing two or more vertical
risers and exceeding ten (10) meters in length immediately upstream of vertical riser
whenever possible.
3.2.7 An expansion joint, shall be placed below the connection point of a waste pipe to the
stack, if this connection is exposed below floor slab, and above the connection point if this
connection is above floor slab.
3.2.8 No expansion joints shall be required in building drain below grade.
3.2.10 Approved expansion fittings that utilize rubber-o-rings in a recessed groove may be used
to compensate for thermal expansion. The ring slides along the pipe when expansion or
contraction occurs. Expansion joints shall be installed by solvent cementing techniques.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
contract documents or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-condensable.
measurement in metric.
3.4 Pipe Sleeves

walls.
with clean water.
3.5.5 The Contractor shall disinfect water piping before it is placed in service. The Contractor
shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfecting and shall
perform the work in accordance with the procedure outlined in AWWA Standard for
Disinfecting Water Mains Designation C 601-68. The dosage shall be such as to produce
a chlorine residual for not less than 10 ppm after a contact period of not less than 24
hours. After treatment, the piping shall be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine content does not exceed 0.2 ppm.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.5.6 During the disinfecting period, care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in
steel main.
3.7 Testing
3.7.1 Drainage and Sewer Pipes
3.7.1.1 Drains and sewers should generally be subjected to an internal pressure test of 1.2 m
head of water above the crown of the pipe at the high end but not more than 6 m at the
low end Inspection and tests should be made during the installation and as the work
superfluous matter.
3.7.1.2 The final test of the completed drainage and vent system shall be made by filling all traps
with water and then introducing into the entire system a pungent, thick smoke produced by
one or more smoke machines. When the smoke appears at stack openings on the roof,
the stack openings shall be closed and a pressure equivalent to a 1-inch water column
(248.8 Pa) shall be held for a test period of not less than 1`5 minutes.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 13 16
22 13 16 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 14 00
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Storm Drainage

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC Pipes

2.2 PVC Roof and Balcony Drains
2.3 Cleanouts
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Internal Storm Water Installation Requirements

3.2 Testing
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 14 00
Facility Storm Drainage
22 14 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 14 00
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Storm Drainage
1.1.1 Storm water shall be drained by means of roof drains and leaders and free discharged
around the building at convenient locations shown on the Drawings.
Reference Code Abbreviati Applicable Title of Standard

o Standard
n
National Plumbing Code NPC -
Uniform Plumbing Code UPC -
British Standards BS BS497 Specification for manhole covers, road gully

gratings and frames for drainage purposes
BS4164 Specification for coaltar-based hot-applied

coating materials for protecting iron and
steel, including a suitable primer.
BS8005 Part 1 Guide to new sewerage construction.

Section 22 34 00 - Boilers, Fuel Tanks and Ancillary Equipment
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 14 00
22 14 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC Pipes
2.1.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the unplasticized rigid type and of high density
2.1.2 UPVC Pipes comply with B ASTM D2665 schedule 40 for pipes, fittings and the system.
2.2 PVC Roof and Balcony Drains
2.2.1 Each drain shall be of uPVC with no trap, having large sump, integral flange and dome
type uPVC strainer.
2.2.2 Balcony drains shall have flat type uPVC strainer.
2.2.3. Angled / Corner roof drain. This drain shall be of Robust UPVC Body and Grate.
2.3 Cleanouts
2.3.1 Each cleanout shall be of the same material and dimensions as the pipe to be cleaned,
and shall be placed at ceiling level, in walls, or slabs, as need be, for ease of operation.
2.3.2 Floor pipe cleanouts on PVC pipes shall have stainless steel cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Internal Storm Water Installation Requirements
3.1.1 All storm drainage piping above grade shall have a slope of two percent (2%) where
possible the minimum acceptable is one percent (1%).
3.1.2 Changes in direction of piping shall be generally made with long radius fittings.
3.1.3 All pipes and fittings shall be kept clean, with the exposed ends of in-completed or
unconnected work to be plugged.
3.1.4 Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in directions, at bends, at ends of pipes and as
shown on drawings with a maximum spacing of 15 m. on straight runs inside building.
3.1.5 All pipes running under building or under streets shall be encased in concrete of minimum
100 mm thickness.
3.1.6 All work done under this section shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing Code
Handbook and Uniform Plumbing Code unless otherwise specified.
3.2 Testing
3.2.1 If an inspection of the completed part thereof shows any structures, pipes or joints which
are defective, the defective work shall be replaced or repaired immediately and to the
3.2.2 The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, any tests or inspections required by
local authorities. The Engineer shall witness the tests.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 14 00
22 14 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.3 All joints shall be inspected and an inspection of the line as a whole shall show pipes to be
true to line and grade with full circles visible at all manholes.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 14 00
22 14 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Submersible Sump Pumps
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
Section 22 14 29
Sump Pumps
22 14 29 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL


head.
Section 22 14 29
Sump Pumps
22 14 29 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
25%.
Motor should be sized to have minimum 20% extra as safety margin on the total power
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Submersible Sump Pumps
2.1.1 The pump and motor housing form a compact integral unit and shall be of the completely
submersible type. The motor shall be cooled by the fluid in the sump.
2.1.2 Pumps shall have duty/assist function and there shall be a level switch for this function
which is additional to duty/standby function.
2.1.3 The pump/motor housing shall be complete with:
2.1.3.1 Lifting Yoke.
2.1.3.2 Electrical terminal board, and submersible electric flexible cable between pump motor and
control unit.
2.1.3.3 Ball bearings good for three years continuous operation.
2.1.3.4 Stainless steel shaft with precision ground finish.
2.13.5 Stator, cast iron stator housing and class F stator insulation.
2.1.3.6 Rotor.
2.1.3.7 Statically and dynamically balanced non-clog impeller with a flow passage cross-section of
(65mm) for sewage application.
2.1.3.8. Cast iron pump housing.
2.1.3.9 Base (and Strainer for waste water application.)
2.1.3.10 Tungsten carbide shaft seals to withstand heavily contaminated liquid.
2.1.3.11 Gate valve and check valve at pump discharge.
2.1.4 The wet well housing the pump/motor assembly shall be complete with the following
accessories:
2.1.4.1 Grouting-in cast iron frame with cast iron cover plate and upper guide rail bracket.
2.1.4.2 Cable holder to collect power cables and permit adjustment of height of level regulators.
Section 22 14 29
Sump Pumps
22 14 29 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.3 Discharge connection with lower guide rail bracket.
2.1.4.4 Automatic control unit with level regulators to start and stop the pumps automatically. The
control unit shall also alternate the operation of the pumps to equalize their operating time.
In case of failure of one pump; the control unit shall initiate an alarm and automatically
start the other pump.
2.1.5 A high level float switch, when reached shall automatically initiate an alarm.
2.1.6 The level regulators (float switches) shall be of polypropylene housing with eccentrically
positioned lead weight, mercury switch and 13 meters water proof cable.
2.1.7 The control unit shall be complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage sensor with alarm
annunciation as required by the authorities starters, automatic electric alternator,
indicating lights and lockable type hand-off-auto selector switches and volt free contacts
for connection to BMS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.2 Pumps and motors shall be aligned and levelled throughout the length and width, and
leveling.
recommendations.
3.2 Pump Settings
Section 22 14 29
Sump Pumps
22 14 29 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 Pumps Testing
Engineer.
tightness.
3.3.3.1 Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.
3.3.3.2 Shut-off head.
3.3.3.3 Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
3.5.1 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipments supplied,
3.6.1 The Contractor shall develop and submit a maintenance manual and schedule based on
the instructions for preventative maintenance or service from the manufacturers or
suppliers of equipment or according to the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating,
and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1 – 2007 or equivalent as approved by
Authority having the jurisdiction containing the following material:-
accessible location for the working life of the system equipment and component.
Section 22 14 29
Sump Pumps
22 14 29 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 14 29
Sump Pumps
22 14 29 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 33 30
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Electric Water Heaters (Storage Type)

2.2 Spare Parts
2.3 Guarantee and Warranted Period
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 33 30
Domestic Water Heaters
22 33 30 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 33 30
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes all water heating installations as part of the domestic water
distribution system inside the building
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The contractor shall be responsible to complete above works based on CONSULTANT’S
approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per specifications and applicable
standards

latest editions of the above codes, standards and regulations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Electric Water Heaters (Storage Type)
2.1.1 Each electric water heater shall be of the cylindrical storage type constructed of heavy
gauge steel with white enamel finish externally and glass lining from inside. Cylinders
shall be factory tested at a pressure of 16 bars.
2.1.1 Heater shall have polyurethane foam insulation (minimum thickness of 18 mm) wall
between the outer casing and the glass lining all around top and bottom of cylinder.
Heater shall be suitable for a working pressure of 100 psi (690 Kpa).
2.1.3 Internal glass lining or titanium glass lining.
2.1.4 Each electric water heater shall be complete with the following:-
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 33 30
22 33 30 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.1 Fast acting surface mounted thermostat for automatic temperature control.
2.1.4.2 Factory installed sensitive high limit energy cut-off( for safety to prevent overheating)
2.1.4.3 Flanged type minimum five bolts flange with electric element of 3000 watt capacity and
smaller as indicated on the drawings. Element shall be constructed of highest quality
resistance wire sheathed in mineral filling and the whole encased in a copper tube and
subjected to a high voltage test.
2.1.4.4 Replaceable magnisium anode.
2.1.4.5 A nonreturn valve at the cold water inlet to the heater .
2.1.4.6 Pressure relief valve installed between heater and non return valve and shall be listed by
AGA and shall be labeled by AGA, ASME or equivalent European Standards.
2.1.4.7 Removable access panel to the heating element and thermostat.
2.1.4.8 Chrome plated gate valves at inlet and outlet of heater.
2.1.4.8 Wall fixing brackets and support.
2.1.5 All water heaters shall have a 5 year guarantee (for cylinder) and 2 years for electrical
parts against manufacturers default.
2.1.6 Domestic electric water heater minimum efficiency factor shall not be less than 0.952
incompliance to the following table:
Subcategory
Size Category
or Rating Minimum Efficiency Test Procedure
(input)
Condition
<12 KW Resistance 0.97 – 0.000349V, EF DOE 10 CFR Part 430
>12 KW Resistance 0.134V+45.4 SL, W ANSI Z21.10.3
<24 amps and <250

Heat Pump 0.97 – 0.000349V, EF DOE 10 CFR Part 430
Volts
2.2 Spare Parts
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 33 30
22 33 30 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 33 30
22 33 30 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 40 00
SANITARY FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Sanitary Fixtures

2.2 Accessories
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Exposed Piping and Trim in Toilet Areas

3.2 Fixture Setting
3.3 Cleaning
Section 22 40 00
Sanitary Fixtures
22 40 00-1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 40 00
SANITARY FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The Sanitary Fixtures along with accessories, pipe fittings shall be installed and put in
operation as hereinafter specified and as shown on drawings.
1.1.2 All fixtures and trimmings, insofar as practicable, shall be of one manufacture.
1.1.3 Ample application of petroleum jelly shall be made to all surfaces of exposed chrome
plated piping, valves and fittings immediately after installation.
1.1.4 All fixtures shall be set straight and true.
1.1.5 Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall have a shop coat of paint.
1.1.6 All exposed piping and trim shall be chrome plated and fully protected during installation.
Strap or padded wrenches shall be used on chrome plated pipe fittings and valves.
1.1.7 Contractor shall comply with the project’s sustainability requirements or local authorities
requirements whichever is more stringent, and shall not exceed the following flow rates for
the sanitary fixtures:-
1.1.7.1 Maximum flow rate for showers in residential,

and hospitality areas = 8 liter/min. at 551.6 Kpa.
1.1.7.2 Maximum flow rate for showers for public,
and non hospitality = 6 liter/min. at 551.6 Kpa.
1.1.7.3 Bathtub mixers = 6 liter/min. at 551.6 Kpa.
1.1.7.4 Maximum flow rate for kitchen taps = 6 liter/min. at 417.7 Kpa.
1.1.7.5 Maximum flow rate for bidets spray = 4.5 liter/min.
1.1.7.6 Maximum flow rate for toilet dual flush = 4.5/3 liter/flushing cycle
1.1.7.7 Maximum flow rate for the Urinal = 1 L/ flushing cycle.
1.1.7.8 Maximum flow rate for lavatory in private toilets = 4.5 liter/min. at 417.7 Kpa.
1.1.7.9 All ablutions taps and public lavatory shall be self-closing type/with automatic sensors &
flow rate maximum of (1.9 L/minute) at 417.7 Kpa.
1.17.10 Bathtub capacity = 200 liters/use
Section 22 40 00
Sanitary Fixtures
22 40 00-2
_________________________________________________________________________________

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Sanitary Fixtures
2.1.1 Sanitary fixtures shall be complete with all required trimming, including mixers, waste
plugs, traps, supplies, stop valves, escutcheons, casings and all necessary hangers,
plates, brackets, anchors and supports.
2.1.2 Vitreous china fixtures shall be of first quality with smooth glazed surfaces, free from warp,
cracks, checks, discolorations or other imperfections.
2.1.3 Enameled cast iron fixtures shall be of acid-resisting type.
2.1.4 In the selection of sanitary fixtures and their accessories, model numbers of certain
manufacturers catalogues are given to describe the type, shape and quality of the items
requested and do not in any way limit the supply to the model listed. Any item of different
make judged by the Engineer to be similar in quality and manufacture will be approved.
2.1.5 All fixtures and fittings types and models shall be as detailed in the schedule of fixtures,
2.2 Accessories
2.2.1 Accessories shall be provided in the locations indicated on Architectural Drawings and
fixed at heights indicated therein or as directed by the Engineer. The Accessories shall be
from approved manufacturers.
2.2.2 Cisterns used for urinals flushing should be fitted with automatic or manual flush controls
as specified elsewhere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Exposed Piping and Trim in Toilet Areas
3.1.1 All piping, valves and fittings exposed to view shall be screwed, polished, chrome plated
brass. Plating shall be accomplished after threading.
3.2 Fixture Setting
3.2.1 Fixtures shall be set in a neat, finished and uniform manner making the connections to all
fixtures at right angles to the wall, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Roughing for
this work must be accurately laid out so as to conform to finished wall material. Fixtures
are not to be set until so directed by the Engineer.
3.2.2 The location and disposition of all items shall be as indicated on the relevant drawings.
3.3 Cleaning
3.3.1 On a daily basis as the Works of this Section proceed, remove and dispose of all debris
resulting from the Works of this Section.
Section 22 40 00
Sanitary Fixtures
22 40 00-3
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.2 Leave work areas of the Works of this Section broom clean at the end of each work day.
Section 22 40 00
Sanitary Fixtures
22 40 00-4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 51 00
SWIMMING POOL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

1.2 Equipment
1.3 Shop Drawings
1.4 Site Inspection
1.5 M&E Design
1.6 Period of Warranty
1.7 Operations and Maintenance Manual
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
2.2 MEP Equipments
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MEP Installations
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 51 00
Swimming Pool
22 51 00-1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 51 00
SWIMMING POOL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The scope of this section includes a description of materials and methods for the creation of
the swimming pools as detailed on the drawings and in this specification.
1.1.2 All works which may be incidental, contingent or necessary for the proper completion of
works, but which are not specifically described herein are also considered to be included.
The Contractor shall include for all tools, equipment and labour necessary to carry out the
works.
1.1.3 Contractor shall fully comply with the Services specifications that shall be read in conjunction
with, and forms an integral part of, this specification.
1.2 Equipment
1.2.1 All equipment shall be supplied and installed by a specialist company. This specialist
company shall be proven in the installation of swimming pools and shall submit a list of
complete projects designed and installed by themselves in the last ten years for the approval
of the Engineer.
1.3 Shop Drawings
1.3.1 The Contractor shall submit for approval fully dimensioned and detailed design, construction
and shop drawings for all parts of the swimming pool. These drawings shall include the
following, but not be limited to mechanical and electrical parts of the work.
(i) Plumbing Layout for Swimming pool

(ii) Pump Room Layout and Section Details
(iii) Electrical Layout for Swimming pool
(iv) Installation Details for Swimming pool
(v) Schematic Diagram
(vi) Electrical Layout for Pump Room Equipment
1.3.2 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the design and performance of all elements of
the works for the stipulated warranty period.
1.4 Site Inspection
1.4.3 The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site at the time of tendering or caused it to
be visited on his behalf by a competent and reliable person to obtain for himself on his own
responsibility all information that may be necessary for the purpose of preparing a tender and
entering into a contract. All costs and charges in connection with the above mentioned visits
shall be borne by the tenderer.
1.5 M&E Design
1.5.1 The M&E design shall include but not be limited to the following elements:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 51 00
Swimming Pool
22 51 00-2
_________________________________________________________________________________
(i) Inlet Fittings

(ii) Vacuum Fittings
(iii) Overflow Fittings
(iv) Frame and grate
(v) Anti-Vortex Main drains
(vi) Plug Drains
(vii) Duty and Stand-by Filter Pumps designed to provide a four hour turnover of water and
nozzle circulation pumps
(viii) Sand Filter
(ix) Under water lights and Deck box
(x) Overflow grating with support
(xi) Balancing tank
(xii) Chlorine and acid Dosing Pump and Tank
(xiii) Automatic chlorine and ph controller.
(xviii) Heat pump for heating and cooling designed to provide 28oC in summer and 30oC in
winter for pool water (Swimming pool and kiddie pool)
(xix) Electronic control panel with all safety switches, MCB, ELCB, indicating lamps and
24Hrs timer
(xx) Complete UPVC pipes (class E) and UPVC fittings
(xxi) Valves, Cables and Conduits
1.5.2 The pump, filter and control panel for all the water elements with dry centrifugal pumps will be
located in pump rooms indicatively located on the drawings and to the final approval of the
Engineer. The contractor shall locate size and detail each pump room and provide all
necessary power and water supply and drainage. All access covers and vents shall be
located in shrub beds and not grass or paved areas.
1.6.1 The Contractor shall warranty that all equipment when installed will perform as intended. All
equipment shall be warranted for a period of 12 months from the date of commissioning of
pool.
1.7.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three sets of the draft Operation and
Maintenance manual for approval. The O&M manual shall contain the following.
(i) System description

(ii) Equipment schedule
(iii) Technical details of equipments
(iv) Spare parts list
(v) Operating procedure
(vi) Maintenance procedure and maintenance schedule
(vii) List of maintenance works
(viii) Warranty certificate
(ix) Commissioning report
(x) Manufacturers and local agents address
(xi) Emergency contact details
(xii) As built drawings (soft copy and hard copy)
1.7.2 Six sets of the approved manual shall be submitted to the Engineer within two weeks of
written acceptance of the swimming pool installation.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 51 00
Swimming Pool
22 51 00-3
_________________________________________________________________________________
One set of plastic laminated 11” x 17” “Process Flow” diagram, “System Electrical
Schematic” diagram and “Control Panel Wiring” diagram to be mounted on pump room wall.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
All materials must carry a written manufacturer’s guarantee, and within the warranty period
there will be an unequivocal counter exchange of the material. All materials will be rated for
the high temperatures and humidity in the UAE. Any product that cannot be protected from
corrosion for a period of 10 years will not be accepted.
Manufacturers of all proposed equipment shall be approved by the Engineer. Finishing

materials shall be approved by Landscape Architect.
2.2 MEP Equipments
2.2.1 Shell fittings
(i) Wall inlet fitting: Manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel with 20mm ball and 1.5”
threaded connection.
(ii) Vacuum fitting: Manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel with push fit hose
connection, cover and 1.5” threaded connection.
(iii) Plug drain: Body in chrome plated brass, 2” internal thread and plug.
(iv) Balancing line fitting: Manufactured from chrome plated brass / stainless steel body,
AISI 316 stainless steel grill and 2” / 3” threaded connection.
(v) Frame & grate: Support frame and grill in AISI 316 stainless steel with grill fixing
screws. Flow velocity through the grate should not exceed 0.5m/s.
(vi) Main drain: Manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel with anti-vortex plate.
(vii) Under water light with niche: Electro polished stainless steel housing IP 68, 300w 12 v
reflector with 3m under water cable.
(viii) Deck box: Electro polished stainless steel body, IP67 protection.
(ix) Gutter drain: ABS body and grill with stainless steel grill fixing screws and 2” bottom
connection.
(x) Overflow grating: Manufactured in white 0r beige PP, resistant to the action of UV rays,
anti slip surface, high mechanical resistant and cannot be altered by chemical and
atmospheric agents (195mm wide)
(xii) Pool ladder: Manufactured in polished stainless steel (316) tube of 43mm dia. with
fixing anchors, 750mm wide steps in stainless steel and slip resistant plastic and
plastic stoppers for pool wall, suitable for overflow type pools.
(xiii) Life guard chair: Frame made of AISI-304 stainless steel, seat, platform and treads are
made from plastic with 90o swivel chair and wheeled base.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 51 00
Swimming Pool
22 51 00-4
_________________________________________________________________________________
(xiv) Life saving equipments: Six sets of life belt, stainless steel life belt holder post. life
saving hook and first aid kit.
(xv) Maintenance kit

(a) Vacuum head: Made of anodized aluminum with provision for 1.5” hose
connection and 450mm wide.
(b) Leaf skimmer: Made of aluminum with a polyester mesh and wing nuts or clip in
fastening. Required surface and pool bottom models.
(c) Floor brush: Head made of aluminum, 450mm wide, with provision for telescopic
handle fastening.
(d) Wall brush: Head made of aluminum.
(e) Telescopic handle: Made of anodized aluminum with wing nuts or clip, size
adjustable from 2.4m to 4.8m.
(f) Vacuum hose : Made of blue polyethylene 30m long and 38mm Dia. hose with
hose cuffs for connecting to pool cleaning equipment and vacuum fitting.
(g) Test kit for chlorine and ph.
2.2.2 Pump room Equipments
(i) Filter pumps: Thermosetting plastic or cast iron body and bronze impeller,
stainless steel shaft, IP 55 motor Protection and ‘F’ class insulation, Pre-filter
incorporated.
(ii) Sand filter: Bobbin wound fiberglass filter equipped with automatic backwash
valves, pressure gauge, manual air and water bleeder valves, collectors and
diffuser in highly resistant PVC and PP plastic. Working pressure 4 Bar and tested
pressure 6 Bar.
(iii) Chemical Dosing pump: Reinforced polypropylene housing, protected touch panel,
IP 65 Protection, pressure level of 7 bar and can be mounted on floor and wall.
(iv) Chemical solution tank: Semi transparent polyethylene with side graduations to
check the Chemical level and with motorized agitator.
(v) Automatic chlorine and ph controller : To control the level of chlorine and ph.
(vi) Heat pump: Galvanized steel cabinet and epoxy coated coils, marine grade heat
exchangers and scroll compressor, suitable for outdoor installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MEP installations
3.1.1 All MEP installations shall conform with the relevant sections of the Services specification and
with all relevant British Standards.
3.1.2 All piping systems shall be engineered for maximum flow rates of 6 ft/sec (1.8 meters/sec.)
for suction and 8 ft/sec. (2.4 meters/sec.) for discharge.
3.1.3 Use stainless steel flexible type couplings to isolate all pumps from interconnecting piping
3.1.4 Use pressure gauges on discharge end of all pumps to monitor operating pressures
3.1.5 Install piping straight and true in accordance with the best practice.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 51 00
Swimming Pool
22 51 00-5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.6 Make pipe runs as direct as possible, using a minimum number of fittings.
3.1.7 Cut pipe ends accurately to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted, unless so
specified.
3.1.8 Cut pipe ends square and thoroughly ream or file ends, and wipe clean to remove all burrs
prior to joining.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 51 00
Swimming Pool
22 51 00-6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 52 00
WATER FEATURES-MEP
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

1.2 Equipment
1.3 Shop Drawings
1.4 MEP Design
1.7 Water Tightness Test
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
2.2 MEP Equipment
PART 3 EXECUTION
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 52 00
Water Features-MEP
22 52 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 22 52 00
WATER FEATURES-MEP
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The scope of this section includes a description of materials and methods for the creation
of the water features/fountains as detailed on the drawings and in this specification.
1.1.2 All works which may be incidental, contingent or necessary for the proper completion of
works, but which are not specifically described herein are also considered to be included.
The Contractor shall include for all tools, equipment and labour necessary to carry out the
works.
1.1.3 Contractor shall fully comply with the Services specifications that shall be read in
conjunction with, and forms an integral part of, this specification.
1.1.4 Final selection of the nozzles shall be subjected to client approval.
1.2 Equipment
1.2.1 All equipment shall be supplied and installed by a specialist company. This specialist
company shall be proven in the installation of water features and fountains and shall
submit a list of complete projects designed and installed by themselves in the last ten
years for the approval of the Engineer.
1.3 Shop Drawings
1.3.1 The Contractor shall submit for approval fully dimensioned and detailed design,
construction and shop drawings for all parts of the fountains and water features. These
drawings shall include the following, but not be limited to, architectural, structural, civil,
mechanical and electrical parts of the work.
1. Plumbing Layout for Water Features

2. Electrical Layout for Water Features
3. Installation Details for Water Features
4. Schematic Diagram
1.5 MEP Design
1.5.1 The MEP design shall include but not be limited to the following elements:
(i) Inlet Fittings

(ii) Water circulation pumps and Nozzle circulation pumps
(iii) Main drains
(iv) Water Level Sensor and controller with dry run protection
(v) Cascade Nozzle
(vi) Electronic control panel with all safety switches, MCB, ELCB, indicating lamps and
24Hrs timer
(viii) Under water lights
(ix) Complete UPVC pipes (class E)
(x) Valves, Cables and Conduits
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 52 00
Water Features-MEP
22 52 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
(xi) Multi-media Filter

(xii) Chlorine dosing unit
1.6.1 The Contractor shall warranty that all equipment when installed will perform as intended.
All equipment shall be warranted for a period of 12-month from the date of commissioning.
1.6.2 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the design and performance of all
elements of the works for the stipulated warranty period.
1.7.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three sets of the draft Operation and
Maintenance manual for approval. The O&M manual shall contain the following.
(i) System description

(ii) Equipment schedule
(iii) Technical details of equipments
(iv) Spare parts list
(v) Operating procedure
(vi) Maintenance procedure and maintenance schedule
(vii) List of maintenance works
(viii) Warranty certificate
(ix) Commissioning report
(x) Manufacturers and local agents address
(xi) Emergency contact details
(xii) As built drawings (soft copy and hard copy)
1.7.2 Three sets of the approved manual shall be submitted to the Engineer within two weeks of
written acceptance of the water feature installation.
1.7.3 One set of plastic laminated 11” x 17” “Process Flow” diagram, “System Electrical
Schematic” diagram and “Control Panel Wiring” diagram to be mounted on the wall
wherein the control panel is installed.
1.8 Water Tightness Test
1.8.1 Test pool and piping for water tightness prior to installing finishes, test must be performed
per waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
2.1.1 All materials must carry a written manufacturer’s guarantee, and within the warranty
period there will be an unequivocal counter exchange of the material. All materials will be
rated for the high temperatures and humidity in the UAE. Any product that cannot be
protected from corrosion for a period of 10 years will not be accepted.
Manufacturers of all proposed equipment shall be approved by the Engineer.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 52 00
Water Features-MEP
22 52 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 MEP Equipment
2.2.1 Shell fittings
(i) Inlet fitting: Manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel with 20mm ball and 1.5”
threaded connection.
(ii) Drain: Manufactured from AISI 316 stainless steel with SS cover
(iii) Recessed underwater light: Body made in stainless steel AISI 316 with front flange
made in special techno-polymer finished in white. equipped with neoprene cable, 9
Natural white LED 4500K, 1332 lm. IP68 or as per Client’s selection. Contractor shall
be provide simulation\concepts based on three light selections.
(iv) Deck box: Electro polished stainless steel body, IP67 protection
(v) Hydraulic Water level controller: Made of cast bronze / brass / stainless steel, mounted
flush in to the front of a wall and monitors normal water level, water make up
(vi) Under water junction box: Manufactured in cast bronze stainless steel fitted with a
neoprene Cover gasket, re-enterable potting compound and brass / stainless steel
cord seal.
(vii) Water level sensor: Made of cast bronze / brass / stainless steel, mounted flush in to
the front of a wall and monitors normal water level, water make up and safety low
level shut off with separate water level controller.
(viii) Maintenance kit
Maintenance kit consisting of vacuum head, leaf skimmer, floor brush, wall brush,
telescopic handle, vacuum hose and as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.2.2 Pump room Equipments
(i) Filter pumps: Thermosetting plastic or cast iron body and impeller, stainless steel shaft,
IP 55 motor protection and ‘F’ class insulation, Pre-filter incorporated.
(ii) Sand filter: Bobbin wound fiberglass filter equipped with 6 way manual selector valves,
pressure gauge, manual air and water bleeder valves, collectors and diffuser in highly
resistant PVC and PP plastic. Working pressure 4 Bar and tested pressure 6 Bar.
(iii) Nozzle / Water fall circulation pump: Cast iron body, bronze impeller, stainless steel
shaft, 1500 RPM, IP 54 motor protection and ‘F’ class insulation.
(iv) Solenoid valve: Cast bronze or Brass diaphragm type
(v) Chlorine tablet feeder: With ABS tank and flow control valves, 5Kg capacity
2.2.3 Nozzle Details: refer to landscape drawings
2.2.4 Underwater Lights and Illumination
2.2.4.1 Water features and water display submersibles lights
1. Quantity: As per drawings.

2. Underwater lights as specified here with must be installed in locations as shown on
the drawings.
3. Standard Features:
a. Number of lights shall be selected to give a minimum of 300 lumens per m2
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 52 00
Water Features-MEP
22 52 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
b. Light body made of stainless steel 316/ABS.

c. Rating IP 68.
d. Niche made of stainless steel 316/ABS
4. Above underwater lights must be supplied complete with:
a. Transformers.
b. Junction boxes.
c. Cables.
2.2.4.2 Deck Junction Boxes

2. Material of work: Stainless steel.
3. Connection: Side outlets pg-16 thread bottom ¾ in outlet.
2.2.4.3 Low Voltage Safety Transformers For Underwater Lights

2. Rating/each: 350 VA
3. Power: Input 230/240V A.C., Output 12V A.C
4. Standard Specification of Transformers:
a. Resin encapsulated step down transformers for use with underwater lights for
swimming pools, fountains, water features and any other low voltage light
fixtures.
b. Fuse protection against overload.
c. Extremely low heat dissipation.
d. Factory sealed rubber inlet cable.
e. Compression glands for outlet cable
f. No short circuit risk
g. No metallic components outside which reduce the chance of shock and rut (C
and TUV approved)
h. IP 64 protection (dust, air and water proof)
i. Ultra-modern design which resulted in tremendous reduction of both volume and
weight
2.2.5 PIPE WORK AND FITTINGS
2.3.1 UPVC Class 16 (16 Bar) pipe work complete with necessary fittings and road-in pipe work for
interconnecting the inlet fittings and drains with regulating and check valves and all necessary
road-in pipe work which shall have puddle flanges incorporated wherever appropriate.
2.2.6 VALVES
2.2.6.1 Ball valves
Body Materials: UPVC

Ball seat: HDPE
O – rings: EPDM
Working presence: 16 bar (PN 16)
2.2.6.2 Spring Check Non Return Valves
Body materials: UPVC

Spring: Stainless steel
O – Ring: EPDM
Working pressure: 16 bar (PN16)
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 52 00
Water Features-MEP
22 52 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 All MEP installations shall conform with the relevant sections of the Services specification
and with all relevant British Standards\ASTM standards.
3.1.2 All piping systems shall be engineered for maximum flow rates of 6 ft/sec (1.8
meters/sec.) for suction and 8 ft/sec. (2.4 meters/sec.) for discharge.
3.1.3 Use stainless steel flexible type couplings to isolate all pumps from interconnecting
3.1.4 Use pressure gauges on discharge end of all pumps to monitor operating pressures
3.1.5 Install piping straight and true in accordance with the best practice.
3.1.6 Make pipe runs as direct as possible, using a minimum number of fittings.
3.1.7 Cut pipe ends accurately to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted, unless
so specified.
3.1.8 Cut pipe ends square and thoroughly ream or file ends, and wipe clean to remove all burrs
prior to Joining.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 22 52 00
Water Features-MEP
22 52 00 - 6
DIVISION 23
HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.2 Application
1.3 Scope of Works
1.10 Machinery Guards
1.12 Abbreviations
1.13 Workmanship
PART 2 EXECUTION

2.2 Tests
2.4 Access Doors
2.5 Permits
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
Common Work Results for HVAC
23 05 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The work of this Section shall be governed by General Conditions of Contract.
requirements of the above listed documents, and further assure that all Subcontractors
are equally informed.
Regulations & Specifications” requirements for Volatile Organic Compounds, (VOCs)
content limits.
1.2 Application
1.3 Scope of Works
1.3.1 The works covered under this contract include supply, installation, testing, adjusting and
putting into operation systems, components of systems, and individual items of
Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of those works shall
be provided such as, but are not limited to the following:
- Requirements of fire dampers wherever duct crossing fire wall.

- System air balancing and associated requirements to do the balancing
- System chilled water balancing and associated requirements to do the balancing.
- Insulation of valves and valve boxes.
- Maintaining the noise levels as specified
- Steel platforms (fly over) above services in plant rooms and roof.
- Chemical dosing and flushing of chilled water system to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.3.2 Fire and life safety requirements from Civil Defense shall be strictly followed as per latest
edition of UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of practice and other rules and regulations from
Civil Defense.
1.3.3 All materials relevant to Fire and Life safety, shall be approved and listed by “Individual
Emirates” Civil Defense.
1.3.4 Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the following electrical works and materials for
the Mechanical equipment shall be supplied and installed under Division 23 of the
specification but in all respect to the requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
a) All control panels including door lock disconnected switches, push buttons, starters,
contractors, circuit breakers, time delays, selector switches, relays, transformers,
timers, controllers, pilot lights, set points, alarms and all other electrical equipment
which are necessary for the satisfactory operation, control and protection of all plant
supplied under this section of the specifications.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
b) Whenever a number of starters controllers, instruments, indicating lights and the like
occur or are shown on the Mechanical and/or electrical Drawings, they shall be
arranged in a central position in a neat, easily cleaned, factory-built panel, or motor
control center assembly. The assembly shall include isolators and all necessary fuses,
bus bars, starters, instruments, relays, push-buttons, indicating lights and the like.
Components shall be mounted in a logical order based on the sequence of operation.
c) Where Fire Command Centre is there, remote (repeater) control panels should be
emergency for all HVAC Systems.
d) A dedicated smoke control panel (SCP) shall be provided for smoke control systems
for Fire Fighters controlled operation.
e) Smoke Control Panel shall be located at the emergency command center or the
agreed and approved location where the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel is located.
f) Smoke Control Panel specification, control capability and functionality shall be as per
latest UAE Fire & Life Safety Code.
g) All control equipment including thermostats, sensors, detectors, actuators, controllers,

pressure level and flow switches, annunciation alarms, remote control stations and all
such equipment needed for the proper system operation.
h) All control wiring for the above mentioned equipment.
j) Final connection, between disconnect switches, power outlets, flex outlet and
mechanical equipment.
k) The following electrical works and materials for the mechanical equipment shall be
supplied and installed under the electrical part of this contract.
i- All power supply up to and including the following:
- Power outlets for fan coil units.

- Disconnect switches when specified to be installed separate from the control
panel.
- Flex outlet for exhaust fans.
ii- Power supply up to control panels when specified with an integral disconnect
switch.
iii- Power supply to disconnect switches when the switches are built-in the
equipment.
iv- Empty conduits with pull wires for all cables and wires classified under the
mechanical scope of works.
v- Control outlet boxes for all control equipment classified under the mechanical
scope of works.
vi- Power cables and conduits or fixing arrangement between fresh air handling units,
etc.. and their control panel.
vii- Power cables and conduits from central control panel to the various equipment
controlled from the same panel, such as exhaust fans, supply air fans, etc..
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.1 In addition to the mentioned above, the works shown herein after shall be applicable along
with the requirements of the related divisions and sections.
the piping, ducting, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and according to the
1.7.2 The Contractor shall submit catalogue cuts and brochures of products with reference to
circumstances.
and dust.
Engineer.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
maintenance staff for a period of at least six weeks on all equipment and plants he has
1.10 Machinery Guards
1.10.1 All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately protect all
personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment.
1.10.2 Wherever possible, moving parts should be protected by guards supplied by the
equipment manufacturer. All guards must be strongly attached to equipment and should
be designed to be easily removed for access, servicing, adjustment and maintenance.
triplicate bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material:
1.12 Abbreviations
1.12.1.1 AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Associations.

1.12.1.2 ANSI - American National Standard Institute.
1.12.1.3 ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
1.12.1.4 ASA - Acoustical Society of America, American Standards Association.
1.12.1.5 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers.
1.12.1.6 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
1.12.1.7 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.12.1.8 BSI - British Standards Institution.

1.12.1.9 SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
1.12.1.10 UL - Under Writers Laboratories.
1.12.1.11 BTU - British Thermal Units.
1.13 Workmanship
the Engineer.
1.13.2 The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.2 Tests
systems, labour, materials, power, etc.., required for testing, shall be furnished by the
2.2.7 The following tests should be furnished for but limited to the following:
a Vibration isolation test

b Sound attenuator test
c Insulation test
d Chilled water pipe tests
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
e. Chiller Test
f. Refrigeration plant test.
g. Pump tests
h. Air handling unit tests
j. Fan coil unit tests
k. Air and water balancing
l. Exhaust systems tests
m. Noise and vibration measurement
n. Room condition tests
o. Controls and building management test
2.4 Access Doors
motors, fire dampers, and other items requiring operation, adjustment, or maintenance.
2.4.2 Doors and frames shall be of 12-gauge galvanized steel with invisible hinges, and cam
lock fastenings. For plaster walls or ceiling, frames shall have a 50 mm. wide lath plaster
bond. For masonry walls, the frame shall be set flush with masonry with provisions in the
jamb for anchoring. Doors shall be solid flush steel with grey metal primer. Location of
access doors shall be coordinated with and shall have the approval of the Engineer before
the mechanical work is installed.
2.5 Permits
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gate Valves

2.4 Air and Dirt Separators
2.6 Pressure Independent Balancing and Control Valve (PIBCV)
2.8 Strainers
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 23 05 23
General Duty Valves for HVAC
23 05 23 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section describes all HVAC valves within the building.
1.1.2 Works of this Section shall be governed by contract general conditions.
Section 23 05 00 - Common Works Results for HVAC

Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps
Section 23 40 00 - Air Cleaning Devices
Section 23 72 00 - Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment
Section 23 73 30 - Outdoor Exposed Air Handling Units
Section 23 82 00 - Convection Heating and Cooling Units
Division 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls
1.3.1 Unless specified otherwise all valves, strainers, flexible connections, etc. shall be selected
for pressure rating at least 1.5 times the operating pressure.
1.3.2 Contractor shall submit a schedule of all valves, strainers, etc., showing the required
pressure rating for each fitting and shall indicate its location and service.
1.4.1 All valves shall be applicable to applicable standard shown.
1.4.2 All valves shall be full line size.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gate Valves
2.1.1 Gate valves shall be cast iron for sizes 2 ½” (65mm) and above, and bronze with, non
rising stem, flanged ends, bolted bonnet and bronze wedge disc faces and seats for sizes
less than 2 ½” (65mm).
Section 23 05 23
23 05 23 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.2 One gate valve shall be supplied and installed:
a- At the supply and return from each equipment.
b- At the discharge and suction of each pump.
c- At the bottom of each riser and all low points to be drained.
d- In general at all points shown on the Drawings and/or specified.
2.1.3 Copper alloy gate valves shall conform to BS 5154.
2.2.1 Check valves shall be of the non-slam spring loaded, globe type with the capability to
absorb and dampen the shock wave from the piping system water hammer. Check valves
2" (50 mm) and smaller, shall be all bronze, screwed ends. Valves 2½" (65 mm) and
larger, shall be cast iron, flanged ends.
2.2.2 One check valve shall be installed:
a- At the discharge of each pump.
b- At all points shown on the Drawings and/or where specified.
2.2.3 Copper alloy check valves shall conform to BS 5154.
2.2.4 Cast iron check valves shall conform to BS 5152.
2.3.1 Supply and install all automatic air vents as shown on the Drawings and wherever
2.3.2 Automatic air vents of the spherical float type shall be installed at all high points in the
piping. Vents shall have cast iron housing and bolted cover with gasket. Float shall be
constructed of stainless steel. Vents shall be suitable for a maximum operating pressure
of 150 psi (1030 Kpa). A ½" (15 mm) lock shield valve shall be directly installed ahead of
each automatic air vent, and a ½" (15 mm) drain line shall be provided to discharge at a
convenient point.
2.4 Air and Dirt Separators
2.4.1 Supply and install air and dirt separators as shown on the Drawings and wherever
2.4.2 Air and dirt separator shall be designed, fabricated and stamped per ASME Section VIII
Division 1 or equivalent with similar system working pressure and temperature.
2.4.3 Air and dirt separator device shall be constructed of brass or steel.
2.4.4 Units up to three 2-1/2-inch in size shall be provided with threaded connections, and larger
shall be provided with flanged system connections as standard.
2.4.5 Each air and dirt separator device shall be equipped with air venting chamber designed to
minimize system fluid from fouling the venting assembly.
Section 23 05 23
23 05 23 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.4.6 A brass flushing cock shall be equipped with the separator to facilitate system fast-fill and
removal of the floating impurities from the air system interface within the separator.
2.4.7 A blow down valve shall be there on the bottom of each unit to allow blow down and
cleaning. The air and dirt separator device shall remove air down to 18 microns and shall
remove dirt/debris down to 35 microns in 100 passes or less.
2.4.8 The unit shall also be 100% efficient at removing dirt down to 90 microns.
2.4.9 The unit manufacturer shall provide third party independent test data certifying that their
unit performs to the above standards.
2.4.10 The pall rings shall be made of stainless steel, and should achieve optimal separation of
air and dirt with minimal pressure drop.
2.4.11 Material used for suppressing turbulence and increasing surface area for high efficiency
air and dirt removal shall be stainless steel.
2.4.12 The unit shall be manufactured with a removable upper head to facilitate removal,
inspection, and cleaning of the pall ring basket
2.5.1 Pump flexible connectors shall be spherical rubber type with carbon steel flanges, easy
flexing, long cyclic life connectors, to protect mechanical equipment by relieving piping
stresses, caused by piping misalignment, sagging pipe hangers, and thermal expansion.
2.5.2 Pipe flexible connector shall be of stainless steel bellow type with flanged or welded ends
as suitable for the pipe application.
2.6 Pressure Independent Balancing and Control Valve (PIBCV)
2.6.1 Pressure Independent Balancing & Control Valves (PIBCV) for modulation of the chilled
water flow in the return pipeline shall consist of control valve and modulating actuator.
2.6.2 The Pressure Independent Balancing & Control valve shall be an automatic flow limiter,
resulting in optimum maintenance of delta T across the Chillers/ Heat Exchangers.
2.6.3 The Pressure Independent Balancing & Control Valve and the Modulating Actuator shall
be from the same manufacturer.
2.6.4 The smaller valves up to sizes 32mm shall be of brass body and more than 32mm should
be a robust design Grey Iron body.
2.6.5 The minimum differential pressure required across the valve, shall not exceed 16kPa for
sizes lesser than 32mm and 30kPa for sizes 40mm and higher.
2.6.6 The valve shall have a linear characteristic, which shall be converted to equal percentage
by the actuator and linear improved controls between Input Signal vs. Heat Output.
2.6.7 The leakage rate of the valves shall be less than 0.05% of the maximum flow.
2.6.8 Valve shall have a shut-off function, lockable, visible features for full flow balancing from
100% to 0%
2.6.9 The valves shall be rated for 16bar (unless required, or specified elsewhere) with 6bar
serviceable and operating differential pressure across the valve.
Section 23 05 23
23 05 23 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6.10 Supplier of the valve should provide lab test results reflecting verification by independent
lab to compare control and flow limitation function of different PIBCVs at the same basis.
2.6.11 Control valve actuators shall be modulating type and must auto-calibrate on power supply
of 24VAC.
2.6.12 Actuator shall be motor driven type and shall operate in numerous steps, with respect to
available valve stroke length for applicable modulation.
2.6.13 Actuators shall incorporate a manual override facility for services purposes.
2.6.14 The actuator should work with 24 VAC supply voltage and control range shall be (0-10
Vdc)/ (4-20 mA).
2.6.15 The actuator shall be sized to meet the valve shut-off requirements and close-off against a
maximum differential pressure of 600 kPa.
2.6.16 The actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and
vice versa in less than two minutes.
2.6.17 Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed as per the location/orientation approved
by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve location.
2.6.18 Actuators shall have indicator showing actuator functioning, auto-calibration and error
status.
2.7.1 Expansion joints shall be provided wherever pipes cross structural expansion joints and
2.7.3 Bellows shall be of stainless steel and suitable for a pressure of 125 psi (860 Kpa) or the
2.8 Strainers
2.8.1 Strainer shall be provided at the suction connection of each pump, and ahead of each
automatic flow control valve or as shown on drawings.
2.8.2 Strainers shall be all bronze, brass basket for sizes up to 2" (50mm), and Cast Iron
flanged ends for sizes above.
2.9.1 Valves shall be designed for a minimum of 700 kPa differential pressure with the down
stream flanged removed through 300 mm size. Factory test date on differential pressure
rating is required. Valves shall have cast or ductile iron body, conforming to ASTM A126
Class B body, aluminium bronze disc, in accordance with ASTM B148 alloy 954, and
EPDM rubber seals. Valves 65 mm through 150 mm shall be provided with lever. Valves
200 mm and larger shall be driven by a worm gear operator or screw driven operator with
position indicator. Operators shall be fully enclosed in cast iron housing, watertight, and
Section 23 05 23
23 05 23 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
require no more than 150N rim pull. Operators shall be designed to withstand, without
damage an input torque of 1.3 KN. Valves shall be rated for 1,000 kPA water working
pressure.
2.9.2 Electric motor operated valve shall be provided with a motor reducer combination with an
operating speed to suit the changeover operation. The operation shall have a high torque
motor specifically designed for valve control service, limit switches, torque switches, local
position indicators and provision for manual operation in case of power failure. Should
power failure occur, valve disc position should be changed by positioning the clutch lever
and using the hand wheel. Electric operation should override manual. The housing shall
be completely weather-proof.
2.9.3 The CV of the valve shall not be less than 1980 when 90 degree open.
PART 3 EXECUTION
by the Drawings.
maintenance.
3.1.4 Valves 2" (50 mm) dia. and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 2 ½" (65 mm) dia.
and larger shall have flanged ends.
from the pipeline.
Section 23 05 23
23 05 23 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.3 Inertia Bases
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 23 05 29
Hangers and Support for HVAC System
23 05 29 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall
employ the services of an Acoustical Consultant & licensed Seismic Structural Consultant
to review equipment, piping, ductwork and to conduct sound, vibration and seismic control
requirements. Any additional improvements necessary to achieve the required design
criteria for HVAC work shall be provided without additional cost.
1.1.1.1 Section 23 05 48 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Construct and install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval
of the Engineer. Do not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to
support weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation. All steel hangers and
supports shall be of hot dipped galavnized.
2.1.4 Un-insulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or
supports.
2.1.6 Clearance for application of specified Vapour sealed insulation without cutting pipeline
2.1.7 Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels, couplings,
brackets and all other components and accessories, to allow installation to freely expand
and contract.
2.1.8 Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with adjustable
attachment to hanger rod. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers. Pipe
hangers shall fit over vapour sealed insulated piping.
2.1.9 Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger, provide steel
pipe clamps.
Section 23 05 29
23 05 29 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
and for piping 2 ½" (65 mm) thru 5" (125 mm) use 5/8" (16 mm) rods, and for piping 6"(150
mm) thru 12" (300 mm) use 7/8" (22 mm) rods.
2.1.12 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with special
conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are required other than
those provided in the structure.
2.1.14 Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron rests,
with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required, provide
pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers, fasten
stands to piers.
located close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500 lbs
(680 Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
2.1.16 Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.
2.1.17 Provide hanger shields to protect vapour sealed pipe insulation within mechanical
waterproofed calcium silicate encased in a 120 ° sheet metal shield. Insert thickness shall
be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe diameter, minimum but shall
not be shorter than 100mm. and need not be longer than 300mm. if bearing load causes
no discernable deformation. Insert shall extend 25mm. beyond sheet metal shield. 100mm.
shields shall be 26 gauge minimum. Shields 130 to 230mm. long shall be 20 gauge
minimum. Shields longer than 230mm. shall be 16 gauge.
360 °, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density, 100 psi.
waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further enclosed within
the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and insulation shield, pack
annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with double neoprene coated
asbestos rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover the wall penetration
opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall extend at least 25mm.
beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.
2.1.19 Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to pitch
vapour sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation.
2.2.2 Spring Mounts
Section 23 05 29
23 05 29 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise and be corrosion protected
when installed outdoors.
2.3 Inertia Bases
2.3.1 Each Fire pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall consist of pre-
reinforcement, equipment mounting bolts and vibration isolator brackets. Base shall mount
on spring vibration isolators which shall be of high deflection, free standing, un-housed
large diameter, laterally stable steel springs assembled into an upper load plate and
leveling assembly and into a lower load plate and noise isolation pad assembly.
2.4.1 Horizontal spacing for Steel, Copper and PVC Pipes:
. ¾" and 1" (20 and 25 mm) steel pipe-----2.5 meter

. 1 ¼"-2" (32 and 50 mm) steel pipe-------3.0 meter
. 2 ½"-4" (65 and 100 mm) steel pipe ------4.0 meter
. 5"-6" (125 and 150 mm) steel pipe---------5.0 meter
. 8" (200 mm) and above steel pipe ---------6.0 meter
. Up to 1 ¼" (32 mm) copper pipe----------2.0 meter
. 1 ½" (40 mm) and over copper pipe-------3.0 meter
. 2 ½" (65 mm) and smaller PVC pipe-------1.2 meter
. 3" (80 mm) and over PVC pipe-------------1.8 meter
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 23 05 29
23 05 29 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 48

FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.4 Submittals
1.6 Guarantee
1.11 Acoustic Analysis
1.14 Emergency Generators
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Attenuator Units

2.2 Internal Acoustic Lining of Ducts
2.6 Inertia Bases
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General

3.2 Noise Tests
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
For HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 48 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 48

FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
discrepancies between the contents of this section and the acoustic specialist report, the report
specifications shall take precedence].
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The work shall include the supply, installation and testing of a complete system of noise
and vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all structural borne vibration and air noise
produced by the electro-mechanical equipment as described herein below and as detailed
on the Drawings. Supporting reports and documents with a full vibration analysis study,
recommendation and implementation plan from a recognized approved acoustic specialist/
subcontractor shall be submitted to the consultant for approval. Such study shall be
submitted at the time the equipment are submitted for approval. The cost of the study,
implementation, erection, and any rectification to the design shall be done at the
contractors own price and without additional cost to the contract value.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for Employment of noise and vibration treatment
specialist.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall supply and install all materials as required by the specialist for noise
and vibration treatment who will be responsible for the performance of these materials.
1.1.4 The Noise & Vibration Control Specialist shall be responsible for collecting data from both
the builder and the MEP Contractor and also measuring and getting the reading for the
noise level in the spaces as specified in the presence of the Engineer.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall submit a detailed report showing all data, recommended material,
shop drawings and levels of treatment.
1.1.6 Materials specified for Noise & Vibration Treatment covered under Architectural Section
shall be supplied & installed by the Civil Contractor.
1.1.7 Materials specified under this section shall be supplied and installed by the MEP
Contractor.
1.2.2 The Acoustic Specialist/ Sub-Contractor should have successfully supplied, installed and
completed similar projects for a period of not less than 10 years.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.1 Unless more stringent requirements specified elsewhere, the following

standards/requirements should be confirmed:
Table 403.01(1) – Acoustical Control Requirements

Building Type Document Reference
Villas / Residential*
Building Regulations Approved Document E (revised 2003) (UK)
Buildings
* Residential Buildings include Villas, Apartments, Labour Accomodations and Student
Accommodations.
** Educational facilities include Nursery Schools, Primary Schools
1.3.2 Unless more stringent requirements specified elsewhere, buildings should have ambient
internal noise levels from external sources do not exceed the criteria prescribed in Green
Buildings regulations.
standards:-
1.3.4 Fire Performance Characteristics:
1.3.4.1 Provide panels with surface burning characteristics to UBC42-2 and ASTM E-84 by a
testing organization approved by the Engineer.
UBC42-2 Fire Hazard Classification Acceptable

ASTM E84 Fire Hazard Classification Class-A
Flame Spread 25 or less
Smoke development 450 or less
1.3.5 Acoustics Performance Characteristics

elsewhere by a testing organization acceptable to Engineer. Approved testing authority
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Shop Drawings
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.2 Samples
specified.
1.4.3 Certification
1.4.4.1 The acoustic sub-contractor supplying and installing the material shall be an approved
agent of the manufacturer. The manufacturer will certify that said contractor is an officially
1.4.5 Single Source
1.6 Guarantee
1.6.1 The sub-contractor shall furnish in the Client’s name, a written guarantee covering the
product supplied against defects in materials and workmanship under normal operating
conditions for a period of one year from the date of completion of acoustic works. The
Contractor shall pass on to the owner any and all guarantees provided by the
manufacturers and acoustic sub-contractor of individual members of the system before the
completion of the project.
of work.
1.7.1.1 Where the contractor fails to meet these specifications he will be expected at his own cost,
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.7.1.2 The contractor shall supply and fit acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units where
necessary to achieve the following noise criteria as indicated in Table 1.
generated by the plant, including airborne noise through the structure, duct borne noise
from the ducted air-conditioning or fan systems and vibration do not exceed the noise
criteria levels for the various types of areas specified.
1.8.1 The optimum NC/NR noise levels for the various spaces shall be as detailed below:-
Table 1 – Noise Criteria and Reverberation Levels
Internal Design Noise Level in dB

Room Description
Leq,T
Guestrooms, Bedrooms and Living Rooms NC/NR 30 – 35
Residence and Guestroom Bathrooms NC/NR 35 – 40
Lobby / Reception Areas NC/NR 35 – 40
Restaurants, F&B NC/NR 35 – 40
Office Corridors / Circulation Areas NC/NR 35 – 40
Public Toilets/Changing NC/NR 40 – 45
Base Build (Core) Circulation/Corridor NC/NR 35 – 40
75 dB LAmax(5min) @ 1m from all
M&E Equipment in Podium and Towers
equipment
80 dB LAmax(5min) @ 1m from all
Basement and Parking M&E
equipment
1.8.2 The optimum vibration levels for the various spaces shall be as detailed below:-
Table 2 – Vibration Levels for Various Types
Room Description BS 6472 Curve
Residences Rooms Curve 1.4
Restaurants, Prayer Rooms Curve 2
Reception, Circulation Areas, Building Lobby Areas Curve 4

Public Toilets/Changing, Base Build (Core)
Circulation/Corridor, M&E Equipment Rooms, Garbage Curve 8
Rooms
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.8.3 The noise and vibration measurement time parameter (T) shall be representative of the
source being measured and at least 1 minute for steady-state noise and vibration sources.
If sources are intermittent or cyclic in nature, the noise and vibration measurements shall
be of sufficient duration to capture 10 cycles of the source.
1.8.4 During periodic testing of equipment, such as emergency generators, a temporary

relaxation in the above-stated noise criteria of NC/NR 10 or 10 dBA shall be permitted.
1.8.5 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the above levels are achieved
and to demonstrate and certify that the same have been achieved.
1.9.1 The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and sound attenuators where
necessary and as shown on drawings to reduce the airborne noise transmission through
the duct distribution systems so that the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.
1.10.1 The external noise levels of any installation located on the roof shall not exceed NR 55
when measured at the site boundary or building parapet.
1.10.2 The external noise emanating from air inlets and exhaust louvres of air handling unit plant
rooms or standby generators shall not exceed NR 55 at a distance of 5 metres or the site
boundary whichever is the more stringent requirement.
1.11 Acoustic Analysis
1.11.1 Moreover, the contractor shall submit at the design stage, prior to commencement of the
work, a detailed noise analysis of all ducted air-conditioning and extract air systems. This
analysis should clearly indicate the required static and dynamic insertion losses of the
attenuators and the aerodynamic pressure loss charts of the attenuators when handling
the design volume of air.
1.12.1 All mechanical, reciprocating machinery shall be analysed for vibration and for noise
breakout to areas adjacent and above or below to ensure that the specified noise criteria
ratings are net.
1.13.1 The contractor shall be responsible and include for the supply, installation and testing of
the complete system necessary for vibration isolation to dampen and eliminate all
structure borne vibration generated by the electro-mechanical equipment as described in
this specification and as detailed on the scheme drawings.
1.13.3 Where air handling units are located at roof level or inside a room the selection of vibration
isolation systems shall take into account the effect of the unsupported span between
building columns and the subsequent deflection of the slab under the point loads. The
spring type isolators shall have a static deflection of not less than 50 mm under the load of
the units supported. This static deflection is to provide an isolation efficiency of at least
95% and higher deflections are to be used if the calculations so indicate. The Contractor
shall also check the installation for airborne noise through the structure that could affect
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
accommodation areas immediately below or adjacent and if necessary recommend the

use of acoustic floating floors to contain the noise. A report of the study and
recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to proceeding with
the installation. The cost of the study, implementation, erection and any rectification of the
original design shall be carried out at the Contractors own cost.
ASHRAE handbook.
1.14 Emergency Generators
1.14.1 Emergency diesel generator and its installation of these machines must be carried out
with careful regard to the acoustic and aerodynamic factors.
1.14.2 Because of the noise generated by the machines, it will be essential to install air inlet
attenuators that are selected to reduce the noise below NR45 at 3 metres from the air
louvres. The exhaust air from the engine radiator will also require attenuating down to a
level of NR45 at 3 metres, and both inlet and exhaust air attenuators must be selected
and sized such that the aerodynamic pressure loss across the system is below that
recommended by the generator manufacturer.
1.14.3 The engine exhaust muffler should be selected for NR 45 at 3 meter.
1.14.4 The plant room containing each generator should be acoustically treated to prevent the
engine and exhaust noise from breaking out through the structure to critical areas above,
below and adjacent.
1.14.5 To contain this noise, it will be necessary to increase the sound transmission losses of the
walls to RW 50dB and fit acoustic doors that have an STC rating of at least 38dB STC.
1.15.2 The first three hangers from the equipment should provide the same deflection as the
equipment isolators; the remaining hangers should be spring or combination spring and
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC system
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Attenuator Units
2.1.1 The primary attenuator should be located in the plant room as close to the plant room wall
as possible. The attenuators shall be inserted in the ducts where they pass through the
plant room wall if fire dampers are not required at this point. However where this not
possible, the attenuator shall be installed between the fan and the mechanical room wall
with the duct between the silencer and the wall acoustically lagged using an appropriate
noise barrier material to prevent noise re-entry.
2.1.2 The aperture in the wall through which the ducts pass must be made good by being
packed with wax impregnated open cell polythene “Acoustic foam” to form an airtight seal
between the duct and the structure.
2.1.3 The sound attenuators should be supplied complete by a specialist manufacturer, the
supply of acoustic splitters for insertion in the contractors own ducting will not be
permitted.
2.1.4 The attenuators shall consist of attenuating splitters arranged with two half width side
splitters and full width central splitters with equal width airways throughout assembled in
the attenuator casing.
2.1.5 The attenuator casings shall be of galvanized sheet steel and the material thickness shall
be in accordance with DW 142 recommendations and shall be supplied with a galvanized
sheet angle, joint system, slide on flange conforming to UK HVCA specification. DW 142+
HVCA test procedure DW 1 + m1.
2.1.6 The splitter perimeter tray shall be manufactured from 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel
with galvanized sheet steel bull nosed section at entry and exit. The splitter absorption
material shall be abrasion proof for velocities up to 18 m/sec. air velocity. The acoustic
infix for the attenuator shall be either mineral wool having a density of 48 kg/m3 or open
cell flame resistant acoustic foam. Where mineral wool is employed the materials shall be
faced with woven glass fiber protective scrim with 22 gauge galvanized perforated sheet
steel fascia.
2.1.7 The lock formed joint for the attenuator casing shall be factory sealed with elastomeric
mastic to prevent air leakage.
2.1.8 Attenuators of large cross section or length can be manufactured as multi-section units
with loose end flanges for ease of transportation and site handling.
2.2 Internal Acoustic Lining of Ducts
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Furnish and install duct lining complete as specified hereinafter and to the approval of the
Engineer.
2.2.1.2 Where it is possible to achieve the required attenuation by lining the interior of duct runs,
this may be accomplished by applying one inch thick lining to the inside of the ducts.
2.2.2 Product
2.2.2.1 Lining for ducts shall be acoustical insulation that meets the following:
2.2.2.1.1 CFC- and HCFC-free, 25 mm thick with 24 Kg/m3 density.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.2.1.2 Resists mold growth and effectively retards the flow of moisture vapour, Water Vapor
Permeability shall be <0.06 as per ASTM E 96 and Water Absorption % (Volume Change)
shall be <0.20 as per ASTM C 209
2.2.2.1.3 Low VOC material, and meeting the requirements under the “Indoor Air Quality”
classifications.
2.2.2.1.4 Acceptable for use in square, rectangular, round or oval duct or plenum applications and
air handling equipment.
2.2.2.1.5 Meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.2.2.1.6 Its flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less as
tested by ASTM E 84, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.
2.2.2.1.7 Shall meet GREENGUARD requirements under the “Indoor Air Quality” classifications.
2.2.2.1.8 Liner could be with or without a factory-applied scrim-reinforced acrylic adhesive on one
side.
2.2.3 Installation
2.2.3.1 Should be applied to clean, dry ductwork and equipment. Adhesive should be applied to
all compression joints and used on all butt edges.
2.2.3.2 Duct liners shall be applied with both mechanical fasteners and an adhesive
2.2.3.3 Apply mechanical fasteners in accordance with SMACNA guidelines. Mechanical

fasteners could be either of the welded pin or impact pin types. The length of each pin
shall be enough to accommodate the specified liner thickness. Washers on top of the pins
shall retain the liner
2.2.3.4 Duct liners shall be applied for both supply and return air ducts with a minimum of 3
meters length away from each air handling unit or fan coil unit.
2.2.3.5 Provide metal noising to every leading edge in case air stream velocities exceed 4,000
FPM. Nosing may be formed, channelled or zee-attached on duct by screws, rivets or
welds.
2.2.3.6 Adhesives must be both water and fire resistant
2.3.1 Isolation hangers shall be used for suspended pipes and equipment.
2.3.2 Isolation hangers are rubber or springs or a combination of both.
2.3.3 Rubber Hangers
Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type. It shall consist of:
a. A high grade rubber block with suspension rod and an outside steel housing.
b. The steel housing will be anchored to the ceiling slab and the suspension rod shall
support the equipment.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
c. The rubber shall be protected against corrosion due to oil or other damaging agents.
2.3.4 Spring Hangers
2.3.4.1 Shall be of the open mounting type and shall consist of a steel spring between a top and
bottom plate with an adjustment bolt or levelling.
stiffness to assure stability, 50% travel beyond rated load and safe solid stresses.
2.4.2 Rubber Mounts
2.4.2.1 Shall be of the rubber-in-shear type with a cub shape or integrated ribbed rubber pad.
2.4.2.2 The pad shall have two bolt holes for isolator anchorage to concrete base.
2.4.2.3 Rubber mounts shall not be used for deflection requirements larger than 8 mm.
2.4.3 Spring Mounts
2.5.1 A reinforced concrete foundation block or concrete inertia base for each piece of
equipment shall be constructed of minimum thickness as shown on the Drawings, with a
minimum weight equal to at least two times that of the equipment and in accordance with
the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and/or vibration specialist. Bases
shown on drawings or included in these specifications represent the minimum
requirements of the Engineer.
2.6 Inertia Bases
2.6.1 Each water pump shall be supported on an Inertia base. Base shall be consist of pre-
2.6.2 Other equipment which are found, by the Engineer, to require inertia bases, shall be of the
same specifications as above and shall be part of the Contractor's obligation without
additional cost.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing General
3.1.1 The test of the airborne noise in each area shall be in accordance with BS 7445 Acoustics
Guide to ISO Measurement of Airborne Acoustical Noise” (BS 7458-1991, also refers).
3.2 Noise Tests
3.2.1 It will be the responsibility of the contractor to employ an independent Acoustic Engineer
to carry out proving tests and to prepare noise test certificates for all acoustically important
3.2.2 The general basis for acceptability of the installation acoustically is (tolerance + or – 2db)
at any point 1.2 metres above floor level and 1.5 metres from grilles, diffusers, registers,
terminal units etc. of the air-conditioning systems.
3.2.4 Tests shall be carried out to establish the required performance standards and shall
comply with the sound attenuation recommendations as detailed in the sections below.
load.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 48
23 05 48 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.4 Nameplates
2.5 Painting
Section 23 05 53
Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping, Duct & Equipment
23 05 53 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 To be read and governed by general contract conditions. This section includes painting
and identification of all pipe works, duct works, equipment etc.
1.2 Scope of Work
content limits.

Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
Section 23 34 00 - HVAC Fans
Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units
Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
Section 23 81 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment

DW 144 Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
Section 23 05 53
23 05 53 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2.1 GENERAL
a) All Building Services including piping, ducting, electrical conduits and their covering
shall be properly identified in accordance with BS 1710, Latest Edition.
b) All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating
conditions.
c) All material used shall be of low emission as per GREEN /LEED Guidlnes.
d) Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours with code

indications.
e) Code indication shall include safety colours and service information. Information shall
be given regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe by using the following
systems, individually or in combination:-
i - Name in Full.
iv - Refrigerant Number as Specified in BS 4580
v - Appropriate Code Indication Colour bands.
f) Air Conditioning and ventilation ducts shall be identified in accordance with DW/142,
latest Edition.
2.2.2 Legend
a) The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be by

b) The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be
applied close to valves and adjacent to changes in direction, branches, where pipes
pass through walls or floors and as frequently as needed along straight runs to
provide clear and positive indication. Identification maybe applied by stencilling,
tape or markers.
c) Pipe marking should be highly visible.
Section 23 05 53
23 05 53 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.3 The Type & Size of Letters

(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm

(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
(200 to 250) mm 600 mm 63 mm
over 250 800 mm 100 mm
2.2.4 Colour
a) The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend. The
b) Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.2.5 Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows:
Colour Code
- Chilled Water Green White/EM. Green/White

- Electrical conduits - Orange
- Cold air supply duct - Blue
- Fresh air duct - Green
- Extract/Exhaust/Re-circulated Air duct - Grey
position on floor.
2.4 Nameplates
a. System and unit designation from schedule of equipment.

b. Manufacturer's name and address.
c. Serial and model number.
d. Rated capacity.
e. Temperature, pressure or other limitations.
Section 23 05 53
23 05 53 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Painting
2.5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.5.1.3 Paint shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops, runs or
sagging.
2.5.1.5 Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus and
2.5.1.7 Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on ASHRAE or BS
recommendations after being submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
2.5.2 MACHINERY
priming coat of gray lead and oil.
2.5.3 PIPING
2.5.3.1 All un-insulated and unwrapped Ferrous piping (galvanized or non-galvanized) including
flanges, bolts and valves in trench, partitions, below tiles, or underground shall be painted
with 2 coats of emulsified asphalt. All metal surfaces located within or directly adjacent to
fresh air intake louvers except fresh air dampers shall be painted with 2 coats, of
emulsified asphalt.
2.5.3.2 Paint all exposed (in shafts, above and below false ceiling, on roof, etc.. ) ferrous piping
applicable).
2.5.3.3 Applicable to galvanized pipes :
a. Prime Coat: Zinc Chromate.
b. Finish Coat: Ironhide gray metal paint or as approved by the Engineer.
2.5.3.4 Applicable to all other ferrous pipes:
2.5.3.4.1 Prime Coat: Red lead Primer, 1.5 to 2.0 mils thick.
2.5.3.5 All un-insulated copper pipes shall be wrapped with black colour PVC denso tape of the
self adhesive water proof type.
Section 23 05 53
23 05 53 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.4 DUCTWORK
2.5.4.1 The inside portions of all ductwork which are visible through registers and grills shall be
painted with one coat of dull black, heat resistant paint.
2.5.4.2 Un-insulated ductwork including support and hangers exposed to view: One coat of zinc
chromate primer, 1.5 mils thick and finished with iron hide grey metal paint or with color
approved by the Engineer.
2.5.4.3 All metal surfaces such as fresh air dampers located within, or directly adjacent to, fresh
air intake louvers: Two coats of gray galvanized steel primer, 1.5 mils thick.
2.5.5 IRON WORK
2.5.5.1 All iron work within the building, not otherwise specified such as pipe and duct hangers
and supports, and supports for apparatus, shall be prime painted with one coat of red
lead.
Section 23 05 53
23 05 53 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.2 Summary
1.4 Submittals
1.7 Warranty
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.2 Preparation
3.7 Maintenance and Guarantee
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
23 05 93 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 Summary
1.2.1 A qualified and approved third party shall carry out and certify the testing and
commissioning. Testing and commissioning must be carried out by a company approved
by Authority having the jurisdiction. Testing, adjusting and balancing of the installed
systems should be as per the relevant commissioning code of the British Chartered
Institute of Building Services (CIBS) or ASHRAE Standards. Commissioning results must
be recorded and made available for inspection by Authority.
1.2.2 Major equipment such as chillers, fresh air units, chilled water pumps shall be tested and
commissioned at factory and contractor shall arrange for the witness of this test if required
by the Client Representative and consultant .
1.2.3 Testing, adjusting and balancing for all the installed systems shall include chilled water
distribution, air distribution, noise and vibration measurement, automatic controls as per
the procedure herein after.
1.2.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to provide during installation all necessary provisions
to carry out the above works as required by the third party.
1.2.5 All costs shall be paid by the Contractor.
specification. Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be
considered and more stringent specifications to be adopted. Ventilation system start up
should be in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2007, section 7.2
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.6 Ductwork, connected to equipment, with an external static pressure exceeding two
hundred and fifty (250) Pascal (Pa) and all ductwork exposed to external ambient
conditions or within unconditioned spaces must be pressure tested prior to occupancy in
accordance with a method approved by the Authority having jurisdiction and a compliant
amount of air leakage achieved.
have been made.
1.3.10 When pipes, valves, equipment etc., are to be covered or embedded or insulated; their
specific tests shall be carried out on them before any covering is applied. These tests shall
not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and he shall take all necessary
precautions to insure the safety and protection of such tested items until the termination of
the work.
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Two copies of Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing strategies plans to be submitted. Plans
should show step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3. Include also a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
1.4.2 Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms
certified by Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing firm.
1.4.3 Warranties if specified in this Section.
1.5.1 Ensure the participation of Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing team members,
equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers,
and other support personnel. Provide notice in advance of scheduled meeting time and
location.
1.5.2 Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing activities.
1.5.3 Certify Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing field data reports by reviewing field data
reports to validate accuracy of data, and certify that Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing
team complied with approved Testing, Adjusting and Air Balancing plan and the
procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
1.5.4 Use approved standard forms.
1.5.5 Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently as required by
instrument manufacturer.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.5.1 Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.6.1 Completed areas of the project might be occupied during Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
or before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing operations to minimize conflicts with Client’s operations.
1.7 Warranty
1.7.1 Provide a guarantee on National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that:-
1.7.1.1 The certified Testing, Adjusting and Balancing firm has tested and balanced systems
according to the Contract Documents.
1.7.1.2 Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
1.8.1 The commissioning of HVAC system, building management shall be carried out before
issuing the completion certificate
1.8.2 Commissioning must be carried out in accordance with the CIBSE Codes listed below or
any other equivalent commissioning standard approved by Authority having the
jurisdiction.
- The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Commissioning

Code, Air Distribution Systems, Code A-2006’
- CIBSE Commissioning Code, Automatic Controls, Code C-2001’ for central control
and Building Management System (BMS)
- CIBSE Commissioning Code R: 2002 Refrigeration Systems
- CIBSE Commissioning Code B: 2002 Boilers
1.8.3 Commissioning must be carried out by a company approved by Authority having the
jurisdiction to conduct commissioning of buildings.
1.8.4 Commissioning results must be recorded and available for inspection by Authority having
the jurisdiction
1.8.5 A systems manual, documenting the information required to allow future operations staff
to understand and optimally operate the commissioned services, must be developed and
provided to the building owner or facilities operator following commissioning
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
address conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing of systems and equipment.
3.1.1.1 Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
3.1.1.2 Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
3.1.2 Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
3.1.3 Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record
Documents."
3.1.4 Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
3.1.5 Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part
of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC
equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare
this data with the design data and installed conditions.
3.1.6 Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been
performed.
3.1.7 Examine system and equipment test reports.
3.1.8 Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that
their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
3.1.9 Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
3.1.10 Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
3.1.11 Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.12 Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
3.1.13 Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
3.1.14 Examine motorized valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
3.1.15 Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
3.1.16 Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
3.1.17 Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
3.1.18 Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
3.1.18.1 Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
3.1.18.2 Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3.1.18.3 Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
3.1.18.4 Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
3.1.18.5 Thermostats and humidistats are located without adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
3.1.18.6 Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
3.1.18.7 Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
3.1.18.8 Controller set points are set at indicated values.
3.1.18.9 Interlocked systems are operating.
3.1.19 Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions.
Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Prepare a Testing, Adjusting and Balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
3.2.2 Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
3.2.2.1 Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
3.2.2.2 Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.2.2.3 Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3.2.2.4 Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2.5 Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
3.2.2.6 Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
3.2.2.7 Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
3.2.2.8 Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3.1 Testing Air Balancing General Procedure
3.3.1.1 Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
shown herein after.
3.3.1.2 Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for
this Project.
3.3.1.3 Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-
speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.3.1.4 Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) and metric (SI)
units.
3.3.1.5 Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
3.3.1.6 Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
3.3.1.7 Develop a plan to simulate diversity for variable-air-volume systems.
3.3.1.8 Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
3.3.1.9 Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
3.3.1.10 Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
3.3.1.11 Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
3.3.1.12 Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
3.3.1.13 Check for airflow blockages.
3.3.1.14 Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
3.3.1.15 Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.3.1.16 Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.17 A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and equipment supplied,
3.3.2 Testing and Hydronic General Procedure
3.3.2.1 Perform testing and balancing procedure on each system according to procedures shown
hereinafter.
3.3.2.2 Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump
to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
3.3.2.3 Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
3.3.2.4 Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition
to the general preparation procedures specified above:-
3.3.2.4.1 Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
3.3.2.4.2 Check expansion tank liquid level.
3.3.2.4.3 Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
3.3.2.4.4 Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.
3.3.2.4.5 Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
3.3.2.4.6 Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
3.3.2.4.7 Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
3.3.2.4.8 Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.3.2.5 Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive
displacement pumps:
3.3.2.5.1 Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the
pump has the intended impeller size.
3.3.2.5.2 Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
indicated water flow is achieved.
3.3.2.5.3 Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
3.3.2.5.4 Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
3.3.2.6 Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated pre-settings.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.2.7 Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
3.3.2.7.1 System components that have CV rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
3.3.2.8 Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that
is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
3.3.2.9 Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:-
3.3.2.9.1 Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
3.3.2.9.2 Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3.3.2.9.3 Record settings and mark balancing devices.
3.3.2.10 Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,
pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
3.3.2.11 Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of
balancing.
3.3.3 Procedures for Constant-Volume Air Systems
3.3.3.1 Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
3.3.3.1.1 Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:-
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
3.3.3.1.2 Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3.3.3.1.3 Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
3.3.3.1.4 Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective
action to align design and actual conditions.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.3.1.5 Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
3.3.3.1.6 Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motoramperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
3.3.3.2 Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
3.3.3.2.1 Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. Where sufficient space in
submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure
airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
3.3.3.2.2 Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
3.3.3.3 Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
3.3.3.3.1 Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
3.3.3.4 Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
3.3.3.4.1 Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
3.3.3.4.2 Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.3.4 Procedures for Variable-Air-Volume Systems
3.3.4.1 Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-
point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated
airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly
among the branch ducts.
3.3.4.2 Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
3.3.4.2.1 Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position
that simulates full-cooling load.
3.3.4.2.2 Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
3.3.4.2.3 Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.4.2.4 Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make
this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.3.4.2.5 Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum
airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
3.3.4.2.6 Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
3.3.4.2.7 Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
3.3.4.2.8 Record the final fan performance data.
3.3.4.3. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
3.3.4.3.1 Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems.
3.3.4.3.2 Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3.3.4.3.3 Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the
static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.3.4.3.4 Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
3.3.4.3.5 Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
3.3.4.3.6 Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure
to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
3.3.4.3.7 Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum
airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
3.3.4.3.8 Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
3.3.4.4 Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
3.3.4.4.1 Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units
at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly
among the branch ducts.
3.3.4.4.2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at
maximum airflow.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.4.4.3 Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
3.3.4.4.4 Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.3.4.4.5 Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
3.3.4.4.6 Measure static pressure at the sensor.
3.3.4.4.7 Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
3.3.5 Procedures for Variable-Flow Hydronic Systems
3.3.5.1 Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for
hydronic systems.
3.3.6 Procedures for Primary-Secondary-Flow Hydronic Systems
3.3.6.1 Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
3.3.7 Procedures for Motors
3.3.7.1 Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
3.3.7.1.1 Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
3.3.7.1.2 Motor horsepower rating.
3.3.7.1.3 Motor rpm.
3.3.7.1.4 Efficiency rating.
3.3.7.1.5 Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
3.3.7.1.6 Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
3.3.7.1.7 Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
3.3.7.2. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.3.8 Procedures for Chillers
3.3.8.1 Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances
of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple
chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by
the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating
at design conditions:
3.3.8.1.1 Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.8.1.2 If water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow.
3.3.8.1.3 Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
3.3.8.1.4 Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt.
3.3.8.1.5 Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt.
3.3.8.1.6 Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
3.3.8.1.7 If air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data including
number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.3.9 Procedures for Cooling Towers
3.3.9.1 Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blow down
systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the
following tests and record the results:
3.3.9.1.1 Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.
3.3.9.1.2 Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
3.3.9.1.3 Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.
3.3.9.1.4 Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.
3.3.9.1.5 Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.
3.3.9.1.6 Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure.
3.3.9.1.7 Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup-water system.
3.3.10 Procedures For Condensing Units
3.3.10.1 Verify proper rotation of fans.
3.3.10.2 Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.3.10.3 Record compressor data.
3.3.11 Procedures for Temperature Measurements
3.3.11.1 During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
3.3.11.2 Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two
successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of
final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
3.3.11.3 Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 13
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.12 Procedures for Commercial Kitchen Hoods
3.3.12.1 Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed
with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure
airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an
explanation in the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the method used
was chosen.
3.3.12.1.1 Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse.
Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
3.3.12.2 After balancing is complete, do the following:
3.3.12.2.1 Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
3.3.12.2.2 Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across
the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches (300 mm)
between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the
measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the
Contract Documents and governing codes.
3.3.12.2.3 Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve
optimum results.
3.3.12.3 Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with
authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it
discharges outdoors. Report findings.
3.3.12.3.1 Check duct slopes as required.
3.3.12.3.2 Verify that duct access is installed as required.
3.3.12.3.3 Verify that point of termination is as required.
3.3.12.3.4 Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required.
3.3.12.3.5 Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.
3.3.12.4 Report deficiencies.
3.3.13 Procedures for Exhaust Hoods
3. 3.17.1 Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each exhaust hood. Measure airflow by duct
Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, explain why, in the report,
and explain the test method used.
3.3.13.2 After balancing is complete, do the following:
3.3.13.2.1 Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
3.3.13.2.2 Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to achieve optimum results.
3.3.14 Procedures for Space Pressurization Measurements and Adjustments
3.3.14.1 Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the
space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable, gaskets, and
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 14
_________________________________________________________________________________
sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported
deficiencies are corrected.
3.3.14.2 Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each
building by adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated
conditions.
3.3.14.3 Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and
measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for
space pressurization.
3.3.14.3.1 For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the
intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure
side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space.
3.3.14.3.2 For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical
space and work to the least critical space.
3.3.14.3.3 Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
3.3.14.4 To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and
adjust the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow
difference.
3.3.14.5 For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and
adjust the controls to achieve the desired set point.
3.3.14.5.1 Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control
system instruments and report findings.
3.3.14.5.2 Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter
the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test over-pressurization and under
pressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set point.
3.3.14.5.3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space
pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions.
3.3.14.6 In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency
mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each
operating mode.
3.3.14.7 Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
3.3.15 Procedures for Vibration Measurements
3.3.15.1 Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
3.3.15.1.1 Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
3.3.15.1.2 Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s).
3.3.15.1.3 Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm).
3.3.15.1.4 Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
3.3.15.1.5 Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 15
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.15.2 Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
3.3.15.2.1 Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
3.3.15.2.2 Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
3.3.15.3. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at
a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
3.3.15.3.1 Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
3.3.15.3.2. Clear the space of people.
3.3.15.4 Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is
complete.
3.3.15.5 Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
3 3.19.6 Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
3.3.15.7 Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).
3.3.15.8 Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and
building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal,
vertical, and axial planes.
3.3.15.8.1 Pumps:
a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Pump Base: Top and side.
d. Building: Floor.
e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.
3.3.15.8.2 Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
3.3.15.8.3 Chillers and HVAC Equipment with Compressors:
a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 16
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.15.9 For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation
blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the
differences.
3.3.15.10 Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.
3.3.15.10.1 Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
3.3.15.10.2 Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3.3.15.10.3 Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
3.3.15.10.4 For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel
to-solid distance.
3.3.15.10.5 Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete
base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia
base and the floor.
3.3.16 Procedures for Sound-Level Measurements
3.3.16.1 Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying

with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters.
Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3.16.2 Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the
sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
3.3.16.3 Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where
air velocities exceed 100 fpm (0.51 m/s), use a windscreen on the microphone.
3.3.16.4 Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are
complete.
3.3.16.5 Close windows and doors to the space.
3.3.16.6 Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise
level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
3.3.16.7 Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be
measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-
sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.
3.3.16.8 Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) above the
floor and at least 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall, column, and other large surface
capable of altering the measurements.
3.3.16.9 Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 un weighted octave bands in the
frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
3.3.16.10 Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound
levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.
3.3.16.10.1 Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on
the difference and adjust measurements.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 17
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.17 Procedures for Indoor-Air Quality Measurements
3.3.17.1 After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions,
perform indoor-air quality testing.
3.3.17.2 Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
3.3.17.2.1 The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge,
cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination.
3.3.17.2.2 Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
3.3.17.2.3 Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain.
3.3.17.2.4 Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal.
3.3.17.2.5 Evidence of water damage.
3.3.17.2.6 Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
3.3.17.3 Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make
measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the
following:
3.3.17.3.1 Most remote area.
3.3.17.3.2 One location per floor.
3.3.17.3.3 One location for every 5000 sq. ft. (500 sq. m).
3.3.17.4 Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-
hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
3.3.17.4.1 Temperature.
3.3.17.4.2 Relative humidity.
3.3.17.4.3 Air velocity.
3.3.17.4.4 Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
3.3.17.4.5 Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
3.3.17.4.6 Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
3.3.17.4.7 Formaldehyde (ppm).
3.3.18 Procedures for Reliability Trial Test
3.3.18.1 After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible for
running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed.
3.3.18.2 The whole of the trial of the Cooling Plant shall take place during the period between the
15th June and 15th September, and the Heating Plant during the period between the 30th
November, and 1st March. The Ventilation trial shall take place at any reasonable time
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 18
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.18.3 The trial shall last for a period of 15 consecutive days and nights during which time the
whole of the plant shall operate continuously, without adjustment or repair to the
3.3.18.4 During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the Refrigerating
Plant, the Heating Plant and the air handling equipment.
3.3.18.5 The test data shall not deviate by more than three percent (3%) from the guaranteed
capacity data.
3.3.18.6 Temperature readings shall be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air handling
unit.
3.3.18.7 Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet the Contract requirements, it shall
be adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The complete
performance test shall then be repeated.
3.3.18.8 A `Taking Over Certificate' with or without reservations shall be issued by the Engineer on
the satisfactory completion of all the tests, provided that these reservations are of minor
importance and will not hinder the satisfactory operation of the Plant.
3.4.2 A maintenance manual and schedule based on the instructions for preventative
maintenance or service from the manufacturers or suppliers of equipment or according to
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) 62.1 – 2007 or equivalent as approved by Authority should be provided.
3.5.2 The training of operators assigned by the client for operation of all major equipment and
controls as decided by the Engineer.
3.5.3 Training should be provided by original suppliers of equipment for a period of at least one
week and or when requested by client through out the liability period.
3.5.4 The replacement of parts or whole equipment that show any manufacturing or installation
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 19
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.5.5 Necessary staff to carryout the above shall be provided to the job site during the said year.
3.5.6 On call emergency services (24 hours), particularly for elevators, escalators, travelators
and fire alarm system.
3.5.5 Guarantee of every piece of equipment from any manufacturing or installation defects for
client.
3.6.1 The Contractor shall issue a letter of guarantee for every compressor installed under his
contract for a period of five years, starting from the date of issue of the completion
certificate. Contractor shall remove the defective compressor and install a new one at his
own expense including all necessary accessories and shall do the necessary testing and
commissioning. Contractor shall submit a report to the Engineer explaining the reason of
damage and methods to prevent it from happening.
3.6.2 The Contractor shall issue in favour of the client all original manufacturers extended
guarantees as required by specifications or by Engineers approval conditions or by
manufacturers initial proposal prior to final handing over to the client.
3.7 Maintenance and Guarantee
3.7.1 The Contractor shall submit along with his quotation a separate price for the maintenance
of all of the Air Conditioning and plumbing works. The price shall be good for two
consecutive years after the end of the maintenance period.
3.7.2 The price shall cover, but shall not be limited to the following items:
3.7.2.1 Yearly Maintenance
3.7.2.1.1 At the end of each year all equipment shall be serviced (checked and repaired), i.e.
compressors, motors, pumps, heaters fans, etc.
3.7.2.2 Weekly Inspection
3.7.2.2.1 Competent technical representatives of the Contractor shall make weekly inspections to
the plant and record the following readings on special log sheets:
3.7.2.2.2 Discharge and suction pressure and oil pressure of each packaged unit.
3.7.2.2.3 Power consumption (Amps) of each compressor, condensor fan, pump motor, heater, .etc.
3.7.2.2.4 Any inconsistency in the above readings or non compliance with manufacturers data shall
be looked into by the Contractor; and after the cause is identified, he shall rectify and
report it to the client. In the weekly inspection, the Contractor should make sure that the
(A/C) design conditions inside the spaces are maintained and to the satisfaction of the
occupants and that no machine or equipment is creating excessive noise.
3.7.2.3 Monthly Inspection
3.7.2.3.1 The Contractor's representative shall make the following monthly inspections:
3.7.2.3.1.1 Check and clean air fitlers of air handlers, fan coil units, fresh air grilles, etc..
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.7.2.3.1.2 Check insulation of A/C pipes, ducts and check evidence of any condensation & do the
necessary repairs.
3.7.2.3.1.3 Clean drain pans and drain pipes of all air handlers and fan coil units.
3.7.2.3.1.4 Check, adjust, and calibrate control system of air handlers and fan coil units.
3.7.2.3.1.5 Check and tighten belts of all fans.
3.7.2.3.1.6 Check the compressor's oil and refrigerant gas quantities and maintain always the
required quantity.
3.7.2.4 Spare Parts
3.7.2.4.1 Contractor shall immediately replace any damaged or fautly item; spare parts should be
always available. Parts shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor.
3.7.2.5 Exclusions
3.7.2.5.1 Contractor shall submit a list of exclusions (if any) to the above, which he thinks are not
part of his responsibilities or duties.
3.7.2.6 Contractor's Attendance
3.7.2.6.1 The Contractor is expected to respond to all requests from owner or owner's
representative or owner's consultant to attend to the faults within 24 hours from the time
he is called upon. He shall carry the necessary service as per the terms of the
maintenance contract.
3.7.2.7 Guarantees
3.7.2.7.1 The contractor shall give the following guarantees for the following equipment whereby he
shall immediately replace the same whenever found defective.
- Compressors 5 years
- Pump motors 5 years
- Condenser fins. 5 years
- Evaporators 5 years
- Air Handlers motors 5 years
- Air Handler casing against any rust, or corrosion or discoloration 5 years
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 - 21
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fiberglass Insulation

2.2 Elastomeric Insulation
2.3 Rockwool Insulation
2.4 Phenolic Insulation
2.6 Vapour Barrier Coating
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.3 Finishes
3.4 Installation of Equipment and Duct Insulation
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract.
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 Supply and install all insulation and lagging on piping, vessels or ducts as indicated on the
drawings or specified to be insulated. Authority regulations, Civil Defence, and
Sustainability requirements shall also be considered and more stringent specifications to
be adopted
content limits.
1.1.3 All insulation material shall have Zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP=0), not more than
0.05 parts per million (ppm) added formaldehyde, and less than Five Global Warming
Potential (GWP < 5).
1.1.4 Canvas jacket and all insulating materials shall be non-combustible, or self-extinguishing
non-flame spread grade.
1.1.5 Insulation in exposed areas, i.e. permanently visible or otherwise indicated, shall be
protected with aluminium cladding as specified herein after.
1.2.1 All items specified in this section are included in each of following divisions, sections and
sub-sections as applicable, as if repeated therein verbatim.
Section 23 20 00 - HVAC Piping and Pumps
Section 23 30 00 - HVAC Air Distribution
Section 23 50 00 - Central Heating Equipment
Section 23 60 00 - Central Cooling Equipment
Section 23 70 00 - Central HVAC Equipment
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.1 The thickness of the insulation applied to pipes, ducts and equipment shall be as stated
hereinafter.
Sizes
Service Location Inches Phenolic Elastomeric Fiberglass Rockwool
(mm) Thickness Thickness Thickness Thickness
Inch(mm) Inch(mm) Inch(mm) Inch(mm)
Chilled water pumps, heat
exchangers, water - - - 2 (50) -
expansion tanks, chillers.
Up to 2
Chilled water pipes In conditioned spaces 1 (25) 1 (25) -
(50)
2½ (65)
Chilled water pipes In conditioned spaces 1½ (38) 1½ (38) -
and larger
In unconditioned
up to 8
Chilled water pipes spaces & running 2½ (65) 2½ (65) -
(200)
exposed
In unconditioned
Chilled water pipes spaces & running 10 (250) 3 (75) 3(75) -
exposed
In unconditioned
12(300)
Chilled water pipes spaces & running 4(100) 4(100)
and larger
exposed
A/C condensate drain pipes - - - ½ (13) -
Treated fresh air, supply
In conditioned spaces - - 1 (25) 1 (25)
and return air ducts
Treated fresh air, supply In unconditioned
- - 2 (50) 2 (50)
and return air ducts spaces
Kitchen hood exhaust duct - - - - - 3 (75)
Refrigerant suction and
- - - 3/4 (20) -
Liquid lines
Applicable
Reference Code Abbreviation Title of Standard
Standard
Association Ventilating Systems.
NFPA 90B Standard for warm Air Heating and

Air Conditioning Systems.
American Society for ASTM ASTM E96 Test method for water vapour
Testing and Material transmission of materials.
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fiberglass Insulation
2.1.1 Insulation in air-conditioned spaces shall be blankets of fibrous glass with a density of not
less than 1.5 lb/ft3 (24 kg/m3) and a K-factor of not more than 0.26 Btu-in/ft2 hr. deg. F
(0.038 W/m deg. K) at a mean temperature of 75 deg. F (24 deg C) for concealed
insulation.
2.1.2 Insulation in un air-conditioned spaces, mechanical rooms, and shafts shall be rigid board
of fibre glass with a resin binder and a density of not less than 4 lb/ft3 (64 kg/m3) and a K-
factor of not more than 0.21 Btu-In/ft2. hr. oF (0.030 W/m o K) at a mean temperature of
50 o F (10o C) for outdoor application.
2.1.3 For cold air application, insulation shall be faced with factory applied reinforced foil and
paper which comprises aluminium foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated
to 40 lbs chemically treated fire retardant kraft.
2.1.4 50 x 50 x 0.6 mm galvanised sheet metal angles shall be attached at corners.
2.2 Elastomeric Insulation
2.2.1 Flexible closed cell, elastomeric/ Polyolefin Foam insulation shall comply with ASTM
C518. The thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.26 Btu.In/ft2.hr.0.039 W/m0K at a mean
temperature of 75 deg. F (24 deg C) with density 55-70 kg/m3.
2.2.2 Insulation thickness should satisfy the ambient condition of 46 deg.C and RH up to 85%
with condensate temperature of 8 -10 deg .C and give life time warranty that condensation
will not occur on insulation.
2.2.3 Fire− resistant shall comply with Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance to ASTM E84\UL723.
2.2.4 The product shall have Authority approval and the smoke toxicity shall not exceed the max
allowable concentration for the following combustion gases, CO, HCL, HBr, HF, HCN,
NOx, SO2
2.2.5 The product shall be weather resistance with unchanged in physical and thermal
properties of minimum 25 years and shall comply with ASTM E-90 for water vapour
permeability.
2.2.6 Insulation shall have a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil of min. 8.00 Micron and
the surface finish shall be as specified elsewhere.
2.3 Rockwool Insulation
2.3.1 Insulation shall be 75mm thick mineral rock wool rigid board form, 12.5 lbs. /ft3 (200
Kg/m3) density, 0.38 Btu.In/ft2.hr. 0F (0.055 W/m. 0K) K-factor at mean temperature of 100
0F (380C applicable maximum temperature is 1200 0F (650 0C) Rockwool should not be
classified as a potential carcinogen. It shall be aluminium faced and shall be secured with
metal mechanical surfaces fasteners on 460 mm centres both ways and metal bands on
460mm centres. Insulation shall be applied over a heavy coating of special adhesive as
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
If it is applied to the pipe, it shall be with longitudinal joints staggered. Lamps and sealing
strips shall be sealed applying fire adhesive or circumferential joints and finished with 8
ounce glass cloth jacket and vapour barrier neatly pasted on. The insulation shall be
secured with aluminium bands, using a minimum of three bands per block.
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.4 Phenolic Insulation
2.4.1 This type of insulation shall be applied for pipes as specified
2.4.2 Pipe insulation shall be preformed rigid close cell Phenolic formed to fit the pipe snuggly.
The Phenolic insulation shall have a minimum density of 2.4 lbs/ft3 (37 kg/m3), and
thermal conductivity of 0.147 Btu.in/ft2. Hr. 0F (0.021 W/m.0K) at a mean temperature of
75 deg. F (24 deg C). Insulation and its related materials shall have fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per FM, ASTM E 84,
NFPA 255, UL 723; and by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. The insulation shall meet SBI Class B S1 D0, as per EN13823. The
flame-spread index shall be 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. The
insulation shall have a factory applied high density white kraft bonded to aluminium foil.
The kraft paper shall be chemically treated to assure fire and smoke safety and to prevent
corrosion of foil. The insulation shall be applied to the pipe with longitudinal joints
staggered. Laps and sealing strips shall be sealed applying fire adhesive or circumference
joints.
2.4.3 The insulation used under pipes for supporting should be of the same material but with
minimum density of 7.5 lbs. /ft3 (120 kg/m3).
2.4.4 The insulation shall be secured with aluminium bands, using a minimum of three bands
per block.
2.4.5 The surface finish shall be an 8-ounce canvas cloth embedded between 2 coats of vapour
barrier. Aluminium cladding shall be provided.
2.5.1 This type of insulation shall apply to chillers, expansion tanks, boilers, boiler circulator,
pumps, heat exchangers and domestic hot water tanks.
2.5.2 This type of insulation and the thickness shall as shown in Schedule of Insulation
Thickness
2.5.3 Insulation shall be removable and replaceable covers consisting of No. 18 gauge
aluminium sheet metal jacket lined with rigid insulation. All voids between insulation and
equipment housing shall be carefully filled with insulation.
2.5.4 The metal casing shall be tightly sealed.
2.6 Vapour Barrier Coating
2.6.1 The vapour barrier coating shall be tough flexible fire resistive elastomeric finish for
protection of thermal insulation and ultra violet. It shall meet the requirements of NFPA
90A and 90B and shall be UL classified.
2.6.2 The vapour barrier shall have water vapour permeability not more than 0.02 perms at 0.75
mm dry film thickness when tested to ASTM E96 Method.
2.6.3 When tested for surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) it shall have a flame spread
rating not exceeding 10 and smoke developed not higher than 15.
2.6.4 The vapour barrier shall be suitable for application by brush or spray. It shall be applied in
2 coats with heavy duty fire retardant canvas cloth (8 ounce) embedded between the
coats. Canvas overlap at joints shall be at least 50 mm. The wet film thickness of each
coat shall be at least 1.25 mm.
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6.5 Vapour barrier coating shall be applied above thermal insulation of G.I. Ducts, Range
Hood Duct, chilled water, water supply (hot and cold), refrigeration and condensate drain
pipes.
2.7.1 Aluminium cladding shall be of 20 gauge it shall be used as protection against weather
and mechanical damage.
2.7.2 Aluminium cladding shall be applied on top of insulation above the canvas jacket and
vapour barrier coating. It shall be held in place by means of self tapping screws and by
using 38 mm wide aluminium straps at 300 mm centres with aluminium or stainless steel
angle rib clips, all joints shall be sealed with grey coloured suitable sealant. Rivets and
screws shall not be used for cladding unless approved by the Engineer for use on elbows
and fittings. Cladding shall be overlapping at joints; horizontal seams shall be at the
bottom. Cladding on ducts shall be formed in such a way to allow for rain/dew drain off.
2.7.3 Fabricated 20 gauge aluminium covers shall be used for valves and fittings. The covers
shall be in two sections hinged together and held in place by suitable stainless
steel/aluminium clasps.
2.7.4 Aluminium cladding shall be applied to all insulated pipes (chilled water, condensate
drains, etc.,) and ducts (Galvanised, Range Hood Duct, and Pre-insulated) running
exposed on roof, outside building, inside parking floors and in plant rooms
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 All insulation shall have a smooth, homogenous and lineable finished surface. All rigid
sections shall be concentric and be accurately matched for thickness.
3.1.2 All surface to be insulated shall be dry and free from loose scale, dirt, oil or water when
insulation is applied.
3.1.3 Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that air circulation within the insulation or
between the insulation and the pipe shall be avoided.
3.1.4 No surface imperfections in the insulation such as damaged edges, or ends, cracks and
small voids or holes shall be accepted.
3.1.5 Insulation materials shall be stored and protected from weather moisture, accumulations
of foreign matter, or possible damage in a dry and clean store.
3.1.6 Surface finishes and lagging adhesives shall not be diluted and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.7 Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of metal without causing damage to
insulation or surface finish.
3.2.1 Insulation thickness 2 ½" (65 mm) or less shall be applied in single layer with joints tightly
butted together.
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2 Insulation thickness 3" (80 mm) thick and more can be single or double layers with lateral
and longitudinal joints of the second layer staggered with those of the first layer. No
canvas is to be used between the layers.
3.2.3 All pipe covering shall fit snugly on the pipe to which it is applied. Inside circumference of
pipe covering when applied shall not vary from the outside circumference of the pipe by
more than 3mm. undersize.
3.2.4 Pipe insulation shall have factory applied jackets and secured with plastic bands at each
joint at centre of each section and where sections abut upon fittings, except where
otherwise specified.
3.2.5 Insulation shall only be applied to piping after all testing has been accomplished and after
all the coats of paint have been applied.
3.2.6 Pipe covering shall be terminated at a sufficient distance from all flanges to permit easy
removal of bolts.
3.2.7 Screwed, soldered, and welded fittings and valves (up to the bonnet) on 4”(100mm) pipe
and larger, shall be insulated with block insulation or pipe covering and shall be given a
trowelled coat of finish cement to present a smooth surface. Valves for the chilled water
shall be covered to the gland.
3.2.8 Screwed, soldered, and welded fittings and valves (up to the bonnet) up to 4”(100mm) in
size shall be covered with field fabricated metered segments of pipe insulation equal in
thickness to the adjoining insulated pipe and finished with standard weight canvas jacket.
Where hangers are installed on the pipe covered with insulation the entire hanger up to
the rod shall be insulated.
3.2.9 Where insulated piping is subject to movement and supported on roller hangers, steel
protection saddles shall be provided and welded to the pipe. Saddles shall be filled with
asbestos cement.
3.2.10 All insulated piping not supported on roller hangers and subject to movement, shall be
provided with protection shields at all hanger locations. Shields shall be of 3mm.
galvanized iron extending on each side of the hanger for a distance equal to the diameter
of the insulation and shall extend up the sides of the insulation to the centre of the pipe
and shall be provided with cork pad support.
3.2.11 Special care shall be exercised in insulating chilled water lines to prevent sweat leaks at
piping hanger locations.
3.2.12 Where standard insulation shapes are not available, cut, score or meter segmental or flat
block to fit contour of pipe, stagger joints of adjoining segments. Fit insulation carefully
and secure with wire. Smooth with insulating cement.
3.2.13 Insulate valves, strainers, fittings and flanges with identical material, density, thickness
and finish as the piping insulation. Use pre-molded insulation material where available,
otherwise use shaped block segments wire on with all edges filled with insulation cement
or filler.
3.2.14 Insulation for strainers shall permit removal of the basket without disturbing the insulation
of the strainer body.
3.2.15 Adhesives, sealants, vapor barriers, paints, etc., shall meet “Green Building Regulation &
Specification” for Voltile Organic Compounds, (VOCs) content limits.
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 Finishes
3.3.1 All pipes running in concealed spaces shall have canvas cover, securely fixed, overlaps
firmly pasted down, secured with aluminium bands at intervals and painted with two coats
of fire retardant emulsion paint.
3.3.2 All non-cladded pipes running inside building but exposed to view shall have same
treatment as for those in concealed spaces but with one coat of gloss paint, to an
approved colour, in addition.
3.4 Installation of Equipment and Duct Insulation
3.4.1 Curved or cylindrical equipment shall be insulated with blocks or curved segments in one
layer for thicknesses of 65 mm or less and two layers for thicknesses of 76 mm or more.
The insulation shall be applied with joints staggered and tightly butted together and held in
place with bands. Square cornered equipment such as boilers, ducts casings etc. shall be
insulated with block insulation protected at corners by metal shields and held in place
by bands, carried around the unit over the insulation and fastened tight.
3.4.2 Metal anchoring clips shall be welded to the equipment surface so that the band will pass
over them and may be wired to them after insulation is in place.
3.4.4 Any part of equipment that is normally removable for service such as heads of heat
exchangers, shall be insulated separately from the equipment.
3.4.5 No insulation shall be applied over nameplates.
3.4.6 Insulated ducts penetrating walls or floors shall be insulated completely thru penetration.
Provide waterproof calcium silicate insert, same thickness and jacketing as insulation with
wall flange for fire wall or floor penetrations, or as detailed on the Drawings.
3.4.7 Duct insulation or lining or any type of covering together with the applied adhesives shall
have a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of continued progressive
combustion and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50, wherever the duct crosses a
fire wall or penetrates a roof slab.
3.4.8 Duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers and fire doors so as not to interfere with
the operation of services.
3.4.9 All duct materials and coverings (insulation, pre-insulated panels, linings, etc.) shall meet
the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B Standards or equivalent European Standards.
3.4.10 Adhesives, sealants, vapor barriers, paints, etc., shall meet the requirements of NFPA
90A and 90B and shall be UL Classified.
Section 23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
23 07 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

1.3 Shop Drawing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Control Panel and Control System

2.2 Temperature Controllers (With Remote Sensors)
2.3 Temperature Sensors
2.4 Room Thermostats
2.5 Control Motor (Actuator)
2.6 Humidity Sensors
2.7 Data Control (D/C) and Graphics Summary
2.8 Unitary DDC Controllers
2.9 Solenoid Valves
2.10 Transducers
2.11 Selector Switches Auto/Off/On
2.12 Thermometers
2.13 Pressure Gauges
2.14 Gauge Test Points
2.15 Filter Condition Indicators
2.16 Flow Meters
2.17 Water Flow Switches
2.18 Firestats
2.19 Smoke Detectors
2.20 Ammeters
2.21 Voltmeters
2.22 Air Flow Switches’ & Dirty Filter Switches
2.23 Energy BTU Meter
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.2 Testing
Section 23 09 00
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
23 09 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The contractor shall supply and install all the control equipment, auxiliary devices,
instruments, etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems described in the
specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings. The Drawings and the specifications are
complemented each to the other.
1.1.2 The sequence of operation of each system or piece of equipment is specified either under
the equipment specification section or detailed on the Drawings.
1.2.1 Control system shall be of the electronic type, (solid state) to provide the required
sequence of operation.
1.2.2 Provide all relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries,
accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable system.
1.2.3 Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus 2 degree F
(1 degree C) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point.
1.2.4 Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where
specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without override.
1.2.5 Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable Manufacturer.
1.2.6 Do not duplicate factory furnished controls of unitary equipment like refrigeration
machines, fan coil units, etc. but modify them to conform to these specifications:
1.2.7 Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification that
proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate Manufacturer's
equipment warranty.
1.2.8 The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with the
same time delays as specified for normal start-up.
1.2.9 Select the instrument so that the normal range of operating temperatures and pressures
falls within the middle-third of the instrument range. Use compound gauges when normal
operating pressure is near or below atmospheric.
1.2.10 Where thermometer sensing bulbs are inserted in air ducts or casings, provide perforated
bulb housing with a 3" (80 mm) diameter union flange to permit removal. Connections for
sensing elements are to be brass except where otherwise specified. Provide all
thermometers in piping systems with stainless steel wells and ¾" (20 mm) separable
sockets.
1.2.11 Provide extension necks where thermometers and pressure gauges are located in
insulated piping, vessels, ductwork, casings or equipment.
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.2.12 All thermometers and gauges shall have both English and metric units grading.
1.3 Shop Drawing
1.3.1 Shop Drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of the control
systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be identified by name
and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls.
1.3.2 Manufacturer's detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment
to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim. However, any
discrepancies between the content of this section and what is shown in Division 25, the
specification in Division 25 shall take precedence.

Section 23 73 10 - Indoor Air Handling Units
Section 23 74 33 - Packaged Outdoor Units
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the Drawings. Each
panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major equipment being controlled
together with their starters and necessary heat detector, alarm and other related safety
and fire alarm systems.
2.1.2 The control system shall be complete with all necessary transformers, thermostats,
valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated regulators required to maintain the
conditions desired together with the thermometers, gauges, and other necessary
accessories and the control wiring.
2.2 Temperature Controllers (With Remote Sensors)
2.2.1 Shall be supplied complete with metal cases and manual set point adjusters.
2.2.2 Room type controllers shall be mounted 1800 mm above the floor and in an accessible
location.
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.3 Panel-mounted controllers shall be supplied with metal mounting adaptor plate and
mounting assembly.
2.2.4 Controllers shall be designed for a throttling range of 2 °F (1 ° C) for a 3Vdc output
change with a control dial range 55-85 ° F (13-29 °C) and shall be suitable for ambient
operating limits 40-135 °F (4-57 °C).
2.3 Temperature Sensors
2.3.1 Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Integrated Automation Facility Controls.
2.4 Room Thermostats
2.4.1 Shall have metal locking covers and shall be provided with concealed adjustment means,
and with thermometers.
2.4.2 Each room thermostat shall be supplied with metal auxiliary mounting bases and metal
sub-base for surface mounting applications; plus a plastic guard to protect thermostat from
damage.
2.4.3 Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated snap action switch. They
shall be underwriters' laboratories inc., listed at an electrical rating appropriate to the
application. Thermostat shall operate on 2 °F (1 °C) differential and shall have a control
dial range 55-85 deg F (13-29 deg C).
2.4.4 Low voltage thermostats shall be of the self contained type with a 1000 ohm sensing
element and an amplifier. Thermostat shall have a control dial range 55-85 deg F (13-29
deg C) and a throttling range of 2 °F (1 °C) for a 3 Vdc output change.
2.5 Control Motor (Actuator)
2.5.1 Electric, reversible, spring-return, proportional type complete with linkage.
2.5.2 Suitable for damper operation.
2.5.3 Shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action as specified.
2.6 Humidity Sensors
2.6.1 Refer to Section 25 50 00 – Integrated Automation Facility Controls.
2.7 Data Control (D/C) and Graphics Summary
2.7.1 All hardware, custom software, application software, graphics, etc., necessary to
accomplish the control sequences and display the graphics specified shall be provided as
part of this contract. Provide all controllers, inputs, outputs, valves, dampers, actuators
and flow meters required to provide the control and graphic data described. Provide
software set-points required for display in logical groups and graphics.
2.7.2 Each digital output shall have a software-associated monitored input. Any time the
monitored input does not track it’s associated command output within a programmable
time interval, a “command failed” alarm shall be reported. Where calculated points (such
as I/s) are shown, they shall appear in their respective logical groups.
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7.3 Unless otherwise specified or approved prior to bidding, the primary analog input and the
analog output of each DDC loop shall be resident in a single remote panel containing the
DDC algorithm, and shall function independent of any primary or UC communication links.
Secondary (reset type) analog inputs may be received from the primary network, but
approved default values and /or procedures shall be substituted in the DDC algorithm for
this secondary input if network communications fail or if the secondary input becomes
erroneous or invalid.
2.7.4 In addition to the Unitary DDC Controller data points specified to be presented on
colorgraphic displays, technical data for each zone mechanical apparatus shall be
presented to operators on the OWS in full English menu text displays including the
apparatus name; heating and cooling PID loop P, I and D gains; primary I/s airflow (if
measured); damper position (% open); reheat status/value; cooling set point; heating
dead-band; minimum and maximum I/s set points; reheat I/s set point; unoccupied
temperature set point; temperature sensor calibration offset and bypass push button time,
in minutes. All such points shall be presented in complete and direct read-write
(command) format, unless they are provided in commendable colorgraphic displays.
2.7.5 In addition to Graphics of building systems with dynamic data points shall be provided for
each mechanical and electrical equipment but not limited.
2.8 Unitary DDC Controllers
2.8.1 All FCU’s in lobbies and mechanical rooms shall be provided with DDC based controller
with PID control action. The controller shall have communication capability with the BMS.
The BMS shall have the capability of resetting the temperature setpoint on the FCU
Controller.
2.9 Solenoid Valves
2.9.1 Solenoid valves shall be the piston type suitable for cold water, hot water, steam, fuel, oil
and other non-aggressive media up to a temperature of 180C. Solenoid Valves shall be
sized for 1600kPa with actuators 240Vac.
2.10 Transducers
2.10.1 Analog output transducers shall be designed for precision closed loop control with
pneumatic repeatability error no greater than 1% or equal approved.
2.11 Selector Switches Auto/Off/On
2.11.1 Manual override switches AUTO/OFF/ON shall be part of DDC panel/controller. The
switches shall be installed in side of DDC panel with necessary auxiliary contacts to DDC
controller to indicate selector position. The manual override function shall be available
even if the DDC/CPU is failed. The BMS contractor shall be responsible to coordinate
proper connection between the selector switches and starters and ensure that the
switches shall provide manual override functions in case that DDC/CPU fails.
2.12 Thermometers
2.12.1 Permanently installed thermometers shall be mercury-in-steel dial type 150mm diameter
having a suitable length of copper covered steel capillary tubing to connect the dial with
The bulb shall be supplied and installed as specified and as approved by the Engineer.
Each thermometer shall be provided with back flange or arranged for flush mounting.
2.12.2 In-glass type thermometers with metal guard shall be supplied and installed as specified
or as approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, thermometer bulbs shall be
of steel type, screwed ¾" (20mm) British Standard pipe and supplied with stainless steel
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
separable pockets suitable for screwing, brazing or welding into the pipe carrying the
medium to be measured.
2.12.3 Thermometers shall be tested to read alike on the midscale band, with their bulbs
immersed in water, and the discrepancy between the highest and the lowest thermometer
shall not exceed 0.5 degree C.
2.12.4 A red mark on each thermometer scale shall indicate the working temperature at the point
of measurement.
2.12.5 Thermometers shall be marked in both Degree C and Degree F.
2.13 Pressure Gauges
2.13.1 Bourdon-tube type with 120 mm. diameter cast aluminium case with moisture-proof and
dustproof blowout discs. Panel mounted gauges to have steel or aluminium hinged rings;
direct mounted gauges to have back flange, black numerals on a white background face.
2.13.2 Pressure gauge shall be furnished with a lever-operated gauge cock, and shall have
snubbers installed between the gauge cock and the gauge to eliminate pulsations.
2.13.3 Bourdon Tube shall be Phosphor bronze, (beryllium copper bellows).
2.13.4 Socket shall be Stainless steel.
2.13.5 Accuracy shall be at least 1% of scale range , range shall be equal to twice the rated
working pressure of the unit ( pumps, chillers,....) reading shall be in psi. and Kpa.
2.13.6 Gauges for combined pressure and vacuum service to have compound seal.
2.14 Gauge Test Points
2.14.1 Gauge test points for temperature and pressure of flow shall be installed in all systems
and particularly pairs of valves for regulating mains at flow and return connections to all
plant and at all thermostatic elements and sensors.
2.14.2 Pressure gauge test points shall consist of 6mm. bore bosses in the pipe work fitted with a
test cock and plugged off.
2.14.3 Air flow test points shall be provided in the air ducting at all branches and regulating
dampers adjacent to each plant item and automatic control element at all fan inlets and
discharges and elsewhere as required.
2.14.4 Test points shall consist of a 40mm. diameter hole drilled through the ducting and covered
with a removable spring clip fastened cover.
2.15 Filter Condition Indicators
2.15.1 Indicators shall be provided for all air filter units on air handlers and main fresh air louvers.
The indicators shall be spirit or moving vane type suitably calibrated and provided with
flexible pressure tubes to a test point on each side of all 'roughing' and 'fine' filters.
2.15.2 The position on the gauge dial at which the filters require cleaning or changing shall be
clearly marked.
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.16 Flow Meters
2.16.1 Supply and install flow meters in the primary chilled water flow line and each refrigeration
machine delivery line. The meter connections and cocks shall be carried well above the
line.
2.17 Water Flow Switches
2.17.1 Water flow switches shall be of the paddle type electric. Those flow switches used in
chilled water applications shall be of the vapor proof type to prevent condensation on the
electrical switch.
2.17.2 Paddles shall be properly trimmed for the pipe sizes in which they are installed. The flow
switches shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations regarding
locations in horizontal piping and proper distance from fittings.
2.18 Firestats
2.18.1 Provide manual reset firestat for each fan of 750 cfm (0.35 m3/sec) or larger capacity, to
stop the fan on rise above set point temperature 136 °F (58 ° C).
2.19 Smoke Detectors
2.19.1 Supply and install duct mounted smoke detectors as shown on the drawings and as
required by NFPA code.
2.19.2 Smoke detectors shall be as specified under the Fire Alarm System section of the
specifications.
2.19.3 Smoke detectors shall be supplied complete with the necessary power relays and control
wiring to perform the proper operations and function specified in the A/C units control
diagrams.
2.20 Ammeters
2.20.1 One 100 mm dial ammeter shall be supplied for each motor 10 HP (7.5KW) or larger, and
for all electrical apparatus fed from the control panel. Ammeter shall be red lined at the
normal running load.
2.20.2 Refer to electrical specifications
2.21 Voltmeters
2.21.1 One 150 mm dial voltmeter shall be supplied to indicate the voltage of the motor control
center in each Plant-Room.
2.21.2 The Voltmeter shall be complete with a seven-position, rotary switch to enable reading the
voltage between all phases and neutral.
2.21.3 Refer to electrical specifications
2.22 Air Flow Switches’ & Dirty Filter Switches
2.22.1 Differential type pressure switches shall be provided for these applications. The switch
shall be complete with connecting tube and metal bends for connections to the duct.
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.23 Energy BTU Meter
2.23.1 BTU metering system shall measure the air conditioning energy consumed. The meters
shall work as stand alone devices as well as integrated part of BMS and must be
connected to allow real-time profiling and management of energy consumption. All meters
must be capable of remote data access and must have data logging capability. The
meters readings and actual consumption details should only be for demand management
and cost allocation purposes The readings shall be displayed and printed out from the
BMS central. Each BTU unit shall include the following:-
2.23.2 Tow immersion type temperature sensors to measure entering and leaving temperatures.
Insertion Flow sensor (pulse out put) to measure water flow.
2.23.3 A calculator unit to calculate BTU consumption based on gathered data, which shall give a
pulse out put to a Automatic Meter Reader (AMR) connected on LON WORKS/M-bus
network. The BMS reads the BTU consumption data through AMR.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made.
3.1.2 Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats 1400 mm above the floor,
measured to the center line of the instruments.
3.1.3 Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up.
3.1.4 Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of wiring and shall
terminate on identified terminal strips.
3.1.5 The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate removal
of instruments without disturbing others.
3.1.6 Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service
engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be
black with white lettering
3.1.7 Mount pressure gauges directly at the sensing point unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.8 Locate temperature sensing devices in a portion of the fluid stream where it will measure
the average fluid temperature without obstructing flow. Increase pipes 1 ½" (40 mm) in
diameter and smaller at least one pipe size at the point of insertion.
3.2 Testing
3.2.1 After completion of installation, all automatic controls shall be regulated and adjusted and
placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the Engineer and a
maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications and sheets for all
instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor.
3.2.2 After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the
presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control system
to meet contract requirements.
Section 23 09 00
23 09 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UPVC Pipes Type 1

2.2 Pre-insulated Piping
2.4 Joints Between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric Isolators)
2.5 Black Steel (ERW )
2.6 Piping Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.5 Pipe Sleeves
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Contract Conditions.
content limits.
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers, Supports and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping
Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment
Section 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
1. American Water AWWA C601-68
Works Association C501-67
2. American Society ASTM ASTM C425 Specifcation for compression joing for
for Testing and vitrified clay pipe and fittings.
Materials
ASTM A53-88a Specification for pipe, steel, black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless.
ASTM B88 Specification for seamless copper
water pipe.
ASTM B280-88 Specification for seamless copper
tube for A/C and refrigeration field
service.
ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts
and Studs. 60,000psi tensile strength
(PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80,
and 120.
3. American Standard ASA ASA 40.1 -
Association
ASA B16.22 -
ASA B1618 -
ASA B9.1 -
ASA B35.5 -
4. British Standards BS
soil and venting pipes, fittings and
accessories.
pipe and fittings.
pipe and fittings (external diameter
34.6 mm, 41.0 mm and 54.1 mm.)
BS 3505 Specification for unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pressure
pipes for cold potable water.
supply.
BS 4346 Part 2 Mechanic joints and fittings,
principally of unplasticized PVC.
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
BS 4660 Specification for unplasticized

polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes and
plastics fittings of nominal sizes 110
and 160 for below ground gravity
drainage and sewerage.
pipe and fittings for gravity sewers.
BS 1387 Specification for screwed and
socketed steel tubes and tubulars and
for plain and steel tube suitable for
welding or for screwing to BS21 pipe
threads.
alloys, tubes.
BS 3601 Specification for carbon steel pipes
and tubes with specified room
temperature properties for pressure
pipes.
BS 21 Specification for pipe threads for
tubes and fittings where pressure
tight joints are made on the threads.
5. American Society ASHRAE - -
for Heating,
Refrigeration and
Air Conditioning
Engineers
6. Deutsches Institute DIN DIN 19534 -

for Normung
7. American National ANSI ANSI B18.2.2
Standards Institute
ANSI B31.1
ANSI A21,10,11 -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the un-plasticized rigid type and of high density
2.1.2 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 shall comply with BS EN 1329-1: 2000 specification for pipes,
fittings and the system.
2.1.3 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 piping systems shall be used in the field of A/C condensate drain.
2.1.4 UPVC Pipes Type 1 piping systems sockets and spigots shall be either for solvent cement
joints or ring seal joints.
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 Pre-Insulated Piping
2.2.1 Pre-insulated piping system shall be applicable to underground chilled water piping and
shall be as described hereinafter.
2.2.2 All pipes shall be factory pre-insulated, suitable for a temperature range of 40° F–180° F.
2.2.3 Carrier pipe shall be black seamless carbon steel pipe to BS 1387 medium weight for
sizes up to 6” (150mm) diameter and BS 3601 for sizes above 6” (150mm) diameter or
ASTM A53 GR.B schedule 40.
2.2.4 Insulation shall be factory injected polyisocyanurate foam insulation with 50 kg/m3 density
and a minimum thickness of 50 mm, having a thermal conductivity of 0.023 w/m degree C
at 10 deg. C mean temperature.
2.2.5 Outer casing shall be uPVC pressure pipe to BS 3505:1968.
2.2.6 Fittings shall be butt weld type to ANSI B16-9 and BS 1640 made of seamless carbon
steel to ASTM A324B grade WPB.
2.2.7 Field joints shall be after welding and hydrostatic pressure testing all field joints shall be
insulated and sealed following manufacturers recommendations.
2.2.8 Contractor shall submit necessary calculations for pipe expansion which shall be designed
to be absorbed by bends.
2.2.9 Underground pipes not located in concrete trenches shall be carefully backfilled and hand
tamped in 150 mm layers until a cover of at least 600 mm from the top of the pipe has
been achieved. Backfill shall be sand or fine gravel less than 12 mm diameter and shall
be free of rocks or foreign material. Pipes located in roads shall be protected by precast
concrete slab over the bedding.
2.3.1 All flanged joints shall be made up with Compressed Non Asbestos Fibre Solid Rubber
(CNAF). Gaskets shall be 1.5mm thick.
2.3.2 Bolts for flanges shall be of low carbon steel with hexagonal heads and hard pressed steel
hexagon nuts. Bolts shall be to ASTM specifications A 307 or SAE grade 2, with tensile
strength of 64000 psi (441.3 Mpa) minimum.
2.3.3 All bolts holes shall be spot faced.
are used.
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Black Steel (ERW)
2.5.1 Pipes shall be black mild steel of the ERW type to B.S. 1387 "medium weight" or ASTM A
53-88a Sch. 40. All pipe fittings elbows, tees, crosses, unions, reducers, etc. shall be of
the same quality and weight as the pipes.
2.5.2 All joints shall be welded by an approved welding process, each joint being of sufficient
strength to withstand the stresses imposed by internal pressure, thermal expansion and
weight of tube, fittings and thermal insulation.
2.5.3 Pipes 2" (50 mm) and smaller, shall be screwed joints. Pipes 2½" (65 mm) and larger,
shall be flanged joints
2.5.4 All welded tees, branches, vent pipes, reducers, etc. shall have bevelled joints, and
finished off with a circumferential butt joint weld.
2.5.5 Welding of pipe work may be by either oxy-acetylene or electric process.
2.5.6 Pipes fittings shall be suitable for welded connections. Butt weld fittings shall be to ANSI
B 16-9 and BS 1640 made of seamless carbon steel to ASTM A324 B grade WPB.
2.5.7 Threaded fittings shall be to BS 21 (ISO 7) made of Malleable Iron to BS and ISO 49.
2.5.8 Unions fittings and flanges shall be installed at all valves inlets or outlets, on all pipe
branches and in general, every 15 metres of pipe run.
2.6 Piping Schedule
2.6.1 General
2.6.1.2 Piping Classes
- A/C Condensate drain in Mechanical areas. UPVC Type 1
- Chilled Water BSP
- A/C Condensate drain above false ceiling UPVC Type 1
- Underground chilled water pipes Pre-insulated pipes
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
½” (15 mm) drain gate valves shall be supplied and installed at all low points and riser
legs.
contract documents or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-condensibles.
3.2.4 Pipe bending shall not be restored to except in extreme cases and only after the written
3.2.7 Automatic air vents shall be installed at all air pocket locations, and / or at the highest
3.3.1 Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and control valves to
facilitate dismantling. Arrange connections so that the equipment being served may be
removed without disturbing the piping.
3.3.2 Install all supply piping, pumps and other equipment including gate valves and strainers
therein, at line size with the reduction in size being made only at the outlet piping from the
control valve at the full size of the tapping in the equipment served.
3.4.1 Unions and flanges shall be installed at all equipment inlets and outlets, at all valves inlets
or outlets, on all pipe branches and in general, every 15 metres of pipe run.
Flanges, suitable for welding, shall be used on all welded pipes and shall be all steel
construction to ASTM or BS Standards.
3.4.3 Threaded flanges shall be used on all threaded pipes; when flanged valves and
equipment are connected to the pipes, flanges shall be of the same quality and service as
the pipe served and shall conform to ASTM or BS Standards.
3.5 Pipe Sleeves
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________

walls.
with clean water.
Section 23 21 13
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
2.3 Sealed Type Expansion Tank
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
Section 23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 1a
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Contract Conditions.

1.1.8 All Electrical works and materials supplied and installed under this section shall confirm, in
all repect, to the requirements of Electrical Specifications.
1.1.9 The Contractor shall submit head calculation for Engineer review and approval.

Section 23 05 23 - General Duty Valves for HVAC
Section 23 05 48 - Mech. Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control for Piping and
Equipment
Section 23 05 53 - Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Section 23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 2a
_________________________________________________________________________________

head.
25%.
Motor should be sized to have minimum 20% extra as safety margin on the total power
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Each pump shall be of the type specified and shall be directly coupled to an electric motor
and mounted on a common steel base plate.
2.1.2 Pump casing shall be of the close-grained, high tensile strength gray iron, with smooth
water ways and fitted with bronze wear ring. Impeller shall be bronze, enclosed,
accurately machined and statically and dynamically balanced. Shaft shall be one piece
stainless steel with bronze sleeve of ample size to carry any axial and radial thrust.
2.1.3 Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and ceramic type. Pump ball
bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all axial and radial thrust.
2.1.4 Pump speed shall be as shown in the pump schedule.
2.1.5 Panel and door shall be rust proof.
2.2 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
2.2.1 For Specification of the variable speed / variable frequency drive, refer to Electrical
Specification.
Section 23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 3a
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 Sealed Type Expansion Tank
2.3.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings one expansion tank of the sealed
type of capacities as shown on the Drawings.
2.3.2 Each tank shall consist of the following items, all wired, piped and packaged into an
automatic unit.
2.3.2.1 Two pressurizing pumps (one standby), each of centrifugal end suction type.
2.3.2.2 Expansion tank, constructed of welded black steel 3mm. thick, and complying with ASME
recommendation.
2.3.2.3 Suction tank with ball valve, pressure switch for pump control.
2.3.2.4 Non-return valve, pressure regulating valve and gauge.
2.3.2.5 Hand-off-Auto switch.
2.3.2.6 Pumps starters.
2.3.2.3 High and low pressure cut out switches, which operate the pump when the pressure drops
due to loss of water from the system.
2.3.2.8 Necessary expansion vessels and valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.2 Pumps and motors shall be aligned and leveled throughout the length and width, and
leveling.
recommendations.
Section 23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 4a
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
Engineer.
tightness.
a. Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.

b. Shut-off head.
c. Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1-2007 or equivalent as approved by Authority containing the
following material:-
Section 23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 5a
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 21 23
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 6a
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Copper Pipes-CuP-Type 3

2.2. UPVC Pipes Type 1
2.3 Joints Between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric Isolators)
2.4 Piping Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.5 Pipe Sleeves
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Works of this Section shall be governed by Contract Conditions.
1.1.2 This section describes basics materials and requirements for refrigerant piping work
services installations for building.
Section 23 05 29 - Hangers, Supports and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
1. American Water AWWA C601-68 -
Works Association C501-67
2. American Society for ASTM D1785 Specification for poly (vinyl chloride)
Testing and Materials (PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80,
and 120.
3. American Standard ASA ASA 40.1 -
Association
ASA B16.22 -
ASA B1618 -
ASA B9.1 -
ASA B35.5 -
4. British Standards BS
BS 4514 Specification for unplasticized PVC soil
accessories.

chloride (PVC-U) pressure pipes for cold
potable water.

supply.
BS 4346 Part 2 Mechanic joints and fittings, principally

of unplasticized PVC.

fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160 for
below ground gravity drainage and
sewerage.
BS 5481 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe

and fittings for gravity sewers.

alloys, tubes.

BS 3601 Specification for carbon steel pipes and
tubes with specified room temperature
properties for pressure pipes.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
5. American Society for ASHRAE - -

Heating,
Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning
Engineers
6. Deutsches Institute DIN DIN 19534 -
for Normung
7. American National ANSI ANSI B18.2.2
Standards Institute
ANSI B31.1
ANSI A21,10,11 -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Copper Pipes-CuP-Type 3
2.1.1 Copper pipes shall be of the seamless hard drawn tubing type K or L to ASTM B 280-88.
Tubing, to be used, shall have been cleaned by the manufacturer and the open ends
capped to preserve cleanliness.
2.1.2 Cup shall be designed, constructed and installed in compliance with ASA B9.1 and ASA
B35.5 (safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration).
2.1.3 CuP shall be suitable for solder jointing with forged or wrought copper fittings.
2.1.4 Cast fittings should not be used because they might be porous and allow the refrigerant to
leak.
2.1.5 Surfaces to be soldered shall be cleaned bright. The joints shall be given a thin coating of
approved soldering flux and the tubing end inserted into the fitting as far as possible.
2.1.6 Heating and finishing of the joint shall be done in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer of the fittings. During the heating, the pipe and fittings must be kept
full of an inert gas N or CO2 to prevent formation of scale.
2.1.7 The solder metal to be used shall be a non-ferrous metal or alloy having a melting point
below 800 °F (427 °C) and below that of the metal being joined, an accepted solder is Sil-
Fos to make copper to copper joints.
2.1.8 When solenoid valves are being installed, the coil should be removed, and no heat shall
be applied near the bulb of the expansion valve.
2.1.9 CuP type 3 are allowed to be used to carry refrigerants and/or as specifically mentioned in
the schedule of pipe materials.
2.2.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipes (PVC) shall be of the un-plasticized rigid type and of high density
2.2.2 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 shall comply with BS EN 1329-1 : 2000 specification for pipes,
fittings and the system.
2.2.3 UPVC Pipes - Type 1 piping systems shall be used in the field of A/C condensate drain.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.4 UPVC Pipes Type 1 piping systems sockets and spigots shall be either for solvent cement
joints or ring seal joints.
are used.
2.4 Piping Schedule
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Piping classes are specified for each service in the following schedule. The designations
- A/C Condensate drains UPVC Type 1
- A/C Condensate drain above false ceiling. UPVC Type 1
- Refrigerant Pipes CUP Type - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.2 Install refrigerant pipe groups in parallel with each other.
3.1.3 Support, anchor all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and install
hangers, supports and accessories to the approval of the Engineer. Do not use wire, tape
or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe, weight of fluid and
weight of pipe insulation.
3.1.5 Uninsulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or
supports.
changes in direction . Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
freely expand and contract. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers. Pipe
hangers shall fit over insulated piping.
contract documents or where required to prevent pocketing of liquid or non-condensables.
measurement, either both English and both metric.
located close to wall.
3.2.6 Vertical piping supports – support pipes at every floor unless shown otherwise.
3600, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shields. Spacing between sleeve and
insulation shield, pack annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with double
neoprene coated asbestos-free rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover the
wall penetration opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall extend
at least 25mm. beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.
3.2.8 Maximum horizontal spacing for hangers are as follows:
- Up to 1 ¼" (32 mm) copper pipe----------2.0 meter

- 1 ½" (40 mm) and over copper pipe-------3.0 meter
3.3.1 Provide connections to equipment and control valves to facilitate dismantling. Arrange
connections so that the equipment being served may be removed without disturbing the
piping.
3.4.1 Unions and flanges shall be installed at all equipment inlets and outlets,
3.5 Pipe Sleeves
internal diameter at least 50mm larger than the diameter of the pipe for un-insulated lines
or of the insulation for insulated pipes.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________

walls.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.2 Chilled Water Piping Treatment System
Section 23 25 00
HVAC Water Treatment
23 25 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation, testing and
delivery in good operating conditions of a complete HVAC water treatment system as
described, shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the project.
1.1.2 The contractor shall employ a specialized and approved water treatment company to carry
out the works as per the following requirements.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories as well as
manpower, scaffolding, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense to execute a complete
operable system.
1.1.4 The contractor shall be responsible for flushing and cleaning the piping system and for the
supply and installation of water treatment chemicals and chemical feeding equipment for
the control of scale, corrosion and algae in the system.
1.1.5 The Contractor shall supply with each system an estimate of one year's supply of water
treatment chemical as specified.
1.1.6 A complete water analysis shall be conducted at the job site by the water treatment
chemical equipment supplier and a written report shall be submitted.
1.1.7 The Contractor shall include the services of a water treatment company every thirty (30)
days during the first full year after system is placed in operation. The company shall make
complete water analysis at the time of each service call and a written report of the findings
shall be left with the Owner's operating personnel. The Company shall also be present for
the initial charging of each system with chemical and shall fully instruct Owner's operating
personnel to insure continuation of proper water treatment.
1.1.8 The chemical feeding equipment shall be automatic as shown on Drawings.
1.1.9 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
1.1.9.1 The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are included in

Equipment
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation And Controls for HVAC
Section 23 25 00
23 25 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.1.10 The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other trades and to
suit site requirements.
1.2 Chilled Water Piping Treatment System
1.2.1 Automatic Chemical Feeding Unit
1.2.1.1 An automatic dosing system based on measuring conductivity shall be installed as shown
on drawings and consist of conductivity controller, conductivity sensor, metering pump and
plastic chemical tank of suitable capacity for dissolving required chemicals.
1.2.2 Initial Treatment Procedures
1.2.2.1 The chilled water system cleaning shall be carried out for removing rust, mill scale, debris
and other foreign bodies by:
1.2.2.1.1 Initially fill the system with fresh water and circulate water by operating existing system
circulating pumps for 30 minutes.
1.2.2.1.2 At the end of this period the system shall be partially drained from the lowest drain points.
1.2.2.1.2 Dismantle the strainers and re-fix after removing all impurities
1.2.2.1.4 Refill the system and operate the circulating pumps
1.2.2.1.5 Fill the system with sufficient dose of non acidic pre operational cleaner
1.2.2.1.6 Once it is established that the chemical is completely mixed after being circulated for at
least 16 hrs. The system shall be completely drained from the lowest drain point.
1.2.2.1.7 Refill the system with fresh water and re-circulate for a minimum period of 2 Hours and
then drain the whole water.
1.2.2.1.8 Continue flushing procedure with fresh water only until tests indicate that the water is of
an acceptable quality within the following parameters, before continuing the process:
Total dissolved solids - Equivalent to incoming main

pH - Equivalent to incoming main
Iron in solution - Maximum of 10 ppm above that of the incoming mains.
Appearance - Visually clear of bright water, free from suspended solids.
These readings shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer prior to

commencing the next stage.
1.2.3 Final Chemical Treatment
1.2.3.1 The final water treatment program shall be carried out by providing sufficient molybdate
type corrosion inhibitor to maintain a molybdate level of 150 – 200 ppm as Mo in system
water. Corrosion inhibitor should be effective for steel, copper, copper - alloy and mixed
metallurgy systems. The product shall contain a unique blend of scale inhibitors to
enhance performance of equipment by maintaining clean metal surfaces.
1.2.3.2 Finally the water shall be analyzed to confirm the correct condition and concentration of
chemicals, these results shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be recorded on a
Completion Certificate within the following control parameters.
Section 23 25 00
23 25 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
Control Limits-Chilled Water System
PARAMETER CONTROL LIMITS

pH 9.0 – 10.5
MOLYBDATES LEVEL Mo04 (PPM) 200 - 400
NITRITE, NO2 (PPM ) 600 - 900
IRON, Fe (PPM) < 3.0
TSS, (PPM) < 2.0
CORROSION RATE MPY (Mils/YR) STEEL < 3.0
CORROSION RATE MPY (Mils/YR) COPPER < 1.0
LEGIONELLA BACTERIA, QUARTERLY TEST NIL
Section 23 25 00
23 25 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
1.5 Ductwork Design Criteria
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Ductwork
2.2 Duct Hangers and Support
2.3 Flexible Ducts
2.4 Fire Rated Ductwork
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Duct Construction
3.3 Access Openings in Insulated Ducts
Section 23 31 00
HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 31 00 -1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes the design, supply, installation testing and commissioning of
complete ductwork system for air conditioning fresh air, exhaust and ventilation systems.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete above works based on design
consultant’s approval of submitted samples, documents etc as per specifications and
applicable standards.
1.3.1.1 Section 23 05 00 - Common Works Results for HVAC

1.3.1.2 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC
1.3.1.3 Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation
1.3.1.4 Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC
1.3.1.5 Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
1.3.1.6 Section 23 34 00 - HVAC Fans
1.3.1.7 Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units
1.3.1.8 Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
1.3.1.9 Section 23 40 00 - Air Cleaning Devices
1.3.1.10 Section 23 73 10 - Indoor Air Handling Units
1.3.1.11 Section 23 73 30 - Outdoor Exposed Air Handling Units
1.3.1.12 Section 23 81 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment
1.3.1.13 Section 23 82 00 - Convection Heating and Cooling Units
HVAC DW 144 Sheet Metal Ductwork

NFPA 90A Standard for the installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems
SMACNA Sheet Metal and air conditioning contractors national association
ASHRAE American society of heating, refrigeration and air conditioning.
UL 181 Underwriters laboratories
ASTM A653-99 Specification for steel sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
process.
Section 23 31 00
23 31 00 -2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5 Ductwork Design Criteria
1.5.1 All rectangular ducts shall be of the low pressure rating and all circular round ducts shall
be of the high pressure rating.
1.5.2 Galvanized sheet steel shall be fabricated, erected and installed in accordance with NFPA
90A and “SMACNA” sheet metal manuals.
1.5.3 All rectangular metal ducts shall be sealed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90 and
SMACNA low pressure duct construction standards. All high pressure ducts shall be air
tight.
1.5.4 Kitchen exhaust ducts shall be constructed and installed in conformance with NFPA 96
and must: Be constructed from carbon steel (for concealed ducts) with a minimum
thickness of 1.4 mm and from stainless steel (for exposed ducts) with a minimum
thickness of 1.1 mm.
1.5.5 Stair case or lift well pressurization duct shall be fire rated.
1.5.6 Ducts that meant to be used for smoke exhaust shall be fire rated unless:-
1.5.6.1 It doesn’t cross any other fire / smoke zones, i.e. its route within the same fire / smoke
zone which it serves.
1.5.6.2 Duct work with equipment connected to it, having external static pressure exceeding 250
Pascal, exposed ductwork to external ambient conditions, or within un air-conditioned
spaces must be pressure tested prior to occupancy in accordance with a method
approved by the municipality and compliant amount of air leakage.
1.5.6.3 Duct leakage testing must be carried by a specialist approved by the Authority for
commissioning of buildings.
1.5.6.4 It is contained solely in a fire rated shaft and no other services included in the same shaft.
1.5.6.5 All return air ducts inlets shall be fitted with stainless steel wire mesh.
1.5.7 If the HVAC system is used during construction, temporary return air filters must be
installed with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 52.2-2007 or an equivalent standard.
1.5.8 Adhesives, sealants, vapor barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Ductwork
2.1.1 Galvanised sheet steel ducts shall be of G90 coating designation within ASTM A653-99,
standard specification for ‘steel sheet zinc coated by the hot dip process’. The weight of
coating on both sides of duct shall be 0.9 oz/ft2 (275g/m2) as a minimum check limit triple
spot test.
2.1.2 The ducts’ gauges, thickness, type and method or jointing shall be as detailed and
tabulated on the Drawings and/or in compliance with ASHRAE Standards and Handbooks.
2.1.3 Stainless steel ducts shall be of 316 for all Toxic exhaust air in accordance with ASTM
Standards and Specifications.
Section 23 31 00
23 31 00 -3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 Duct Hangers and Support
2.2.1 Supply and install steel work necessary for the support of the ductwork Section 23 05 29.
Hangers shall be spaced not more than 3000 mm. apart, and at changes of direction.
Types and construction of hangers shall be as detailed on the Drawings and in
compliance with SMACNA recommendations.
2.3 Flexible Ducts
2.3.1 Ducts shall be all metal constructed of heavy gauge corrugated aluminium with water tight
continuous lock seams.
2.3.2 Ducts shall be UL 181 Class O non-combustible and complying to NFPA 90A & 90B, or
tested to BS 476 (parts 6, 7 & 20) class 1 flame spread and meets the requirements of CP
413 section A2.2.3.
2.3.3 For air conditioning flexible ducts shall have 25mm thick fiber glass insulation and
sheathed in durable polymer vapour barrier.
2.4 Fire Rated Ductwork
2.4.1 2 hours fire resisting ductwork shall be installed where indicated on the drawings or
mentioned in Specifications or required by Local Authorities.
2.4.2 Provide complete 2 hours fire rated fire resistive enclosures for smoke make-up, smoke
and pressurization systems where ductwork is located outside fire rated shaft.
2.4.3 Fire resisting duct and smoke duct shall be manufactured erected and tested in
accordance to BS 476 Part 24 ISO 6944.
2.4.4 Fire resisting duct shall prove by test that its cross section area is maintained above 75%
when subject to full fire temperature.
2.4.5 Fire resisting duct shall be constructed using higher GI sheet thickness with suitable
accessories in accordance with the duct manufacturer standards without any coating and
protected to insure maintaining the stability, integrity insulation supports, fixing throughout
the required period.
2.4.6 Fire resistance filling (fire stopping material) shall seal the clearances between fire
resisting duct and wall to insure the stability and integrity of the system.
2.4.6 Fire resisting duct shall be connected to fans by fire rated flexible connectors. Flexible
connectors shall be made of glass fabric coated on both sides with flame retardant silver
grey polyurethane rubber tested to BS476 Part 20.
2.4.7 All drop rods and exposed bearers shall be insulated in accordance to manufacturers
instructions to assure its fire resistance.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 Duct Construction
3.1.1 All ducts shall be constructed and erected so as to be rigid and free from sway, drumming
and movement. Duct work shall be true to sizes indicated on Drawings, straight and
smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Whenever internal acoustic lining is
indicated on the Drawings, the duct sizes have to be increased to accommodate the lining.
3.1.2 Ductwork joints shall be square with all sharp edges removed.
Section 23 31 00
23 31 00 -4
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.3 The ducts shall be routed with a minimum of directional changes and abrupt transitions.
3.1.4 Adequate space shall be provided around ducts to assure proper support and to allow the
installation of the specified insulation.
3.1.5 All connections between ductwork, including flexible connections, fittings and equipment,
shall be made with gradually tapered transition fittings.
3.1.6 Whenever a flexible duct is used to correct misalignment between the supply duct and the
diffuser ceiling location, the misalignment (or offset) shall not exceed one-eighth (1/8) the
length of the collar (or diffuser diameter). Flexible duct length shall not exceed 30 cm.
3.1.7 Changes in section of ductwork shall be effected by tempering in ducts with as long a
taper as possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45 degree angle from
the axis of the main duct unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.1.8 The ducts shall be securely anchored to the building in an approved manner.
3.1.9 The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of
operation.
3.1.10 The ducts and hangers shall be installed straight, plumb and level.
3.1.11 Wherever ducts pass thru walls or floors, a sleeve of galvanized mild steel sheet shall be
provided and the space between the pre-insulated duct and the sleeve shall be caulked
with lead wool and finished on each face with a mastic fill.
3.1.12 Flexible ducts should be kept as short as possible (maximum 30 cm) and fully extended.
3.1.13 All slip joints shall be made in the direction of flow.
3.1.14 All elbows shall have a centre line radius equal to at least 1.5 times the width of the duct,
otherwise turning vanes shall be installed in the elbows.
3.1.15 Adjustable splitters and hinged volume dampers shall be provided at every duct junction
on both supply and exhaust ductwork for adjusting air volumes.
3.1.16 Where splitters and dampers are installed above suspended ceiling, flush-mounted
controlling devices shall be used.
3.1.17 Connection to diffusers, grilles and registers shall be made absolutely airtight.
3.1.18 Equalizing grids or turning vanes shall be installed ahead of an air outlet whenever poor
approach conditions, from the main duct to the outlet, exist.
3.1.19 In critical low noise level projects, poor approach conditions are not allowed.
3.1.20 Where the duct is pierced for any reason, sealing compound shall be used.
3.1.21 All joints and fittings concealed in vertical duct shafts shall be welded.
3.1.22 For duct work balancing and testing refer to Section 23 05 93 Subsections 1.3 and 1.4.
3.2.1 Unless it is required to provide ventilation during construction, the supply and return
heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) system openings must be closed and
Section 23 31 00
23 31 00 -5
_________________________________________________________________________________
protected from contamination. All ducts and other related air distribution component
openings must be covered with tape, plastic, sheet metal or other methods to prevent dust
or debris from collecting in the system.
3.2.2 During Construction, building occupant and systems must be protected from airborne
contaminants which are generated or spread during construction inside the buildings.
Including toxic substances or substances harmful to the human body, such as asbestos,
lead, pesticides, heavy metals, mold, dust, fumes, paint... etc.
3.2.3 Remove all foreign materials and clean the duct inside and outside.
3.2.4 Clean ducts before operating fans and filters. Never operate fans unless filters are
installed.
3.2.5 Immediately prior to occupancy, the temporary return air filters must be removed and
replaced with permanent filters having Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007 or an equivalent standard.
3.2.6 Operate the fans and thoroughly blow out the interior surfaces of the duct work.
3.2.7 After tests, wash cleanable filters and replace renewable media.
3.2.8 Contractor to submit the air quality plan in line with authority’s requirements and
regulations for review and approval.
3.3 Access Openings in Insulated Ducts
3.3.1 Where ducts require to be thermally insulated the door frame shall be extended beyond
the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of the insulation and as
arranged so that the insulation can be 'dressed' into the frame. Doors or covers shall be
suitably insulated and provisions made to ensure that the seal is continuous across the
whole opening. The extent of the opening shall be clearly visible or otherwise indicated.
Where it is impossible to vapour seal an access opening, provision shall be made for
collecting and draining condensation.
Section 23 31 00
23 31 00 -6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCTS ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
1.5 Fire Dampers – General Requirements
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Volume Control Dampers
2.2 Gravity Dampers
2.3 Fire Dampers (Curtain Type)
2.4 Smoke Dampers
2.5 Motorized Dampers
2.6 Flexible Connections
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Access Openings
Section 23 33 00
Air Ducts Accessories
23 33 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCTS ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes the design, supply, installation testing and commissioning of all
materials for the complete installation of air distribution specialties and duct accessories
for the air distribution system..
1.2 Scope of Work

UL 555 Standard for fire Dampers and ceiling dampers

NFPA 90A Standard for the installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems.
ASTM – A525 Specification for general requirements for steel sheet, zinc-coated
(galvanized), by the Hot-dip process.
BS 5588-Part 9 Code of Practice for air-conditioning and ventilation duct work
Section 23 33 00
23 33 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5 Fire Dampers – General Requirements
1.5.1 Fire dampers shall be provided on all duct branches which pierce fireproof floors, walls,
shafts, ceilings and as required in accordance with NFPA SECTION NO. 90A.
1.5.2 Assemblies shall be complete with damper blades, fusible links, linkage and stops.
1.5.3 Dampers shall be proportioned and weighed to close at once if released from a link with
spring catches and shall stay closed until manually reset.
1.5.4 Dampers and frames shall have suitable peep holes.
1.5.5 Fire damper installation shall guarantee the fire wall integrity.
1.6.1 The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units where
necessary and as shown on drawings and/or required by the Specialist study to reduce
the air borne noise transmission through the distribution duct system, so that the specified
noise criteria levels are satisfied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Volume Control Dampers
2.1.1 Volume control dampers shall be complete with locking levers and quadrants, indicating
their position.
2.1.2 Volume dampers shall be provided whether shown/or not on drawings in main ducts, in all
branch ducts supplying three (3) or more air outlets, in all fresh air intakes etc to achieve
proper system balancing.
2.1.3 Volume control dampers shall be of the butterfly type for ducts 15" (380 mm) in depth and
lower, and multiple opposed blade type for ducts above 15" (380 mm) in depth. Maximum
blade size shall be 48" x 10" (1220 x 250 mm). For ducts larger than 48"(1220 mm),
multiple frame sections shall be used. Blades shall not be less than 18 gauge. Duct shall
be stiffened at damper location. Volume dampers for circular ducts shall be of the multiple
opposed blade type fitted in a square section.
2.1.4 Upon completion of the ductwork, dampers shall be adjusted and set to deliver the
amounts of air indicated on the Drawings.
2.2 Gravity Dampers
2.2.1 Gravity dampers shall consist of:
a- Galvanized sheet steel frame.

b- Aluminum blades.
c- Stainless steel bearing shafts and brass bearings.
d- Neoprene seal to withstand 120 °C. air temperature.
e- Aluminum blade travel stop.
2.2.2 All blades shall be coupled together by means of an aluminum bar.
Section 23 33 00
23 33 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 Fire Dampers (Curtain Type)
2.3.1 Each fire damper shall have a 1.5\ 2 hours fire protection rating and a 1650 F (73.9 0C)
fusible link. Fire damper frame shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel channel.
2.3.2 Blades shall made of 24 gauge galvanized steel and finish shall be mill galvanized to
ASTM A525 g-60.
2.3.3 Each fire damper shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard
555.
2.3.4 Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation. Horizontal mounted
dampers shall be spring loaded.
2.3.5 All necessary accessories such as sleeves, angles etc. shall be provided for proper
installation of fire damper as per manufacturer instructions, UL approval and it shall finally
guarantee the integrity of the fire wall.
2.4 Smoke Dampers
2.4.1 Furnish and install at all locations shown on plans, motorized dampers of the following
specifications. Frame shall be minimum of 16 gage galvanized steel formed into a
structural hat channel shape with tabbed comers for reinforcement. The blades shall be
single skin 16 gage minimum galvanized with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement.
Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in the frame. Jamb
seal shall be stainless steel flexible metal compression type.
2.4.2 Each damper shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated

Damper for use in smoke control systems. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be
leakage Class III (40 cfm/ft.at 1" w.g.).
2.4.3 As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (to
open and close) under HVAC system operating conditions with pressure of at least 4" w.g.
in the closed position and 2000 fpm air velocity in the open position.
2.4.4 In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their actuators
shall be rated for the elevated temperature anticipated by the smoke but not less than
572°F (300°C). Appropriate electric actuators shall be installed by the damper
manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a
single entity which meets all applicable UL 555S qualifications for both dampers and
actuators. Factory supplied caulked sleeve shall be 20 gage for dampers through 84"
wide and 18 gage above 64" wide. Damper and actuator assembly shall be factory tested
to assure operation. All wiring or piping material required to interconnect the actuator with
detection and/or alarm or BMS system shall be furnished under fire alarm on BMS
installation as applicable.
2.4.5 Blade Position Indicator:- Each smoke damper shall be equipped with two position
indicator switches linked directly to the damper blade to provide the capability of remotely
indicating damper blade position.
2.4.6 For Damper actuator, refer to Section 25 50 00.
2.5 Motorized Dampers
2.5.1 Motorized automatic dampers shall be of the louver type with not less than 13 gauge
welded steel frames and galvanized finish. Blades shall have interlocking edges, stainless
steel side springs (or vinyl or neoprene gaskets), and teflon-coated stainless steel thrust
washers. Blades shall be edged with neoprene if the damper is to operate in outside air
Section 23 33 00
23 33 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
service either as an intake or discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel trunnions
mounted in nylon or oilite bearings.
2.5.2 Dampers shall be not more than 1200mm. in length between bearings. Modulating
dampers shall be of the opposed blade type unless specified otherwise. Blades shall be
not over 200mm. in width and shall not be less than 16 gauge galvanized steel. Hardware
shall be zinc plated. One damper actuator shall be provided for each 1.5 sq. meter of
damper area.
2.5.3 Provide parallel blade dampers arranged for maximum turbulence and mixing of outside
air with return air. Arrange dampers as necessary to prevent stratification or provide
baffles necessary to correct stratification problems.
2.5.4 Provide dampers of low leakage construction, so designed that the maximum leakage
shall be 10 cfm/ft2 (0.005 m3/s/m2) of damper with 4" WG. (1 Kpa) pressure differential
applied.
2.5.5 For damper actuator specification, refer to Section 25 50 00.
2.6 Flexible Connections
2.6.1 Flexible connections of approved flame retardant fabric to prevent the transmission of
vibration through the ducts shall be installed on both the supply and return sides of all fans
and ventilating units for a maximum length of 250mm. and a minimum of 100mm. in the
direction of the flow. The fabric shall have a flame spread rating of not over 25 and a
smoke developed rating of not higher than 50.
2.6.2 Flexible connections shall connect ducts across structural expansion joints.
2.6.3 Cloth used for flexible connections shall be of proper weight and strength for the service
required, and shall be properly fitted to render it relatively tight.
2.6.4 Neoprene laminated fabric, with neoprene facing on interior surface, shall be used for
ducts handling other than clean dry air.
2.6.5 Flexible duct connection used for air conditioning, air handling units shall have vinyle
coated fabric insulated with 1" (25 mm) fiberglass insulation of 0.75 lbs/ft3 (12 Kg/m3)
minimum density, designed to NFPA-90 or BS 5588 part 9 Standards. The connector
should be pre-assembled metal to fabric.
2.6.6 The connector shall be 24 gauge galvanized zinc to ASTM-A525 G 60.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Access Openings
3.1.1 General
3.1.1.1 Access doors shall be provided for volume damper quadrants installed in concealed
spaces, for control valves, for fire dampers or as specified hereinafter.
3.1.1.2 All access openings shall be rigidly framed and made air-tight. Covers shall be simply and
speedily removed and re-fixed. Multiple set screws or self-tapping screws will not be
acceptable as a method of fixing. Access doors and other openings in ductwork shall be
provided for the purposes given below. The number, size and locations shall be as
indicated on the Drawings or as necessary to ensure adequate access to equipment and
plant.
Section 23 33 00
23 33 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.2 Access for Personnel
3.1.2.1 Access doors shall not be larger than 1350mm. high by 500mm. wide, unless essential for
equipment handling. Doors shall open against the air pressure. Duct openings and the
access doors shall be adequately reinforced to prevent distortion. Suitable sealing gaskets
shall be provided together with sufficient clamping type latches to ensure air-tight and
water-tight sealing between the door and the duct. All personnel access openings shall
have latch handles on both the inside and outside of the door.
3.1.3 Access for Maintenance, Cleaning and Inspection
3.1.3.1 Inspection openings shall generally not be larger than 300mm high by 400mm. wide
unless essential for access to equipment, in which case the size shall be agreed before
manufacture. The opening in the duct shall be adequately stiffened and the door cover
sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion. Approved sealing gaskets and suitable fastenings
shall be provided to ensure air-tight sealing.
3.1.4 Test Holes for Test Equipment and Instruments
3.1.4.1 Test holes shall be provided wherever instructed by the engineer, and in all main ducts
and branch ducts to correctly establish design air flows and to check the performance of
fans and regulating dampers. All holes shall be 25mm. dia. and suitably strengthened.
Cover plates shall be screw-fixed to the duct and sealed.
3.1.5 Access Openings in Insulated Ducts
3.1.5.1 Where ducts require to be thermally insulated the door frame shall be extended beyond
the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of the insulation and as
arranged so that the insulation can be 'dressed' into the frame. Doors or covers shall be
suitably insulated and provisions made to ensure that the seal is continuous across the
whole opening. The extent of the opening shall be clearly visible or otherwise indicated.
Where it is impossible to vapour seal an access opening, provision shall be made for
collecting and draining condensation.
Section 23 33 00
23 33 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.4 General Requirements for Ventilating Fans
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Vane Axial Fans.
2.2 Exhaust Fan
2.3 Centrifugal In-Line Fan (Not for Smoke)
2.4 Centrifugal Exhaust Ventilation (Roof or Wall Mounted)
2.5 Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fan
2.6 Fresh Air Fans
2.7 Spare Parts
2.8 Special Tools
2.9 Operation and Maintenance Manual
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Ventilating system as described,
shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the project.
The Contractor shall supply and install fans of capacities indicated on the Drawings.
Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be considered and more
stringent specifications to be adopted. Manufacturing of all fans should be in accordance
with ASHRAE 62.1-2007, section 5.
manpower, scaffolding, painting, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense to execute a
complete operable system.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other trades and
to suit site requirements.

Equipment
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
American Society of Heating ASHRAE - -
Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers.
National Electrical NEMA - -
National Electrical Code NEC Section 424 -
Air Moving and Conditioning AMCA - -
Associations
National Fire Protection NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air Conditioning
Association and Ventilation Systems
Underwriters Laboratories UL UL181 -
American Standards for ASTM ATSM A525- Specification for general
testing and Materials 75 requirements for steel sheet,
zinc-coated (galvanized) by the
hot-dip process.
1.4.1 The fan motors and starters shall be in accordance with the Electrical division of these
specifications.
1.4.2 Test and rate all fans in accordance with the standards of the AMCA. All fans must bear
the AMCA certified rating seal.
1.4.3 Make appropriate allowance for the effects on fan performance of all installation conditions
including plenum enclosures and inlet and discharge arrangements so that actual installed
fan performance equals that specified.
1.4.4 Balance all fan wheels and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
Where coating is specified and it affects the balance of the fan wheel, perform balancing
after the coating has been applied.
1.4.5 Drill all fan shafts on the center line to receive a tachometer.
1.4.6 Belt driven fans shall be connected to the driving motor by means of an approved V-belt
drive, with adjustable sheaves, unless otherwise designated. V-belt drives shall be
designed for 50% overload capacity and the motors for such drives shall be equipped with
adjustable bases or slide rails.
1.4.7 Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball-bearing type, and shall be complete
with grease fittings, extended for easy access where necessary.
1.4.8 Weather proof hoods should be provided for all motors and drives exposed to weather to
the approval of the Engineer.
1.4.9 Back draft dampers, gravity type, shall be installed on the fan discharge of all fans
discharging directly to the atmosphere except the kitchen hood fan.
1.4.10 Fans scheduled for the exhaust of kitchen equipment hoods and high temperature
exhaust systems shall include an up blast arrangement on the discharge with complete
grease drainage and insulated heat shield to protect motor and drive, all designed for high
temperature services.
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.11 Fans are to operate steadily without pulsation at design conditions. Centrifugal fan
characteristic curves must be such that the fan operating point falls below the point of no
flow static pressure, to the right of the point corresponding to that of maximum mechanical
efficiency, and a 15% increase in static pressure over that specified results in not more
than a 15% reduction in cfm and does not affect the stability of fan operation. If necessary
accomplish the foregoing by modifying the width of the wheel and/or by providing inlet
vanes to change the characteristic curve.
1.4.12 Performance curves shall be submitted for each fan for approval.
1.4.13 Fans power shall not exceed ESTIDAMA requirements and properly operatin at 125 0F
(520C).
1.4.14 Fans used for life & safety should be listed and approved by Civil Defense
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Vane Axial Fans
2.1.1 Each fan shall be of the axial type with belt driven aerofoil impeller. Casing shalll be
fabricated from mild steel hot dipped galvanized after manufacture.
2.1.2 Each fan shall be complete with:
· Electric motor mounted on fan casing.

· Sealed ball bearings
· V-belth with pullies keyed to the shaft.
· Belt tunner and screen.
· Intergral guide vanes.
· Protection ground.
· All parts of Fan used for smoke exhaust shall be rated for the high temperature
anticipated by the smoke, but not less thant 752 0F (4000C) for 2 hours.
2.2 Exhaust Fan
2.2.1 Shall be of the centrifugal single inlet backword curved blades type with two-piece housing
where wheel, shaft and inlet pan assembly installed in lower housing section. Fan shall be
complete with:
2.2.1.1 Electric motor mounted on one chassis with the fan.
2.2.1.2 Reinforced heavy gauge fan casing.
2.2.1.3 Metallic fixing frame and supports.
2.2.1.4 Dust proof, non-fused disconnect switch.
2.2.1.5 Pulleys, belt drive and belt guard.
2.2.1.6 Vibration isolators.
2.2.1.7 Heavy flanges on both sections of housing for assembly. Flanged joints shall be gasketed
for air tightness.
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 Centrifugal In-Line Fan (Not for Smoke)
2.3.1 Fan shall be of the centrifugal in-line type all aluminium construction and shall be
complete with:
2.3.1.1 Electric motor mounted outside the air stream, when air temperature inside the duct is
above 200 °F (93 °C), otherwise inside air stream.
2.3.1.3 Dust proof, non fused disconnect switch under motor casing.
2.3.1.4 Belt drive and belt guard or as stated in Capacity Schedule.
2.3.1.6 Aluminium air foil blades impeller with non overloading horse power characteristic.
2.3.1.7 Flexible duct connection at each end.
2.4 Centrifugal Exhaust Ventilator (Roof Or Wall Mounted)
2.4.1 Fan to be spun Aluminium centrifugal exhauster belt or direct, driven, down blast or
horizontal discharge and shall be wall or roof mounted as applicable and shown on
drawings. Fan shall be UL listed and shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound
and air performance.
2.4.2 The fan shall be bolted and welded construction utilising corrosion resistant fasteners
spun Aluminium structure shall be minimum 16 gauge marine alloy Aluminium. The
motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power
assembly with vibration isolation, these components shall be enclosed in a weather tight
compartment separated from airstream. Wheels shall be centrifugal backward inclined,
constructed of 100% Aluminium, wheel vanes shall be welded to the inlet cone to ensure
permanent wheel stability and alignment, wheels shall be balanced in accordance with
AMCA standard 204-96.
2.4.3 Bearings shall be heavy duty with average life of 200,000 hours. Belts shall be of oil and
heat resistant, non-static type. Drives shall be machined cast iron sized up to 150% of
installed motor HP. Variable pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan
rpm.
2.4.4 Each fan shall be complete with:-
2.4.4.1 Heavy duty electric motor suitable for outdoor operation with permanent lubrication.
2.4.4.2 Aluminium protective cowl and body.
2.4.4.3 Metallic fixing and supporting frame.
2.4.4.4 Weatherproof non fused disconnect switch under fan cowl.
2.4.4.5 Galvanised steel bird screen.
2.4.4.6 Automatic shutter
2.4.4.7 Control panel.
2.5 Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fan
2.5.1 Ceiling exhaust fan shall be of the centrifugal double inlet fan with bottom intake through
an extruded aluminium grille, and horizontal ducted discharge. Casing shall be of rigid
formed steel housing with baked enamel finish. Unit shall be complete with:
2.5.1.1 Motor with vibration isolators.
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.1.2 Enough length of electrical flexible cord with disconnect plug and integral electrical
knockouts, accessible from outside.
2.5.1.3 Shutter which closes automatically by means of an electromagnet when the exhaust fan is
off.
2.6 Fresh Air Fans
2.6.1 Fan shall be of the centrifugal double inlet width, backward curved blades type with non-
overloading design wheel diameters and outlets areas shall be in accordance with the
standard sizes adopted by the AMCA for non-overloading fans. Inlets shall be fully stream
lined and housing shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration or pulsation.
2.6.2 Fan shall be supplied complete with:
2.6.2.1 Electric motor mounted on one chassis with the fan.
2.6.2.2 Reinforced heavy gauge fan casing.
2.6.2.4 Pulleys, belt drive and belt guard (of expanded metal with tachometer hole).
2.6.2.6 Fan wheels with die formed backward curved blades designed for maximum efficiency
and quiet operations. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
2.6.2.6 Heavy flanges on both sides of housing. Flanged joints shall be gasketed for air tightness.
2.6.2.8 Fan inertia should be checked against motor capability. If fan inertia is found larger, then a
centrifugal or plate clutching service should be used to enable the fan to be brought up to
speed without damaging the motor.
2.6.2.9 Motorized damper at fan outlet to open and close with fan on/off operation.
2.7 Spare Parts
2.8 Special Tools
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-6
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 34 00
HVAC Fans
23 34 00-7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 35 00
SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 Air Curtain
2.3 Spare Parts
2.4 Special Tools
Section 23 35 00
Special Exhaust System
23 35 00-1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 35 00
SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Ventilating system as described,

Equipment
Section 23 35 00
23 35 00-2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
Associations
Association Ventilation Systems
Underwriters Laboratories UL UL181 -
American Standards for ASTM ATSM Specification for general
testing and Materials A525-75 requirements for steel sheet, zinc-
coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip
process.
1.4.1 The fan motors and starters shall be in accordance with the Electrical division of these
specifications.
1.4.2 Test and rate all fans in accordance with the standards of the AMCA. All fans must bear
the AMCA certified rating seal.
1.4.3 Make appropriate allowance for the effects on fan performance of all installation conditions
including plenum enclosures and inlet and discharge arrangements so that actual installed
fan performance equals that specified.
1.4.4 Balance all fan wheels and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
Where coating is specified and it affects the balance of the fan wheel, perform balancing
after the coating has been applied.
1.4.5 Drill all fan shafts on the center line to receive a tachometer.
1.4.6 Belt driven fans shall be connected to the driving motor by means of an approved V-belt
drive, with adjustable sheaves, unless otherwise designated. V-belt drives shall be
designed for 50% overload capacity and the motors for such drives shall be equipped with
adjustable bases or slide rails.
1.4.7 Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball-bearing type, and shall be complete
with grease fittings, extended for easy access where necessary.
1.4.8 Weather proof hoods should be provided for all motors and drives exposed to weather to
the approval of the Engineer.
1.4.9 Back draft dampers, gravity type, shall be installed on the fan discharge of all fans
discharging directly to the atmosphere except the kitchen hood fan.
1.4.10 Fans scheduled for the exhaust of kitchen equipment hoods and high temperature
exhaust systems shall include an up blast arrangement on the discharge with complete
grease drainage and insulated heat shield to protect motor and drive, all designed for high
temperature services.
Section 23 35 00
23 35 00-3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.11 Fans are to operate steadily without pulsation at design conditions. Centrifugal fan
characteristic curves must be such that the fan operating point falls below the point of no
flow static pressure, to the right of the point corresponding to that of maximum mechanical
efficiency, and a 15% increase in static pressure over that specified results in not more
than a 15% reduction in cfm and does not affect the stability of fan operation. If necessary
accomplish the foregoing by modifying the width of the wheel and/or by providing inlet
vanes to change the characteristic curve.
1.4.12 Performance curves shall be submitted for each fan for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Air Curtain
2.1.1 General
2.1.1.1 The Air Curtain shall be suitable for doors dimension as shown on design drawings.
2.1.1.2 The unit shall be made of Slim design, simple mounting, high durability and powerful
airflow.
2.1.1.3 The unit shall be complete with a polycarbonate cabinet of colour acceptable to Architect
for the exposed units. However, for the concealed type the unit shall be mounted within
false ceiling void and shall have supply air linear grille/slot diffuser at the false ceiling
level.
2.1.2 Fan Housing
2.1.2.1 Self contained one piece housing made of 18 guage sheet steel, fire retardant and
corrosion proof. It shall be protected with grey rust reventive coatings and all interior parts
shall be safe guarded against inclement weather .
2.1.3 Blower Fan
2.1.3.1 Double with and double inlet squirrel cage blower, of the direct drive type.
2.1.4 Discharge Nozzle
2.1.4.1 Wedge shaped discharge nozzle shall have adjustable air deflectors with a 40 degree
girth sweep from front to back.
2.1.5 Velocity Control Louvres
2.1.5.1 Adjustable louvre damper controls shall be provided to adjust rate of air flow.
2.1.6 Electric Motor
2.1.6.1 Continuous duty type motor totally enclosed with sealed lubricated ball bearings, reilient
mounted and protected by an automatic thermal overload switch. It shall have class F
insulation and shall be U.L. approved.
2.3 Spare Parts
2.3.1 The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract spare parts for all the equipment
supplied sufficient for two years of operation all in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturers of the equipment.
Section 23 35 00
23 35 00-4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.4 Special Tools
and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1 - 2007 or equivalent as approved by
Section 23 35 00
23 35 00-5
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 35 00
23 35 00-6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
1.5 Air Distribution Outlets General Requirements
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Square - Air Diffusers

2.2 Linear Diffusers
2.3 Linear Bar Grilles
2.4 Grilles and Registers
2.5 Fresh Air and Discharge Louvers
2.6 Sand Trap Louvers
2.7 Door Louvers
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.2 Fixing
3.3 Rejected
Section 23 37 00
Air Outlets and Inlets
23 37 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section of specification includes the design, supply, installation testing and
commissioning of the Air inlets and outlets for the complete air conditioning and ventilating
system including fresh air intakes, louvers, grilles, diffusers etc.
1.2 Scope of Work
consultant’s approval of samples, submitted documents etc as per specifications and

Section 23 70 00 - Central District Cooling System
DW 142 British Heating & Ventilating Contractors association Code of Practice

NFPA 90A Standard for the installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems
ADC Air diffusion council
1.5 Air Distribution Outlets General Requirements
1.5.1 All air outlets shall be of, at least the sizes indicated on the Drawings. Irrespective of the
sizes indicated on drawings, diffusers/grillers shall be sized such that the noise spectrum
Section 23 37 00
23 37 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
of the supply outlets not higher than NC-25, and not exceeding a velocity of 0.3 m/sec but
in all cases outlet selected shall perform within the noise level requirement of the space it
is supplying. Outlets shall be supplied with foam rubber gaskets to prevent air leakage.
1.5.2 Where supply or return outlets are installed in continuous line, omit intermediate frames
and margins. Provide guides for each element to keep adjoining lengths aligned and
butted without breaks. All outlets shall be constructed of aluminum of the color specified or
as selected by the Engineer.
1.5.3 Outlets causing excessive air movement, drafts or objectionable noise shall be replaced at
no cost to the owner.
1.5.4 All outlets & louvers shall be powder coated, samples showing finish and color shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to supplying the outlets to Site.
1.5.5 The Contractor shall provide in his Tender for delaying the fixing of loose grilles until all
other trades have completed their work, returning to the Site to fit the grilles as and when
required to do so.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Square - Air Diffusers
2.1.1 Air diffusers shall be of the diffusion and air mixing type and shall be made of extruded
aluminum.
2.1.2 Supplied air shall be diffused with no air velocities in excess of 50 fpm. (0.25 m/s) at 1800
mm height or less above the floor line. Room air shall be mixed with the primary air by
induction to effect subsequent uniformity of the room temperature without stratification.
2.1.3 Diffusers shall be multicone type giving 4-way horizontal discharge unless otherwise
indicated. The centre cones of the diffuser shall be manufactured from pressed aluminum
of 1.1mm thickness whereas the outer frame shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum
of 1.2mm thickness - suitably aligned at the corners giving it a near invisible joint.
2.1.4 Each diffuser shall be provided with an aluminum opposed blade damper.
2.1.5 The diffusers shall be supplied completely factory powder coated, the finish color as per
approved by the Consultant. The diffusers shall be tested and rated in accordance with
ASHRAE standard 70.
2.1.6 Diffuser shall not project appreciably below ceiling or duct.
2.1.7 The inner assembly of the diffusers shall be attached to the outer assembly by means of a
lock permitting assembly and disassembly without the use of tools.
2.1.8 The noise level shall be measured at a point one meter below the diffuser.
2.2 Linear Diffusers
2.2.1 Continuous slim line diffusers shall have extruded aluminum vanes and frames, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings, and shall be designed for surface mounting on wall,
ceiling or sill.
2.2.2 Diffusers shall be capable of diffusing air in a horizontal or vertical plane, combining
discharge air diffusion, 20% aspiration and secondary air motion causing the discharge air
to be diffused in such a manner that the air is delivered in a multiplicity of high and low
Section 23 37 00
23 37 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
pressure air currents causing turbulent air motion and insuring complete coverage and
temperature uniformity within the space served.
2.2.3 The diffuser shall be provided with equalizing deflector and damper to accomplish uniform
distribution throughout the length of the outlet.
2.2.4 The noise level shall be measured at a point 1800 mm below on either side of the diffuser.
2.3 Linear Bar Grilles
2.3.1 Linear grille shall have extruded polyester powder coated aluminum fixed bar and frames,
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings and shall be designed for surface mounting.
2.3.2 Grilles shall be capable of diffusing air in a horizontal or vertical plane with 0° to 15° or 30°
deflection. Air shall be diffused in such a manner that the air is delivered in a multiplicity
of high and low pressure air currents causing turbulent air motion and insuring complete
coverage and temperature uniformity within the space served.
2.3.3 The grille shall be provided with directional blades and damper to accomplish uniform
distribution throughout the length of the outlet. All deflection bars shall be securely fixed
and shall be parallel to the long dimension.
2.3.4 The noise level shall be measured at a point 1800 mm below on either side of the diffuser.
2.4 Grilles and Registers
2.4.1 All grilles shall be mounted upon substantial frames connected to the duct work, and shall
be provided with soft plastic mounting rings inserted under the frame, so as to obviate
leaks behind the grille.
2.4.2 All supply grilles and high level return grilles shall be double deflection, with horizontal
face blade in the front, with airfoil blade construction, with minimum of 19 mm flange with
gasket.
2.4.3 Supply registers shall be double deflection, horizontal face bars, airfoil blade construction,
with aluminum opposed blade, key operated volume dampers, and 19 mm minimum
gasket flange.
2.4.4 Return grille at low levels and fresh air grilles shall be single deflection fixed blade type
with 19mm. flange with gasket where the sheet metal is visible behind the grille, paint the
interior surface of the sheet metal flat black.
2.5 Fresh Air and Discharge Louvers
2.5.1 Louvers for fresh air intake, and for exhaust. They shall be extruded aluminum.
2.5.2 Louvers shall be weatherproof, with fixed blades set at 30 degree and shall have a free
area of 85%.
2.5.3 Louvers shall be furnished with ½" (13mm) mesh-bird screen secured in removable
extruded Aluminum frames.
2.6 Sand Trap Louvers
2.6.1 Sand trap louver shall have a high degree of separation of sand and large dust particles,
even in cases of high dust concentrations. The vertically arranged sections and holes for
sand drainage shall ensure the sand trap louver is self-cleaning and maintenance free.
Section 23 37 00
23 37 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
The sand trap louver shall be designed to separate large particles at low air velocities,
thus avoiding excessive dust loading.
2.6.2 The sand trap louver shall be constructed in polyester powder coated aluminum, and shall
be complete with transom, sand chute and galvanized bird screen. Color shall be to
Engineer’s approval.
2.6.3 Whether shown on drawings or not, all fresh air intakes shall be with sand trap louvers,
filters and volume control dampers.
2.7 Door Louvers
2.7.1 The door louvers shall be sized so that the face velocity does not exceed 250 fpm (1.3
m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2.7.2 The louver shall be extruded aluminum completely lightproof V-Section with double frame.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 All outlets shall be erected, leveled and accurately set in position, to ensure symmetry with
other grilles, light fittings, etc. It has been arranged that final minor adjustments to
suspension levels to obtain final accurate alignment between the ceiling and light fittings,
diffusers, etc., shall be executed by those responsible for erecting the false ceilings.
3.2 Fixing
3.2.1 All outlets shall be concealed fixing type with no screws.
3.3 Rejected
3.3.1 Any imperfect outlet scratched or damaged surfaces of fixing screws having damaged
heads, or scratched plating, will be rejected and shall be replaced satisfactorily before the
Contract Works will be taken over as complete.
Section 23 37 00
23 37 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 40 00
AIR CLEANING DEVICES
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Scope of Work
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Filter Elements
2.2 Approved list of Manufacturers
Section 23 40 00
Air Cleaning Devices
23 40 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 40 00
AIR CLEANING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This section includes the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
complete air cleaning devices for air conditioning systems.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.3.1 The works specified in the following sections are included in this Section in each
applicable part, as if repeated herein verbatim.

Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and control for HVAC
Section 23 35 00 - Special Exhaust System
Section 23 70 00 - Central District Cooling System
ASHRAE American society of heating, refrigeration and air conditioning.

UL Underwriters laboratories
NBS Atmospheric Dust Spot Method
1.5.1 Provide temporary filter elements in the filter banks of supply systems used during
construction prior to using the system.
1.5.2 MERV values shown below should be as per ASHRAE Standards 52.2- 2007.
Section 23 40 00
23 40 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.3 Temporary filter elements shall be throw-away type with frames taped air-tight.
1.5.4 Immediately prior to test and balance operations, replace temporary filters with a new set
of specified filter elements.
1.5.5 After final acceptance, a new set of filter elements shall either be delivered to owner or
installed to replace "Test" filters, as directed by Owner.
1.5.6 Provide throw-away filters of thickness to fit frames of unitary equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILTER ELEMENTS
2.1.1 Throw-away Filter
2.1.1.1 Throw-away filters - 2" (50 mm) thick fiberglass media contained in rigid frame with a
supporting maze across both entering and leaving faces of media, with minimum MERV of
9 with maximum initial resistance of 0.17" WG. (42 pa) at 500 FPM (2.5 m/s) face velocity.
2.1.1.2 Provide throw-away filters of thickness to fit frames of unitary equipment.
2.1.2 Bag Filter
2.1.2.1 Bag type filters shall be supported on substantial wire mesh frames fixed in a housing
assembly containing the filter bags. The housing frames shall be drilled for assembly into
a multiple battery suitable for mounting directly onto the downstream side of the outdoor
louvers or grilles.
2.1.2.2 Each bag is made up from three distinct layers of filter media. The first layer should
provide dust holding capacity for long life, the second fine filtration of smaller particles and
the third prevent fiber migration.
2.1.2.3 Filters shall be bag type, of high performance rating with performed, and deep pleated
construction. The media shall be micro fine fiberglass, reinforced by a laminated synthetic
backing, the filter shall have minimum MERV of 13 Filters shall be 24" x 24" x 12"
(600x600x300)deep with an effective filter media area of not less than 41 sq.ft.(3.8 m2).
2.1.2.4 Bag filters shall have an initial clean filter resistance to air-flow not exceeding 0.28" WG.
(70 pa) and a final resistance (dirty) not exceeding 0.5" WG. (125 pa). The first layer shall
be of graduated density continuous filament glass, the second layer shall consist of the
fiberglass or synthetic media, while the third layer shall consist of spun nylon backing.
2.1.3 Grease Filters
2.1.3.1 Grease filters- 2"(50mm) thick, constructed of cross-pleated layers of fine mesh aluminum
media with aluminum frame. Filter shall be the high capacity, low resistance type which
can be cleaned in hot water with a household detergent maximum initial resistance shall
be 0.1"wg (25pa) at a rated face velocity of 500 FPM (2.5 m/s).
2.1.4 Cleanable Filter
2.1.4.1 Cleanable filter: 2" (50mm) thick aluminum media, contained in aluminum frame. Filter
shall have minimum MERV of 3 and it shall be capable of being completely cleaned by
flushing with tap water. Holding frames shall be provided with polyurethane seals and
stainless steel spring latches.
Section 23 40 00
23 40 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 40 00
23 40 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 64 26
SCREW CHILLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General
1.4 Design Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Chiller Controller
2.2 Compressor
2.3 Evaporator
2.4 Air-Cooled Condenser
2.5 Refrigerant Circuits
2.6 Unit frame
2.7 Power and electrical components
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.2 Chiller Plant Manager (CPM)
3.3 Spare Parts
3.4 Special Tools
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 64 26
SCREW CHILLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General
1.1.1 The Contractor shall supply and install factory assembled air-cooled packaged
refrigeration machines. The number and capacity of which shall be as indicated in the
capacity schedule shown on the Drawings. Authority regulations and Sustainability
requirements shall also be considered and more stringent specifications to be adopted.
1.1.2 Each machine shall consist of refrigerating circuits comprising screw compressors, air-
cooled condenser, and evaporator, interconnecting refrigerant piping, controls, safety
devices, accessories, and control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage
to 240 volts maximum. No phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
1.1.3 The machine shall be completely charged at the factory with Environment Friendly
Refrigerant (Zero Ozone Depletion Potential). All factory wiring and piping shall be
contained within the machine enclosure. All electrical components shall be protected from
the weather.
1.1.4 Each machine shall have heavy steel base frame with coil frames and panels of
galvanized steel phosphatized, and finished with baked-on enamel paint.
1.1.5 Each machine shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at low outdoor air temperatures.
1.1.6 The chiller performance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI standard 550/590 in
the presence of the Engineer and one Client representatives as minimum including
traveling and accommodation facilities as required. Components of factory testing shall be
included but not limited to factory leak test, insulation resistance test, chiller performance
test and acoustic test.
1.1.7 Unit shall have the following:
1.1.7.1 The unit performances shall be certified by Eurovent & AHRI independent testing
laboratory Certified in accordance AHRI 550/590 “Performance Rating of Water Chilling
Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle”.
1.1.7.2 In compliance with ASHRAE 90.1.
1.1.7.3 In compliance with ESMA Standard UAE.S 5010-5:2014
1.1.7.4 Minimum full load COP of chillers shall be 3.0 and minimum IPLV shall be 4.38 at AHRI
conditions.
1.1.7.5 In compliance with Abu Dhabi Quality Conformity Council. (QCC) Scheme for Air/Water
Cooled Chillers.
1.1.7.6 Manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:20018, ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS
18001:2008.
1.1.7.7 The units are factory assembled, leak tested, evacuated, internally wired and fully charged
with refrigerant. The unit shall be fully tested before delivery and is ready for installation.
Comply with the manufacturer instructions for rigging and handling equipment.
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.1.7.8 The chiller shall be able to operate at 55 ºC ambient without compressor trips.

Standard
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers.
National Electrical Manufacturers NEMA - -
Association
Air Moving and Conditioning
Associations
AMCA - -
National Fire Protection NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air Conditioning
Association and Ventilation Systems
ARI ARI American Refrigeration Institute
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.1 The air conditioning system is based on the following design conditions.
Outside summer conditions:-
115°F (46.1° C) Dry Bulb.

85°F (29.4° C) Wet Bulb.
25° F (13.8° C) Daily range.
1.4.2 The inside summer conditions are indicated on the Drawings in the units capacity
schedules.
1.4.3 The unit shall be selected at 48 °C but shall keep working till 55 °C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Chiller Controller
2.1.1 Microprocessor based controller shall be housed in a weather proof enclosure with
removable panels to allow for customer connection of power wiring and remote interlocks.
All controls including sensors shall be factory mounted and tested prior to shipment.
2.1.2 Microprocessor controls shall provide all control functions including start-up, shut-down,
leaving chilled water temperature control, compressor and electronic expansion valve
modulation, fan sequencing, ant recycle logic, automatic lead/lag compressor starting and
load limiting.
2.1.3 Unit protective functions shall include loss of chilled water flow, evaporator freezing, loss
of refrigerant, low refrigerant pressure, high refrigerant pressure, reverse rotation,
compressor starting and running over current, phase loss, phase imbalance, phase
reversal and loss of oil flow. Panel shall have a clear language display to indicate
operating data points including chilled water set point, current limit set point, leaving
chilled water temperature, evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressures and
temperatures.
2.1.4 The display shall be read and advanced on the unit without opening any control panel
doors.
2.1.5 Each chiller shall have its own microprocessor based controls to maintain the supply
chilled water temperature at the pre-set value. The microprocessor shall also have a
provision for resetting the set point from the BMS.
2.1.6 Each chiller shall be capable of continuously modulating capacity from 100% down to
10%.
2.2 Compressor
2.2.1 Semi-hermetic direct drive, screw type with all rotating parts statically and dynamically
balanced. Capacity controlling slide valve, rolling element bearings, differential refrigerant
pressure oil pump and oil heater. Motor shall be suction gas cooled, two pole squirrel
cage induction type with part wind starter. Suction and discharge pressure gauges shall
be provided, compressor shall have soft start with minimum inrush to comply with
regulation (Wye delta or start delta electronic starter).
2.2.2 Oil separation and filtration devices shall be provided separate from the compressor.
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 Evaporator
2.3.1 Direct expansion double circuit shell and tube type with water flowing through the baffled
shell and refrigerant through the tubes. Shell shall be manufactured from seamless
carbon steel pipes, seamless copper tubes with aluminium star inserts, anti-corrosive steel
baffles around tubes. Design working pressure tube side shall be 230 psig and water side
150 psig or applicable to withstand CHW system pressure.
- Vent and drain connection shall be included.

- Refrigerant heads shall be removable.
- Equipped with antifreeze protection heater.
- The shell shall be completely insulated with 2" (50 mm) thick urethane foam
insulation covered with a sheet steel jacket.
2.4 Air-Cooled Condenser
2.4.1 Condenser coils shall be V/W-shaped with a minimum open angle of 40° to ensure
optimum air distribution.
2.4.2 Coils shall be entirely made of aluminium alloy, micro channels type.
2.4.3 The condenser shall be air-cooled, upward air discharge type.
2.4.4 Alternatively, condensing coils shall be seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
plate aluminium fins of min. thickness of 0.12 mm and max pitch of 16 FPI. Fins shall
have full self spacing collars and completely cover the tubes.
2.4.5 Condenser coil fins shall have factory applied anti-corrosive coating as approved by the
Engineer against the high humidity and salty atmosphere. Condenser coil shall be easily
cleanable using a high pressure cleaner up to 60 bar pressure rating. The condenser coils
shall be leak-tested by helium gas detection.
2.4.6 Condenser fans are propeller type made of a corrosion-resistant composite material, and
statically and dynamically balanced directly driven by electrical motor and equipped with
variable frequency drive (EC motor fans) for optimum chiller performance particularly at
part load conditions through precise head pressure control and by making use of its total
condenser heat exchange area.
2.4.7 A separate sub-cooling coil integral with main condenser coil to be provided for each
refrigerant circuit. Fans shall be propeller type, placed to have uniform air distribution and
shall be statically and dynamically balanced for minimum noise and vibration. Motors for
outdoor application and specified ambient shall be tropicalized T. E. A. O. class "F"
insulation and with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Heavy gauge protections guards
are to be provided for each condenser fan. Condenser coils shall be factory leak tested at
21 Bar.
2.4.8 Coils shall be fitted with PVC coated steel guards.
2.5 Refrigerant Circuits
2.5.1 Chillers shall have at least two completely independent refrigerant circuits with one or
more screw compressor per circuit. Each refrigerant circuit shall include compressor
suction and discharge service valves, liquid line shut-off valve, removable core filter drier,
sight glass with moisture indicator, charging port and an electronic expansion valve.
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6 Unit frame
2.6.1 Frame shall be made of U steel beam with hot dip galvanization or electrophoresis
treatment completed with paint.
Panels and electrical box shall be made of galvanised sheet steel with oven-baked pol-
yester powder paint finish in light grey colour (RAL 7035) and be capable of with-standing
a 500-hour salt spray test in accordance with the ISO 9227.
2.7 Power and electrical components
2.7.1 Power requirement
2.7.1.1 The unit shall operate at 400 volts, 3 phases, 50 hertz (400 V ± 10%) without neutral.
Chillers with two compressors shall have single power connection and for chillers hav-ing
more than two compressors shall have dual power connection to have electrical re-
dundancy, ease of maintenance & small cable size.
2.7.1.2 Main disconnect switch with lockable handle for each compressor shall be provided at
point of incoming.
2.7.2 Power and control cabinets
2.7.2.1 Powder painted steel cabinet with hinged and gasket sealed doors. Power box doors shall
be interlocked with main disconnect switch handle so that doors opening may not be
possible without disconnecting power, but a special opening system should be provided to
troubleshoot while power is on.
Power cabinet includes: compressor short circuit and overload protection, fan and control
circuit breakers
Separate control cabinet for safe and easy access to control display.
Each circuit must be protected with fuse.
Each circuit must have control transformer.
Each transformer must be protected with breaker at input and fuse at output.
2.7.3 Compressor starter
2.7.3.1 Motor starter shall be Wye –Delta or Star Delta type for minimum inrush current, Wye-
Delta transi-tion shall be managed electronically without electromechanical relays.
Compressor motor winding should have two sensors one on line and one spare.
The temperature of the refrigerant cooling motor winding should be managed by the
microprocessor a sensor installed in the suction housing.
2.7.4 Control transformer
2.7.4.1 The control circuit voltage should be 24 V maximum, supplied by a factory-installed

transformer as well as 115volts for Y D contactors.
2.7.5 Under Voltage Relay
2.7.5.1 In order to protect electrical components of voltage drops, an under voltage relay shall be
factory mounted and shall meet UAE local requirements. The unit shall be able to shut
down within 0.2s if voltage drops to 75% of nominal voltage and shall be equipped with a
5-10 minutes programmable restart timer. Voltage limit shall be ad-justable. The under-
voltage relay shall be compliant with ADWEA regulation.
Solution shall include line monitor relay and a timer relay adjustable from 0.05s to 100h,
minimum tripping time 0.035 s, allowing to sustain 100 000 cycles. Total mini-mum
tripping time shall be 0.135 s, 0.2s including control and compressor shutdown delay.
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 The manufacturer shall perform all field or factory testing, balancing and final adjustment
of the refrigeration machines in accordance with the applicable provisions of the relevant
ASHRAE Standards.
3.1.2 The following data shall be compiled and certified:
. Temperature of chilled water "In and Out".

. Chilled Water flow (gpm).
. Pressure drop in chiller (Feet of Water).
. Operating power consumption from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
3.1.3 Any part of the machines or system failing to meet the contract requirements shall be
adjusted, repaired or replaced.
3.1.4 Unless indicated otherwise on electrical drawings Each packaged unit shall be factory
equipped to connect to only one electrical power feeder with the necessary built-in circuit
breakers or disconnect switch.
3.1.5 The selection of the chiller shall be based on the optimum performance model of the
approved manufacturer, which combines best COP, FER and noise level ratings.
Contractor shall be responsible to select accordingly and to the approval of the Engineer.
3.1.6 Each packaged unit shall be mounted on spring type vibration isolators flexible enough to
dampen any vibrations.
3.1.7 The selection of the chiller shall be based on the optimum performance model of the
approved manufactureres which combines best COP, EER and noise level ratings.
Contractors shall be responsible to select accordingly and to the approval of the Engineer.
3.2 Chillers Plant Manager (CPM)
3.2.1 Introduction
3.2.1.1 The Chillers Plant Manager (CPM) shall be factory supplied and installed to sequence and
control the chilled water plant as specified under this section of the specifications.
3.2.2 Controller
3.2.2.1 The controller shall serve all the chillers and the chilled water pumps and shall be of the
electronic type.
3.2.2.3 The Controller shall be complete with a remote water temperature sensor in the return
chilled water header with all the necessary interlocking devices, and all necessary items
required for satisfactory operation of the central chilled water system as generally
described herein below.
3.2.2.4 This controller shall be supplied in addition to the individual control panels of each chiller
which is factory assembled and wired and as specified under the chiller specifications.
3.2.3 Operation Sequence
3.2.3.1 All the chillers shall be electrically interlocked with the chilled water pumps such that no
chiller shall operate unless the duty chilled water pump(s) have run for a pre-set time
interval. Each shall also be interlocked with it's water flow switch, installed in the water
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
outlet of the chiller in such a way that the chiller stops automatically when its flow switch
fails to sense water circulation through it.
3.2.3.2 The Contractor shall produce a schematic line diagram to show the manual and automatic
control system described hereinafter and shall submit this diagram to the Engineer for
approval.
3.2.3.3 The control and operating sequence for the cooling equipment shall be as follows:-
3.2.3.3.1 The chilled water pump(s) shall be started manually by placing the selector switch on
manual position.
3.2.3.3.2 The flow switch in the chiller water circuit shall, after sensing the rated flow, permit the
starting of the refrigeration machines provided that a signal from the sequence controller is
received by these machines.
3.2.3.4 The water temperature sensor in the return chilled water header of the system shall
control the operation of the refrigeration machines through the sequence controller which
sends its signal direct to the multi-stage temperature controllers of the refrigeration
machines. When there is need for cooling, one stage of the multi-stage controller shall
operate a control relay which permits the operation of the condenser fans and the
corresponding refrigerant solenoid valve and non-recycling relay, one at a time.
3.2.3.5 One stage of the first compressor can then start after the above mentioned relays are in
operation provided the following safety and control cut-outs are closed:-
- High pressure cut-out

- Low pressure cut-out
- Oil pressure cut-out
- Low temperature cut-out (freeze protection)
3.2.3.6 When there is need for more cooling. the other stages of the first compressor shall
operate until the first compressor is fully loaded. The same sequence will follow for the
other compressors of the refrigeration machine when more cooling is needed.
3.2.3.7 A step controller shall prevent the compressors from starting all at the same time and it
shall start them one at a time with a time delay between one another.
3.2.3.8 Upon a further increase in the return chilled water temperature the sequence controller will
send a signal to the second refrigeration machine and the same sequence of first machine
will be repeated and so on until the load is satisfied and design water temperatures are
maintained.
3.2.3.9 Upon a drop in load one stage of the multi-stage controller opens and as a result, the last
operated compressor starts unloading and upon further drop in load the relay of the
solenoid valve is de-energized and starts the pump down cycle until the compressor stops
by the action of the low pressure cutout. When load is diminished more, and return water
temperature drops further, other compressors of the refrigeration machine are de-
energized by the same procedure. The condenser fans keep running after the relay is de-
energized, through the period of pump down and will stop after the last compressor of
refrigeration machine stops. On a further drop in load, another step of the sequence
controller similarly de-energizes the compressors of the second refrigeration machine
through its multi-stage controller. The chilled water pump(s) shall run continuously and
shall be independent of the automatic starting and stopping of the refrigeration machines.
3.2.3.10 A manual switch in the sequence controller shall enable the operator to alternate the
operation of the duty and stand-by pumps and chillers.
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.3.11 A reversing switch shall be provided on the sequence controller to equalize the running
time of the refrigeration machines.
3.3 Spare Parts
3.4 Special Tools
contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of 1 year, and 5 years for the
compressor from the date of final completion certificate.
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 64 26
Screw Chillers
23 64 26 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 72 00
AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Heat Recovery Wheel
2.2 Heat Pipe Recovery
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.2 Spare Parts
3.3 Special Tools
Section 23 72 00
Air to Air Energy Recovery Equipment
23 72 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 72 00
AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Air Recovery System as described,
Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be considered and more
stringent specifications to be adopted. Manufacturing of all fan coil units should be in
accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2007, section 5.

Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation And Controls for HVAC
Section 23 35 00 - Special Exhaust System
Section 23 72 00
23 72 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
Associations
Association Ventilation Systems
ARI ARI American Refrigeration Institute
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Heat Recovery Wheel
2.1.1.1 It is the responsibility of the Air Handling Units supplier for the heat wheel integrity with
the whole unit in terms of withstanding design conditions and operation. The Air Handling
Units supplier shall give 5 (five) years extended warranty for proper operation and against
any deterioration, misalignment, deformation, and manufacturing defects.
2.1.1.2 Unless it is specifed elsewhere, minimum sensible load recovery efficiency should be
seventy percent (70%)
2.1.1.3 The heat wheel shall consist of a casing, wheel media, drive unit and exhaust fan. An
inspection cover for the drive unit should be provided on one end of the heat wheel for
inspection.
2.1.1.4 Casing shall have double skin panels, utilising fixed sectionalised modular sandwich
panels of 30 mm thickness in air conditioned spaces or 50 mm in non-air conditioned
spaces, with not less than 70 kg./m3 density with mineral wool rigid insulation. Panels
shall be provided with integral profiled frames incorporating double hollow rolled rubber
seals to ensure optimal even sealing efficiency pressure & depression sides, and shall be
made of galvanized steel with painted finish.
2.1.1.5 Panels shall be internally impact and corrosion resistant, access doors shall be provided
with rubber seals and special fasteners, with service and inspection doors on air inlet and
air outlet side.
2.1.1.6 To prevent the wheel media from transferring exhaust air to the supply air duct, the heat
wheel shall be fitted with an adjustable purging sector, the sector is adjustable from 0 to 6
degree. The rotor passages are blown clean in the purging sector. On delivery, the sector
is set at 0 degree.
2.1.1.7 Wheel media shall be made of alternating layers of flat and corrugated aluminum foil and
shall contain a desiccant material which eliminates carry over of bacteria and airborne
contaminants i.e. selective absorption. Desiccant shall allow only water molecules to pass
through it, rejecting all other pollutants of exhaust air. (Level cross contamination
shouldn’t be more than 0.04%).
Section 23 72 00
23 72 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.1.8 Dust particles up to 800 micron shall pass through media without causing choking of
pores.
2.1.1.9 Both sensible and latent recovery efficiency shall not be less than capacities indicated in
capacity schedule.
2.1.1.10 The center of the wheel media shall consist of a hub with a shaft and bearings with
efficient seal provided in the clearance between the rotor and the casing to minimize
leakage between the supply air and exhaust air ducts.
2.1.1.11 Heat wheel section to be provided with drain pan under the heat wheel.
2.1.1.12 Enthalpy heat wheel shall be vertically positioned for vertical installed fresh air and
exhaust air unit combination, unless indicated otherwise.
2.1.1.13 Heat wheel consists of corrosion protected housing with double chamber divided with
brush gasket and inspection door for drive inspection maintenance.
2.1.1.14 The drive unit shall consist of an electric motor having constant speed of not more than 20
– 25 rpm.
2.1.1.15 The face velocity shall not exceed 700 FPM (3.5 m/s.)
2.1.1.16 Leakage of exhaust air into the supply air and across the seals should be eliminated.
2.1.1.17 Pressure adjusting dampers can be used to balance the unit pressure difference if
required.
2.1.1.18 Purging sector should be correctly adjusted to suit the prevailing pressure conditions so
that complete purging of the wheel media will take place without any supply air being lost.
On the other hand, a certain proportion of the supply air will be transferred to the exhaust
air by carry over. This will take place at the point where the wheel media moves over from
the supply air duct into the exhaust air duct.
2.1.1.19 The heat wheel shall be designed for operation at temperatures up to + 50 degree C.
2.1.2 Heat Wheel Exhaust Fan Section
2.1.2.1 The fan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel properly reinforced and
braced with steel angle framework. It shall be provided with suitable angle flanges for
connecting it to the coil section.
2.1.2.2 Fan shall be centrifugal type with multi-blade forward curved or air foil type, mounted on a
common shaft with enclosed housing. The fan motor shall be statically and dynamically
balanced to eliminate noise and vibration.
2.1.2.3 Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated ball type with grease lines extending to the
outside surface of the casing. Average life of bearing shall not be less than 200000 hours.
2.1.2.4 Fan shall conform to the design fabrication of the AMCA.
2.1.2.5 Fan shall be mastic coated and have galvanized steel wheel and high grade steel shaft.
2.1.2.6 Fan shall be driven by V-belt of variable pitch type. Belt guards of removable type shall be
provided on the fan and motor shafts.
2.1.2.7 The electric motor starter and controllers shall be in accordance with Electrical section of
these Specifications.
Section 23 72 00
23 72 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 Heat Pipe Recovery
2.2.1 Energy recovery heat pipes shall be included within the AHU or within the supply and
extract ductwork as specified.
2.2.2 The heat pipe shall be a single section and will straddle the airways in the supply and
extract decks of the AHU or the supply and extract ductwork.
2.2.3 The heat pipe shall be suitable for either side by side mounting between the two adjacent
ducts (horizontal heat pipe) or top and bottom mounting with the warmer air always
flowing through the bottom section (vertical heat pipe).
2.2.4 The length of the heat pipes in the supply and extract section shall be selected so as to
match the respective air volumes. The external fins shall be of aluminium with a minimum
thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall be of the continuous plate type and louvered type to
optimize the airside heat transfer .
2.2.5 Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C106 for heat exchanger use.
Tube diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner surface to enhance the internal
surface area and minimum root thickness of the tube shall be 0.35mm.
2.2.6 Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum thickness of 1.4mm. The
casing shall incorporate tube plates, continuous side plates and a centre dividing plate to
prevent cross-contamination between the two airstreams.
2.2.7 The working fluid shall be refrigerant type and shall be environment friendly Zero ozone
depletion potential. The heat pipe circuits shall be factory charged and hermetically sealed
with the calculated weight of refrigerant.
2.2.8 There shall be a multitude of loops in the height of the heat pipe and each loop shall be
individually charged.
2.2.9 Heat pipes with header assemblies containing a single circuit are not suitable as a single
leak will render the entire heat pipe inoperative.
2.2.10 Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified conditions
2.2.11 Heat pipe performance shall be independently type tested and certified in line with the
requirements of British Standards BS 5141 pt1 or European Standards EN 305 & 306 or
American Standards ARI 410 for testing and rating of heat exchangers.
2.2.12 The heat pipe shall have a third party independent type test report conducted by
Eurovent certified laboratories .
2.2.13 The heat pipe manufacturer shall have minimum 10 years experience in manufacturing of
heat pipes and must have heat pipes commissioned for a minimum period of 6 years in
the Middle East market.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Instruction Manuals containing the following material:-
Section 23 72 00
23 72 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.1.8 Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
3.2 Spare Parts
3.3 Special Tools
Section 23 72 00
23 72 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 72 00
23 72 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 73 30
OUTDOOR EXPOSED AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Air Handling Units General Requirements
2.2 Variable Frequency Speed Controller
2.3 Spare Parts
Section 23 73 30
Outdoor Exposed Air Handling Units
23 73 30 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 73 30
OUTDOOR EXPOSED AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Air Handling Units as described,
1.1.4 The Contractor shall submit the total and external static head calculation verification for
Engineer approval.
1.1.5 A name plate shall be permanently affixed to every unit listing air volume, fan static
pressure, coil duties and heat recovery equipment ratings.
1.1.6 Liftings rings shall be provided on all individual components of 35 kg mass and above for
maintenance removal.

1.3.1 Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards/
European Norms and United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the
performance/manufacturing standards of items mentioned in this section shall confirm to
the applicable portions of the latest editions of the following codes, standards and
regulations.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard

Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers.

Association

Associations
National Fire Protection Association NFPA NFPA 90A -
ARI ARI - Amertican

Refrigeration Institute.
Euopean standards/ EN -- --
Norms
1.4.2 Outside summer conditions:
115 °F (46.1 °C) Dry Bulb.

85 °F (29.4 °C) Wet Bulb.
25 °F (13.8 °C) Daily range.
schedules.
1.5.1 Manufacturers of air handling units shall have ISO 9001:2008 Certification.
1.5.2 The Air Handling Unit and all internal components such as “Coils, Fans and Filters etc”
should be manufactured to ISO 9001:2008 (BS 5750 part 1) Quality Assurance standards
and ISO 14001 Environmental Standards.
1.5.3 The Air Handling supplier should supply the first line product, which should be Eurovent
Certified. The Eurovent certificate should show the product model, range, factory name
and Country of origin.
1.5.4 Electrical components required as part of air handling units, shall be listed and labeled by
UL and comply with IEE Standards.
1.5.5 Air handling unit fan performance, sound rating, coil performance and fabrication should
be as per EN 13053/ARI 430.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Air Handling Units
2.1.1.1 Each unit shall consist of fan, motor, V-belt drive, cooling-coil, heating coil (when
specified), drain pan, filters and necessary controls.
2.1.1.2 The unit shall be either mounted on a suitable base, or hung from the ceiling. In all cases
approved vibration eliminators shall be provided. The Contractor shall submit details of
bases, mountings and connections to the Engineer for approval.
2.1.1.3 The unit(s) shall be of the draw thru Low/medium pressure type.
2.1.1.4 AHUs used for fresh air along with their cooling coils shall be suitably treated to prevent
corrosion and warranted for a minimum of 5 years, supported by local service agent
2.1.1.5 If not shown elsewhere in Acoustic Specialist Report the measured sound transmission
loss of the air handling units casing shall not be less than:
63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K HZ

24 22 26 37 44 53 55 dB
2.1.1.6 The listed sound transmission loss is the minimum required sound reduction from the fan
chamber to the plant room for an air handling unit that has supply and return ducted
systems.
2.1.1.7 The contractor shall confirm to the Engineer the total static pressure of the fan after the
Engineer's approval on the air handler and after preparing the shop Drawings.
2.1.1.8 Units shall be suitable for variable air volume application as shown in capacity schedule.
2.1.2 Construction
2.1.2.1 General:
a. AHU unit shall be in compliance with BS EN1886 /EURO VENT /ARI.
b. Central Station Air Handling Unit's casing construction shall be fabricated from
highest grade galvanized steel.
c. Construction of panel and frames shall be folded to form sturdy Side/ Top/ Bottom
panels and a rigid structure frames.
d. The construction shall serve thermal protection, reducing machine noise, absorbing
vibration and avoiding air leakage.
e. Modular sizes of panel and frames shall be easily assemble and re-assemble.
f. The construction and material used shall be environment friendly, clean and safe.
g. Mechanical strength of the casing at +1000 pa and -1000 pa shall be class D1 as per
EN 1886:200.
h. Casing air leakage at -400 pa and +700 pa shall be class L1 as per EN 1886:200.
i. Filter bypass leakage shall be class F9 as per EN 1886:200.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
j. Thermal bridging factor shall be class TB2 as per EN 1886:200.
k. Thermal transmittance shall be class T2 as per EN 1886:200.
2.1.2.2 Frame:
Heavy-duty formed frame is designed for rigidity and is made from highest-grade hot-dip
galvanized steel with minimal spangle finish grade G90 galvanized coating in accordance
with ASTM A653/ A653M in accordance with UL 465 Frames shall be painted for extra
protection, OR Housing assembled with self-supporting modular panels with base frame
integrated into the unit and anodized extruded aluminium profiles along the upper sides of
the unit. Inside and outside walls completely smooth
2.1.2.3 Double Skin Panel:
a. Modular panel shall be designed to be rigid and sturdy.
b. Panels shall be manufactured from heavy gauge galvanised mild steel sheets (or pre
plasticized or paint finish),or fabricated of aluminium sheet. Panels shall be double
skinned with heavy density acoustic and thermal insulation between the skins.
(Mineral wool / Glass Fibre Insulation).
c. The casing insulation properties:
· Minimum thickness shall be 50 mm and density 68 Kg/m3.

· Compliant with BS 476 -6 and BS 476-7.
· CFC and HCFC free.
· Inorganic, vermin proof and non-hygroscopic.
· Comply with fire protection class 0 of ISO 1182.2 an class A1 of DIN 4102.
· Thermal conductivity no greater than 0.03 W/mK.
d. Panel exterior skin shall be made from highest-grade hot-dip galvanized steel, a
minimal spangle grade G90 coating (Pre painted) or additional oven dried marine
anti-corrosion surface coating of plastic type A47SME, thickness 150 μm.
· Panel inside bottom: 1.20 mm galvanized sheet for AHU’s up to 10000 lps and
floor sheet shall be 1.5 mm for AHU’s above 10000 lps.
· Outer skin: 1 mm galvanized sheet with thermal transmittance: class T4.
· Thermal bridging factor: class TB2
· T2 / TB2.
· Sound attenuation Rw(DIN 52210-03): 41dB
· Sound attenuation of the panel certified in compliance with EN 1886 and EN ISO
3744
2.1.2.3.1 The unit panels skin thickness should be not less than 1 mm for inner skin. The panels
shall be fabricated of aluminium sheet. (or pre plasticized or paint finish).
2.1.2.3.2 All access doors shall be insulated to the same standard as the unit casing open towards
the high pressure side.
2.1.2.3.3 Full size hinged access doors with cam-locks and fixed handles should be provided for
inspection section, filters section, electric heaters section & fans section.
2.1.2.3.4 Walk in units should have internal door handles, internal lighting and reinforced floors.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.2.3.5 Air handling unit intake and discharge openings should be fitted with a flanged duct
connection frame.
2.1.2.3.6 All panels should be removable from outside the casing with quick release fasteners and
sturdy handles. the inspection doors should be hung on adjustable hinges and equipped
with mechanical secured sealing strips against the framework and view window. The
sealing strips should of cellular rubber with closed pores. The panel shall be mounted
flush with the frame members to create a smooth surface inside and outside.
2.1.2.3.7 Outdoor exposed unit shall have additional sheet roof steel with epoxy coated finish with a
minimum of 150mm air space above the top panel and angled at a minimum slope of 1:50.
The roof shall overhang all sides by a minimum of 150mm.
2.1.2.3.8 Outdoor exposed unit shall have the inner and outer panel skin should be coated with
minimum of 7 micro primer + 20 micro polyester + 10 micro epoxy paint or reverse side.
The walls from inside and outside should be completely smooth.
2.1.2.3.9 The installer shall provide the flexible duct connection and ensure that the duct is suitable
supported to ensure no deformation.
2.1.3 Fan Section
2.1.3.1 Fans shall have the duty as stated within the associated schedules.
2.1.3.2 All fan resistances stated have been calculated based on a particular selection of
equipment.
2.1.3.3 The final selection of plant duties by the installer, such as filters, coils, attenuators,
diffusers etc. and the actual ductwork fabrication drawings may produce different pressure
drops and therefore the installer shall recalculate the total system resistances based on
the final selection of plant and revise the fan resistance as necessary to achieve the
design air volume flow.
2.1.3.4 The fan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel properly reinforced and
connecting it to the coil section.
2.1.3.5 Fan shall be centrifugal type with multi-blade forward curved or air foil type, mounted on a
common shaft with enclosed housing. The fan and motor shall be statically and
dynamically balanced to eliminate noise and vibration (By Anti Vibration Spring Isolators).
2.1.3.6 Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated ball type with grease lines extending to the
2.1.3.7 Fan shall conform to the design fabrication of the AMCA 300 & 301 Standards.
2.1.3.8 Fans shall generally be of the high efficiency (minimum 75% efficiency) backward curved
bladed type, double inlet double width and for casings shall be of the lock-form casing
type, all welds heavy sheet steel, or split flanged type on the larger fans, adequately
braced and stiffened with steel angle with the discharge outlet level with the axis of the
impeller.
2.1.3.9 A bolted on access door shall be provided on the fan scroll to allow inspection and
cleaning of the impeller. Inlet eyes shall be of the curved aerofoil profile to streamline the
airflow into the impeller and of adequate diameter to allow withdrawal of impeller without
splitting the fan scroll split cased fans shall be assembled on site by a qualified millwright
to ensure that the fan set is correctly assembled and aligned. A drain plug shall be fitted at
the base of the fan scroll.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.3.10 The fan outlet shall be a spigot connection to suit connections to the ductwork system
flexible connections within the fan section, or externally, depending on the anti-vibration
requirements stated elsewhere.
2.1.3.11 The fan supporting side frame shall be constructed in angle frame or steel plate and shall
be fixed to the fan casing to provide the required angle for the fan discharge arrangement
shown elsewhere.
2.1.3.12 Impellers shall be of welded steel constructed on a case steel hub suitable bored and
keyway for mounting the shaft and shall have high grade steel plate aerofoil blades or
stitched welded to a rigid back plate. The impeller shaft shall be of solid high grade steel
adequately sized such that its first critical speed is not reached before the design fan
speed is obtained. The fan shaft shall be supported at each side of the impeller with either
sealed for life bearing or double roller bearings.
2.1.3.13 Fan shall be mastic coated and have galvanized steel wheel and high grade steel shaft.
2.1.3.14 Fan shall be driven by V-belt of variable pitch type. Belt guards of removable type shall be
2.1.3.15 The shaft shall be connected to the motor drive by cast steel machined pulleys, key way
and fixed onto the fan and drive shaft by an Approved manner and a multi V- belt drive
arrangement complete with a protective wire guard. The motor shall be a TEFC type
mounted on adjustable sliding rails.
2.1.3.16 The fan motors shall have IP55 degree of protection with mounting method B3 and class F
insulation.
2.1.3.17 Fan motors shall be 4 pole 1450 rpm. Motors shall be rated at a minimum 25% higher
than the actual absorbed power of the selected fan and drive. The fan motor shall be
suitable for operating on 400V, 3Ph, 50Hz electrical power supply. The fan section in the
AHU shall be provided with cable inlet set at factory. Drilling panels at site is not allowed.
2.1.3.18 The fan casing, side frames, bearing supports and motor shall all be mounted on a heavy
steel one piece channel on hollow section base frame and supported on independent
spring type anti-vibration. Mountings, within the fan section as selected by the AHU
manufacturer and in accordance with anti-vibration details contained elsewhere in this
specification.
2.1.3.19 The fan sections shall be complete with an approved reinforced steel base to facilitate
maintenance within the fan section, with marine lights and view ports in fan section
2.1.3.20 Belt drives
a) Belt drives shall comply with BS 3790 and be capable of transmitting at least the rated
power output of the driving motor at any stage of operation with one belt removed.
Unless otherwise indicated, not less than two belts per drive shall be used and all
multi-belt drives shall use matched sets. Belts shall be of rubber and fibre V section
unless otherwise indicated.
b) Pulleys shall be correctly aligned in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
c) Provision shall be made to permit drive alignment and adjustment of belt tension.
2.1.3.21 Guards
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
a) All power transmission shafts, belts and pulley drives shall be guarded and be in
compliance with PD 5304.
b) Fan guards shall be purpose-made by the air handling unit manufacturer or to the
approval of the air handling unit manufacturer and be constructed from galvanised or
plastic coated steel wire.
c) Guards shall be installed to prevent inadvertent contact with dangerous parts of

machinery and the mesh size and/or the location of the guard shall prevent finger
contact with any enclosed danger point.
d) Construction and installation shall ensure strength and rigidity and it shall not be
possible to remove any guard or access panel without the aid of a tool.
e) Removable access panels shall be provided to permit tachometer readings to be made

of motor and drive shafts and belt tension to be tested.
f) Guards shall be designed for the extreme motor position.
g) For duplicate motor installations, the guard provided shall be designed to protect both
drives. All fixings and mountings shall be installed to facilitate change-over of the drive.
2.1.3.22 Variable speed drives
a) Variable speed drives shall be provided where indicated, and as specified in

Electrical Specification.
b) Variable speed motors, drives, control gear and accessories shall be selected by a
specialist variable speed drive manufacturer as a complete package. The specialist
shall ensure that the unit is capable of providing sufficient power and torque to
enable the driven unit to start and operate properly throughout the speed range.
The drive shall be capable of providing the additional capacity as indicated
elsewhere.
c) The system shall be capable of interface with the BMS / controls system / control
panel with the necessary monitoring and control functions as indicated elsewhere.
The BMS specialist shall be responsible to ensure co-ordination between all parties.
2.1.3.23 The fan outlets shall be connected to casing with the help of fire retardant fabric acting as
flexible connection for anti-vibration tested to UL-214 and confirming to NFPA 90A and
NFPA 90 B. Country of the motor shall be from Europe, US and Japan.
2.1.3.24 The electric motors, starters and controllers shall be in accordance with the Electrical
section of these Specifications.
2.1.4 Cooling Coil
2.1.4.1 The coil shall be suitable for chilled water application.
2.1.4.2 The coil shall be of seamless copper tubing, having aluminium fins mechanically bonded
to the tubes, electro-tinned for marine application. Any other coating to improve the coil life
span can be evaluated.
2.1.4.3 Chilled water coil shall be manufactured in accordance to ARI 410-91, /en305, en1216
and EN13503.
2.1.4.4 The Copper tube used for cooling coil shall be 0.41 mm thickness and 16 mm dia. for
above 10000 lps capacity and 12.5 mm dia. for below 10000 lps capacity AHUs.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.5 Fin thickness shall be 0.3mm aluminium, Row /FPI – minimum 6 Row /9,
2.1.4.6 Capacities shown in documents should be net capacities after applying the protective coil
coating.
2.1.4.7 The fins should be in corrugated form to give good turbulent airflow. The fins should be
de-grease after punching and ultrasonic cleaned for solder joints. The whole fin should be
without any slots or holes for easy clean.
2.1.4.8 The tubes up to 3.2 m length should bent as a “hairpin” so no soldering has to be made on
the backside that results less risk for leaking. The return bends and the above bent tubes
should have the risk of erosion and to reduce the pressure drop. The return bends shall be
die formed.
2.1.4.9 The coil frame shall be Stainless steel. The thickness of the steel should be suitable to
carry the load of the cooling coil and not less than 1.2 mm. The coil body shall be mounted
on rails so that it can be withdrawn from the unit casing. Galvanized sheet should not be
used in coil construction.
2.1.4.10 All coils should have failing circuit for complete draining for the coil and shall be fitted with
a sloping stainless steel drip tray double skinned and insulated with a connection the
outside of the unit. The drip tray shall be designed to prevent water carry-over. The
installer shall ensure that a suitable sealed trap is fitted to the condensate outlet.
2.1.4.11 Drain pan shall extend 3” (75 mm) from the entering side face, 6” (150 mm) from air
leaving side face and 4” (100 mm) from face to drift eliminator, if exist. Drain pan shall be
Stainless steel with insulation.
2.1.4.12 Cleanout plugs of copper construction shall be provided on return bends to facilitate of
internal surface of tubes.
2.1.4.13 The headers shall be of seamless copper with supply and return connections. Each
header shall be provided with drains and vents placed at the highest point of the coil.
2.1.4.14 The coil shall be tested at not less than 350 psig. (2415 Kpa).
2.1.4.15 The coil shall be accessible for service and shall be removable without dismantling the
entire unit with marine lights in coil section.
2.1.4.16 The face velocity shall not exceed 2.3 to 2.35 m/s. Cooling coil pressure drop shall not
exceed 25 Kpa.
2.1.5 Electric Heating Coil, Duct Heater or Reheat Coil
2.1.5.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings electric heaters of the duct mounted
type or incorporated with air conditioning unit of capacities as indicated in the Capacity
Schedule and on the drawings.
2.1.5.2 Heaters shall comply with NEC Section 424 Part F and NFPA 9,90A-2-1.3 for adjacent
duct linings.
2.1.5.2.1 Heater shall be controllable in steps or by Thyrister. The heater shall have degree of
protection IP 43 in accordance with IEC 529. Each heater shall be supplied complete with
the following:-
2.1.5.2.1.1 Fin tube heating element constructed of steel sheath with ceramic coated steel fins, 80%
of nickel 20% chromium coiled resister wire centred within the sheath and highly
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
compacted MgO film on the internal surface of the sheath for electrical insulation and heat
transfer.
2.1.5.2.1.2 Maximum watt density should not exceed 35 watt/in2 (5.4 watt/cm2).
2.1.5.2.1.3 Heavy gauge aluminized steel frame hosing the heater, and shall be suitable for horizontal
and vertical mountings.
2.1.5.2.1.4 Control panel incorporated with the heater housing and same material as the housing.
Panel shall include the following:-
a) Auto-reset thermal cut-out and manual-reset thermal cut-out with the sensing bulb
in the air stream.
b) Cut-out shall de-energize the heating element in case of excessive temperature.
c) Staging contactors to control the heating element as required by the temperature

controller and the auto-reset thermal cut-out. Heating elements shall be phase to
phase connected to eliminate need for neutral in control panel.
d) Safety contactors (controlled by the manual reset thermal cut-out) are wired in
series with the staging contactors to serve as a back-up in the event staging
contactors fail.
e) Static pressure type air flow switch that prevent energization when air flow is
inadequate.
f) Fan delay control, to delay fan motor operation until the heating elements have
reached a pre-selected temperature.
g) Terminal box and knock outs.
h) Built-in control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts
maximum. No phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
2.1.6 Filter Section
2.1.6.1 The air filter section shall consist of a rough filter (Flat Filter) 50 mm thick aluminium mesh
for all indoor AHU’s and aluminium plus a fine filter (Bag Type) for FAHU’s. Pressure drop
in the filter when dirty shall not exceed ½"WG (125 pa). Filters shall be easily removable
for cleaning and replacement.
2.1.6.2 The rough filter shall be part of the mixing box section.
2.1.6.3 Filters shall be provided with rigid self-supporting corrosion resistant steel frames and
clamps, gasketed and sealed to prevent air bypass, with marine lights and view ports in
fan section
2.1.7 Mixing Box and Dampers
2.1.7.1 The mixing box shall be of a mild steel, heavy gauge cabinet. The mixing box shall include
steel damper blades and rough filter section.
2.1.7.2 Fresh and return air dampers shall be so designed that complete mixing of the two air
streams is achieved in the mixing box. They shall be of the parallel acting type and shall
be mechanically interlocked.
2.1.7.3 The dampers shall have approved non-corrosion type bushings.
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.7.4 Mixing box openings shall be provided with duct flanges.
2.1.8 Drain Pan
2.1.8.1 An insulated drain pan shall be provided in each unit under both the fan and the coil
section.
2.1.8.2 Drain pans shall have drain connections on both sides and a deep seal trap on the drain
pipe.
2.1.8.3 Drain pan shall be suitably connected to the drainage system.
2.1.9 Controls
2.1.9.1 Each air handling unit shall be equipped with a control panel.
2.1.9.2 The panel shall include but shall not be limited to the following: circuit breakers, motor
starters, pilot lights, on/off push button, temperature controller, control power transformer,
as applicable, to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum, and all control wiring, no
phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
2.1.9.3 2 or 3 way modulating motorized valves, isolating valve double regulating valves, strainer
and all accessories as detailed on drawings.
2.2.9.4 Pressure Independent Balancing and Control Valve (PIBCV) shall be used if shown on the
drawings as per the specifications shown elsewhere
2.1.10 Vibration Isolation
2.1.10.1 The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor
and drive assembly on 25 mm deflection spring type anti-vibration mountings. The fan
discharge shall be connected to the air handling unit casing through canvas connection to
prevent vibration transfer.
2.1.11 Air Control Dampers
2.1.11.1 Dampers supplied along with AHUs, shall be opposed blade type. Dampers shall be of
aerodynamic construction fabricated from aluminium extrusions with regulations ABS
plastic gear wheel. Damper motor and fittings, including a position indicator, shall be
supplied loose for fitting on site by the installer. Dampers shall be in accordance with CEN
3 (T4).
2.2 Variable Frequency Drive
(Refer to Electrical Specifications)
2.3 Spare Parts
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 62.1 – 2007 or equivalent as approved by

2.4.1.1 Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation features.
contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year and ten years for the coil
and casing against corrosion and deterioration from the date of final completion certificate.
2.5.2 All guarantees shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the Contractor shall
Section 23 73 30
23 73 30 - 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 81 00
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DX Split Systems (Constant Refregirant Flow)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Spare Parts

3.2 Special Tools
Section 23 81 00
Decentralized HVAC Equipment
23 81 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 81 00
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 Units shall be completely packaged, factory assembled and factory charged, designed for
such Applications. Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be
considered and more stringent specifications to be adopted. Manufacturing of AHU’s
should be in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2007, section 5.
Engineer approval.
1.1.5 Refrigrant type used must have zero ozone depletion potential (ODP=0) and shall comply
with ESTIDAMA requirements.
1.1.6 The Contractor to confirm the CoP value of 3.6 for DX Split Units and Mini-Split Units,
prior to procurement, with supporting test certificate at AHRI conditions (or equivalent)
when tested at full load.
1.1.7 All AC units supplied shall be ESMA certified.
1.1.8 All AC units load shall be verified by the AC supplier/contractor upon actual selection of
materials at site.

Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and ASHRAE - -
Air Conditioning Engineers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA - -
Air Moving and Conditioning Associations AMCA - -
National Fire Protection Association NFPA NFPA 90A -
ARI ARI - Amertican

Refrigeration Institute.
1.4.1.1 Outside summer conditions
115°F (46.1° C) Dry Bulb.

85°F (29.4° C) Wet Bulb.
25° F (13.8° C) Daily range.
1.4.1.2 The inside summer conditions are indicated on the Drawings in the units capacity
schedules.
1.5.1 Manufacturers of air handling units shall have ISO 9001:2008 Certification.
1.5.2 The Unit and all internal components such as “Coils, Fans and Filters etc” should be
manufactured to ISO 9001:2008 (BS 5750 part 1) Quality Assurance standards and ISO
14001 Environmental Standards.
1.5.3 The Units supplier should supply the first line product, which should be Eurovent Certified.
The Eurovent certificate should show the product model, range, factory name and Country
of origin.
1.5.4 Electrical components required as part of air handling units, shall be listed and labeled by
UL and comply with IEE Standards.
1.5.5 The Unit performance, sound rating, coil performance and fabrication should be as per EN
13053/ARI 430.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DX SPLIT SYSTEMS (CONSTANT REFRIGERANT FLOW)
2.1.1 Each split system shall consist of two major components, one condensing unit installed
out door and one blower coil unit installed indoor. Both units are interconnected with
copper pipes.
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
Each system shall be supplied complete with all necessary control wiring for its proper
operation.
2.1.2 DX CONDENSING UNITS
2.1.2.1 General
2.1.2.1.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings condensing units of the direct
expansion air-cooled type. Unit shall be factory-assembled into a compact, weather-proof
cabinet with common base size. Each condensing unit shall be complete with casing,
compressor, condenser, control panel, one main disconnect switch, vibration isolators and
all electrical power and control wiring necessary for proper operation.
2.1.2.2 Casing
2.1.2.2.1 Casing shall be at least 18 gauge, zinc-coated steel, phosphatized and painted externally
with epoxy resin primer and finished with an approved top coat. Casing shall have a
removable end panel, to allow for access to all components and connections, and die
formed mounting rails integrated with unit base. Casing shall be provided with drainage
holes in the base pan.
2.1.2.3 Compressor
2.1.2.3.1 Compressor shall be of rotary /scroll type with crank case heater, discharge line sound
muffler and suction and discharge valves. Compressor shall have internal protection
devices to provide protection for motor overload, locked rotor, and excessive winding
temperatures.
2.1.2.4 Condenser Coil and Fans
2.1.2.4.1 Coil shall be of the seamless copper tubes with heavy aluminium fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes, coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested at not less than 400
psig ( 2756 Kpa ) air pressure. Condenser coil shall be protected by heavy-duty grille.
2.1.2.4.2 Condenser fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced of aerodynamic design,
heavy duty motors.Each motor shall have built-in current and thermal overload protection
and permanently lubricated ball bearings . Fan motor shall be provided with short circuit
protective device(s).
2.1.2.4.3 Propeller Type Fans:shall be of the direct drive type with fan motor support mounted to
cabinet top. Fan shall have rugged steel guards for protection.
2.1.2.4.4 Centrifugal Type Fan: shall be of the double inlet forward- curved blades, belt driven with
adjustable pulleys. Fan motor shall be capable to overcome specified static pressure.
2.1.2.5 Control panel
2.1.2.5.1 Condensing unit shall be equipped with a factory wired built-in control panel comprising :
24-volts control power transformer, magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser
fan motors, high and low pressure cutouts , non-recycling pump down and reset relay, and
all necessary timers, and control relays and protective devices.
2.1.3 DX BLOWER COIL UNITS
2.1.3.1 General
2.1.3.1.1 Supply, install, and connect ( refrigerent piping, power and electrical wiring ) wherever
shown on the Drawings factory assembled blower coil units consisting of casing, direct
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
expansion evaporator coil, fan, motor, insulated drain pan and throw away filters. Each
unit shall be supplied complete with expansion valve, drier, liquid sight glass, electrical
wiring and vibration isolators.
2.1.3.2 Casings
2.1.3.2.1 Casing shall be not less than 20 gauge steel with baked on enamel finish, lined with not
less than 13 mm thick, neoprene coated insulation. Casing shall be provided with
removable access panel for full access to all components , and shall be provided with
mounting holes for suspended mounting.
2.1.3.3 Coils
2.1.3.3.1 Cooling coils shall be seamless copper tubes with heavy aluminium fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes. Coil shall be complete with male couplers, and factory operating
charge of refrigerent and shall be factory pressure and leak tested at not less than 200
psig (1380 Kpa).
2.1.3.4 Fan Motors
2.1.3.4.1 Fan shall be of the double inlet centrifugal type with forward-curved blades, belt driven,
with an electric 3 speed motor having permanent split capacitor (for single phase motors
only),and built-in thermal over load protection. Fan and motor bearings shall be of the
permanently lubricated type.
2.1.3.5 Remote Control Station
2.1.3.5.1 Supply and install a remote control station wherever shown on Drawings complete with
thermostats, on/off switches, controllers and all components indicated on the Drawings
together with all the control wiring and its connections to the blower & condensing unit.
2.1.4 DX Double Skin & Fresh Air Handling Unit
2.1.4.1.1 Each unit shall consist of fan, motor, V-belt drive, cooling-coil, heating coil (when
specified), drain pan, filters and necessary controls
2.1.4.1.2 The unit shall be either mounted on a suitable base, or hung from the ceiling. In all cases
approved vibration eliminators shall be provided. The Contractor shall submit details of
bases, mountings and connections to the Engineer for approval.
2.1.4.1.3 The unit(s) shall be of the draw thru Low/medium pressure type.
2.1.4.1.4 If not shown elsewhere in Acoustic Specialist Report the measured sound transmission
loss of the air handling units casing shall not be less than:
2.1.4.1.5 Sound attenuation of the panel certified in compliance with EN 1886 and EN ISO 3744:
Frq. Hz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Okt. dB 17 21 27 30 31 38 42
2.1.4.1.6 The listed sound transmission loss is the minimum required sound reduction from the fan
chamber to the plant room for an air handling unit that has supply and return ducted
systems.
2.1.4.1.7 The contractor shall confirm to the Engineer the total static pressure of the fan after the
Engineer's approval on the air handler and after preparing the shop Drawings.
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.1.8 Units shall be suitable for variable air volume application as shown in capacity schedule.
2.1.4.2 Construction
2.1.4.2.1 General:
a. AHU unit shall be in compliance with BS EN1886 /EURO VENT /ARI.
b. Central Station Air Handling Unit's casing construction shall be fabricated from
highest grade galvanized steel.
c. Construction of panel and frames shall be folded to form sturdy Side/ Top/ Bottom
panels and a rigid structure frames.
d. The construction shall serve thermal protection, reducing machine noise, absorbing
vibration and avoiding air leakage.
e. Modular sizes of panel and frames shall be easily assemble and re-assemble.
f. The construction and material used shall be environment friendly, clean and safe.
g. Mechanical strength of the casing at +1000 pa and -1000 pa shall be class D1 as per
EN 1886:2007.
h. Casing air leakage at -400 pa and +700 pa shall be class L1 as per EN 1886:2007.
i. Filter bypass leakage shall be class F9 as per EN 1886:2007.
j. Thermal bridging factor shall be class TB3 as per EN 1886:2007.
k. Thermal transmittance shall be class T3 as per EN 1886:2007.
2.1.4.2.2 Frame:
Heavy-duty formed frame is designed for rigidity and is made from highest-grade hot-dip
galvanized steel with minimal spangle finish grade G90 galvanized coating in accordance
with ASTM A653/ A653M in accordance with UL 465 Frames shall be painted for extra
protection, OR Housing assembled with self-supporting modular panels with base frame
integrated into the unit and anodized extruded aluminium profiles along the upper sides of
the unit. Inside and outside walls completely smooth.
2.1.4.2.3 Double Skin Panel:
a. Modular panel shall be designed to be rigid and sturdy.
b. Panels shall be manufactured from heavy gauge galvanised mild steel sheets. Panels
shall be double skinned with heavy density acoustic and thermal insulation between
the skins. (Mineral wool / Glass Fibre Insulation).
c. Panel exterior skin shall be made from highest-grade hot-dip galvanized steel, a
minimal spangle grade G90 coating (Pre painted) or additional surface coating in white
plastic type A47SME, thickness 150 μm. Thickness shall be 1 mm galvanized sheet
with Thermal transmittance: class T4. Sound attenuation Rw(DIN 52210-03): 40dB
d. Panel inside bottom: 1.20 mm galvanized sheet for AHU’s up to 10000 lps and 1.5 mm
thickness floor sheet for AHU’s for above 10000 lps.
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
e. The casing insulation shall be in compliance with BS 476 -6 and BS 476-7; CFC and
HCFC free ;inorganic, vermin proof and non-hygroscopic; comply with fire protection
class 0 of ISO 1182.2 an class A1 of DIN 4102.;minimum thickness of 50 mm and
density 48 Kg/m3. with thermal conductivity no greater than 0.03 W/mK
f. All access doors shall be insulated to the same standard as the unit casing open
towards the high pressure side.
g. Full size hinged access doors with cam-locks and fixed handles should be provided for
inspection section, filters section, electric heaters section & fans section.
h. Walk in units should have internal door handles, internal lighting and reinforced floors.
i. Air handling unit intake and discharge openings should be fitted with a flanged duct
connection frame.
j. All panels should be removable from outside the casing with quick release fasteners
and sturdy handles. the inspection doors should be hung on adjustable hinges and
equipped with mechanical secured sealing strips against the framework and view
window. The sealing strips should of cellular rubber with closed pores. The panel shall
be mounted flush with the frame members to create a smooth surface inside and
outside.
k. Flexible duct connection should be provided to ensure that the duct is suitably
supported without deformation
l. Outdoor exposed unit shall have additional sheet roof steel with epoxy coated finish
with a minimum of 150mm air space above the top panel and angled at a minimum
slope of 1:50. The roof shall overhang all sides by a minimum of 150mm.
m. Outdoor exposed unit shall have the inner and outer panel skin should be coated with
minimum of 7 micro primer + 20 micro polyester + 10 micro epoxy paint or reverse
side. The walls from inside and outside should be completely smooth
2.1.4.3 Fan Section
2.1.4.3.1 Fans shall have the duty as stated within the associated schedules.
2.1.4.3.2 All fan resistances stated have been calculated based on a particular selection of
equipment.
2.1.4.3.3 The final selection of AHU shall be calculated based on the final selection of plant
components and revise the fan resistance as necessary to achieve the design air volume
flow.
2.1.4.3.4 The fan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel properly reinforced and
connecting it to the coil section. Fresh and return air dampers shall have approved non-
corrosion type bushings and shall be so designed that complete mixing of the two air
streams is achieved in the mixing box. They shall be of the parallel acting type and shall
be mechanically interlocked.
2.1.4.3.5 Fan shall be centrifugal type with multi-blade forward curved or air foil type, mounted on a
common shaft with enclosed housing. The fan and motor shall be statically and
dynamically balanced to eliminate noise and vibration (By Anti Vibration Spring Isolators).
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.3.6 Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated ball type with grease lines extending to the
2.1.4.3.7 Fan shall conform to the design fabrication of the AMCA 300 & 301 Standards. Mixing box
shall be of a mild steel, heavy gauge cabinet. The mixing box shall include steel damper
blades and rough filter section
2.1.4.3.8 Fans shall generally be of the high efficiency (minimum 75% efficiency) backward curved
bladed type, double inlet double width and for casings shall be of the lock-form casing
type, all welds heavy sheet steel, or split flanged type on the larger fans, adequately
braced and stiffened with steel angle with the bottom of the discharge outlet level with the
axis of the impeller.
2.1.4.3.9 A bolted on access door shall be provided on the fan scroll to allow inspection and
cleaning of the impeller. Inlet eyes shall be of the curved aerofoil profile to streamline the
airflow into the impeller and of adequate diameter to allow withdrawal of impeller without
splitting the fan scroll split cased fans shall be assembled on site by a qualified millwright
to ensure that the fan set is correctly assembled and aligned. A drain plug shall be fitted at
the base of the fan scroll.
2.1.4.3.10 The fan outlet shall be a spigot connection to suit connections to the ductwork system
flexible connections within the fan section, or externally, depending on the anti-vibration
requirements stated elsewhere.
2.1.4.3.11 The fan supporting side frame shall be constructed in angle frame or steel plate and shall
be fixed to the fan casing to provide the required angle for the fan discharge arrangement
shown elsewhere.
2.1.4.3.12 Impellers shall be of welded steel constructed on a case steel hub suitable bored and
keywayed for mounting the shaft and shall have high grade steel plate aerofoil blades or
stitched welded to a rigid backplate. The impeller shaft shall be of solid high grade steel
adequately sized such that its first critical speed is not reached before the design fan
speed is obtained. The fan shaft shall be supported at each side of the impeller with either
sealed for life bearing or double roller bearings.
2.1.4.3.13 Fan shall be mastic coated and have galvanized steel wheel and high grade steel shaft.
2.1.4.3.14 Fan shall be driven by V-belt of variable pitch type. Belt guards of removable type shall be
2.1.4.3.15 The fan motors shall have IP55 degree of protection with mounting method B3 and class F
insulation.
2.1.4.4 Cooling Coil
2.1.4.4.1 Cooling coil shall be seamless copper tubes with heavy aluminium fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes. Coil shall be complete with male couplers, and factory operating
charge of refrigerent and shall be factory pressure and leak tested at not less than 200
psig (1380 Kpa).
2.1.4.4.2 Fresh Air Handling Unit’s coil shall be of seamless copper tubing, having copper fins
mechanically bonded to the tubes, electro-tinned for marine application. Any other coating
to improve the coil life span can be evaluated.
2.1.4.4.3 Capacities shown in documents should be net capacities after applying the protective coil
coating.
2.1.4.5 Electric Heating Coil, Duct Heater or Reheat Coil
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.5.1 Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings electric heaters of the duct mounted
type or incorporated with air conditioning unit of capacities as indicated in the Capacity
Schedule and on the drawings.
2.1.4.5.2 Heaters shall comply with NEC Section 424 Part F and NFPA 9,90A-2-1.3 for adjacent
duct linings.
2.1.4.5.3 Heater shall be controllable in steps or by Thyrister. The heater shall have degree of
protection IP 43 in accordance with IEC 529. Each heater shall be supplied complete with
the following:-
2.1.4.5.3.1 Fin tube heating element constructed of steel sheath with ceramic coated steel fins, 80%
of nickel 20% chromium coiled resister wire centred within the sheath and highly
compacted MgO film on the internal surface of the sheath for electrical insulation and heat
transfer.
2.1.4.5.3.2 Maximum watt density should not exceed 35 watt/in2 (5.4 watt/cm2).
2.1.4.5.3.3 Heavy gauge aluminized steel frame hosing the heater, and shall be suitable for horizontal
and vertical mountings.
2.1.4.5.3.4 Control panel incorporated with the heater housing and same material as the housing.
Panel shall include the following:-
a) Auto-reset thermal cut-out and manual-reset thermal cut-out with the sensing bulb
in the air stream.
b) Cut-out shall de-energize the heating element in case of excessive temperature.
c) Staging contactors to control the heating element as required by the temperature

controller and the auto-reset thermal cut-out. Heating elements shall be phase to
phase connected to eliminate need for neutral in control panel.
d) Safety contactors (controlled by the manual reset thermal cut-out) are wired in
series with the staging contactors to serve as a back-up in the event staging
contactors fail.
e) Static pressure type air flow switch that prevent energization when air flow is
inadequate.
f) Fan delay control, to delay fan motor operation until the heating elements have
reached a pre-selected temperature.
g) Terminal box and knock outs.
h) Built-in control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts
maximum. No phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
i) View ports shall be provided to the fan section and filter section.
Provide marine lights in fan section, Coil section and filter section.
2.1.4.6 Filter Section
2.1.4.6.1 The air filter section shall consist of a rough filter (Flat Filter) 50 mm thick aluminium mesh
for all indoor AHU’s and aluminum plus a fine filter (Bag Type) for FAHU’s. Pressure drop
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
in the filter when dirty shall not exceed ½"WG (125 pa). Filters shall be easily removable
for cleaning and replacement.
2.1.4.6.2 The rough filter shall be part of the mixing box section.
2.1.4.6.3 Filters shall be provided with rigid self supporting corrosion resistant steel frames and
clamps, gasketed and sealed to prevent air bypass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Spare Parts
3.2 Special Tools
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.4 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEED PERIOD
contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year and five years for
compressors from the date of final completion certificate.
Section 23 81 00
23 81 00 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 82 00
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fan Coil Units
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Spare Parts
3.2 Special Tools
Section 23 82 00
Convection Heating and Cooling Units
23 82 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 82 00
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
delivery in good operating conditions of a complete Terminal Heating and Cooling Units as
described, shown detailed or implied in the tender documents of the project.
Engineer approval.
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________

Standard
American Society of Heating Refrigerating ASHRAE - -
and Air Conditioning Engineers.
Association
Air Moving and Conditioning Associations AMCA - -
National Fire Protection Association NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air
Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
ARI ARI American Refrigeration
Institute
1.4.1.1 Outside summer conditions:-
115 °F (46.1 °C) Dry Bulb.

85 °F (29.4 °C) Wet Bulb.
25 °F (13.8 °C) Daily range.
schedules.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Fan Coil Units
2.1.1.1 The Contractor shall supply and install fan coil units of capacities indicated on the
Drawings. . Authority regulations and Sustainability requirements shall also be considered
and more stringent specifications to be adopted. Manufacturing of all fan coil units should
be in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1-2007, section 5.
2.1.1.2 The units shall be complete with galvanized heavy gauge steel casing, coil, fan(s), motor,
filter, drain pan, grilles, dampers, controls, insulation and all necessary auxiliaries.
2.1.1.3 The units shall be hung from the ceiling with approved type vibration eliminators.
2.1.1.4 Downstream duct of the Fan Coil Unit, dampers and air outlets should be sized on the
maximum air flow (high speed) of the unit selected and not the specified one.
2.1.1.5 The Contractor shall confirm to the Engineer the total static pressure of the fan motor after
the Engineer’s approval on the units and after preparing the shop drawings.
2.1.1.6 All exposed unit shall have decorative cabinet with double deflection aluminum grille.
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.2 Casing
2.1.2.1 FCU body shall be constructed with minimum 16 gage sheet, with galvanized sheet steel
casing; 10mm thick closed cell thermal/acoustic insulation with class 1 fire resistance.
2.1.2.2 If not shown on acoustic specialist report / specifications, the maximum acceptable sound
transmission through the FCU casing (at high speed) measured in accordance with JIS
B8616-2006, or equivalent international standard as follows:-
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k Hz

28 31 36 34 32 28 24 dB
2.1.2.3 When selecting the units the external static pressure should include all losses in ducts,
fittings, air outlets, clean filter, etc., in addition, 0.1” wg (25 Pa) should be added as a
margin for dirty filter. ESP of fan coil unit shall be at 75 Pa.
2.1.3 Fan
2.1.3 .1 Fan shall be AMCA tested and certified by AMCA in accordance with AMCA 210 for air
performance and AMCA 300 for sound performance or equivalent certified body.
2.1.3.2 Fans shall be selected in such way that the operating point does not fall very close to the
unstable region, select at Best efficiency point. Limit the fan coil unit combined noise to
the maximum sound level indicated by a NC 30 curve in the occupied space when the fan
coil unit is installed above the ceiling.
2.1.3.3 Fan bearings are suitable for continuous operation of 200000 hrs.
2.1.4 Cooling Coil
2.1.4.1 The coil shall be suitable for chilled water application.
2.1.4.2 The coil shall be constructed of heavy gauge copper tubes and aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to the tubes.. The coil shall have seamless copper headers with
manual air vents and shall be suitable for a working pressure of 250 psi. (1720 Kpa).
2.1.4.3 Chilled Water Cooling Coils, Cleanable, capacities indicated when operating under design
conditions and sized as scheduled. Coils constructed with 0.31 mm thickness and 9.5 mm
seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins and galvanized steel frames and
headers.
2.1.4.4 Chilled coil pressure drop in liquid shall be restricted 25kpa
2.1.4.5 Cooling coils for FCUs shall be a minimum of 4 rows. Minimum coil diameter should be
3/8 inches.
2.1.4.6 Fin thickness shall be 0.12 mm and the fin concentration on the coil shall be restricted to
8-9 fins per inch.
2.1.4.7 Coils shall have manual air vent and drain connections. Coils shall be pressure tested at
1.5 times operating pressure, but the test pressure shall be minimum 24 Bars unless
otherwise required by higher system working pressures.
2.1.4.8 Water velocity in the tubes shall not exceed 1.5 m/s and the face velocity across the
cooling restricted to 1.5 to 2.00 m/sec
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.9 Chilled water coil shall be manufactured in accordance to ARI 410-91, also in accordance
to EN305, EN1216 and EN 13503 Standards.
2.1.5 Filter
2.1.5.1 25mm thick air filter, permanent and cleanable type, made of aluminum mesh and
arranged in a solid frame.
2.1.5.2 Arrangements shall be made for passing all fresh and re-circulated air through the filters
before passing through the coils. Or otherwise separate filters on the fresh air side shall
be provided.
2.1.6 Drain Pan
2.1.6.1 An insulated drain pan shall be provided in each unit under both the fan and the coil
section.
2.1.6.2 Drain pans shall have drain connections on both sides and a deep seal trap on the drain
pipe.
2.1.6.3 Drain pan shall be suitably connected to the drainage system.
2.1.6.4 The drain pan shall be stainless steel or equivalent rigid and watertight and shall be sized
and equipped with slope towards drain connection.
2.1.6.5 An auxiliary drain pan shall be provided in the piping end pocket under the coil drain
valves and control valves. Pan shall be completely insulated on the underside of the pan
with 6 mm thick elastomeric foam insulation
2.1.7 Fan Assembly
2.1.7.1 Forwardly curved galvanized steel fan wheel, statically and dynamically balanced in
scrolls of galvanized steel, mounted on common shaft with the motor.
2.1.7.2 Fan shall be AMCA tested and certified by AMCA in accordance with AMCA 210 for air
performance and AMCA 300 for sound performance or equivalent certified body.
2.1.7.3 Fans shall be selected in such way that the operating point does not fall very close to the
unstable region, select at Best efficiency point. Limit the fan coil unit combined noise to
the maximum sound level indicated by a NC 30 curve in the occupied space when the fan
coil unit is installed above the ceiling.
2.1.7.4 Fan bearings are suitable for continuous operation of 200000 hrs.
2.1.7.5 The fan motor shall be of (ODR), with class “B” insulation as a minimum and generally
comply with the requirements of the Electrical section of these specifications. Direct drive
units shall be of the permanent split capacitor, three speed types, fan motors are 6 poles
they revolve at around 900rpm and DIDW forward curved direct driven 3 speed fans. And
shall run without undue noise or vibration. Rubber isolators and thermal overload
protective devices shall be provided. For belt drive units motor shall be single speed
bolted to an adjustable platform for belt adjustment.
2.1.7.6 Provide fuse stat overload device for motor protection and permanent green field
connections to motor. Provide isolation between fan motor assembly and unit casing in at
least four (4) locations to eliminate any vibration from the fan to the fan coil unit casing.
Provide isolation between the motor and blower as well as between the blower and
casing.
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.7.7 The motors shall confirm to IEC 34, IEC72, BS 5000, BS 3979 AND BS 4999 Standards,
the motor meets EN 60034, EN55014, EN 50082 -1/2, EN 61000-3-2, VDE 0839, TEIL 82-
2, UL 1004 for safety and carry CE mark.
2.1.7.8 Permanently lubricated or pre-lubricated bearings to require lubrication no more than once
every three years.
2.1.8 Controls
2.1.8.1 Each Fan-Coil unit shall be provided with the following controls:
2.1.8.1.1 A combination room thermostat and manual three speeds LO-ME-HI (for direct drive units)
motor control switch with an (ON/OFF/AUTO) position of decorative appearance.
2.1.8.1.3 Dedicated FCU`s are to be provided with modulating type 2 port pressure independent
control valves (PIBCV)
2.1.8.1.4 1 Number thermostat is to be provided to each FCU or for multiple FCU as per the
drawing to control temperature within a pre-defined limit (+or – 2 Degrees ONLY) and the
fan speed. The thermostat shall be connected to the FCUs and the mall BEMS system
and be provided with 10 meters of cable by the landlord. This will afford some degree of
flexibility during the tenant fit out with regards to the location of the controller.
2.1.8.1.5 Where there is more than one FCU serving a tenancy a common strainer shall be utilized
i.e. there is no requirement for an individual strainer to each FCU.
2.1.8.1.6 Isolating and other accessories as shown on drawings.
2.1.8.2 The Control cycle for the fan coil unit shall be as follows:
2.1.8.2.1 The operation of the fan shall place the motorized valve under the control of the room
thermostat. Fan in off position shall place the valve in closed position.
2.1.9 Grilles and Dampers
2.1.9.1 Decorative Fan-Coil unit shall be provided with the following.
a) Adjustable double deflection aluminum discharge grilles.
b) Return air aluminum grille.
c) Fresh air grille, with damper manually adjustable from fully closed to at least 20%
CFM of the unit.
2.1.10 Performance Test Certificate:
2.1.10.1 The fan coil unit thermal test has to be performed according to EUROVENT 6/11 ‘'
Thermal test method for Ducted Fan Coils",
2.1.10.2 EUROVENT 6/10 ‘‘Air Flow test Method for Ducted Fan Coil Units'' and EUROVENT 8/12
‘' Sound test method for Ducted Fan Coil Unit.
2.1.10.3 Alternatively the FCU manufacturer shall be certified with AHRI standard 440-2008 in
addition to a CETL listed for safety compliance.
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Spare Parts
3.2 Special Tools
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 23 82 00
23 82 00 - 8
DIVISION 25
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION FACILITY CONTROLS
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 25 50 00
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 System Architecture
2.3 Hot Backup Server
2.4 Hardware
2.5 Communications
2.6 System Software
2.7 Operator Interface
2.8 Monitoring And Control
2.9 System Database
2.10 Open Integration
2.11 Data Exchange
2.12 Diagnostic Capabilities
2.13 Building Management Specification
2.14 Specific Building Management Functions
2.15 Field Devices
2.16 Valves
2.17 Rotary Actuators
2.18 Rotary Valves
2.19 Sensors
PART 3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3.1 Chilled Water Plant

3.2 Constant Air Volume Total Fresh Air Handling Units with Energy & Heat Recovery
Wheels
3.3 Basement Parking Extract Fans
3.4 Fire Lift Well and Pressurisation Fans
Section 25 50 00
Integrated Automation Facility Controls
25 50 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.5 General Extract Fan

3.6 Water Storage Tank/ Light Fuel Oil Tank
3.7 Transfer Pumps
3.8 Typical Water Supply Pump Set
3.9 Water Booster Pumps/Irrigation Pumps
3.10 Sump Pumps
3.11 Fire Pumps
3.12 Generator
3.13 Fire Alarm System
3.14 Swimming Pool Panel/Water Fountains Control Panel
3.15 Lift System
3.16 Lighting System
3.17 Main Distribution Boards
3.18 FCUs
3.19 Chilled Water BTU Metering
3.20 Electric KW/HR Energy Meters
3.21 Water Metering
3.22 Water Filtration System
3.23 Security/Access Control/Gate Barrier Systems
3.24 Motorized Damper
3.25 SMOKE EXTRACT FANS
3.26 Smoke Control Panel (SCP)
3.27 Main Control Panels (MCP)
3.29 Approved Manufacturers
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 25 50 00
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The contractor shall supply and install all the Building Management Control System,
auxiliary devices, instruments, etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems
described in the specifications. The specifications are complemented each to the other.
1.1.2 The sequence of operation of each system or piece of equipment is specified under the
equipment specification.
1.2.1 The Building Management and Control System (BMS) shall incorporate Direct Digital
Control (DDC) of HVAC, equipment monitoring, and control consisting of a Client Server
based system with Operator Work Stations (OWS) with color graphic data displays;
microcomputer based General Purpose DDC Controllers (GPCs) interfacing directly with
sensors, actuators and environmental delivery systems (i.e. HVAC units, chillers) electric
controls and mechanical devices for all items indicated on drawings described herein
including dampers, valves, panels; a primary communication network to allow data
exchange from GPC to GPC; Unitary DDC Controllers (UCs) interfacing with sensors,
actuators, terminal equipment devices.
1.2.2 Provide all panels, enclosures, relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all
other auxiliaries, accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable
system.
1.2.3 The IBMS software must be certified by BACNet Testing Laboratories as BACNet
Advanced Workstation. The IBMS should also have other certifications such as UL listing
for Energy and preferably for Fire and Security.
1.2.4 Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats, room wall sensors, 1400 mm
above the floor, measured to the center line of the instruments.
1.2.5 Insertion type thermostats and sensors shall have adjusting head at eye level, wherever
practicable, for adjustment and calibration.
1.2.6 Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up. Contractor shall take
permission to install horizontally.
1.2.7 Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus 2 degree F
(1 degree C) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point.
1.2.8 Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where
specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without override.
1.2.9 After completion of installation, all Controllers shall be programmed, tuned, regulated and
adjusted and placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the
Engineer and a maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications
and sheets for all instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.2.10 The sequence of operation of each system or piece of equipment is specified either under
the equipment specification section or detailed on the Drawings
1.2.11 After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the
presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control system
to meet contract requirements.
1.2.12 Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable Manufacturer.
Only select and special items as approved by the engineer shall be accepted from other
makes.
1.2.13 Each operator shall be assigned a password and a defined Scope of Responsibility which
defines the locations in the facility that may be managed and controlled by the individual
operator.
1.2.14 Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification that
proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate Manufacturer's
equipment warranty.
1.2.15 Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of wiring and shall
terminate on identified terminal strips.
1.2.16 The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate removal
of instruments without disturbing others.
1.2.17 Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service
engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be
black with white lettering
1.2.18 The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with the
same time delays as specified for normal start-up.
1.3.1 Division 10 - Specialties

1.3.2 Division 21 - Fire Suppression
1.3.3 Division 22 - Plumbing
1.3.4 Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning
1.3.5 Division 33 - Utilities
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the Drawings. Each
panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major equipment being controlled
together with their starters and necessary heat detector, alarm and other related safety
and fire alarm systems.
2.1.2 The control system shall be complete with all necessary transformers, thermostats,
valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated regulators required to maintain the
conditions desired together with the thermometers, gauges, and other necessary
accessories and the control wiring.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
emergency for all HVAC, Fuel Gas Fire Fighting Systems.
2.1.4 Shop Drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of the control
systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be identified by name
and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls.
2.1.5 Manufacturer's detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment
to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2.2 System Architecture
2.2.1 The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) system shall use a Client Server
architecture based around a modular PC network, utilizing industry standard operating
systems, networks and protocols.
2.2.2 The system shall allow the distribution of system functions such as monitoring and control
and graphical user interface etc. across the network to allow maximum flexibility and
performance. The architecture shall include support of various Wide Area Networks using
standard hardware and software to link nodes into a single integrated system. The
network protocol used shall be industry standard TCP/IP. The system shall also support
remote configuration and operation using standard dial-up modems.
2.2.3 The IBMS system shall allow communications with a wide variety of control devices
utilizing off the shelf driver packages. It shall support LON, BACnet, Modbus and OPC
standards as a minimum for open system communications.
2.2.4 The IBMS should be common for BMS, Fire and Security (Access and Digital Video) to
provide a truly integrated system with common operator window. Operator should be able
to use a single log-in to operate all these system from IBMS operator station. Refer to the
other sections for the particular specs related to IBMS.
2.3 Hot Backup Server
2.3.1 This facility shall enable the system server to operate in high availability architecture. To
achieve this, provide the Hot Backup Server.
2.3.2 The system must be running a pair of similarly configured computers in a hot backup
configuration where at any point in time, one is the acting Primary and the other acting as
the Hot Backup. An on-line database duplication mechanism must be supported.
2.3.3 The database duplication must be performed on a per-transaction basis for two reasons:
- To ensure that the duplicated Backup database is consistent at all times with the
Primary database.
- To avoid unnecessary loading of field devices caused by duplicate polling
2.3.4 It must be possible to remove one of the redundant systems for maintenance without
interrupting operation, and upon its reinstatement, re-synchronize the databases, again
without interruption to system operation. A method of manually initiating a fail over must
be provided to assist with such maintenance operations. Failure of either system must be
announced audibly and visually via the alarming subsystem. Use of Virtualization or 3rd
party applications for redundancy is not acceptable. The configuration must be as
described above.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.5 To accommodate recoverable faults, the failed system must be able to reboot
automatically after non-fatal errors and assume the role of acting as Hot Backup
automatically.
2.3.6 The IBMS system shall be qualified and supported on a leading Virtual Machine platform
such as VMware ESX. This support shall include operations of the IBMS server software,
and also related communications gateways and storage devices.
Completed test plans demonstrating the offered IBMS solutions support for Virtual
Machine platforms shall be available. Also characterizations of performance results and
required Virtual Machine settings shall be available.
2.4 Hardware
2.4.1 Server Computer
2.4.1.1 The system server computer shall comprise of the following minimum hardware:-
- Intel i7 880 or better

- 8GB RAM (minimum)
- A Super VGA graphics card capable of 1280 x1024 pixel resolution and 32 bit colors,
non-interlaced (70 Hz or better vertical refresh rate).) Unless rack mounted or blade
server is offered
- A 12 function-key keyboard
- Mouse pointing device
- 250 GB Hard disk drive
- USB ports (4)
- Dual NIC 1 GB
- DVD RW
- Windows 2008 R2 operating system
An Adapter for Ethernet Networking compatible with TCP/IP network protocols.
2.4.2 Operator Workstation
2.4.2.1 The system shall be capable of supporting up to 80 simultaneous Operator Workstation

connections using a TCP/IP Local Area Network (LAN) subject to hardware capacity on
the server computer without any degradation of user experience. The Network connection
must allow a limitless number of casual users access to the 40 connections on a first-
come-first-served basis. Refer to the tender riser drawing for the actual number of clients
and licenses to be provided. As a minimum provide at least two Operator Work Stations.
The Workstation shall be based on Windows 7 OS.
2.4.2.2 The Operator Workstation shall comprise the following minimum hardware:
- Intel Core i5 470UM 1.33GHz

- Min 4 GB RAM
- LCD 21” NVIDA or AMD, a super VGA graphics card capable of 1280 x 1024 pixel
resolution and 32 bit colors, non-interlaced (70 Hz or better vertical refresh rate).
- 250 GB Hard disk drive
- A 12 function-key keyboard
- DVD RW
- A mouse pointing device
- Windows 7 64 bit
- Built-in Ethernet Networking Card compatible with TCP/IP network protocols 1 GB
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.4.3 Printers
2.4.3.1 Colour A4 laser printers shall be available for printing reports. Report printers shall be any
Windows compatible printer such as a laser printer from a reputed manufacturer. Alarm
printers shall be 132 column printers to allow alarms to be printed as they occur. Refer
riser diagram from quantity and locations.
2.5 Communications
2.5.1 The IBMS system shall provide communications over a variety of physical media
topologies as follows:
RS-232
RS-422 / RS-485
Ethernet / IP
Proprietary Networks
2.5.2 The IBMS shall be available with an operator interface designed for use on a mobile or
PDA device with network connectivity, such as but not limited to:
• Mobile telephone with internet access (such as Nokia)

• Blackberry
• iPhone, Android
• Windows Mobile Device (such as Dell Axim, HTC Touch, or Symbol)
The Mobile solution shall incorporate full scope of responsibilities of the IBMS operators
for the remote mobile users, allowing them to view or control points within their assigned
facility locations. Other standard IBMS features required include:
• Real time updates of point information from the standard html pages with no custom
programming
• An Alarm Dashboard, indicating the most recent 20 alarms at a minimum. Users

shall be able to acknowledge these alarms directly into the IBMS database
• Simple trending objects shall be integrated into mobile solution, enabling historized
IBMS data to be viewed in simple trend widgets.
• Wildcard searching must be provided to allow remote users to search for points in
the IBMS system and with suitable access privaleges; they can then monitor and
control this plant data.
2.5.3 Where supported by the controller, it shall be possible for serial connections to the IBMS
Server to be routed via a terminal server and the LAN as an alternate to connecting
directly to the host computer. TCP/IP based Terminal Servers are suitable and must be
Ethernet connected to the IBMS server directly.
2.5.4 Given the sufficient level of system privilege, it shall be possible to view, manipulate and
analyze all data in the system from any Operator Workstation in the system, including
those operating remotely via dial-up modem links.
2.5.5 Once a control device is configured and placed in service, the system shall automatically
begin background diagnostic scanning of the device to ensure that communications are
monitored independently of any monitoring scanning.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.6 The system shall perform checks on data integrity of all data acquired from the device. If
an invalid or time out response is received, the data shall be ignored and the system will
record the transaction as an error. Statistics shall be kept and displayed by the system on
errors encountered in communication by means of a communications barometer. The
barometer shall increment for every failed call and decrement for each successful call. In
addition, the system shall alarm separate marginal and failure conditions based on user-
defined limits to advise the operator of the device and link that has failed. Communications
statistics shall be displayed as standard on the system and shall also be available as part
of the reporting system or custom displays.
2.6 System Software
2.6.1 The IBMS system server shall be based on the Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 Server and
use SQL Server 2008 for the database.
2.6.2 Standard services supported by the server computer operating system will include the
following:
- Multi-tasking Multi-user support

- TCP/IP Network Support
- Graphic Display Building Editor
- Application software
2.6.3 The networking software shall use the industry standard TCP/IP LAN protocol.
2.6.4 All system peripherals shall be capable of being connected to the server computer via the
LAN.
2.7 Operator Interface
2.7.1 The operator interface provided by the system shall allow for efficient communication of
operational data and abnormal conditions. It shall provide a consistent framework for
viewing of information. Critical areas (such as alarm icons) shall be visible at all times. A
predefined area on the screen shall provide operator messaging, and this area shall also
be visible at all times. A set of standard displays for configuration, and navigation around
the IBMS system are to be provided with every system and shall not require any
engineering. The IBMS shall also have an unlimited number of custom (facility specific)
displays created to meet the needs of the specific facility.
2.7.2 The operator interface shall be interactive and totally graphics and/or icon based.
Graphics shall be capable of supporting at 32K colors at a minimum 1280 x 1024 pixel
resolution.
2.7.3 The operator interface shall employ standard Windowing conventions so as to reduce
required Operator training. In particular, standard tool bar icons and drop-down menus
shall be available on all standard and custom displays to allow easy access to common
functions. The tool bar and pull down menus shall be fully configurable. Similarly, such
functions shall also be available via a standard set of Function-Key based pushbuttons
without requiring configuration.
2.7.4 The operator interface shall support the ability to “full screen lock” the window so users
cannot access other applications. If “full screen lock” is not enabled, support for copy and
paste facilities shall be provided between the operator window and other Microsoft
applications.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7.2 Web Browser Operator Interface
2.7.2.1 The operator interface shall also be fully available through the internet via an Internet
Explorer browser. From Microsoft’s Internet Explorer, an operator shall be able to perform
all functions on the same standard and custom graphics as used in the standard operator
interface. All custom graphics, alarm graphics and standard graphics shall be available
without modification or reengineering through the Internet in an Internet Explorer browser
user interface and shall be fully functional. Refer the riser diagram for quantity and
locations.
2.7.2.2 The browser interface shall provide login and security authentication in the same way as
the standard operator interface. A large number of casual users shall be permitted without
any additional licensing burden. Licensing shall be based on the number of simultaneous
operator connections on a “First Come First Served” basis. Those users with casual
access shall automatically disconnect from the IBMS server after an idle timeout period.
2.7.3 Operator Interface Connection
2.7.3.1 The operator interface shall be flexible in its connection to the IBMS server. An Ethernet
LAN or Internet connection shall be used between the Server and the Operator
Workstations and Browser Clients. The operator interface shall provide standard support
using Microsoft Remote Access Service (RAS) allowing devices such as Tablets (iPad,
Android, Windows) devices for access to the system. Using other packages such as
Microsoft Terminal to make the modem connection shall not be acceptable.
2.7.3.2 To minimize bandwidth on both serial and LAN links, it shall be possible for the operator
interface to only require updated dynamic information from the IBMS server. All static
information (such as display backgrounds) can be stored locally.
2.7.4 Operator Interface Characteristics
2.7.4.1 The system shall provide a Windows operator interface with the following minimum
capabilities as standard. Using VB scripting it shall be possible to enhance the custom
graphics.
2.7.4.2 Dedicated icons and Pull Down Menus to perform the following: Associated Alarm Display,
Alarm Summary, Alarm Acknowledgement, Forward/Backward Previous Display Recall
(minimum of 8 displays), Graphic Call-up, Trend Call-up, Point Detail Call-up, Card Holder
Detail, Pop up face plates, Alarm Banner showing highest priority, most recent (or oldest)
unacknowledged alarm, System Date and Time Zone, Current security Level, Workstation
connection number, Alarm Annunciation, Communications Fail Annunciation, Operator
Message Zone, etc.
2.7.5 Operator Security and Sign-On.
2.7.5.1 Security
2.7.5.1.1 If necessary, each operator may be assigned a user profile that defines the following:-
- Security and/or Control Level

- Operator Identifier
- Unique Password
- Area Assignment / Area Profile
- Start Graphic for that operator
- Timeout Value for that operator
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7.5.1.2 Any actions initiated by the operator shall be logged in the Event database by operator
identifier. In addition, any control actions to a given point shall only be allowed if the
control level configured in the operator's profile exceeds the level assigned to the
controlled point.
2.7.5.1.3 Utilities shall be provided to allow administration of the operator passwords.
2.7.5.2 Security Levels
2.7.5.2.1 The system shall support at least six levels of operator security. The functions allowed
from each security level shall be as follows:
Level 1: Signed Off mode - View start-up display only.
Level 2: View only - The operator shall be able to view displays. Typically used for an
inexperienced operator.
Level 3: Permit all Level 1 and 2 functions and in addition the operator shall be
permitted to control points such as start/stop, disable/enable, etc. and
acknowledge alarms as they occur.
Level 4: Permit all Level 1 through Level 3 functions in addition to accessing master
time schedules, system peripherals allocation, change point engineering
parameters, build reports and use most standard system configuration
displays. This level shall typically be reserved for the building supervisor.
Level 5: Permit all Level 1 through Level 4 functions in addition to accessing the
engineering functions such as building and linking displays, allocating
keyboard push button assignments, etc. Reserved for the building engineer.
Level 6: This is the highest level of station security and shall allow the user unlimited
access to all station functions. Typically reserved for the building manager.
2.7.5.3 Sign-On/Sign-Off
2.7.5.3.1 The operator shall be permitted to sign on to the system if the correct Operator Identity
and the Operator Password have been entered. This password shall be encrypted. It shall
also be possible to have the system linked to Windows such that the operator uses their
Windows Account Name and password to sign on to the IBMS system. This ensures that
operators only need to remember 1 set of credentials.
2.7.5.3.2 After a series of three (3) unsuccessful attempts to sign-on the Operator Workstation
interface shall be locked for a configurable period of time. The lockout period shall be set
via system configuration displays. During Operator Workstation lockout the other Windows
functions of the computer running the Operator Workstation software shall not be affected.
2.7.5.3.3 It shall be possible to assign operators either single or multi-user passwords. Single user
passwords enable the operator to sign-on to only a single Operator Workstation thus
preventing simultaneous sign-on by the same operator. Operators with the highest sign-on
security level who may require simultaneous access to more than one Operator
Workstation would typically use the multi-user password.
2.7.5.3.4 Each operator shall be assigned a password and a set of authorized areas.
2.7.5.3.5 The operator may sign-off at any time by issuing a sign-off command.
2.7.5.3.6 A keyboard time-out feature shall be provided such that the operator shall be
automatically signed off after a defined period of keyboard inactivity. It shall optionally be
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
possible to configure automatic call-up of a "logged-out" display when this occurs to hide
restricted information for example.
2.7.5.4 Location Assignment / Scope of Responsibility Profile
2.7.5.4.1 Each operator shall be assigned one or more specific areas of the building with the
appropriate monitoring and control responsibility (no view, view only, alarm acknowledge
only or full control). An area shall be defined in this context as a logical entity comprising
of a set of points in the system. This in turn may represent a physical space in the
building. Areas shall be used to partition the database in such a way as to assign
operators control over certain areas and prevent unauthorized access to other areas.
2.7.5.4.2 It shall be possible to define individual tenant access by means ofScope of Responsibility
Profile. Likewise, an operator’s ability to control or monitor certain parts of a facility can be
controlled by means of area assignment.
2.7.5.4.3 The system shall provide the facility to createScope of Responsibility Profile, which
combine Locations and time periods, and which can be assigned to operators with the
same Location access requirements. By using Scope of Responsibility Profilein this way,
Location access can be specified to apply during certain time periods, allowing different
areas of access at different times of the day or week.
2.7.5.5 Duress
2.7.5.5.1 It shall be possible for an operator to indicate that they are signing on under duress. The
system shall recognize that the operator is signing on under duress and it shall then be
able to issue a control to alert appropriate assistance.
2.7.5.6 Command Partitioning
2.7.5.6.1 It shall be possible to assign each operator a set of allowed commands for each assigned
area, where an area is a group of points. These commands can be mapped against the
output state of any given digital point in the respective area to determine whether a control
command is allowed for the particular operator.
2.7.5.6.2 With this feature, it shall for example be possible to configure an operator to set a digital
point to ON, but to disallow the same operator from setting the same digital point to OFF.
2.7.6 Standard System Displays
2.7.6.1 The following displays shall be included as part of the system:-
- Alarm Summary Display, Event Summary Display, Point Detail Template Displays , (for
each point in the database), Trend Set Template Displays, Group Control and Group
Trend Template Displays , Communications Status Displays, System Status Displays,
Operator Scratch-pad Display, Face Plates for all common point types.
- Configuration Displays
2.7.6.2 In the case of the Trend and Group displays, configuration of these displays shall only
require entry of a point name to completely configure the display. The Alarm Summary,
Event Summary, Point Detail, Communications Status, System Status shall not require
any configuration.
2.7.6.2 Systems where standard graphical displays, showing all parameters for each system
Point, do not exist shall not be acceptable. It shall be possible to perform all the operator
activities such as acknowledging alarms, configuring and taking reports, commanding
points, view all the points and also manage the system without the need for any custom
displays.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.7.7 Creating Custom Displays (Graphic Display Building Editor)
2.7.7.1 The IBMS shall provide a Graphic Display Building editor for the creation of site specific
graphic displays. It shall allow one-step online building of display static and dynamic
objects. It shall be a WYSIWYG editor (what you see is what you get) allowing the
displays drawn using the editor to appear exactly the same when viewed from an Operator
Workstation.
2.7.7.2 Displays shall be created in the HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) format. This is
essential so that the displays can also be viewed through a web browser as well as the
normal IBMS operator interface. The displays must be saved in the standard HTML
format. All graphic elements shall be available as HTML elements.
2.7.7.3 It shall be possible to link dynamic objects to the IBMS database. They shall allow
information to be displayed from the database or to allow an operator to interact with them
in order to make changes in the database and to perform control actions. Dynamic objects
shall include dynamic text, push buttons, indicators, charts, check boxes, combo boxes,
pop up boxes, ActiveX controls and scroll bars.
2.7.7.4 It shall be possible to include static and dynamic display objects on the one display. The
editor shall allow display objects to be manipulated by pointing, clicking and dragging. The
editor shall allow display objects to be drawn, re-sized, copied, grouped, rotated, aligned
and layered over each other. It shall be possible to copy and paste objects within and
between displays.
2.7.8 Display Scripting
2.7.8.1 It shall be possible to further animate display elements using standard HTML scripts such
as JavaScript or VBScript. A script editor supporting one of the standard script languages
shall be provided. By using script programs, individual elements on the display may be
manipulated. A proprietary scripting language or additional scripting and drawing package
shall not be acceptable. It shall be possible to perform a variety of animations.
2.7.8.2 Live Video
2.7.8.2.1 Both the Graphic Display Building Editor and the Operator Interface shall have built in
support for the creation and display of live video objects without the need for
programming. The size and position of the video object shall be configured on a per
display basis.
2.7.8.2.2 Systems, which show the live video object in a separate window from the operator
interface, or on a separate monitor screen, shall not be acceptable.
2.7.8.3 Web Technology
2.7.8.3.1 Displays created in the Graphic Display Builder Editor shall be usable in a Web Browser
such as Microsoft’s Internet Explorer without modification. All displays shall be usable in
this manner enabling operators to completely operate the system through a web browser
via the internet. Displays may also incorporate data from an intranet, the Internet, or
ActiveX documents along with other building data.
2.7.9 Help and Documentation
2.7.9.1 The IBMS operator interface shall also have access to online help and full system
documentation. Online help shall be fully searchable and cross referenced to all relevant
sections of the documentation. It shall be possible to browse the online help and set
“favorites” which link to commonly used sections of the help information. All manuals shall
be available online.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.8 MONITORING AND CONTROL
2.8.1 Monitoring
2.8.1.1 The system shall support acquisition of data using the following techniques:
2.8.1.1.1 Periodic Scanning
2.8.1.1.2 Report by Exception
2.8.1.1.3 Data on demand
2.8.1.2 In order to minimize communications traffic, the system shall automatically block data
requests using contiguous addresses and the scan intervals to generate scan packets,
optimizing throughput for a given scanning load. The system shall also provide utilities to
examine scan packet allocation for each scan interval, and compile aggregate statistics on
communication link usage.
2.8.1.3 Where supported by the controlling device, Report by Exception (RBE) protocols shall be
used to reduce the scanning load of the system while improving system response. If
necessary, periodic scanning may be used in conjunction with RBE to ensure data
integrity.
2.8.2 Device Control
2.8.2.1 Control transactions issued by the operator shall be communicated to control devices
using a write followed by read to ensure the integrity of the transaction. If the read
following the write to the device indicates that the control action has failed, the operator
shall be informed by means of a control failure alarm. The priority of the control failure
alarm shall be configurable by the user.
2.8.2.2 It shall be possible to optionally assign a control confirmation message to individual points.
This message shall request the operator confirm the requested supervisory control action
prior to sending the entered value to the controller.
2.9 System Database
2.9.1 The system shall provide a real-time database incorporating data from analog, logical or
pulse inputs. The database shall be configurable by the end user without the need for any
programming and shall be able to be modified on-line without interrupting operation of the
system. In addition to point-based information, the database shall also provide
historization capabilities for analog, digital, pulse and event based information. This
information shall be accessible by all facilities of the system such as custom displays,
reports, trends, user written applications, etc.
2.9.1 Database Structure
2.9.1.1 The real-time database shall support collection of data and storage using the following
structures such as Analog Point, Status Point, Accumulator Point, Flexible Point, Historical
Data, Event Data and User Defined Structures.
2.9.1.2 Each of the Point database structures shall be comprised as a composite point with a
number of associated parameters, which may be referenced relative to a single tag name.
Specifically, each of these parameters shall be accessible by various sub-systems such
as the Graphical Operator Interface, Report Generation system and Application Program
Interface in a simple POINT.PARAMETER format without the need to know any internal
storage mechanism.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 13
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.1.3 Database backup shall be possible with the system on-line including backup of historical
based data. The backup shall be possible via standard Microsoft Windows operating
system utilities. Point data shall be stored in a composite point database structure that
provides a wide range of configurable information.
2.9.2 Grouping of Points
2.9.2.1 The IBMSIBMS system shall provide a means by which a number of alarm inputs, outputs
and other related points can be grouped together for more convenient monitoring and
control without the need for custom graphics.
2.9.3 History Management
2.9.3.1 Collection of historical point data shall be configurable as part of the point definition. Once
configured, this data shall be collected automatically. Historical data collection shall be
provided for both snapshots and averages with intervals ranging from 1 second to 24
hours.
2.9.3.2 Once assigned to history, point data shall be available by POINT.PARAMETER access
used in conjunction with a history offset to locate the particular value of interest. The
graphical operator interface, trend, report generation and application interfaces shall be
able to access historical data.
2.9.3.3 Modifications to the history collection of a point shall be possible on-line without the loss of
previously collected data for the point being changed or any other points in the system
currently being historized.
2.9.3.4 History shall be able to be archived to an alternative file system or offline media. Different
archive settings shall be available for different history types.
2.9.4 Trending
2.9.4.1 The system shall provide flexible trending allowing real-time, historical or archived data to
be trended in a variety of formats. In addition, trend data types shall be able to be
combined to allow for comparisons between data e.g. current real-time data versus
archived data. Copying the currently displayed trend data to the clipboard for pasting into
spreadsheet or document
2.9.4.2 Configuration of trends shall only require the entry of the Point Name into the desired
trend template to produce the trend. All trend configuration must be possible on-line
without interruption to the system. Historization of data shall not be affected by changes
to trend configuration. Systems that only provide trending via a third party package will not
be acceptable.
2.9.5 Trend Types
2.9.5.1 The system shall be able to present real-time, historical or archived data in a variety of
formats, including single, dual and multiple value trends of up to 8 points. For each trend
set display it shall be possible for operators to configure the number of historical samples
and ranges displayed. Points configured in trend sets shall be changeable on-line.
2.9.5.2 Scroll bars shall be available to move the Trend set backwards and forwards across the
historical records. The trend sets shall automatically access archived history files without
operator configuration.
2.9.5.3 It shall be possible to embed trend objects as part of custom displays. The following
formats shall be available: Bar Trend, Line Trend, Numeric Trend, Tuning Trend, Pie
Trend, X-Y Plot.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 14
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.6 Event Management
2.9.6.1 It shall be possible to log an event such that it shall be journalized in the event file and
optionally printed on the event printer. The journal shall contain the following event
information: Alarms, Alarm Acknowledgements, Return to Normal, Operator Control
Actions, Operator Login & Security Level Changes, On-line database Modifications
2.9.6.2 Communications Alarms, System Restart Messages, Database changes
2.9.6.3 Standard Displays shall be provided to show the current journal file with the most recent
event at the top of the display. Subsequent page forward actions shall allow display of
progressively older events. Sorting and filtering of the journal shall be possible directly on
screen. Filters shall be able to be saved for future use. Filtered events shall be able to be
printed as an event report directly from the Event display.
2.9.6.4 There may be additional fields which are relevant for different types of events. It shall be
possible to enter comments on all events so that operators can annotate an event with
relevant information. It shall be possible to manually create an event if the operator wishes
to record an incident on the site which is unrelated to system equipment.
2.9.6.5 The event file shall store events online. The system shall be able to automatically or
manually archive these online events periodically, at a time period specified by the user.
Operators shall be notified by an alarm that event archiving is required if manual operation
is chosen. Events may be archived to tape, or to other media such as CD, DVD, Zip drive
or to other file systems.
2.9.6.6 Archived events may be restored to the IBMSat a later time if required for reporting
purposes. Multiple archives shall be able to be restored at any one time. The IBIBMS shall
indicate to the operator the range of events in a particular archive file.
2.9.7 Alarm Management
2.9.7.1 The IBIBMS shall support several different types of alarms for analog points, such as Hi
Low, HiHi, LowLow and rate of change. It shall be possible to have an alarm for the
different states of a multi-state point. The BACNet alarm notification shall be used to
receive all the alarms from the BACnet Controllers.
2.9.8 Alarm Priorities
2.9.8.1 Each monitored point in the system shall be able to be assigned one of four alarm
priorities to individual states. The meaning of the priorities shall be as follows:
2.9.9 Journal
2.9.9.1 Changes of state shall be journalized to the Alarm/Event Log and optionally printed on the
Alarm/Event printer.
2.9.10 Low
2.9.10.1 Change of state will generate a Low priority alarm, which will appear on the Alarm
Summary. Optionally, the alarm may be printed on the Alarm/Event printer or generate an
audible tone.
2.9.11 High
2.9.11.1 Change of state will generate a High priority alarm, which will appear on the Alarm
Summary. Optionally, the alarm may be printed on the Alarm/Event printer or generate an
audible tone.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 15
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.12 Urgent
2.9.12.1 This is the highest priority. Change of state will generate an Urgent priority alarm, which
will appear on the Alarm Summary. Optionally, the alarm may be printed on the
Alarm/Event printer or generate an audible tone.
2.9.12.2 Within each of the four alarm types there shall be 15 sub-priorities available. Each alarm
priority shall have a configurable color.
2.9.12.3 It shall be possible to escalate priority of alarm if the alarm is not acknowledged within the
configured time.
2.9.13 Alarm Enunciation
2.9.13.1 Alarms shall be enunciated by:
2.9.13.2 Most recent, highest priority alarm message appearing on dedicated alarm banner on the
operator interface.
2.9.13.3 Alarm message appearing on alarm summary display.
2.9.13.4 Available Tone - based on a “*.wav” or other sound file for each alarm priority.
2.9.13.5 Alarm message printed on the alarm printer.
2.9.13.6 Alarm indicator flashing on the operator interface.
2.9.14 Alarm Summary
2.9.14.1 Alarms shall be able to be viewed in a consolidated alarm summary which shows all
current or pending alarms on the system. This summary may be sorted by time and date,
database partition or source of the alarm.
2.9.15 Dedicated Alarm Banner and Alarm Indicator
2.9.15.1 A dedicated alarm banner shall appear on all displays showing either the most recent or
oldest (configurable), highest priority, unacknowledged alarm in the system. This banner
shall be clear when there are no unacknowledged alarms for the operator to process.
2.9.15.2 An alarm indicator shall also appear on all displays. This indicator will flash red (or another
configured color) when there are any unacknowledged alarms pending in the system. This
indicator will remain solid red if there are alarms, which have not returned to normal but
which have all been acknowledged. The indicator will be clear if there are no points in an
alarm condition.
2.9.16 Alarm Logging
2.9.16.1 As well as being logged on the printer, alarms shall be logged to an event file for future
retrieval in alarm reports or archived to removable media.
2.9.17 Alarm Response Function Keys
2.9.17.1 The following dedicated function keys shall be provided on the keyboard for alarm action:
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 16
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.17.2 Acknowledge
2.9.17.3 After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and selecting the point the
operator shall be able to acknowledge an alarm by pressing this key. This action shall be
logged in the event file and on the printer showing the operator ID with the alarm.
2.9.18 Alarm Summary
2.9.18.1 By pressing a dedicated key at any time the operator shall be able to view a display
showing all currently active alarms. The alarm messages shall be color-coded showing
priorities. The operator shall be able to view the alarms according to priority or sorted
based on other fields. It shall be possible to acknowledge alarms from this display and
also go to the associated display defined for the point.
2.9.19 Associated Display
2.9.19.1 After moving the cursor to the point in alarm on the screen and selecting the point the
operator shall be able to bring up the display applicable to that alarm by pressing this key.
Just selecting the associated display key directly will bring up the associated display for
the point currently on the alarm banner. This is generally a custom graphic showing the
location of the alarm in the facility.
2.9.20 Alarm Link to Digital Video Recordings
2.9.20.1 The system shall allow the linking and display of digital video recordings pertaining to
alarms. If there is any video footage in digital format which is relevant to an alarm, then
the alarm summary shall indicate this by the use of a special icon on the alarm. By
selecting the icon, the operator can then replay the relevant digital video footage of the
alarm incident.
2.9.21 Print Alarms as a Report
2.9.21.1 The filtered alarm summary should be able to be printed directly as a report. From the
alarm summary page, it shall be possible to view the current filtered list of alarms via a
print preview button. This shows what the alarms will look like when printed to the
configured report printer. From the alarm summary, it shall be possible to print the alarms
directly using the print button.
2.9.22 Advanced Alarm Management
2.9.22.1 The IBIBMS shall be capable of advanced alarm management, which includes set stages
of alarm handling.
2.9.23 The stages shall be:

2.9.23.1 Silence alarm condition
2.9.23.2 Acknowledge and action alarm condition
2.9.23.3 Respond to alarm condition by using pre-defined responses
2.9.23.4 Optionally reset alarm
2.9.23.5 All actions shall be recorded in the event file for retrieval and auditing purposes.
2.9.23.6 When an alarm is silenced, an instruction page for the alarm will be displayed. The alarm
may then be acknowledged from this page and alarm handling action completed.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 17
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.24 Reporting
2.9.24.1 The system shall support a flexible reporting package to allow easy generation of report
data. The reports provided shall include pre-configured standard reports for common
requirements such as Alarm Event reports and custom report generation facilities that are
configurable by the user.
2.9.24.1 The system must have SQL Server 2008 Reporting Services for custom reports to be built
by the end-user as per the requirements.
2.9.25 Standard Reports
2.9.25.1 The following pre-formatted reports shall be available on the system:-
a) Alarm/Event Report
b) Operator Trail Report
c) Point Trail Report
d) Alarm Duration Report
e) All Point Report
f) After Hours Alarm Report
g) Point Attribute Report
h) Generic or Custom Report
(Note: additional application specific reports shall be described later in this document)
2.9.25.2 Configuration of these reports shall only require entry of the schedule information, and
other parameters such as Point Name or wildcard, filter information, time interval for
search and destination printer to fully configure the report. Specifically, no programming
or scripting shall be required.
2.9.26 Additional Generic or Custom Reports
2.9.26.1 In addition, configurable report generation facilities must be provided to allow custom
reports to be produced. They shall be able to be configured at any time with the system
online, and shall be able to access any database values. At least two methods of custom
report generation shall be available, including the following:
2.9.27 Microsoft Excel
2.9.27.1 The IBMS shall provide the facility for the use of Microsoft Excel as a reporting tool –
allowing calculations such as summations, maximal, minimal and standard deviations, and
the production of graphs, charts and tables. Systems that do not provide support for the
latest version of Microsoft Excel, in this respect shall not be acceptable.
2.9.27.2 Data accessible for Excel reporting shall include alarms, events, and point parameter
values.
2.9.28 ODBC / SQL Server Reporting Servics
2.9.28.1 The IBIBMS shall be capable of providing selected data in an ODBC format for the
purpose of extracting data and creating custom reports. It shall be possible to create
custom reports in the IBIBMS using the SQL Server reporting tools.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 18
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.28.2 It shall be possible to incorporate the activation of custom reports created using SQL
Server Reporting tool through the standard IBMS report subsystem. Example reports shall
be provided to illustrate how to create the custom reports in the IBMS.
2.9.28.3 A report detail display shall allow naming of reports, scheduling information and the
destination of the report. The report destination shall be a printer, operator interface or
internal file. The report output format shall be HTML (Hypertext Mark-up Language),
Microsoft Word or RTF format.
2.9.29 Report Activation
2.9.29.1 Reports shall be activated in one or more of the following ways:
a) Periodic activation at user specified intervals

b) Operator Demanded
c) Event Initiated e.g. Change in point value
d) Application Initiated
e) Printed directly from the alarm/event summary
2.9.30 Historical Data Archiving
2.9.30.1 The system shall support archiving of historical data to allow a continuous record of
history to be built up over a period of time. Archived data may be stored on the hard disk
of the system or a remote network drive or moved off-line to removable media such as
floppy disk, cartridge tape, DAT tape, or optical disk. The number of archives maintained
on the system before transferal to off-line media shall only be limited by the size of the
hard disk or remote network drive. The system shall allow the user to define the specific
intervals of history to be archived to avoid archiving of unnecessary data.
2.9.30.2 Once archived, the data shall be available for re-trending through the system trend
facilities in combination with the current on-line history or other archives. Providing the
archived history is present on the IBIBMS Server's hard disk or remote network drive, the
trend facilities must be able to access it transparently for display, when a user scrolls
beyond current on-line history limits.
2.9.31 Time Schedules
2.9.31.1 It shall be possible to specify time schedules for the control of all IIBMS points. A large
number of individual points shall be controlled by a single time schedule. A single time
schedule shall define the control to any combination of day and time e.g. Mon-Fri 7:00 to
18:00, Thursday 7:00 to 22:00 and Saturday-Sunday 9:00 to 14:00. The IBMSIBMS time
schedule must also provide the ability to override the normal schedule for holidays or
special occasions.
2.9.31.2 Configuring time schedules must be done through a graphical user interface whereby the
operator selects the appropriate time span from a calendar. Systems where times and
days must be manually entered is not acceptable.
2.9.31.3 Where the control device supports an internal time schedule program, the IBMSIBMS
shall be able to upload, display, modify and download the control device time schedules.
Support for the control device time schedules shall be in addition to the IBMSIBMS time
schedules.
2.9.31.4 All BACnet devices shall support Scheduling and it shall be possible for the IBMS to
configure the different schedule objects along with schedules for other non-BACNet
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 19
_________________________________________________________________________________
systems in to Global Schedules so that universal changes to the schedules can be

implemented and applied.
2.10 OPEN INTEGRATION
2.10.1 Any of the following Open Protocol Standards shall be used for integration of 3rd party
devices or systems. In coordination with suppliers of other systems, provide the optional
open protocols as may be needed for the project.
2.10.2 Modbus
2.10.2.1 The IBIBMS server shall provide an integrated interface to devices using the Modbus RTU
protocol, where the IBIBMS server shall be the ‘master’ and the external device or system
shall be the “slave”. The Modbus Interface shall support the following function codes:
Modbus Function Code Meaning
01 Read Coil/Status
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
06 Preset Single Register
16 Preset Multiple Registers
2.10.2.2 The IBIBMS shall also support user definable data formats for Modbus devices to
accommodate the wide variety of formats in use in the industry.
2.10.3 BACnet (ANSI / ASHRAE 135)
2.10.3.1 The IBIBMS system shall be capable of communicating to other building subsystems
using the ASHRAE standard BACnet. The IBIBMS shall be capable of acting as both a
BACnet Operator Workstation and a BACnet Gateway. The BACnet capability shall
support all of the following standard BACnet objects:
· Analog Input
· Analog Output
· Analog Value
· Accumulator
· Averaging
· Binary Input
· Binary Output
· Binary Value
· Calendar
· Command
· Device
· Event Enrollment
· File
· Group
· Loop
· Multistate Input
· Multistate Output
· Multistate Value
· Notification Class
· Program
· Schedule
· Trendlog
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.10.4 BACnet Operator Workstation
2.10.4.1 An integrated BACnet Operator Workstation shall be provided which allows the monitoring
of BACnet devices via data acquisition and control.
2.10.4.2 The BACnet Operator Workstation shall support the following BACnet Interoperability
Building Blocks:
· ReadProperty-A (DS-RP-A)
· ReadProperty-B (DS-RP-B)
· ReadPropertyMultiple-A (DS-RPM-A)
· WriteProperty-A (DS-WP-A)
· WritePropertyMultiple-A (SW-WPM-A)
· COV-A (DS-COV-A)
· View-A (DS-V-A)
· Modify-A (DS-M-A)
· Advanced View-A (DS-AV-A)
· Advanced Modify-A (DS-AM-A)
· COV Unsubscribed-A (DS-COVU-A)
· Alarm and Event-Notification-A (AE-N-A)
· Alarm and Event-ACK-A (AE-ACK-A)
· Alarm and Event-Summary-A (AE-ASUM-A)
· Alarm and Event-View Notifications-A (AE-VN-A)
· Alarm and Event-View and Modify-A (AE-VM-A)
· Alarm and Event-Alarm Summary-A (AE-ASUM-A)
· Alarm and Event-Enrollment Summary-A (AE-ESUM-A)
· Alarm and Event-Alarm Summary View-A (AE-AS-A)
· Alarm and Event-Information-A (AE-INFO-A)
· Alarm and Event-Advanced View and Modify-A (AE-AVM-A)
· Alarm and Event- Advanced View Notifications-A (AE-AVN-A)
· Scheduling-View and Modify-A (SCHED-VM-A)
· Scheduling-Advanced View and Modify-A (SCHED-AVM-A)
· Scheduling-Weekly Schedule-A (SCHED-WS-A)
· Dynamic Device Binding – A (DM-DDB-A)
· Dynamic Device Binding – B (DM-DDB-B)
· Dynamic Object Binding – A (DM-DOB-A)
· Dynamic Object Binding - B (DM-DOB-B)
· DeviceCommunicationControl – A (DM-DCC-A)
· TimeSynchronization – A (DM-TS-A)
· UTCTimeSynchronization – A (DM-UTC-A)
· ReinitializeDevice - A (DM-RD-A)
· Connection Establishment - A (NM-CE-A)
· List Manipulation-B (DM-LM-B)
· Object Creation and Deletion – B (DM-OCD-B)
· Device Management-Backup and Restore-A (DM-BR-A)
· Trending-Viewing and Modifying Trends-A (T-VMT-A)
· Trending-Automated Trend Retrieval-A (T-ATR-A)
· Trending –View-A (T-V-A)
2.10.5 OLE for Process Control (OPC) - Optional
2.10.5.1 The IBIBMS server shall provide an integrated OPC Client, integrated OPC Server, and
OPC Alarm and Event Server. This option shall be provided if any of the sub-systems
being integrated is based on OPC-DA Server.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 21
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.10.5.2 The OPC Client shall support the mandatory OPC Release 2.0 Data Access as a
minimum.
2.10.5.3 The OPC Server shall support OPC Release1.0A and OPC Release 2.0 Data Access
OPC interfaces as a minimum. An OPC Server option shall be provided if the data from
IBMS is required to be provided to another application that uses OPC Client.
2.10.5.4 The OPC Alarm and Event Server shall allow an OPC alarm and event client to receive
alarm and event information and be compliant to OPC Version 1.02 foundation Alarm and
Event Specification.
2.10.6 LonWorks
2.10.6.1 The IBMS server shall provide a LonWorks Client to allow communication to LonWorks
Controllers. The LonWorks interface shall use LonWorks Network Services (LNS) to
maintain, monitor, and control LonWorks networks.
2.11 DATA EXCHANGE
2.11.1 The IBIBMSsystem shall have the capability to interface to the point database of other
similar IBIBMS systems (i.e. nodes) on a TCP/IP network. This shall enable both the
acquiring of point data and issuing control outputs to other IBIBMS systems.
2.11.2 Data Exchange with Microsoft Excel
2.11.2.1 The system must be capable of exporting bulk data to Microsoft Excel. As a minimum the
following shall be supported:
2.11.2.1.1 Allow retrieval of data either periodically or snapshot.

2.11.2.1.2 Allow retrieval of data via POINT.PARAMETER requests.
2.11.2.1.3 Allow retrieval of tag names, descriptions etc.
2.11.2.1.4 Allow retrieval historical data.
2.11.2.1.5 Writing of values from Excel back to the supervisory system.
2.11.3 Paging and External Annunciation of System Alarms
2.11.3.1 The IBMSIBMS shall provide a facility for sending alarm text from configured points to the
following external systems:-
2.11.3.2 Digital mobile phones with text message (SMS) support.
2.11.3.3 Email
2.11.3.3.1 Each point’s paging priority threshold shall be individually configurable, and individually
enabled or disabled. Each external device configured in the system shall have individually
selectable times and days of operation, an alarm priority threshold, and an alternative
device for use in escalation of unacknowledged alarms.
2.11.4 Server Scripting Engine / Automation Rules Engine
2.11.4.1 The IBMS system must have the ability to extend its functionality easily by the addition of
small script code to certain server functions. This will enable additional customer specific
functionality to be easily added to point, report and server processing. For example, a
script shall enable a calculation to be performed and a number of points to be controlled
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 22
_________________________________________________________________________________
based on another point going into alarm state. Scripts shall be able to be attached to point
processing, report generation, server startup and shutdown, or executed on a periodic
basis.
2.11.4.2 The scripting engine must support a standard scripting language such as Microsoft’s
VBScript. Access to the scripts shall be through an inbuilt scripting editor which provides
key work support and syntax checking as well as an extensive range of online help
including a large number of worked examples. Proprietary scripting languages shall not
be acceptable.
2.11.4.3 An easy to use and configure Automation Rules engine must be provided so that the user
/ operator can quickly configure cause and effect relationship between different points and
different sub-systems.
2.12 DIAGNOSTIC CAPABILITIES
2.12.1 The IBMS system must enable easy diagnostics of the health of the system.
2.12.2 Diagnostic Framework
2.12.2.1 The IBMSIBMS system must make all diagnostic information viewable through an easy to
use user interface and shall be able to be easily exported as a standalone collection of
material for later analysis.
2.13 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SPECIFICATION
2.13.1 General
2.13.1.1 The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS) to be provided shall perform the
following general functions:
2.13.2 Building Management and Control.
2.13.2.1 Monitoring and Control of Controllers, Remote Devices and Programmable Logic
Controllers including sensors, actuators, environmental delivery systems (pumps, boilers,
room climate control, lighting systems, electrical systems etc.).
2.13.2.1.1 Operator Interface to allow general supervision of room controls

2.13.2.1.2 Video display integration
2.13.2.1.3 Data collection and Historization
2.13.2.1.4 Alarm Management
2.13.2.1.5 Trending
2.13.2.1.6 Report Generation
2.13.2.1.7 Network Integration
2.13.2.2 Data exchange and integration with a diverse range of other computing and facilities
systems using industry standard techniques.
2.13.2.3 The system shall employ all standard features and functions as described in Section to
monitor and control building equipment. At a minimum, the following data shall be
accessible:
2.13.2.3.1 Space temperature

2.13.2.3.2 Space temperature set point
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 23
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.13.2.3.3 Occupancy status

2.13.2.3.4 Operating mode
2.13.2.3.5 Window status
2.13.2.3.6 Valve positions
2.13.2.3.7 Air volume flow
2.13.2.3.8 Percent terminal load
2.13.2.3.9 Time schedules
2.13.2.3.10 Zero energy bands
2.13.2.3.11 Room name
2.13.2.3.12 Terminal type e.g. fan coil
2.13.2.4 In the event of a power failure or disconnection from the IBMS, the controllers shall
continue to be fully operational with full time program capability.
2.13.2.5 At the IBMS using appropriate Energy Manager program, Loads shall be managed (shed
and powered up) in the event of power shortage / outage. Different loads shall have
priorities assigned to determine the sequence in which they are operated. Any
discrepancies in the load requirement and power availability shall be alarmed. Follow the
sequence of operation as shown on the drawings.
2.13.3 Primary Plant Controllers
2.13.3.1 All the elements used to create the Building Management System (BMS) shall be
designed to work as a homogeneous entity. This means that the primary and secondary
plant controllers shall be compatible with each other and use a graphically-based
engineering tool.
2.13.3.2 The descriptions below are relevant to the field-mounted BMS components. Similar or
enhanced functionalities shall also be required at the central supervisor location as
described elsewhere in this document.
2.13.3.3 To conserve energy, where ever applicable the HVAC shall be operated using highly
flexible time programs and the use of parameters such as current outside temperature,
history of the building and current inside conditions should be used to determine the
optimum start times. Sequential start / stop (duty-cycling) shall be used to save energy.
2.13.4 BACnet Building Controller
2.13.4.1 The Network / General Purpose Controller (NC) shall be a Native BACnet® controller
based on 32 bit technology to provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field
control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices
connected to the NC. The NC shall conform to BACnet® Building Controller (B-BC) profile
and be provided with appropriate PIC statement defining BACnet® services and objects
supported. BACnet® Data Sharing BIBBs supported shall include at a minimum: RP,
RPM, WP, WPM, COV . Alarm and Event, Trending, and scheduling including SCHED-A
BIBBs support shall also be supported in BACnet® native communications. The NC shall
support Master Communication control on the BACnet communication bus. The NC shall
physically connect to the LAN without the need for additional Router hardware. The NC
shall support transmitting and receiving segmented messages as well as BACnet®
Broadcast Messages over IP. It should be possible to define any NC / GPC in an IP
subnet as a BBMD device. The NC shall also support both Secure (https://) and non
secure (http://) remote web server access using commonly used web browsers. It shall be
capable of executing application control programs to provide::
1. Calendar functions
2. Scheduling
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 24
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. Trending and Trending Backfill

4. Alarm monitoring and routing
5. Time synchronization
6. Integration of BACnet® devices and BACnet® controller data
7. Integration of MODBUS devices and serial MODBUS RTU controller data
2.13.4.2 The Network / General Purpose Controller must provide the following features as a
minimum:
· One Ethernet Port -10 / 100 Mbps RJ45

· One RS-232 port
· One RS 485 port
· Three independent BACnet® MS/TP Channel capable of supporting up to 90 total
Unitary controllers
· A minimum of 24 On-board I/O, expandable up to 128 hardware points; external
expansion I/O on dedicated controller I/O bus is also accepted for up to 256
(alternate maximum of 128 physical points for UUKL applications) physical I/O
points where on-board I/O is not supported
· Battery Backup using Gold Capacitor to avoid low battery alarms and subsequent
replacement during service life of the controller.
· Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not
supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage
capacity)
· A Reset Button
· The NC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 50°C
· The NC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 5 and
70°C
· The NC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 93% RH, non-
condensing
· Shall include expansion for Input/Output that require Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switches
· Field Bus for remote I/O
· Controller shall operate with a fixed cycle time. Controllers with non-deterministic
operating system shall not be acceptable
· 1. Any or all the 3 independent MS/TP channels may be used to integrate
MODBUS devices like Energy Meters etc. or BACnet® devices and BACnet®
controller data. The BMS contractor shall include if any, license required for this
interface within their scope
· The GPC/NC shall provide alarm recognition, storage routing, management, and
analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific
controllers.
· Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but limited to:
o To alarm
o Return to normal
o To fault
· Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm classes for the purpose
of routing types and or classes of alarms based on priority.
· Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or priority.
· Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate password control.
· Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and be
annunciated.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 25
_________________________________________________________________________________
· A log of alarms shall be maintained by the NC

· Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined
parameters.
· A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
· An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided
and available for review by the user.
2.13.4.3 Advanced Application Specific Controller (B-AAC)
1. Controller shall be 32 bit microprocessor based BACnet® Advanced Application

Controller in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004. Advanced
Application Controllers shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Variable Air Volume
(VAV) Terminals and other applications as shown on the drawings. The application
control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output
circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier must provide a
PICS document showing the installed systems compliance level to the
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004.
2. All Advanced Application Controller shall be fully programmable with the help of
Windows based software programming tool and shall at all times maintain their
BACnet® compliance. Controllers offering application selection only (non-
programmable) require a 15% spare point capacity to be provided for all
applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the B-AAC shall be
stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a
battery, to be retained.
3. Stand-alone, Native BACnet®, UL Listed Application Controllers shall be used to

provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment. In addition to their standalone
capabilities, they shall also provide the ability networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet®
MS/TP field network to other MS/TP controllers, and VAV/SPC zone controllers on
the single MS/TP channel. These controllers may be used to optimize the energy
consumption by implementing various control strategies such as temperature
setup/setback etc.
4. Standard features for all Advanced Application Controllers shall include:
a. 32 bit microprocessor based controllers
b. Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities on single MS/TP channel
c. Masters to slave devices are not acceptable
d. Should have on-board Real Time Clock
e. Should support BACnet® intrinsic alarm reporting
f. Should support calendar objects for scheduling
g. Should comply to BACnet® B-AAC device profile
h. Flexibility to be used and connected to Network Controller to expand the I/O

capacity of network controller
i. BACnet® MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k baud
j. All Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable as

analog or digital with standard and custom ranges.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 26
_________________________________________________________________________________
k. Pulse counting shall be available for any one of binary inputs up to 15Hz
frequency
l. Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet® Loop Objects
m. Minimum of one Loop Object for each output
n. In the particular case of Programmable VAV Controllers (VAV), the following
5. Standard VAV control sequences are incorporated to provide pressure independent

control of a single duct VAV unit
6. VAV Controllers shall be with actuator to provide a easy and compact installation
and without actuator to provide flexibility to choose suitable modulating or floating
actuator based on the application. For example VAV box controller used in the
laboratory should use the modulating actuator and the VAV box controller used in
office area should use the floating actuator.
7. Each controller shall have an onboard flow-thru sensor for use with a single or multi-
point differential pressure measuring station or pitot tube. Programmable controller
to allow customizing of the standard sequences for temperature setback, overrides,
proportional wet reheat and other user defined sequences to adapt to changing
building conditions. The ability to only change operating parameters or substitute
between configurable applications shall not be considered acceptable.
8. Should be easily programmable using Microsoft Windows based programming utility.
9. The VAV controller shall communicate with the main network controller at a baud
rate of not less than 38.4K baud. The VAV controller shall provide LED indication of
communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal.
2.13.4.4 In the particular case of Programmable Small Point Control (SPC) Application Controllers,
the following shall apply in addition to the standard features listed above:
1. Programmable control basic to allow customizing of the standard sequences for

temperature setback, overrides, proportional wet reheat and other user defined
sequences to adapt to changing building conditions. The ability to only change
operating parameters or substitute between configurable applications shall not be
considered acceptable
2. Should be easily programmable using Microsoft Windows based programming utility.
3. The SPC shall communicate with the main network controller at a baud rate of not less
than 38.4K baud. The SPC shall provide LED indication of communication and
controller performance to the technician, without cover removal.
2.13.4.5 Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
1. Controller shall be 32 bit microprocessor based BACnet® Application Specific

Controller in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004. Application
Specific Controller shall be provided for Fan Coil unit (FCU) and other unitary
applications as shown on the drawings. The application control program shall be
resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the
sensor signals. The BMS Contractor must provide a PICS document showing the
installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 27
_________________________________________________________________________________
2. All Application Specific Controller shall be fully programmable as per application with
the help of Windows based software programming tool. Controllers offering application
selection only (non-programmable), require a 15% spare point capacity to be provided
for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the B-ASC shall
be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a
battery, to be retained.
3. Stand-alone, Native BACnet®, UL Listed Application Controllers shall be used to

provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment. In addition to their standalone
capabilities, they shall also provide the ability networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet®
MS/TP field network to other controllers, or as part of a complete facilities management
system which integrates multiple field networks. These controllers may be used to
optimize the energy consumption by implementing various control strategies such as
temperature setup/setback etc.
4. Standard features for all Application Specific Controllers shall include:
a. 32 bit microprocessor based controllers

b. Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities as MS/TP, Masters to slave
devices are not acceptable
c. Should have on-board Real Time Clock
d. Should support BACnet® intrinsic alarm reporting
e. Should support BACnet® B-ASC profile and BTL
f. BACnet® MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k baud
g. All Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable as
analog or digital with standard and custom ranges.
h. Pulse counting shall be available for any one of binary inputs up to 15Hz frequency
i. All Outputs to be Universal Outputs with 8 bit resolution - software selectable for
analog or digital with standard and custom ranges
j. Maximum 90 objects
k. Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet® Loop Objects.
l. Minimum of 1 Loop Object for each output.
m. In the particular case of Programmable Unitary Applications, the following shall
apply in addition to the standard features listed above:
5. Standard FCU control sequences are incorporated to provide control of Fan Coil Unit
Programmable control basic to allow customizing of the standard sequences for
temperature setback, overrides, proportional wet reheat and other user defined
sequences to adapt to changing building conditions. The ability to only change
operating parameters or substitute between configurable applications shall not be
considered acceptable. Should be easily programmable using Microsoft Windows
based programming utility.
2.14 Specific Building Management Functions
2.14.1 LonWorks / BACnet Capability
2.14.1.1 The system shall provide direct Interfaces to LonWorks and BACnet. The interface shall
provide the functionality necessary to normally operate a building management system
based on LON devices including alarming, data acquisition, supervisory control, and
trending. BACnet at Management level shall be used for General Purpose DDC controllers
and also for 3rd party integrations that are available on BACnet.
2.14.1.2 This interface shall use standard components such as PC LonTalk Adaptors (PCLTA) or
Ethernet to LonTalk routers such as the Echelon I-LON routers to connect the IBMS to the
LonWorks network and devices. Solutions requiring gateways or data servers (e.g. OPC
to LON or DDE to LON) are not acceptable.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 28
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.14.1.3 The IBMS Interface to LonWorks should be based on LON Network Services (LNS)
Release 3.2 or later. The interface shall allow access to be configured for any Network
Variable (NV) or Configuration Property (CP) in the LON device. Any LON devices
conforming to LonMark functional profiles shall be able to be easily integrated into the
IBMS without the need for software changes in the IBMS.
2.14.1.4 The system shall allow standard graphics to be created for configurable LonWorks
devices so that it is possible for all instances of points for the same device type to use the
same graphic.
2.14.1.5 The LonWorks Interface shall be compatible with any LonWorks vendor whose products
conform to standard LonMark profiles. Terminal Unit Controllers such as VAV and FCU
shall be Lonmark compliant controllers.
2.14.1.6 The LonWorks range of controllers shall be acceptable for the terminal units (FCU, VAVs,
etc) provided they are Lonmark and comply fully and beyond the standard profile.
2.14.1.7 The LonWorks range of devices shall be connected directly with the IBMS using the
standard Lon Network Server Database. Connections based on proprietary methods shall
not be accepted.
2.14.2 Controller Scheduling
2.14.2.1 A controller scheduling tool shall be provided for creating, editing and maintaining
controller time schedules. The controller scheduling tool shall be constructed in a way that
allows compatibility with new controller types with minimal additional development.
2.14.2.2 The controller scheduling tool shall allow downloading of schedules to several (supported)
controllers in a single operation by provision of an integrated graphical interface.
2.14.2.3 The controller scheduling tool shall provide a clear, graphical indication of the status of
each downloadable schedule element, and shall automatically recover and complete any
schedule download which, for any reason, has failed or been interrupted.
2.14.3 System Control and Monitoring via the web
2.14.3.1 For building tenants or other people without access to an Operator Workstation, the IBMS
shall provide the ability to control and monitor site resources via a standard Intranet site.
2.14.4 Integrated Maintenance Management
2.14.4.1 The IBMS shall optionally provide an integrated facility for maintenance management of
plant and equipment. The maintenance facility shall tightly integrate with the IBMS to
retrieve data from field devices to determine when equipment or plant in the field requires
maintenance
2.14.4.2 The maintenance facility shall automatically raise a works order request for a piece of
equipment when certain maintenance conditions are met. Types of configurable
maintenance events shall include duty cycles, run hours, and high data values. The works
order will automatically be emailed to the configured responsible individual.
2.14.4.3 The user interface shall be based on Web technology, with all regular maintenance facility
interaction occurring through a standard web browser. Systems that require additional
software on client machines to allow viewing and configuration of the maintenance facility
shall not be acceptable.
2.14.4.4 The maintenance facility shall use a standard reporting tool for generation of maintenance
reports. Such reports shall include past and present works orders, equipment lists and
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 29
_________________________________________________________________________________
equipment history reports. User customization of reports shall be possible via the standard
reporting tool.
2.14.4.5 The maintenance facility shall store common asset information and provide easy addition
of customer-defined information. User access shall be configurable, to enable user
capabilities to be tailored or limited. It shall be possible to use equipment templates to
allow definition of equipment with common data requirements without having to repeat
data entry.
2.15 FIELD DEVICES
2.15.1 Field devices, including valves, actuators and sensors, shall be selected from the following
types, wherever possible.
2.15.2 Actuators
2.15.2.1 The following actuator ranges provide maximum flexibility in component selection.
2.15.2.1.1 Small Linear Actuators without Spring Return
2.15.2.1.2 The small linear actuators shall provide floating or modulating control together with small
linear valves. These actuators shall be used in fan coil units. They shall be employed in
electronic temperature control systems using cold water as the controlled medium.
2.15.2.1.3 The small linear actuators shall be suitable for controllers using floating or modulating
outputs or communications interfaces based on LonWorks® technology. Controllers with
floating outputs track the precise valve position whereas with controllers with modulating
outputs the actuators operate continuously to the requested valve position. These
actuators shall be well-suited for applications where space is limited and where minimal
power consumption is required. These small linear actuators shall have a flexible platform
which can be adapted to meet requirements for color, cable-length, auxiliary switches,
mechanical interface, and integrated manual adjustment.
2.15.3 Large Linear Actuators
2.15.3.1 The large linear actuators shall be used together with controllers providing switched or
floating single-pole/double-throw outputs or controllers with modulating control outputs.
These actuators shall have a standard mechanical interface where no linkage is required,
and no calibration or adjustments shall be necessary. The actuators shall feature force-
limiting end switches to guarantee that no power is consumed in the end positions and
synchronous motors to ensure a long life span. They shall be capable of simple manual
operation and the option of spring-return and non-spring-return models to guarantee a
wide range of applications. The modulating actuators without spring return shall also
provide a failsafe function in case of a faulty connection. These shall be used in air
handling units.
2.15.4 Damper Actuators with Spring Return
2.15.4.1 The spring return actuators shall combine safety and control functionality and provide
on/off, floating, and modulating control interfaces with a wide range of available
accessories. These actuators shall have a bidirectional fail safe functionality and a self-
centering shaft adapter or exchangeable hub insert to fit on all dampers quickly and
securely. Quick start-up and service shall be ensured by a manual override, a highly-
visible position indicator, dual-point mounting options and auxiliary switches. These
products shall be used for ventilation and air-conditioning systems for ventilation flaps and
air handlers where the fail safe functionality is required.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 30
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.16 Pressure Independent Control Valves & Regular Control VALVES
2.16.1 Small Linear Valves (non PICV)
· The small linear valves shall be operated with small linear actuators and
thermoelectric actuators for modulating or on/off control of chilled water for fan coil
units. These valves shall be well suited for applications where space is limited such
as in fan coil units. They shall be designed for reliable long time use and feature high
quality specifications.
2.16.2 Threaded Large Linear Valves (non PICV)
· The threaded large linear valves shall be used with large linear actuators for
modulating control in ventilation and air conditioning systems with chilled water. 2-
way valves shall provide a long lifespan and feature optimized rangeability, leakage
rate, temperature range, close-off pressure and flow characteristics.
2.16.3 2-Way Flanged Large Linear Valves (non PICV)
· The 2-way flanged large linear valves shall be used with large linear actuators for
modulating control of chilled water in ventilating and air conditioning systems. Metal
to metal seating and self-adjusting packing shall ensure long life, and the valves shall
provide high quality specifications to ensure state of the art temperature control.
2.16.4 Automatic pressure independent balancing and control valve for FCUs DN15 to DN25
(Internal threaded type)
· Automatic balancing and control valve shall provide hydronic balancing by keeping
the flow rate at a constant pre-set level. The required flow rate shall be preset without
tools and locked with a pin directly at the valve and must not affect the actuator
stroke, and shall provide full stroke modulating temperature control. The valve must
have Integrated emergency shutoff function with the use of a protection cap. All
functions shall be located on one side and the valves must be suitable to be installed
in any orientation such that the condensate does not flow to the actuator. The
graduations for the flow setting shall provide flow rate values and shall not require the
installer to refer to any charts.
· Valve housing shall be made of dezincification resistant brass, sealings from EPDM,
pre-setting parts from High resistance polymer and inner parts from brass, stainless
steel, high resistance polymer and EPDM. The valve shall have integrated
SafeConTM pressure test connections for measurement, and it must comply to IEC
60534-2-3 Class IV rated minimum leakage.
· The valve shall be suitable for water or water-glycol mixture according to VDI 2035
Operating temperature shall be: -10…120°C

Maximum Operating pressure shall be: 25 bar
Flow capacity of the valve family shall be 45 l/h to 1500 l/h
Maximum differential pressure shall be 400 kPa
Pipe connections shall be internal threaded Rp type machined into the dezincification
resistant brass valve body
DN size Connection size Flow range Pressure

Internal threads range
DN15 ½“ 45…150 l/h 20…400 kPa
DN15 ½“ 60…600 l/h 25…400 kPa
DN15 ½“ 78…780 l/h 35…400 kPa
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 31
_________________________________________________________________________________
DN20 3/4“ 100…1000 l/h 30…400 kPa

DN20 3/4“ 450…1500 l/h 35…400 kPa
DN25 1“ 450…1500 l/h 35…400 kPa
2.16.5 Automatic pressure independent balancing and control valve for FCUs & AHUs DN20 to DN32
(Internal threaded type)
the flow rate at a constant pre-set level. The required flow rate shall be preset without
tools and locked with a pin directly at the valve and must not affect the actuator
stroke, and shall provide full stroke modulating temperature control. The valve must
have Integrated emergency shutoff function with the use of a protection cap. All
in any orientation such that the condensate does not flow to the actuator. The
graduations for the flow setting shall provide flow rate values and shall not require the
installer to refer to any charts.
· Valve housing shall be made of dezincification resistant brass, sealings from EPDM,
pre-setting parts from High resistance polymer and inner parts from brass, stainless
steel, high resistance polymer and EPDM. The valve shall have integrated
Maximum Operating pressure shall be: 25 bar
· Pipe connections shall be internal threaded Rp type machined into the dezincification
resistant brass valve body
DN20 3/4“ 220…2200 l/h 25…400 kPa
DN20 3/4“ 270…2700 l/h 25…400 kPa
DN25 1“ 220…2200 l/h 25…400 kPa
DN25 1“ 270…2700 l/h 25…400 kPa
DN32 1 1/4“ 270…2700 l/h 25…400 kPa
DN32 1 1/4“ 300…3000 l/h 35…400 kPa
· Automatic pressure independent balancing and control valve for FCUs and AHUs
DN32 to DN50 (Internal threaded type)
the flow rate at a constant pre-set level. The required flow rate shall be set without
use of tools directly at the valve actuator. The actuator shall provide full modulating
flow control with position feedback and meets class II-IP54 requirements. All
in any orientation such that the condensate does not flow to the actuator.
· Valve housing shall be made of ductile iron and spray coated, sealings from EPDM,
pre-setting parts from dezincification resistant brass and inner parts from brass,
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 32
_________________________________________________________________________________
stainless steel, high resistance polymer and EPDM. The valve shall have integrated
Maximum operating pressure shall be: 16 bar
Pipe connections shall be internal threaded Rc type made from brass

DN32 1 1/4“ 1800…6000 l/h 30…400 kPa
DN40 1 ½“ 2700…9000 l/h 35…400 kPa
DN50 2“ 3300…11000 l/h 40…400 kPa
DN50 2“ 5400…18000 l/h 35…400 kPa
2.16.6 Automatic pressure independent balancing and control valve for AHUs DN50 to DN150 mm
(Flanged Type)
the maximum flow rate at a constant pre-set level. The required flow rate shall be set
without use of tools directly at the valve actuator. The integrated actuator shall
provide full modulating flow control with position feedback and meets class II-IP54
requirements. All functions shall be located on one side and it should be possible to
install the valve in any orientation such that the condensate does not flow to the
actuator.
· Valve housing shall be made of ductile iron and spray coated, sealings from EPDM,
pre-setting parts from high resistance polymer and dezincification resistant brass,
and inner parts from brass, stainless steel, high resistance polymer and EPDM. It
shall include integrated pressure test connections for measurement. The pressure
connectors shall be such that connection and disconnection shall be possible without
the use of any tools. No liquid shall be spilled during connection and disconnection.
The valve must meet IEC 60534-2-3 standard and be Class IV rated for minimum
leakage.
Maximum operating pressure shall be: 16 bar
Pipe connections shall be flanged type machined onto the ductile iron valve body
DN size Flow range Pressure

range
DN50 2000…20000 l/h 40…400 kPa
DN65 3000…30000 l/h 30…400 kPa
DN80 3000…30000 l/h 30…400 kPa
DN100 5500…55000 l/h 30…400 kPa
DN125 9000…90000 l/h 35…400 kPa
DN150 15000…150000 l/h 50…400 kPa
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 33
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.17 Rotary Actuators
2.17.1 Floating Actuators
· These actuators shall provide floating or on/off control together with 3- and 4-way
rotary valves as well as butterfly valves in heating and air conditioning systems. The
actuators shall be protected against overload and blocking. Mounting shall be quick
and easy without special linkage parts. Manual operation of the valve shall be
possible without removing the actuator. The actuators shall provide long life at a high
nominal torque level. Auxiliary switches and a feedback potentiometer shall be
optional features.
2.17.2 Modulating Actuators
· These actuators shall provide modulating control together with the standard rotary
valve range in heating and air conditioning systems. They shall provide flexibility by
allowing 2-10V/0-10V switching and reversible operating direction and shall be
available in 10 and 20 Nm torque ranges. Auxiliary switches and an external position
indicator (0-10V output) shall be optional.
2.17.3 Small Floating Actuator Series
· The small rotary actuators shall provide floating control in small heating and air
conditioning systems with pipe diameters of 15-50 mm. When used in combination
with the new 3- and 4-way compact valves, it shall be possible to control very exact
heating and cooling water temperatures. The mechanical interface between actuator
and valve shall be designed for fastest mounting and ease of start-up. The actuators
shall be prewired and be available in 24Vac and 230 Vac versions. They shall be
available with and without auxiliary switches. All types shall have a 100s run time per
90°, provide 7 Nm torque, and be rated to IP44.
2.18 Rotary Valves
2.18.1 Bubble Tight Butterfly Valves
· The butterfly valves shall employ an EPDM - HT liner to meet upcoming cooling
system standards. No additional linkage shall be required for mounting standard
actuators.
2.19 SENSORS
2.19.1 Temperature Sensors
2.19.1.1 Passive temperature sensors with NTC 20K ohm, Balco500 and PT1000 elements shall
be available for different applications.
2.19.1.1.1 Outdoor temperature sensors (also combined with humidity sensors) with extra covers for
protection and shielding the sun. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be available.
Their temperature range shall be –40 to +60°C.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 34
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.19.1.1.2 Earth temperature sensors for greenhouse applications. These prewired NTC 20 sensor
shall be rated to IP65. Their temperature range shall be –50 to +90°C.
2.19.1.1.3 Room temperature sensors (also combined with set point adjustment and fan/presence
switches). These shall be available with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500 elements in an
attractive, appealing housing, with terminal blocks for wiring. Models shall also be
available with LEDs. Their temperature range shall be –20 to +50°C.
2.19.1.1.4 Air duct temperature sensors. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be available to
mount in and outside the duct. Their temperature range shall be –40 to +120°C.
2.19.1.1.5 Strap-on temperature sensors. These shall be used measure the temperature in a water
pipe. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be available and shall be mounted on the
pipe with a clamp. Their temperature range shall be –50 to 110°C.
2.19.1.1.6 Immersion temperature sensors. These shall be used to measure the temperature in a
water pipe. Prewired and terminal block versions shall be available and shall be mounted
in the pipe with a well. Lengths from 95 to 300 mm shall be available. Material shall be
copper, brass or stainless steel depending on type. Their temperature range shall be –50
to +130°C.
2.19.1.1.7 Fast temperature sensors. These shall be used with domestic hot water applications in
district heat stations and shall detect fast temperature changes. These shall be pre-wired
stainless steel sensors and be available with a NTC 20 element. They shall be mounted
directly into the pipe. Sensor lengths shall be 75, 220 and 300 mm. The length shall be
adjustable to pipe diameters.
2.19.2 Average Temperature Sensor for Air Ducts
2.19.2.1 A single PT 1000 sensor over a length of 3.6m shall be used for sensing the average
temperature in large air ducts with. Sensor holders shall be included for installation.
2.19.3 Stainless Steel Temperature Sensors and Transmitters
2.19.3.1 Stainless steel temperature sensors shall be available with PT 100 and PT 1000 elements
and stainless steel temperature transmitters. They shall feature a 2-wire-system, 4-20 mA
output, 12-36 Vdc supply voltage, and shall meet protection class IP 65.
2.19.4 LON Temperature Sensors
2.19.4.1 LON temperature sensors, compliant with temperature profile 1040, shall be available
with the Neuron button accessible and the LED visible from outside. The following models
shall be available:
2.19.4.1.1 Rod temperature sensor, range –20 to + 110 °C, sensor length 135 mm, LonMark®-
compliant, including brass immersion well.
2.19.4.1.2 Rod temperature sensor, range –20 to + 110 °C, sensor length 300 mm, including brass
immersion well.
2.19.4.1.3 Duct sensor, range –30 to +110 °C, sensor length 280 mm.
2.19.4.1.4 Fast temperature sensor, range –20°C to 110°C, length 75 mm, variable sensor
immersion length, for use without immersion well for fast temperature transmission.
2.19.4.1.5 Fast temperature sensor, range –20°C to 110°C, length 75 mm, variable sensor
immersion length, for use without immersion well for fast temperature transmission.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 35
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.19.5 Humidity Sensors
2.19.5.1 Active humidity sensors shall be available in combination with temperature sensing with
NTC 20K ohm, Balco500 and PT1000 elements for different applications. The operating
voltage for the capacitive humidity sensing element shall be 24V. The following types
shall be available:
2.19.5.1.1 Outdoor humidity sensors with terminal blocks and a temperature range of –30 to +50°C.
2.19.5.1.2 Capacitive room humidity sensors with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500 temperature
sensors, and with terminal blocks, output for humidity of 0 to 1 or 0 to 10V, and a
temperature range of –0 to .+50°C.
2.19.5.1.3 Capacitive air duct humidity sensors with NTC 20, PT1000 and Balco500 temperature
sensors, and with terminal blocks, output for humidity of 0-1 or 0-10V, a temperature
range of –0 to +50°C, and mountable on the air duct.
2.19.6 Pressure Transmitters
2.19.6.1 Differential pressure transmitters are used for controlling pressure in air conditioning or
other ventilation applications, such as filter monitoring, pressure or flow control, maximum
pressure control, etc. The transmitters can be used for overpressure, vacuum or
differential pressure measurement with non-aggressive gaseous media. The range of the
transmitters shall be easy changed by potentiometers or jumpers.
2.19.7 Differential Pressure Transmitters For Air Conditioning
2.19.7.1 These transmitters shall have an output signal of 0 to 10V, pressure ranges selectable by
jumper, zero point adjustment by potentiometer, and shall conform to protection class IP
65. Accessories such as 2m silicone pressure hose and pressure joints shall be included.
The following pressure ranges shall be available:
0 to 500 / 1000 Pa selectable by jumper, set to 500 Pa

0 to 1000 / 500 Pa selectable by jumper, set to 1000 Pa
0 to 2000 / 1000 Pa selectable by jumper
–500 to + 500 Pa fixed
–1000 to +1000 Pa fixed
2.19.7.2 Additional versions shall be available with a 3-½ digit LCD display. These transmitters
shall be available in LON versions conforming to pressure profile 1030, with service and
operation LED visible and Neuron button accessible from outside. Provide as / if shown on
the drawings.
2.19.8 Air Quality Sensors
2.19.8.1 Air quality sensors measure the concentration of CO2 or mixed gases (VOC) in the air and
are used to initiate an action such as causing dampers to open or fans to speed up to
bring fresh air in. Sensor elements shall be, depending on type, metalloxide
semiconductors, CO2 sensors, Non Dispersion Infrared (NDIR) and thermistors. The
sensors shall be powered by 24V, with an output signal of 0-10V. The operating range
shall be 0 to 45°C.
2.19.8.2 Versions with a display and relay outputs shall also be available. Room sensors and air
duct sensors shall both be available. Provide as / if shown on the drawings.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 36
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.19.9 Room Sensors
2.19.9.1 A LonMark®-compliant fast temperature sensor shall be available in the range of 0°C to
70°C and shall meet temperature profile 1040. The Neuron button shall be accessible
and the service and operation LED shall be visible from outside. Provide as / if shown on
the drawings.
PART 3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3.1 Chilled Water System
3.1.1 System Configuration
The chilled water system comprises of 3 Air cooled chillers in parallel arrangement. The
primary chilled water pumping system consists of 4 constant speed common chilled water
primary pumps (3 duty + 1 stand-by). The Chilled water secondary pumping system is
variable volume and consists of 3 pumps (2 duty and 1 standby). Differential Pressure
sensors are installed in each of the secondary circuit before the last AHU / FCU. The final
location of the differential pressure sensor in each of the secondary circuits shall be
approved by the Engineer. According to the requirement of the cooling load, the number of
chillers and pumps will be enabled / disabled and the speed of the pumps shall be
adjusted by the Chiller Plant Manager. In addition to individual temperature sensors at the
supply line of each chiller, temperature sensors are provided at the common supply and
return header line to monitor the chilled water supply temperature and chilled water return
temperature to and from the building respectively. De-coupler (Bypass) valve between
Primary and secondary system balances the chilled water flow between the primary and
secondary chilled water lines. Control & monitoring of the chillers, cooling towers,
secondary pumps, condenser pumps and Primary chilled water pumps shall be performed
by the Chiller Plant Manager (CPM). Dedicated control panels of the chillers will be
connected to each other and with the main chiller control panel. The Chiller Plant Manager
will communicate with the BMS through BACNet / IP protocol.
3.1.2 Sequence of Operation
3.1.2.1 For Sequence of Operation of the chillers, primary and secondary chilled water pumps,
condenser water pumps and cooling towers, please refer to the Sequence of Operation of
the Chiller Plant Manager.
3.1.3 Alarms
3.1.3.1 Alarms generated by the Chiller Plant Manager shall be conveyed to the BMS and
displayed in the Central Station BMS monitor.
3.1.4 The CPM shall perform all the controls of the whole chilled water plant as standalone, but
shall be interfaced with the BMS to allow the BMS personnel to override any input data.
3.1.5 Pressurization System
3.1.5.1 The chilled water pressurization system MCC panel will provide, in the form of a VFC, the
pump run status signal to the DDC controller.
3.1.5.2 The pressurization system MCC panel will also provide, in the form of a VFC, the motor
overload trip alarm signal to the DDC controller.
3.1.6 Refer to BMS detailed drawings for complete list of monitored / controlled points.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 37
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME TOTAL FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH HEAT PIPE &
HEAT RECOVERY WHEELS
3.2.1 Plant Configuration
3.2.1.1 Each Air Handling Units shall comprise of an AHU supply air fan provided with VFD
(variable frequency drive) motor, exhaust fan with a constant speed motor, CHW cooling
coil with 2 way modulating valve, Reheat section (heat pipe, heat wheel…) 2 bank of filters
(pre & bag filters) and heat wheel section. There shall be 2 filters, including a Carbon Filter
in the Extract duct before the Heat Wheel. The fresh air shall be pre – cooled by the
extract air before its entry to the cooling coil. This section of the AHU shall act as a heat
recovery section.
3.2.2 Temperature/humidity Control
3.2.2.1 A combined Temperature and humidity sensor located directly after the cooling coil shall
monitor the temperature and humidity. The supply air temperature after the reheat section
shall be maintained at the desired set point (720F/50%RH) or as set it via the modulating
valve located on the chilled water coils.
3.2.3 Heat & Energy recovery Wheels
3.2.3.1 The DDC shall enable/disable the heat recovery wheel and also monitor the heat recovery
wheel motor trip status.
3.2.3.2 Temperature sensors installed downstream and Upstream of the Heat Recovery Wheel on
the extract side will be used to monitor the efficiency of the Heat Recovery Wheels.
Temperature/Humidity sensors installed downstream and Upstream of the Heat Recovery
Wheel on the supply will also be used to monitor the efficiency of the Heat Recovery
Wheels.
3.2.4 Dirty Filter Status
3.2.4.1 Differential pressure switches are located across the filters. In case the filter gets clogged
beyond the value set in the differential pressure switch, a contact is made which the DDC
controller recognizes. The DDC controller raises an alarm for dirty filter if the pressure
drop across the filter exceeds the pre-determined value.
3.2.4.2 Supply and Exhaust Fans Monitoring and Start/Stop
3.2.5 Supply Air Fan
3.2.5.1 The motor control centre serving the AHU shall have an "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. The
BMS shall take over the operations of the AHU when the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the
‘AUTO” position. The AHU shall be switched on automatically as per the dictates of the
time channels defined in the DDC controllers. Under normal conditions the AHU shall run
in the ‘AUTO’ mode. The DDC shall first open the duct dampers. Once the dampers open
status is established, the DDC shall enable/disable the variable speed drives of the AHU
supply fan, thereby switching on these fans. The supply air fan VFD is controlled
depending on the supply air duct pressure sensors. The pressure shall vary as the VAVs
open or close.
3.2.5.2 The DDC shall also monitor the VFD trip status and control the fan speeds by giving 0-10
v dc outputs. The DDC shall also receive the fan speed feedback via 0-10 v dc from the
variable speed drive. Fans shall run in the “hand” mode only for testing purposes. The
airflow switches are mounted across the supply fan to detect airflow. Each airflow switch is
connected to a digital input of the DDC controller.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 38
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.5.3 The ‘overload trip’ condition of the motor is monitored at the DDC controller via a volt-free
contact from the Motor Control Centre
3.2.6 Exhaust Air Fan
3.2.6.1 The Motor Control Centre serving the AHU shall have an "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. The
BMS shall take over the operations of the AHU when the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the
‘AUTO” position. The AHU & exhaust fan shall be switched on automatically as per the
dictates of the time channels defined in the DDC controllers. Under normal conditions the
AHU and the exhaust fan shall run in the ‘AUTO’ mode. The AHU supply air fan shall run
in the “hand” mode only for testing purposes. The airflow switches are mounted across the
supply air fan to detect airflow. Each airflow switch is connected to a digital input of the
DDC controller.
contact from the Motor Control Centre.
3.2.7 Fire/Smoke Mode Operation:
3.2.7.1 In case of fire being detected in the conditioned area, DDC shall receive an input signal
from the fire alarm system corresponding to that zone. On receiving the signal, DDC shall
switch off the AHU supply air fan.
3.2.7.2 A duct smoke detector located in the supply duct shall signal the FA/BMS system to shut
down the AHU in the event of fire/smoke in the supply duct.
3.3 Basement Parking Extract Fans
3.3.1 Normal Mode
3.3.1.1 Exhaust Fans used for basement and ground floor ventilation are of two- speed and shall
be under the control of BMS. The Basement shall have multi Air quality sensors each area
that is served by a separate ventilation system requires a separate monitoring point. The
exact no. of Air quality sensor shall be decided by determining the coverage area of each
Air quality sensor under the condition that no part of the car park must be more than 25
meters from a sampling point.
3.3.1.2 The nos. of Air quality sensors shall cover the entire basement area at least one sampling
point must be provided at each entrances and exits of the Car park. These sensors shall
be connected to the DDC Controllers.
3.3.1.3 Monitoring must take place within the breathing zone; which is the region within an
occupied space between 1 and 1.8m above the floor, and more than 0.1 m from walls or
air conditioning equipment.
3.3.1.4 The hand-off-auto switch should be in ‘auto’ position, under normal conditions i.e when the
CO Concentration is below 25 ppm, the fans should operate at 3 ACH, and as the CO
concentration increases, the fans speed should increase linearly, to reach a maximum of 6
ACH when the CO concentration reaches 50 ppm. At CO concentration 50 ppm, the
operation at 6 ACH should be maintained until the CO concentration reaches 100 ppm, at
which Smoke Mode should operate i.e. 10 ACH.
CO Concentration Fan Air Flow

0 < CO < 25 0
25 < CO < 50 3 ACH → 6 ACH
50 < CO < 100 6 ACH
CO > 100 10 ACH
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 39
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.5 Fans shall continue to run till the CO concentration falls below the CO Set-point. The
Common Airflow status of these fans shall be monitored on BMS via Air Flow Switch. The
‘overload trip’ status of these fans shall also be monitored by the BMS via volt free
contacts from the motor control centres.
3.3.1.6 Air quality sensors will send alarm to BMS if the rates of gases reached more than below
specified requirements:
Air Pollutant Average Time Maximum Concentration

Carbone Monoxide (CO) 15 Minutes 100 mg/m3
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 1 Hour 200 µg/ m3
Particular matter PM10 24 Hours 50 µg/ m3
3.3.1.7 The Space Temp is also monitored by the DDC, Fans which are generally off shall be
commanded to be ON in the event the Space temp exceeds 30 deg. C or as set by the
engineer, during the occupied periods only. During unoccupied periods as set by the time
schedules, fans shall be off unless an alarm signal received from Air quality sensor gives
a command via the DDC starts the Fan.
3.3.2 Smoke Mode
3.3.2.1 In case CO concentration is more than 100ppm (i.e. Smoke due to fire inside the served
zone), exhaust fans serving the affected zone shall run on its high speed and maintain
minimum 10 air change per hour to evacuate all smoke.
3.3.2.2 For other points, which are to be monitored by the BMS, please refer to the BMS
schematics.
3.4 Fire Lift Well and Pressurisation Fans
3.4.1 These fans shall be under the control of the BMS. The Pressurization Fans shall be
equipped with VFD and receive ‘start / stop’ command from the DDC controller on the
receipt of a Fire Alarm signal but only when the hand-off-auto switch is in ‘auto’ position.
The airflow status of the fan shall be monitored on BMS via Air Flow Switch. The ‘overload
trip’ status of these fans shall also be monitored by the BMS via volt free contacts from the
motor control centres. The Motorized On/Off Damper shall be mounted on the
Pressurization Duct. As per the Pressurization demands the Damper will be open/Closed
and this status shall be monitored by the BMS.
3.4.2 Fan VFD shall increase/decrease the fan speed to achieve the required pressure
difference between the stair case and the adjacent area (50 pa or as set)
3.4.3 For other points, which are to be monitored by the BMS, please refer to the BMS
schematics.
3.5 GENERAL EXTRACT FAN
3.5.1 Fan Monitoring and Start/Stop
3.5.1.1 The motor control centre serving the fan shall have an "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. The
airflow switches are mounted across the exhaust air fan to detect airflow. Under normal
conditions in the ‘AUTO’ mode the fan shall run as per the dictates of time schedule via
the DDC.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 40
_________________________________________________________________________________
contact.
3.6 WATER STORAGE TANK/ LIGHT FUEL OIL TANK
3.6.1 Immersed level sensor to monitor the high/low level shall be provided in the level pipe and
connected to the DDC. The dynamic display on the BMS PC screen shall be calibrated to
indicate actual water/oil volume in (m3), as a percentage of the full reading and also
display the high level and low level of fire reservoir level. The BMS shall provide the time
and date of occurrence of the alarms conditions.
3.6.2 Fluid temperature shall be monitored by BMS.
3.6.3 For other points, which are to be monitored by the BMS, please refer to the Data Points
Schedule.
3.7 TRANSFER PUMPS
3.7.1 The motor control centre serving the pumps shall have an "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It
shall be possible to start the pumps directly when the switch position is in “HAND”. When
this switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller can enable & disable the pump
manually either from the Management Station or automatically via a time program. The
BMS shall monitor the ‘run’ and ‘trip’ status of these pumps via voltfree contacts from the
respective motor control centres.
3.8 TYPICAL WATER SUPPLY PUMP SET
3.8.1 Filters, softeners and feed pumps.
3.8.2 The "RUN" status of the individual pumps shall be monitored through volt free contact
from the respective pump panels. The ‘trip/common fault’ alarm for the individual pumps
shall also be monitored. The electrical panel manufacturer shall render all the digital
signals to the BMS as volt free signals.
3.9 WATER BOOSTER PUMPS/IRRIGATION PUMPS
3.9.1 The BMS shall monitor the ‘run’ status of these pumps via volt free contacts from the
respective motor control centers. These Pumps shall be VFD driven and shall operate to
maintain the desired pressure in the Line. The VFD “Trip” and Feedback should be
monitored.
Schedule.
3.10 SUMP PUMPS
3.10.1 The BMS shall monitor the ‘run’ & ‘trip’ status of the Sump pumps via volt free contacts
from the respective motor control centres. The BMS shall also monitor the ‘High Level
Alarm’ of the Sump Pit via volt free contacts from the respective motor control centres.
The Stand By Pump should also come into operation if the operation if the main pump is
not sufficient.
Schedule.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 41
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.11 FIRE PUMPS
3.11.1 The BMS shall monitor the Run/Trip Status of each of the pumps. The BMS shall also
monitor the line pressure via a pressure transducer.
3.12 GENERATOR
3.12.1 The generator control panel shall convey the following volt free signals to the DDC
Controller.
3.12.1.1 System Healthy.

3.12.1.2 Generator Run Status.
3.12.1.3 Generator Common Fault.
3.12.1.4 Emergency stop status
3.12.1.5 High coolant temperature
3.12.1.6 Generator ‘On Test’ status.
3.12.1.7 Battery status
3.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
3.13.1 The Fire Alarm control panel shall convey the following volt free signals to the DDC
Controller.
3.13.1.1 Fire Alarm condition

3.13.1.2 Common Fault
3.13.2 Based on the previously illustrated fire/smoke modes of all mechanical systems, the BMS
contractor shall interface commands from the fire alarm panel in order to define the fire
zone(s) and start the fire/smoke mode of operation for all systems.
3.14 Swimming Pool Panel/Water Fountains Control Panel
3.14.1 The Status and Fault signals are monitored via volt free contacts from the Swimming Pool
Panel.
3.15 LIFT SYSTEM
3.15.1 BMS shall monitor Lift panel Healthy status, Panel Fault signal and Emergency call from
the lift car through volt free contacts from Lift control panel.
3.15.2 The following points will be monitored by the BMS:-
3.15.2.1 Lift Panel Health Status

3.15.2.2 Lift Panel Fault Signal
3.15.2.3 Emergency call from the lift car
3.15.2.4 Refer to BMS point schedule for detailed list of points.
3.16 LIGHTING SYSTEM
3.16.1 The Lighting System shall be interfaced to the BMS via EIB Based Lighting Control
System, the Lighting Vendor shall provide all relevant data to be monitored by the BMS at
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 42
_________________________________________________________________________________
a single point to the BMS over OPC or BACNet/IP. All the necessary hardware/software
for achieving this shall be considered by the Lighting System supplier.
3.17 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
3.17.1 The ‘Main Incomer - On/Off Status & Trip ’ shall be monitored by the BMS via volt free
contacts from the respective Distribution Boards.
Schedule.
3.18 FCUs
3.18.1 FCUs IN PUBLIC AREAS & TECHNICAL FLOORS
3.18.1.1 Individual BACnet controllers provided for each FCUs. They shall be of communicating
type to BMS.
3.18.1.2 Digital Room units with built-in temperature sensors to be provided for each FCU controls
for achieving the desired temperature conditions.
3.18.1.3 The room unit should be capable of displaying room temperature & humidity, outside air
temperature & humidity and set point if required.
3.19 CHILLED WATER BTU METERING
3.19.1 The offered BTU metering system shall measure the air conditioning energy consumed.
The meters shall work as standalone devices as well as integrated part of BMS. The
readings shall be displayed and printed out from the BMS central. Each BTU unit shall
include the following:-
3.19.2 Two immersion type temperature sensors to measure entering and leaving temperatures.
Insertion Flow sensor (pulse output) to measure water flow.
3.19.3 A calculator unit to calculate BTU consumption based on gathered data, which shall give a
pulse output to a Automatic Meter Reader (AMR) connected on LON WORKS/M-bus
network. The BMS reads the BTU consumption data through AMR.
3.19.4 All BTU meters must have data logging capability and be connected to a central
monitoring system so that information on the buildings energy consumption can be
recorded.
3.19.5 The monitoring system for main BTU meters must have at a minimum, the following
capabilities:-
3.19.5.1 Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annually energy consumption for each end-use.
3.19.5.2 Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analysis.
3.19.5.3 Determine “out-of range” values and alert building operators to unusually high
consumption.
3.19.5.4 Record peak energy consumption for each end use.
3.20 ELECTRIC KW/HR ENERGY METERS
3.20.1 The KWh readings of the SMBDs are monitored locally through the kWh meters installed
in the respective SMDBs. KWh meter shall give a pulse output to an Automatic Meter
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 43
_________________________________________________________________________________
Reader (AMR) connected on LON WORKS/Modbus RTU network. The BMS reads the
kWh consumption data through AMR.
3.20.2 Each meter will read either by direct method or by difference method.
3.20.2.1 Direct Method: In this method, the BMS will read the end use energy consumption as the
following:-
End use energy Consumption = The Meter Reading
3.20.2.2 Difference Method: In this method, the BMS will read the end use energy consumption as
the following:-
End use Energy Consumption = Main Meter Reading – Branch Meters Readings on that
Electric Panel
2.30.2.3 Refer to the electrical power schematics to determine the metering method (Direct or
Difference)
3.20.3 Each energy meter shall indicate the energy usage and the area served.
3.21 WATER METERING
3.21.1 Each water meter shall indicate the water use, measure the water consumed, and indicate
the area served. The meters shall work as standalone devices as well as integrated part of
BMS. A pulse input shall be obtained from water meters by DDC controllers. The readings
shall be displayed and printed out from the BMS to facilitate monthly consumption records.
3.21.2 All sub-meters shall be data logged via BMS so that information on the building’s energy
consumption can be recorded. The monitoring system must have, at a minimum, the
following capability:
§ Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual energy consumption for each end-
use.
§ Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analysis.
§ Determine ‘out-of-range’ values and alert building operators to unusually high

consumption.
§ Record peak energy consumption for each end-use.
3.22 WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM
3.22.1 Dirty Filter Status shall be monitored via BMS. Differential pressure switches are located
across the filter. In case the filter gets clogged beyond the value set in the differential
pressure switch, a contact is made which the DDC controller recognizes.
3.23 Security/Access Control/Gate Barrier Systems
3.23.1 BMS shall provide software integration with security, access and gate barrier control
systems on BACnet/IP.
3.23.2 The Status and Fault signals are monitored via volt free contacts from the aforementioned
systems.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 44
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.24 Motorized Damper
3.24.1 This system operates under its own dedicated controls. BMS monitors the following points
through volt free signals to DDC from each panel:
- VAV status
- Trip alarm
3.25 SMOKE EXTRACT FANS
3.25.1 Smoke extract fans are constant speed fans.
3.25.2 In case a fire alarm is received from the fire alarm panel (i.e. smoke due to fire inside the
served zone), smoke extract fans serving the affected zone shall run to evacuate all the
smoke.
3.25.3 In case the zone is served by makeup fresh air fans, these fans shall operate directly after
the smoke fans are operated.
3.26 Smoke Control Panel (SCP)
3.26.1 Smoke Control Panel shall have full control capability over all smoke control system
equipment or zones within the building to enable fire fighters readily understand the
operation of the system, and to activate or isolate certain zones or individual equipment.
3.26.2 Smoke Control Panel (SCP) shall have a minimum of these features:
3.26.2.1 Fan ON – Auto-OFF.

3.26.2.2 Dampers OPEN Auto-CLOSE
3.26.2.3 Visual indication of WHITE for fans, Dampers – NORMAL.
3.26.2.4 Visual indication of RED for fans-OFF, Dampers – CLOSED.
3.26.2.5 Visual indication of GREEN for fans-ON, Dampers – OPEN.
3.26.2.6 Visual indication of AMBER for fans-TROUBLE.
3.26.3 Smoke Control Panel (SCP) control functions shall include override of any automatic
functions in the smoke control system.
3.27 Main Control Panels (MCP)
3.27.1 The main incoming breaker of the panels shall be monitored for on/off status and trip
status. The BMS shall monitor the various electrical parameters as mentioned in the data
point schedule. The electrical panel manufacturer shall render all the digital signals to the
BMS as volt free signals.
3.28 CODES AND STANDARDS
Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Standard Title of Standard
1. National Fire Protection NFPA -

Association
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 45
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.29 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
3.29.1 For approved manufacturers related to this Section refer to ANNEXURE I- LIST OF
MECHANICAL MANUFACTURERS. Only direct manufacturers shall be considered,
Agents or Distributors are not acceptable.
Section 25 50 00
25 50 00 - 46
DIVISION 33
UTILITIES
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 33 05 10
GENERAL NATURAL GAS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.2 Application
1.3 Scope of Works
1.10 Workmanship
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 Tests
3.4 Access Doors
3.5 Permits
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 05 10
General Natural Gas Requirements
33 05 10 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 33 05 10
GENERAL NATURAL GAS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
of Division -22 and 33.
equally informed.
1.2 Application
1.3 Scope of Works
1.3.1 The works covered under this contract include the detailed design, supply, installation,
testing, adjusting and putting into operation systems, components of systems, and
individual items of equipment, and work related thereto, in accordance with the ADNOC
distribution guidelines and applicable standards & codes in line with relevant Authority
having jurisdiction. Products not mentioned but obviously necessary for the completion of
those Works shall be provided.
1.3.2 The ADNOC distribution approved contractor scope of works shall include NG System
from the downstream of the service isolating valve up to the appliance inlet including but
not limited to PRMS, gas leak detection system, gas meter inside the kitchen, risers and
droppers for Apartment’s kitchen, where as for commercial kitchen / restaurant; the scope
is limited up to the isolating valve only, gas meters & related piping, valves, fittings and
accessories shall be under Tenant’s scope of works.
1.3.3 The Contractor shall appoint an independent TPI to review and approve the detailed
design of GIB package prior to submission to ADNOC distribution.
1.3.4 Whenever a number of starters controllers, instruments, indicating lights and the like occur
or are shown on the Mechanical and/or electrical Drawings, they shall be arranged in a
central position in a neat, easily cleaned, factory-built panel, or motor control center
assembly. The assembly shall include isolators and all necessary fuses, busbars, starters,
instruments, relays, push-buttons, indicating lights and the like. Components shall be
mounted in a logical order based on the sequence of operation.
1.3.5 All control equipment including sensors, detectors, actuators, controllers, pressure level
and flow switches, annunciation alarms, remote control stations and all such equipment
needed for the proper system operation.
1.3.6 All control wiring for the above mentioned equipment.
1.3.7 Final connection, between disconnect switches, power outlets, flex outlet and mechanical
equipment.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 05 10
33 05 10 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.7 All cost shall be paid by the contractor.
1.3.9 The following electrical works and materials for the mechanical shall be supplied and
installed under the electrical part of this contract.
1.3.9.1 All power supply up to and including the following:
- Disconnect switches when specified to be installed separate from the control panel.
1.3.9.2 Power supply up to control panels when specified with an integral disconnect switch.
1.3.9.3 Power supply to disconnect switches when the switches are built-in the equipment.
1.3.9.4 Empty conduits with pull wires for all cables and wires classified under the mechanical
scope of works.
1.3.9.5 Control outlet boxes for all control equipment classified under the mechanical scope of
works.
the piping, equipment, etc., all in their respective locations and according to the
circumstances.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 05 10
33 05 10 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
and dust.
Engineer.
Maintenance Staff for a period of at least six weeks on all equipment and plants he has
triplicate bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material.
fulfillment of the specified requirements.
1.10 Workmanship
the Engineer.
1.1.2.2 The Engineer will be the sole judge of the standards required.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 05 10
33 05 10 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.2 Tests
systems. Labor, materials, power, etc.., required for testing, shall be furnished by the
3.4 Access Doors
motors and other items requiring operation, adjustment, or maintenance.
3.4.2 Access doors shall be fire rated and as per ADNOC distribution requirements.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 05 10
33 05 10 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.5 Permits
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 05 10
33 05 10 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 33 51 00
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Natural Gas System - General Description

1.2 Reference Code
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 Pipework, Valves and Fittings

2.2 Identification and Colour Coding
2.3 Flexible Hoses
2.4 Pipe Joints
2.5 Pressure Reducing and Metering
2.6 Hangers and Supports for Natural Gas
2.7 Gas Leak Detection & Control System
2.8 Data Logging, Recording and Monitoring System
2.9 Basic Design Requirements
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Gas Piping System Installation Requirements

3.2 Pipe Passing Through Walls
3.3 Testing and Commissioning
3.4 Pipe Laying
Section 33 51 00
Natural Gas Distribution
33 51 00 - 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 33 51 00
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract requirements. All works
shall be carried out by a specialist contractor approved by ADNOC Distribution.
1.1 Natural Gas System - General Description
1.1.1 Natural gas is supplied to the site by SNG plant located within the project unitl gas
network is provided ADNOC Distribution as indicated on the Drawings.
1.1.2 Gas under pressure is distributed to the the inlet of Kitchens through piping networks as
shown on drawings.
1.2 Reference Code
1.2.1 All work under this section (Installation and Material) shall conform to the Authority
requirements in addition to the Institution of Gas Engineer G Series document IGE/G/5,
unless otherwise specified hereinafter.
1.3.1 In no contradiction with UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE: Codes and
standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British Standards and United States
Codes, The design codes for the systems will be those of the UK’s Institution of
Gas Engineers and Managers (IGEM). Hybridization with other codes and standards or
selective adoption of individual clauses between codes and standards solely for the
purpose of gaining commercial advantage will not be permitted. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, other International Codes and Standards are also recognized and may be
implemented where the IGEM codes do not adequately cover local conditions etc.
within the UAE.
1.3.2 Other recognized standards include the following:
International Standards Organization (ISO)

European Norms - EN British Standards - BS
American National Standards Institute - ANSI
American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME
Emirates Authority for Standardization & Metrology - ESMA
1.3.3 Piping designs will be in accordance with the following s tand ar ds :
IGE/GM/8 Part 1 Non-domestic meter installations. Flow rate exceeding 6 m3h-1 and
inlet pressure not exceeding 38 bar. Part 1: Design.
IGE/GM/8 Part 2 - Non-domestic meter installations. Flow rate exceeding 6 m3h-1

and inlet pressure not exceeding 38 bar. Part 2: Locations, housings and compounds.
IGE/TD/3 – Steel and PE Pipelines for Gas Distribution (and amendments).
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
IGE/TD/4 - PE and steel gas services and service pipework.
IGE/UP/1 – Strength Testing, Tightness Testing and Purging (I & C), MOP ≤ 16 bar.
IGE/UP/1A - Strength Testing, Tightness Testing and Purging (I & C), MOP ≤ 40 mbar.
IGE/UP/1B - Tightness Testing and Purging (domestic) MOP ≤ 21 mbar.
IGEM/UP/2 - Installation pipework on industrial and commercial premises.
IGE/UP/11 - Gas Installations in Educational Establishments.
BS 6891 Specification for installation of low pressure gas pipework of up to 28 mm

(R1) in domestic premises (2nd family gas).
IGE/G/5 - Gas Installations in Multi- Occupancy Buildings.
1.3.4 D/DD/00011/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Multi-Unit Residential Building.
1.3.5 D/DD/00013/01 - Utilization Pipe Work Typical Consumer in Multi-Unit Building.
1.4.1 33 05 10 - General Natural Gas Requirements
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipework, Valves and Fittings
2.1.1 Materials
2.1.1.1 All materials used, including non-metallic parts for valve seals, gaskets, diaphragm, etc.
shall be resistant to the action of Natural Gas under the conditions to which they may be
subjected in service.
2.1.1.1.1 Natural Gas pipes lines shall be in accordance with API 5L.
2.1.1.1.2 External piping upstream of PRMS shall be designed to 1.2 – 4 bar pressure and should
be seamless steel or HDPE pipe conform to ISO 4437.
2.1.1.1.3 External piping downstream of PRMS (Riser), shall be designed to 75 mbar pressure and
conform to BS 6891 and IGE/G/5.
2.1.1.1.4 Natural Gas lines Internal Pipe Work shall be designed to operate below 75 mbar and
conform to BS 6891 (medium or heavy gauge only) or equivalent.
2.1.1.2 All pipeline should be adequately supported and have adequate flexibility to compensate
for thermal expansion, contraction or any other stresses which may occur in the system.
2.1.1.3 Risers installed in the shaft / duct shall be of fully welded construction and continuous to
the roof without take off points.
2.1.2 Valves and Fittings
2.1.2.1 Valves and fittings should be made of steel or forged brass. Cast iron valves and fittings
other than those of modular iron to BS 2789 or equivalent should be used:
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.2.2 The seats and valves must be suitable for use with Natural Gas. The use of fire safe
valves is recommended.
2.1.3 Pressure Gauges
2.1.3.1 Consideration should be given to the provision of pressure gauging devices to indicate
service pressure.
2.2 Identification and Colour Coding
Pipelines should be colour coded where appropriate in accordance with the relevant
section of the specifications.
2.2.1 Valve Chart Locations
2.2.1.1 Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
2.2.2 Identification of Pipelines and Services
2.2.2.1 General
2.2.2.1.1 Adhesives, sealants, vapour barriers, paints, coating, etc., shall meet “Green Building
2.2.2.1.2 All methods of identification shall be compatible with the pipe and operating conditions.
2.2.2.1.3 Identification shall be accomplished by using basic identification colours with code
indications.
2.2.2.1.4 Code indication shall include safety colours and service information. Information shall be
i - Name in Full.
iv - Appropriate Code Indication Colour bands.
2.2.2.2 Legend
2.2.2.2.1 The material in piping system shall be identified. Primary identification should be by
2.2.2.2.2 The legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple. Legends shall be applied close
2.2.2.2.3 Pipe marking should be highly visible.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.2.3 The Type & Size of Letters

(13 to 32) mm 200 mm 13 mm

(40 to 50) mm 200 mm 19 mm
(65 to 150) mm 300 mm 32 mm
2.2.2.4 Colour
2.2.2.4.1 The Colour should be shown on the piping, but in combination with a legend. The
2.2.2.4.2 Colour reference shall be in accordance with BS 4800, Latest Edition.
2.2.2.5 Color Code Indication for Building Services and Pipelines should be as follows:
Colour Code
- Natural Gas - Yellow
2.2.3 Sign and Accessory Fastening
2.2.3.1 Warning and instruction signs, wherever specified or otherwise required, shall be securely
position on floor.
2.2.3.2 All accessories such as wrenches specified to be hung on chain adjacent to the
2.2.4 Painting
2.2.4.1.1 Surface requiring prime painting shall be cleaned thoroughly of all rust, loose scale, oil,
2.2.4.1.2 No painting shall be applied to damp or frosty surfaces in wet, foggy or freezing weather.
2.2.4.1.3 It shall be evenly spread and well brushed out so that there shall be no drops, runs or
sagging.
2.2.4.1.4 Shop coated surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and retouched where necessary.
2.2.4.1.5 Care shall be taken not to paint controls, label plates, nameplates on all apparatus and
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.4.1.6 All items that have rusted or corroded in storage or in place shall be re-cleaned or
2.2.4.1.7 Finishing coats shall be made in accordance with a color code, based on ADNOC
Distribution Guide after being submitted to and approved by the Engineer.
2.3 Flexible Hoses
2.3.1 Where flexible hoses are required:
2.3.1.1 The design, materials and construction should be suitable for the grade of NG which they
are to handle. They should be designed to withstand a minimum bursting pressure of four
times the maximum pressure they will carry on service. It is recommended that corrosion
resistant braiding is used.
2.3.1.2 A flexible hose connecting cooking appliance to the installation pipework shall be
equipped with a bayonet fitting incorporating an automatic shut off valve at the
upstream end and a union at the downstream end.
2.4 Pipe Joints
2.4.1 For pipelines operating at pressure of 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge and above, pipe joints of
over 50 mm (2.") nominal bore should be welded or welded flanged; those of 50 mm (2")
bore and smaller should preferably be welded or flanged by screwed joints may be used.
2.4.2 Jointing compounds for screwed connections should be resistant to Natural Gas and
should conform to BS 5292 the use of PTFE tape is preferable but red lead or hemp
should never be used.
2.4.3 The fabrication of pipe work by electric arc or gas welding should be carried out in
accordance with BS 2971 or BS 2640 respectively. Only electric arc welding should be
used on pipes of 125 mm (5") nominal bore and larger operating at pressure of 4.83 bar
(483 KPa) gauge and above.
2.4.4 Steel butt-welded fittings should be to BS 1965 or equivalent standard and at least of the
same schedule thickness as the pipe for use at or above 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge.
2.4.5 Steel socket-welded and screwed fittings and screwed couplings should be to BS 3799 or
equivalent standard for use at or above 4.83 bar (483 KPa) gauge.
2.4.6 Gaskets must be resistant to Natural Gas; natural rubber should not be used.
2.5 Pressure Reducing and Metering
2.5.1 Where the incoming gas pressure is higher than 1.2 - 4 Bar, 1st stage PRMS shall be
provided.
2.5.2 Primary First Stage Meter and Pressure Reducing Assembly
2.5.2.1 The Customer Primary Meter / PRV Assembly shall reduce incoming pressure from 1.2 - 4
Bar to 75 m bar as 1st Stage Regulation. It shall consist of Pressure Regulating valves
with Standby Leg, containing Emergency Control Valve. Rotary positive displacement
meter, Solenoid shut off valve, safety relief valve, non-return valve, pressure differential
across filter, filter with 20 micron mesh and Isolating valves. All are also as shown on
relevant Gas System drawings. PRMS shall be equipped with both OPSO and UPSO
devices.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.3 Consumer Meter and Pressure Reducing Assembly
2.5.3.1 The consumer meter / PRV Assembly shall reduce incoming pressure from 75 m Bar to 21
m Bar. It shall consist of pressure regulating valve, meter, solenoid shut off valve,
emergency control valve, automatic valve with manual reset, pressure test points and
isolating valve. All are also to be as shown on relevant gas system drawings.
2.5.4 Gas Meter
2.5.4.1 Gas Meter shall be made of joint pressed steel construction without any external soldered
joint and fire resistant body. Steel pipe connection shall be corrosion proof. The index
drive shall be by a magnetic coupling. Measuring chamber shall be free floating
minimizing the effect of pressure oscillations and flow noises. Index cover shall be tamper
proof.
2.5.4.2 Meter shall be suitable for remote reading, with reed switch pulse transmitter and roller
index with optical pick up.
2.5.4.3 Gas meter shall comply with ADNOC distribution requirement and specification.
2.6 Hangers and Supports for Natural Gas
2.6.1 Hangers and Supports, Anchors and Guides - General
2.6.1.1 Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and
install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval of the
Engineer. Do not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support
weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation.
2.6.1.2 Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the supports or
the structure itself. Secure pipe support, anchors and guides to concrete by means of
2.6.1.3 Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and supports.
2.6.1.4 Un-insulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or
supports
2.6.1.5 Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at all
2.6.1.6 Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels,
2.6.1.7 Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same
2.6.1.8 For hanger rods on piping 3/8" (10 mm) thru 2" (50 mm) inclusive use 3/8" (10 mm) rods,
2.6.1.9 Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6.1.10 Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron rests,
with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required,
provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers,
fasten stands to piers.
2.6.1.11 Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook for pipe
located close to wall and not larger than 3" (80 mm) pipe. For greater loads, up to 1500
lbs (680 Kg) maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
2.6.2 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule
2.6.2.1 The piping support shall be provided as ADNOC distribution guidelines.
2.7 Gas Leak Detection & Control System
2.7.1 The contractor shall design, supply and install complete gas leak detection & control
system in the following areas, and wherever else required:
a) Kitchen
2.7.2 Central Control Cabinet
2.7.2.1 The cabinet shall be designed for wall mounting. Measuring range shall be 0-100% LEL.
The gas supply shall be closed at 30% LEL. The cabinet shall include flashing alarm light
and horn for 30% LEL and shall be suitable for 220-240 VAC inlet power supply, and
24vdc. The central control cabinet shall be interfaced with the BMS and fire alarm panel.
2.7.3 Gas Leak Detectors
2.7.3.1 Gas leak detectors shall be weather proof in shafts and open areas and explosion proof
inside.
2.7.4 Emergency Shut of System
2.7.4.1 The system shall include one set of 24 VDC batteries in a protective box, including battery
charger.
2.7.5 Solenoid Valve
2.7.5.1 Solenoid Valve shall be made of brass / stainless steel, suitable for 200 / 220 V AC supply
for both application (normally closed) as required.
2.8 Data Logging, Recording and Monitoring System
2.8.1 The Contractor shall include and provide hardware and software for computing and
automation of data logging, recording and monitoring of Natural gas. The systems shall
generate gas bills on automatic bases. The program shall comprise recorder systems for
measured values in tariff recording and monitor system for gas supply and optimization of
purchased and consumed quantities. A comprehensive program of software shall be
provided to record data of operation and disturbances with data recording and transfer by
random access memory cards scanners or modems.
2.8.2 The system shall consist of pulse transmitter Data Memory, read out device and work
station with print out.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
emergency for all Fuel Gas system.
2.9 Basic Design Requirements
2.9.1 Pipework operating pressure shall depend on load and distance between meter set and
point of entry to a building but shall not exceed 75 mbar.
2.9.2 Maximum pipework operating pressure within the building should be 21 mbar.
2.9.3 Where the external installation pipework operates in excess of 21 mbar (75 mbar max),
secondary pressure regulation should be installed prior to or immediately after pipework
entry into a building (within 2m of the point of entry). Primary pressure regulator
installations shall incorporate an under pressure shut off device (UPSO) and over
pressure shut off device (OPSO) capabilities.
2.9.4 Pressure loss calculations and friction factor shall be in accordance with the relevant
standard. Equivalent lengths of valves and fittings shall be added to the pipe length.
2.9.5 The internal pipework shall be designed to deliver at least the minimum operating
pressure of all connected appliances.
2.9.6 The external piping shall be designed to comply with IGEM/UP/2, IGE/G/5 and IGE/TD/4.
Riser supplying shall operate at a standardized pressure of 75 mbar.
2.9.7 Velocity should be limited to 20 m/s for unfiltered gas as per IGEM/UP/2.
2.9.8 The minimum pressure in the droppers shall always exceed 67.5 mbar.
2.9.9 The above ground external pipe will be in accordance with Material Specification ADNGD-
SSP-586-12.
2.9.10 The PEX pipe will be completely sleeved with GRP (see Material Specification ADNGD-
SSP-574-3 and 574-4) and secured with wall mounted retaining clips.
2.9.11 PEX riser and droppers shall have a maximum diameter of 63mm and minimum diameter
of 25mm.
2.9.12 PEX pipe shall be jointed and supported using wall mounted crimped fittings. Internal
pipework shall be designed to comply with BS6891 and IGE/G/5:
2.9.13 Pipes and fittings shall be EN 1057 half hard R250 copper in accordance with Material
Specification ADNGD-SSP-586-12.
2.9.14 Minimum diameter of copper pipe shall be 15 mm operates at 21 mbar with a maximum
allowable pressure drop after pressure regulation 1 mbar.
2.9.15 Pipework should not pass through a dwelling other than the one it supplies.
2.9.16 Primary meter set will be located in a suitable wall recess or wall mounted box if it is
installed in a position which is accessible from ground level.
2.9.17 The riser shall be installed on the outside wall of the building preferably in a purpose
designed channel, with no openings to the inside of the building. Vented cladding may be
installed over the riser.
2.9.18 All rooftop piping shall be adequately supported and secured above the roof surface.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.19 All piping shall be clearly marked as natural gas pipe. Consideration shall be given to the
need to protect pipe from corrosion, deterioration (eg. ultraviolet damage) or mechanical
damage.
2.9.20 Provision must be made to mitigate any effects of thermal expansion and contraction.
2.9.21 An isolation valve shall be installed in each dropper just upstream of its entry into the open
to sky duct. Such valves shall be clearly tagged as gas valves.
2.9.22 Purge points shall be installed in suitable locations in the rooftop distribution manifold.
2.9.23 Entry into apartment shall be via a house entry tee or transition fitting.
2.9.24 A consumer emergency control valve followed by a suitable regulator shall be installed in
the individual unit as near as possible to the point of entry. Neither shall be further than 2
metres from the point of entry. Such valves shall be tagged as emergency control valves.
The regulator shall reduce the gas pressure to 21 mbar.
2.9.25 The regulator should incorporate an under pressure shut off device (UPSO).
2.9.26 A pressure test point shall be fitted downstream of the consumer emergency control valve.
Safety equipment shall be installed as follows:
2.9.26.1 The solenoid valve should be located upstream of the regulator and as close as
possible to the Emergency Control Valve (ECV) and rated for operation at 100 mbar
minimum. The solenoid valve shall be activated by either output from the natural gas
detector or the wall mounted “on-off” switch.
2.9.26.2 The natural gas detector shall be positioned at suitable high level location in
accordance with BS6959.
2.9.26.3 Sharp changes in direction of the pipe shall be accomplished using fittings rather than
bending the pipe. Slow bends and offsets may be made by bending the pipe using
approved methods only (bending machine or spring).
2.9.26.4 The pipework shall be fixed to a permanent wall and supported at regular intervals using
stand-off clips.
2.9.26.5 Pipework to each appliance shall terminate with an appropriately anchored fitting.
2.9.26.6 A flexible hose connecting cooking appliance to the installation pipework shall be
equipped with a bayonet fitting incorporating an automatic shut off valve at the upstream
end and a union at the downstream end.
2.9.27 Pipe in Trench
2.9.27.1 Piping in concrete trench between the boundary wall and building wall:
· The below ground supply pipe which exit the meter box outlet, and then pass through
the boundary wall shall be HDPE per Material Specification ADNGD-SSP-586.
· The pipe passes through the wall via a cored hole shall be through an appropriate
corrosion resistant sleeve.
· The annular space between the sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with a non-setting
mastic.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.9.27.2 The below ground piping shall be designed in accordance with IGEM/UP/2 the following:
· Pipe and fittings will be polyethylene (HDPE 100 SDR 11) in accordance with Material
specifications ADNGD-SSP-586.
· Minimum clearances of 400 mm and 250 mm must be maintained between the below
ground pipework and electrical cables and other utilities respectively. Where these
minimum clearances cannot be maintained protective plates should be installed
between the PE pipe and the utilities in question.
· The HDPE pipe shall exit the ground protected by GRP sleeve and terminates with an
approved house entry tee (Service Riser Kit – Material Specification ADNGD-SSP-
574-4).
· The outside piping shall terminate at a point approximately 1 metre above the finished
grade with the house entry tee or with transition fitting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Gas Piping System Installation Requirements
3.1.1 Gas piping shall not be strained or bent and applications shall not be supported by or
develop any strain or stress on its supply piping.
3.1.2 Gas piping shall not be installed in or on the ground under any building or structure and all
exposed piping shall be kept at least 150 mm above grade or structure.
3.1.3 An accessible shut-off valve shall be installed outside of each appliance and a head of the
union connection thereto, and in addition to any valve on the appliance.
3.1.4 Discharge from relief valves shall be into the open air and shall be at least 1.5 meters
horizontally away from any opening into the building. Use vent pipe to vent it atmosphere.
3.1.5 All lines should be provided with union between two bends and at all critical locations.
3.1.6 Details are to be provided as per Construction Guidelines document ADNGD-SYD- 557.
3.2 Pipe Passing Through Walls
3.2.1 Wherever p i p i n g passes through any building wall or similar structure the hole
s h a l l be cut using a suitable core drill.
3.2.2 A pr otec ti ve sleeve s h a l l b e installed. The protective sleeve should be integral to the
approved fitting (e.g. house entry tee) or be separately inserted in the cored hole.
3.2.3 The carrier pipe shall be inserted through this sleeve.
3.2.4 The annular space between wall and sleeve shall be sealed. Where the wall is
external, the annular space shall be sealed on the internal side only.
3.2.5 The annulus between the pipe and the sleeve shall be sealed with a fire resistant
material so as to prevent the passage of gas.
3.3.1 Before the gas piping is finally put in service, and before connecting the appliances, the
system shall be carefully tested to assure that it is gas-tight.
3.3.2 The testing procedure must be carried out in compliance to IGE/UP/1.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.3 Hydro Test / Pneumatic Test:
3.3.3.1 The piping shall be filled with air or inert gas, but not with any other gas or liquid, to a
pressure of 10 psig (70 Kpa) for a 2-hours duration without showing any drop in pressure.
3.3.3.2 All diaphragms or controls known to be incapable of withstanding the test pressure shall
be disconnected.
3.3.4 After piping has been checked, all piping receiving gas shall be fully purged by
disconnecting the pilot piping at the outlet valve of the appliances.
3.3.5 HSE studies shall be carried out by the contractor in accordance to ADNOC distribution
guidelines / requirements in case of routing of gas piping is hazardous.
3.3.6 NDT testing shall be carried out by the contractor in accordance to ADNOC distribution
guidelines / requirements, if required.
3.4 Pipe Laying
3.4.1 The suction /discharge pipe lines shall be placed at 70 cm. depth below the finished
ground level over 10 cm. thick sand bed. After completion of pressure test and wrapping
to the pipe line is finished and approved by the Engineer, a further filling 30 cm. thick with
clean sand shall be done and well compacted (manually). Place 50 x 25 x 5 cm. thick
precast concrete slabs over the second layer of sand only at the location where pipe joints
are crossing the road. The rest of the depth of excavated trench shall be filled with
approved quality of gatch material and well compacted similar to other areas of paving.
Section 33 51 00
33 51 00 - 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 33 52 00
SNG SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Reference
1.2 Description of Work
1.4 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LPG Storage Tanks
2.2 Container Appurtenances
2.3 LPG Tanks Loading Facilities
2.4 LPG Pumps
2.5 SNG Module (Vaporizer + Blender)
2.6 Air Compressor & Treatment Unit
2.7 SNG Quality Control Systems
2.8 Flare Stacks
2.9 General Description and Requirements
2.10 Pressure Reducing Station
2.11 Civil Works and Site Layout
2.12 Piping, Fittings and Valves
2.13 GAS Leak Detection System
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -1
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 33 52 00
SNG SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Reference
1.1.1 Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Division210100.
1.2 Description of Work
1.2.1 Furnish and install SNG/Natural Gas installation as indicated on drawings.
1.2.2 This section specifies the requirements for the SNG/Natural Gas components.
1.2.3 Provide electrical work related to this section and complying with requirements of
Division–26.
1.3.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of LPG storage

tanks and distribution components with characteristics, sizes and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.3.2 Professional ENGINEER Certification: Approval/compliance certification shall be

submitted from the following agencies to certify that the professional ENGINEER is legally
qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in
providing Engineering services of the kind indicated:
a) Local Civil Defence Authority

b) ADNOC Distribution
c) NFPA 58 & 59
d) British Standards Code of Practice LPG 1TA.
e) Relevant all underground gas installations, testing & commissioning details
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product specifications, installation and start up
instructions.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating tank locations, weight loadings, required
clearances and SNG/Natural Gas pipe work distribution complete with valves, fittings and
controls.
1.4.3 Submit the following elements of the SNG/Natural Gas Distribution and Storage System:
Pipe and fittings, valves, dielectric unions, strainers, meters, instruments, storage tanks,
leak detection and alarm system.
1.4.4 Steel Pipes:
1.4.4.1 Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that the pipe furnished meets the
international standards specified and contained in this section. Subcontractor shall submit
the Mill certification papers, also known as material test reports, for the pipe furnished for
this project, in English. Code numbers on these papers to match the code numbers
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -2
_________________________________________________________________________________
stencilled on the pipe. Chemical analysis indicated on the mill certification papers to meet
or exceed the requirements of the referenced International Standard specification.
1.4.5 Certificates to be provided for welding procedure with qualification of welders including list
of welder’s names and symbols.
1.4.6 Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for power supply wiring.
Submit manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly
differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory–installed and portions to be field-
installed.
1.4.7 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each component control
and accessory, including “trouble–shooting” maintenance guide. Include this data,
product data, shop drawings and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual.
1.4.8 List of spare parts for two years operation and maintenance of complete system.
1.5.1 Handle SNG/Natural Gas System components carefully to prevent damage, breaking,
denting and scoring. Do not install damaged components, replace with new.
1.5.2 Store SNG/Natural Gas system components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LPG Storage Tanks
2.1.1 General
2.1.1.1 This section includes design, fabrication and marking provisions for containers, and
features normally associated with container fabrication, such as container openings,
appurtenances required for these openings to make the containers gastight entities,
physical damage protecting devices, and container supports attached to, or furnished with
the container by the manufacturer.
2.1.1.2 Containers shall comply with 2.1.1 (c) or shall be designed, fabricated, tested and marked
using criteria which incorporate an investigation to determine that it is safe and suitable for
the proposed service, is recommended for that service by the manufacturer and is
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
2.1.1.3 Containers shall be designed, fabricated, tested and marked (or stamped) in accordance
with the Regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), the "Rules for the
Construction of Unfired Pressure Vessels", Section VIII, Division 1, ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, or the API-ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for
Petroleum Liquids and Gases applicable at the date of manufacture.
2.1.1.4 The Storage vessels shall be designed for underground installation. A protective coating,
ballasts, special types of pumping scenarios and top penetrations should be considered.
Storage vessels shall have an emergency shutdown system to guard against, or minimize
any directly threatening or actual hazard. In case of the emergency shutdown system is
actuated, shall remain in the "off position until they are re-turned to the initial position by
unblocking or intentionally resetting.
2.1.1.5 Storage vessel shall be designed so that overfilling is reliably prevented.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -3
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.1.6 Storage tanks should include minimum the following trim items and any other items
required by the standards:
· Liquid fill valve,

· Liquid outlet port valve
· Vapor space valve
· Pressure gauge
· Thermometer
· Relief Valves
· Excess flow valves
· 85% value
· Internal valves
· Rotary level gauge
2.1.1.7 Containers showing serious denting, bulging, gouging or excessive corrosion shall be
removed from service.
2.1.1.8 Repair or alteration of containers shall comply with the Regulations, Rules or Code under
which the container was fabricated. Other welding is permitted only on saddle plates, lugs
or brackets attached to the container by the container manufacturer.
2.1.1.9 Heating or cooling coils shall not be installed inside storage containers.
2.1.1.10 Containers shall be painted either with yellow colour using a paint made with a medium
yellow chrome pigment or white colour with a titanium oxide pigment.
2.1.2 Container Design or Service Pressure
2.1.2.1 The minimum design, or service, pressure of DOT specification containers shall be in
accordance with the appropriate DOT regulations.
2.1.2.2 The minimum design pressure for ASME containers shall be in accordance with Table
2.1.2.
2.1.2.3 Containers shall be designed to be self-supporting without the use of guy wires and shall
satisfy proper design criteria taking into account wind, seismic (earth-quake) forces, and
hydrostatic test loads.
2.1.2.4 Design pressure (see Table 2.1.2) shall be interpreted as the pressure at the top head
with allowance made for increased pressure on lower shell sections and bottom head due
to the static pressure of the product.
Table 2.1.2
For Gases with Vapor
Pressure in psig (MPa Gauge) at 100 Minimum Design Pressure in psig (MPa
deg. F (37.8 deg.C) not to Exceed gauge) ASME Code Section VIII, Division 1,
1980 Edition (Note 1)
80 (0.6) 100 (0.7)

100 (0.7) 125 (0.9)
125 (0.9) 156 (1.1)
150 (1.0) 187 (1.3)
175 (1.2) 219 (1.5)
215 (1.5) 250 (1.7)
215 (1.5) 312.5 (2.2)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.2.5 Wind loading on containers shall be based on wind pressures on the projected area at
various height zones above ground in accordance with Design Loads for Buildings and
other structures, ANSI A58.1. Wind speeds shall be based on a Mean Occurrence Interval
of 100 years.
2.1.3 Container Openings
2.1.3.1 Containers shall be equipped with openings suitable for the service in which the
containers to be used. Such openings may be either in the container proper or in the
manhole cover, or part in one and part in the other.
2.1.3.2 Connections for pressure relief valves shall be located and installed in such a way as to
have direct communication with the vapor space, whether the container is in storage or in
use. If located in a well inside the container with piping to the vapor space, the design of
the well and piping shall permit sufficient pressure relief valve relieving capacity. If located
in a protecting enclosure, design shall be such as to permit this enclosure to be protected
against corrosion and to permit inspection.
2.1.3.3 Containers shall be fabricated so that they can be equipped with a fixed liquid level
gauge(s) capable of indicating the maximum permitted filling level(s).
2.1.4 Container Markings
2.1.4.1 Containers shall be marked as provided in the Regulations, Rules or Code under which
they are fabricated and in accordance with 2.1.4 (b) and 2.1.4 (c).
2.1.4.2 When LP Gas and one or more other compressed gases are to be stored or used in the
same area, the containers shall be marked "Flammable" and either "LP-Gas," "Propane"
or "Butane."
2.1.4.3 ASME containers shall be marked as noted hereunder. The markings specified shall be on
a metal name plate attached to the container, so located as to remain visible after the
container is installed. The nameplate shall be attached in such a way that corrosion of the
nameplate or the container will be minimized:
i) Service for which the container is designed; i.e. underground, above ground, or
both.
ii) Name and address of container supplier or trade name of container.
iii) Water capacity of container in lb or U.S. Gallons.
iv) Design pressure in psig.
v) The wording "This container shall not contain a product having a vapor pressure in
excess of- psig at 100 deg.F".
vi) Tare weight of container fitted for service for containers to be filled by weight.
vii) Outside surface area in sq. ft.
viii) Year of manufacture.
ix) Shell thickness Head thickness
x) OL – OD - HD
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -5
_________________________________________________________________________________
xi) Manufacturer's Serial Number.
xii) ASME Code Symbol.
2.2 Container Appurtenances
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 This section includes fabrication and performance provisions for container appurtenances,
such as pressure relief devices, container shut off valves, backflow check valves, plugs,
liquid level gauges and pressure gauges connected directly into the container openings.
2.2.1.2 Container appurtenances shall be fabricated of materials suitable for LP-Gas service and
resistant to the action of LP-Gas under service conditions The following shall also apply:
i) Pressure containing metal parts of appurtenances, shall have a minimum melting point
of 1500 deg. F (816 deg.C) such as steel, ductile (nodular) iron, malleable iron or brass.
Ductile iron shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 395 or equivalent and alleable iron
the requirements of ASTM A 47 or equivalent.
ii) Cast iron shall not be used for parts such as bonnets or bodies.
2.2.1.3 Container appurtenances shall have a rated working pressure of at least 250 psig (1.7
MPa gauge).
2.2.1.4 Gaskets used to retain LP-Gas in containers shall be resistant to the action of LP as. They
shall be made of metal or other suitable material confined in metal having a melting point
over 1500 deg. F (816 deg.C) or shall be protected against fire exposure, except that
aluminium O-rings and spiral wound metal gaskets are acceptable. When a flange is
opened, the gasket shall be replaced.
2.2.1.5 Each tank shall be equipped with at least:
i) A continuous liquid level monitor with remote indicator.
ii) A fixed maximum level gauge eg. of the vent-valve type, with 1.5 mm or less orifice
diameter.
iii) A shut-off device for each connection of the outlet pipes for both gaseous and liquid
phases and in addition an excess flow valve for the liquid phase.
iv) A safety relief valve, it may be of the internal or external type. The minimum rate of
discharge shall be calculated to the formula:
Discharge rate = 10.6552 S0.82m3/Min air at 1 atm.

S = Total exterior surface in m2.
2.2.2 Pressure Relief Devices
2.2.2.1 Containers shall be equipped with one or more pressure relief devices which shall be
designed to relieve vapor.
2.2.2.2 DOT containers shall be equipped with pressure relief valves or fusible plug devices as
required by DOT Regulations.
2.2.2.3 ASME containers for LP-Gas shall be equipped with direct spring-loaded pressure Relief
valves conforming with applicable requirements of the Standard on Safety Relief valves
for Anhydrous Ammonia and LP Gas, UL 132; Standards for Safety Relief Valves of the
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -6
_________________________________________________________________________________
Factory Mutual Research Corporation; or other equivalent pressure relief valve standards.
The start to leak setting of such pressure relief valves, with relation to the design pressure
of the container shall be in accordance with Table 2.2.2.
Table 2.2.2
Containers Minimum Maximum

All ASME Codes prior to 1949 Edition and the 110% 125%
1949 Edition paragraphs U-68 and U-69.
ASME Code, 1949 Edition Paragraphs U-200 100% 100%
and U-201 and all ASME Codes later than
1949
Manufacturers of pressure relief valves are allowed a plus tolerance not exceeding
10 percent of the set pressure marked on the valve.
2.2.2.1 Pressure relief valves for ASME containers shall also comply with the following:
i) Pressure relief valves shall be of sufficient individual or aggregate capacity as to provide

the relieving capacity for the container on which they are installed and to relieve at not
less than the rate indicated before the pressure is in excess of 120 percent of the
maximum (not including the 10 percent referred to in the footnote of Table 2.2.2)
permitted start-to-leak pressure setting of the device.
ii) Each pressure relief valve shall be plainly and permanently marked with:
§ the pressure in psig at which the valve is set to start-to-leak;
§ rated relieving capacity in cu ft. per minute of air at 60 deg. F (15.6 deg. C) and 14.7
psia (0.1 MPa absolute).
§ the manufacturer's name and catalogue number. Example: A pressure relief valve
is marked 250-4050 AIR. This indicates that the valve is set to start to leak at 250
psig (1.7 MPa gauge); and that its rated relieving capacity is 4050 cfm (1.9m3/s) of
air.
iii) Shut off valves shall not be located between a pressure relief device and the container,
unless the arrangement is such that the relief device relieving capacity flow specified in
3.2.4 (a) will be achieved through additional pressure relief devices which remain
operative.
iv) Pressure relief valves shall be so designed that the possibility of tampering will be
minimized. Externally set or adjusted valves shall be provided with an approved means
of sealing the adjustment.
2.2.3 Connections for Flow Control (Filling, Withdrawal, Equalizing).
2.2.3.1 shut off valves, excess-flow check valves, back flow check valves and quick closing
nternal valves, used individually or in suitable combinations, at container filling, withdrawal
and equalizing connections, shall comply with 2.2.3 (b) and 2.2.3 (c).
2.2.3.1 Filling, withdrawal and equalizing connections shall be equipped with the appurtenances
for the appropriate type and capacity of container and the service in which they are to be
used. Cylinder valve outlet connections on all DOT cylinders from which vapor can be
withdrawn, shall not be interchangeable with those used for liquid withdrawal.
2.2.3.1 Manual shut off valves shall be designed to provide positive closure under service
conditions.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -7
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.3.1 Excess flow check valves shall be designed to close automatically at the rated flows of
vapor or liquid specified by the manufacturer. Excess flow valves shall be designed with a
bypass, not to exceed a No. 60 drill size opening, to allow equalization of pressure.
2.2.3.1 Backflow check valves, which may be of spring loaded or weight-loaded type with in line
or swing operation, shall close when flow is either stopped or reversed. Both valves of
double backflow check valves shall comply with this provision.
2.2.3.1 The appurtenances specified herein above may be installed as individual components or
as combinations completely assembled by the appurtenance manufacturer.
2.2.4 Liquid Level Gauging Devices
2.2.4.1 Liquid level gauging devices shall be provided on all containers filled by volume. Fixed
level gauges or variable gauges of the slip tube, rotary tube or float types (or combinations
of such gauges) may be used to comply with this provision.
2.2.4.2 Variable liquid level gauges shall be so marked that the maximum liquid level, or percent
of capacity of the container in which they are to be installed, is readily determinable.
2.2.4.3 The markings indicating the various liquid levels from empty to full shall either be directly
on the system nameplate and on the gauging device.
2.2.5 Other Container Connections
2.2.5.1 Container openings shall be equipped with a positive shut off valve in combination with an
excess-flow valve.
2.2.5.2 First and second stage vapour pressure regulators shall be sized to bring down the
pressure of gas to the required pressure. The regulators shall be complete with pressure
relief and venting devices in accordance with NFPA 58.
2.3 LPG Tanks Loading Facilities
2.3.1 The units shall be designed for installation Class 1, Group D. Zone 1 locations, and shall
meet all current AD 2000 HP 801 Nr.25 and / or NFPA 58 requirements.
2.3.2 The delivery of the liquid LPG upto the storage facility shall be via LPG Road Tanker
equipped with a pump. A loading facility shall be required to ensure effective transfer of
the liquid LPG from the Road Tanker to the Storage Facility.
2.3.3 The loading facility should be composed on a steel bulkhead, protected by two crash
posts. It's configured to connect the storage tank with Transport Road Tanker that delivers
LPG to the storage tank.
2.3.4 The loading facility should include two lines, one for liquid LPG and one to equalize the
vapor pressure between Transport road tanker and the Storage Tank.
2.3.5 The loading facility should contain two gas compressors one working one stand-by
connected to the vapor line. Each compressor shall be equipped with safety devices to
prevent pressures Being exceeded and pressure switches as maximum pressure limiters
on the pressure side or minimum pressure limiters on the suction side as well as
temperature indicators and limiters (in case of relief valves) on the suction and pressure
sides.
2.3.6 The maximum noise level shall be 75 d8A @ 1 meter distance from the compressor
enclosure under all operating conditions.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -8
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.7 The Loading Facility should be equipped with a Methanol injection system to the storage
tanks to remove any water which may be in the LPG.
2.4 LPG Pumps
2.4.1 The LPG pump shall be designed as per AD 2000 HP 801 Nr.25 and/ or RFPA 58
2.4.2 The LPG pump shall be equipped with an automatic over heating disconnection system.
Moving parts of liquefied gas pumps shall have a high-quality dynamic seal to the pump
housing e.g. double, acting; unloading bearing ring seals in a back-to- back arrangement
with pressure-monitored sealing medium. The medium shall be monitored. If the pressure
in the sealing medium is too high or low. The pump shall be automatically disconnected
and the alarm trigged simultaneously.
2.4.3 LPG liquid pump shell be protected against dry run-ring. e.g by means of level monitors in
the suction-side or by means of differential pressure switches.
2.4.4 The LPG pump discharge pressure must be adequate to meet the application
requirement, taking into account the pressure drop incurred in the system. The LPG
system includes the piping, vaporizer and vapor piping.
2.4.5 The LPG pump should be equipped with external bypass relief valve and apilot operated
liquid regulator. The bypass relief valve will be used to allow excess LPG flow to return to
the storage tank. The downstream liquid regulator regulates the LPG pressure to the SNG
Module. The internet relief valve should be set to open at PSIG above pump inlet
pressure.
2.4.6 The design and capacities of the LPG pumps should be as indicated in the drawings/BOQ
and based on the operating conditions. The capacity of the LPG pump should be 3 times
the maximum vaporizer capacity.
2.5 SNG Module (Vaporizer + Blender)
2.5.1 The SNG module should be consisting of vaporizer. LPG-Air mixer and all the necessary
equipments, valves, fittings and accessory etc.
2.5.2 The SNG module should be a complete package skid mounted inside a container and filly
tested ready to connect to plant facilities.
2.5.3 The design and capacities of the SNG Modules should be as indicated in the
drawings/Box and based on the following operating conditions:
· The available LPG in Abu Dhabi is as follows and the SNG module should be
designed to handle all potential scenarios.
· 99.7% propane
· 30% propane+ 70% Butane.
· 20% Propane + 80% Butane.
· The mixed gas gross heating value is = from 1575 BTU / SCM +/-5%
· The mixed gas gross Wobbe Number is = from 1295 BTU / SCM to 1373 BTU /
SCM
· Mixed gas pressure = more than 20 PSIG
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -9
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.5.4 Vaporizer
2.5.4.1 The vaporizer and all its accessories, wiring, controls, electrical components shall be
designed in comply with recognized code standards AD 2000 HP 801 Nr.25 and/or NFPA
58 and other related applicable codes.
2.5.4.2 The design and capacities of the vaporizers should be as indicated in the drawings / BOQ
and based on the above operating conditions:
2.5.4.3 The vaporizer should be indirect fired type transfer to te liquid LPG indirectly through a
heater transfer medium.
2.5.4.4 The preferred vaporizer is waterbath-type and should include the following as minimum:
1- Low water level cutoff switch,

2- High waterbath temperature cutoff switch
3- Low and High gas pressure cutoff switch.
4- Liquid carry over safety switch (or, floatshutoff)
5- Safety relief valve (for LPG coil, preset at 250PSIG)
6. Electronic flame safeguard UV scanner.
7- Energy source gas fire burner
2.5.5 LPG / Air Mixer
2.5.5.1 The LPG/Air Mixer and all accessories, wiring, controls, electrical components shall be
designed in comply with recognized code standards AD 2000 Code in combination with
LPGA
2.5.5.2 Coda of Practice 9 and/ or NFPA 58 and other related applicable codes.
2.5.5.3 The design and capacities of the LPG/Air Mixer should be as indicated in the
drawings/BOQ and based on the above operating conditions.
2.5.5.4 The LPG/Air Mixer should be Proportional Blender type that can provide SNG mixtures at
pressure from 13 PSIG to 15OPSlG with LPG/Air, Butane or propane / air.
2.5.5.5 The LPG/Air Mixer should have sophisticated controls with greater flexibility and high
accuracy of SNG mixtures.
2.5.5.6 The LPG/Air Mixer should not be cannot be feedstock sensitive and can run with 100%
Propane or 80% Butane + 20% Butane; Calorimeter feedback loop can maintain stable
CV with varying flows and feedstock compositions.
2.5.5.7 Air quality should be easy controlled with dryers and filters.
2.5.5.8 The LPG/Air Mixer should allow easy interface to PLC's.
2.6 Air Compressor & Treatment Unit
2.6.1 The capacity of the air compressor & treatment unit shall be designed asper the
requirements of the SNG plants.
2.6.2 The air compressors should be screw type compressors, sound attenuation enclosures to
reduce the noise to within the acceptable level 74-79dbA @ 1 meter distance from the
compressor enclosure under all operating conditions.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -10
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.6.3 The air treatment unit should produce an acceptable quality of air (dry and clean) to the
SNG module for continuous operation in the environmental conditions experienced in Abu-
Dhabi.
2.7 SNG Quality Control Systems
2.7.1 The gas quality control system should be a Calorimeters type and use a combustion
process to measure the Wobbe index value or calorific value of SNG. The calorimeters
should be fast reliable easy to maintain & operate and simple to calibrate with following
specifications:
2.7.2 Readouts: Expressed in BTU/SCF, MJ/SCM or Kcal/SCM, WI Range: 50-100% from the
final value of tile measuring range. Accuracy +/-1% of upper range value. Repeatability:
+/-0.3% 05 upper range value. Response: 3 seconds plus transport lag time 4–20 mA DC
output. Digital Character Display. Automatic ignition system interlocked on loss of air and
loss of name High & Low alarms
2.7.3 The output should be used in controlling the SNG module for purposes of stabilizing the
SNG mix. The Calorimeters should be able to detect changes in both heating value and
specific gravity of the SNG mix being analyzed, and provides a function referred to as
"Wobbe Index" or "Calorific Value'," as required.
2.8 Flare Stacks
2.8.1 A flare sack should be used to safely burn LPG/Air mixtures andto help in settings up the
SNG Module operation. The flare stack should be:
· Safely burns the LPG / Air mixtures

· With high capacity flare stack complete with 2" or 3" flare base, flare head and
controls.
· With electronic ignition with burner ensures SNG mixtures are burned.
· With separate pilot supply ensures stable pilot.
· With stainless steel burner head.
2.9 General Description and Requirements
2.9.1 As a minimum a gas leak detection system (s) which should incorporate a gas control
panel interlinked with panel fire alarm system and plant shut down system, sufficient
number of gas detectors, automatic and manual emergency gas shut off system and gas
solenoid valve(s).
2.9.2 Standards
2.9.2.1 The gas leak detection system(s) shall when fitted it should comply with the requirement
of BSEN 61779-1 to BS EN 61779-5 and be installed in accordance with GS 1611 & 1612
/ 2002 & BS 6959.
2.9.3 Gas Control Panel
2.9.3.1 The gas control panels shall interface with remote gas detectors and solenoid valves
installed within the SNG plant and displayed any detected level of combustible gas as %
of CEL. The gas control panel shall produce both audible and visual alarms have the
capacity to closes remote solenoid valves as required. The audible alarm shall have
output safety of least 850B(A) at distance of 3m.
2.9.3.2 The gas control panel shall be interlink with the Fire Alarm Panel and / and the SNG Plant
shutdown systems and shut down the gas supply to the SNG module in case of any alarm
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -11
_________________________________________________________________________________
signal from any of the gas detectors and/or other detectors within the overall safety
system.
2.9.4 GAS LEAK DETECTOR
2.9.4.1 The gas detectors are devices for continuous testing the air for presence of gas leak. The
gas leak shall be is detected by using Pellistor sensors-electronic for catalytic combustion.
2.9.4.2 GasLeak detectors shall comply with BS EN 61779-1, BS EN 61779-2. BS EN 61779-3,

BS EN
2.9.4.3 61779-4 and BS EN 61779-5 taking account as to whether the system is for group 1 or
group 2 gases. The gas leak detector shall be capable of signals.
2.9.4.4 The gas detector tobe used for gas leak detection system shall be design& for industrial
use, outdoor location, explosion proof and denoted EEx ia, &Ex ib, EEx id, EEx ie.
2.9.4.5 The power supply for gas detectors to be used for gas teak detection system within SNG
plant area shall be 24V direct current (DC).
2.9.4.6 The measurement range of the gas detector shall be 0-100% LEL.
2.9.5 GAS SOLENOID VALVE(S)
2.9.5.1 Solenoid and motorized valves shall comply with SS 254: Part 1
2.9.5.2 The gas solenoid valves shall be capable on/off operation interfacing with either manual
electrical switch or signal received from the control panel.
2.9.5.3 The flow capacity of solenoid valve shall be equal to at least 1.15 times Vmax m3/h,
where Vmax is the maximum flow capacity of the installation.
The gas solenoid valves shall be explosion proof.
2.9.5.4 The gas solenoid valve to be used for the gas leak detection system shall be normally
closed and operated by 24 V direct current (DC) and manual reset.
2.10 Pressure Reducing Station
2.10.1 The Pressure Reducing Stations (PRS) equipment shall be designed to comply with the
institution of Gas Engineers IGE/TD/13
2.10.2 Regulators, valves and associated pipe works shall be sized according to the flow and
pressure conditions.
2.10.3 Te skid mounted station shall be designed a streams module and designed to minimize
space requirements and the amount of on-site fabrication. Each st:eams should include an
active and monitor regulators stations shall be designed for installation above ground only.
2.10.4 PRS’s skids shall be designed considering the maintenance and replacement of streams
as required in day to day operation.
SN Description Spec Comments

1 Station design pressure Class 150
2 Max inlet pressure (bar) 6 barg
3 Max inlet pressure (bar) 5 barg
4 Outlet pressure (bar) 3-4 barg (max)
5 Flow capacity As per gas demand
6 Station layout Above ground Skid mounted
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -12
_________________________________________________________________________________
7 Odorisation required No
8 Meter required Yes
9 Design temp -20ºC to 80ºC
2.11 Civil Works and Site Layout
2.11.1 All civil works shall be as per municipality of Abu Dhabi specifications and requirements
and should be part of Civil contractors work.
2.11.2 The civil contractor should design, supply and construct all the necessary civil works
related to the SNG plant including the following:
- Excavation and landscaping
- Foundations required for the underground LPG storage tanks and all the
equipments of the SNG plant.
- Fenced enclosure type industrial at least 1.8 m high
- Hard-standing, paving and surface finishes.
- Access road and track and external parking.
- Control room and instrumentation building.
2.12 Piping, Fittings and Valves
2.12.1 General
This section includes basic design provisions and material specifications for pipe, tubing,
pipe and tubing fittings, valves used to connect container appurtenances with the balance
of the LP Gas system.
2.12.2 Pipe
a) LPG fill line shall be seamless steel to BS 1387 Class C.
b) Below grade Distribution pipework shall be seamless steel to BS 1387 Class-C with
factory applied polyethylene sleeve.
c) Above grade distribution pipework shall be copper to BS 2871 Table Y
d) Final connections to equipment shall be soft copper tubes to BS 2871 Table X.
2.12.3 Pipe and Tubing Fittings
a) Pipe joints in steel, brass or copper pipe shall be welded or brazed.
b) Fittings used at pressure higher than container pressure such as on the discharge
of liquid transfer pumps shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 350 psig
(2.4 MPa gauge).
c) Fittings used with liquid LP-Gas, or with vapor LP-Gas at operating pressures over
125 psig (0.9 MPa gauge) shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 250
psig (1.7 MPa gauge).
d) Fittings for use with vapor LP-Gas at pressure not exceeding 125 psig (0.9 MPa
gauge) shall be suitable for a working pressure of 125 psig (0.9 MPa gauge).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -13
_________________________________________________________________________________
e) Soldering or brazing filler material shall have a melting point exceeding 1,000 deg.
F (538 deg. C).
2.12.4 Valves, Other than Container Valves
a) Pressure containing metal parts of valves (except appliance valves), including

manual positive shut off valves, excess flow check valves (either manually or
automatically operated), used in piping systems shall be of steel, ductile (nodular)
iron, malleable iron or brass. Ductile iron shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/ASTM A 395 or equivalent and malleable iron the requirements ofANSI/ASTM
A 47 or equivalent. All materials used including valve seat discs, packing, seals
and diaphragms shall be resistant to the action of LP Gas under service conditions.
b) Valves shall be suitable for the appropriate working pressure, as follows:
i) Valves used at pressures higher than container pressure, such as on the

discharge of liquid transfer pumps shall be suitable for a working pressure of at
least 350 psig (2.4 MPa gauge). [400 psig (2.8 MPa gauge) WOG valves
comply with this provision].
ii) Valves to be used with liquid LP Gas, or with vapor LP-Gas at pressures in
excess of 125 psig (0.9 MP a gauge), but not to exceed 250 psig (1,.7 MPa
gauge), shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 250 psig (1.7 MPa
gauge).
iii) Valves (except appliance valves) to be used with vapor LP Gas at pressures
not to exceed 125 psig (0.9 MPa gauge) shall be suitable for a working
pressure of at least 125 psig (0.9 MPa gauge).
c) Manual shut off valves, excess flow check valves and backflow check valves used
in piping systems shall comply with the provisions for container valves.
d) Emergency shut off valves shall be approved and incorporate all of the following
means of closing.
i) Automatic shut off through thermal (fire) actuation. When fusible elements are
used they shall have a melting point not exceeding 250 deg. F (121 deg. C).
ii) Manual shut off from a remote location. iii)Manual shut off at the installed
location.
e) Solenoid valves shall be intrinsically safe construction suitable for 24V DC power
supply.
2.13 GAS Leak Detection System
A gas leak detection system shall be installed to monitor for gas leaks at different
locations of the gas network.
2.13.1 Control Panel
a) The central control panel shall be located in the control room at Administration
Building and shall easily be accessible in the event of an emergency.
b) The central panel shall have a modular design incorporating input alarm/display
module for each gas detector. Each channel shall have indication for low alarm at
15% LEL, high alarm at 30% LEL and fault at 0-100% LEL indicator.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -14
_________________________________________________________________________________
Main LPG supply shall be shut off at 30% LEL indication.
c) The concentration of the gas shall be displayed on a common indicator with

selector switches to display the concentration of the desired channel or zone
indicator.
d) Below the gas control panel is the system control panel which shall have the
following indications:
AC healthy
DC healthy
Sprinkler on
Gas pressure low
Gas pressure high
Gas solenoid valve operated
Common fire signals
Gas leak high
The panel shall have the following switches:
Sprinkler manual operate

Gas manual shut off
Test lamp
System reset
2.13.2 Gas Detectors
The gas detectors shall use a pellistor sensor to detect flammable gases and vapours.
The sensor shall be housed in a stainless steel, flame proof housing, fitted onto an
explosion proof junction box.
2.13.3 Sounder Flasher
A sounder cum flasher unit shall be installed in the vicinity of the panel located in a visible
area.
2.13.4 Cables
MICC cables of at least 1.5 sq. mm area shall be used to interconnect between each
detector and the control panel.
2.13.5 Logic of operation
When low level gas leak is detected in any zone, local internal alarm and indication shall
show on the control panel. When high level gas leak is detected in any zone, the following
sequence shall occur:
a) The solenoid valve in the gas distribution channel shall be closed automatically.
b) External alarm shall be operated.
Connection to the fire alarm system:
In the event of a fire alarm signal, the following sequence shall occur:
a) The solenoid valve in the gas distribution channel shall be closed automatically.
b) The sprinkler system over the LPG storage tanks shall operate.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -15
_________________________________________________________________________________
In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to by pass the automatic system and
operate the system manually, this shall include:
c) Manual shut off/on of the gas through the emergency shut-off push button.
d) Manual operation of the sprinkler system On/Off
e) Manual reset
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 All pipe work, pipe supports and brackets shall be painted with 2 undercoats and 2
finishing coats of yellow colour paint.
3.1.2 LPG piping shall be painted with a specific colour different than other pipes. Orange or
yellow colours are recommended. Valves shall also be painted. Direction arrows to
indicate the flow of gas in the system shall be painted.
3.1.3 The system in parts and as a whole shall be tested to ensure that it will operate safely,
without leaks and to the satisfaction of the local Civil Defence Authority.
3.1.4 Commissioning of the system shall be carried out to demonstrate that all the equipment
and the whole system are in good working order.
3.1.5 The LPG contractor shall accommodate any additional testing required by authorities such
as Civil Defence in order to obtain their acceptance of the system.
3.1.6 The gas network shall be leak tested using gases such as nitrogen or argon. Oxygen or
flammable gases will not be used. The leak test shall include all the different pressure
stages of the system including:
a) The filling line operating pressure up to 20 bar.

b) The tank and high pressure stage operating pressure 16.5 bar
c) The first stage regulator operating pressure 1.5 bar.
d) The second stage pressure, operating pressure 37 mbar.
3.1.7 Test pressure shall be at least 1.5 times the operating pressure. The leak test duration
shall be 1 hour. The specified test pressure shall be monitored for a minimum of one hour
during which the soap water method shall be used to leak test every joint. If no leak is
detected and the pressured gauge indicates no drop in the test pressure then the system
will be proven to be leak free.
3.1.8 If a leak is found, the leaking joint shall be repaired or the leaking equipment shall be
replaced. The testing procedure shall be repeated to prove the complete system as leak
free.
3.1.9 A test report shall be submitted to the for approval.
3.2.1 Before installations are handed over or subjected to inspection and testing, the entire
installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -16
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2 Purging
Vessels and their ancillary equipment shall be purged until the oxygen level is reduced
below that which will support combustion before commissioning. When purging into or out
of service is required this shall be carried out in accordance with LPGA Code of Practice
No. 17.
3.2.3 LPG shall not be introduced into a pipework system unless it has passed a leak test for
the entire system to be commissioned, and signed records are available.
3.2.4 Purging of pipework systems shall only be carried out by or under the supervision of
competent persons. Pipework should be purged with an inert gas e.g. nitrogen, so that
the oxygen level is reduced to less than 9% by volume, before introducing LPG. Purge
gas should be introduced in a controlled manner using an adjustable pressure regulator.
3.2.5 When commissioning liquid systems, sudden chilling of the system from rapid vaporisation
shall be avoided by pre-charging with LPG vapour up to vapour pressure before
introducing liquid, or by pre-pressurisation with the inert gas.
3.2.6 During the introduction of LPG the gas shall be released at a safe location and must not
be allowed to accumulate in any confined space.
3.2.7 The introduction of LPG may be undertaken in sections if necessary, provided suitable
purge gas release points have been provided.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 33 52 00
SNG System
33 52 00 -17
ANNEXURE - I
LIST OF APPROVED PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS
& SUPPLIERS FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
_______________________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE - I
LIST OF APPROVED PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
Division Material Brand Contacts
1. Division 10 a) Angus Juma Al Majid Est Fire

Portable Fire
Specialties Protection Dept, Dubai
Extinguishers &
Section 10 44 00 Fire Tel: 04-2037358
Fire Blankets
Protection
Specialities b) Siemens Bin Jabr Fire & Safety Est.
Abudhabi
Tel: 02-6418284
c) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai

Tel: 04-8895561
AIKAH Establishment,
Dubai
Tel: 04-3478005
d) Chubb Fire Safe Fire Engg. - Abu

Dhabi
Tel: 02-5547750
e) Kidde - Thorn Kidde International – Dubai

Tel: 04-3372498
f) Naffco Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
g) Firex Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Sharjah
Tel: 06-5340300
h) SFFECO SFFECO,Dubai
Tel: 04- 8809890
i) Bristol Corodex Est.

(Fire System Div.), Dubai
Tel: 04-3472530
j) COMBAT/AMNA Aikah Est., Dubai

Tel: 04-3478005
2. Division 21 – Fire Expansion Joints a) Mason Inter Cool, Dubai

Suppression Tel: 04-4542308
Section 21 05 16 -
Expansion Fittings b) Crane Co Technical Parts Co., Dubai
and Loop for Fire Tel: 04 -2823414
Suppression Piping
c) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai
Tel: 04-3574469
________________________________________________________________________________________
Annexure I – List of Approved Products, Manufacturers &
Suppliers for Mechanical Works
Ann -1
_______________________________________________________________________________________

d) Bockington & Scott Ltd. Dutco Tennant
Tel: 04-2220186
e) Proco Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
3. Division 21 –Fire Pressure Gauges a) Dwyer Westech- Dubai

Section 21 05 19 –
Meter & Gauges for b) Trerice Westech- Dubai
Fire Suppression Tel: 04-2994124
Systems
c) Weiss Energy International
Tel: 06-5343477
d) Hunter Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
e) Brannan Fawaz Trading and

Engineering Services-
Tel: 04-2282733
f) March Super Technical Ent.,

Tel: 04-3387111
g) WIKA Wika ME, Dubai

Tel: 04-8839090
Flow meters a) Sparling Energy International

Tel: 06-5343477
b) Danfoss Haste, Dubai.

Tel: 04-2223133
c) Smith meter Inc. Petro Gas Agencies,

Tel: 02-5553455
d) Hersey Suwaidi Engr. Group

Tel: 02-6727488
4. Division 21 – Fire Siamese a) Angus Juma Al Majid Est Fire

Suppression Connection Protection Dept, Dubai
Section 21 05 23 - Tel: 04-2037358
General Duty Valves
for Fire Suppression b) Grinnell Suwaidi Engr. Group
piping Tel: 02-6727488

Tel: 04-8895561
d) Polter Roemer Unisafe Fire Protection,

Tel: 04-3339977
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -2
_______________________________________________________________________________________

e) Naffco Naffco, Dubai
Tel: 04-8151111
f) Aqua Plus Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Tel: 06-5340300
g) Bristol Corodex Est.

Tel: 04-3472530
5. Division 21 – Fire Hangers & a) Grinnel ITT Suwaidi Engr. Group

Suppression Supports Tel: 02-6727488
Section 21 05 29 –
Hangers & Supports b) Mupro Fawaz Trading and
for Fire Suppression Engineering Services-
Piping Tel: 04-2282733
c) PHD Manufacturing Metallic Bldg, Materials,

Tel: 04-2894393
d) Tolco Viking Arabia, Dubai

Tel: 04-8895561
e) ANDRE SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962
f) Weicco Leminar Air Conditioning

Co.
Tel: 04-3338700
g) Hiliti Hiliti Gulf Office, Dubai

Tel: 80044584
h) Fischer Fischer, Dubai

Tel: 04-3957772
i) Ideal Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
j) Diamond R-Hira Trades, Dubai

Tel: 04-8848414
k) Vibration Management Meaptashi Corp.

Crop (Vimco)-USA Tel: 06-5574756
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -3
_______________________________________________________________________________________

6. Division 21 – Fire Vibration a) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai
Suppression Isolation Tel: 04-3574469
Section 21 05 48 -
Mech. Sound, b) Mason Inter Cool, Dubai
Vibration, Seismic Tel: 04-4542308
Control for Fire
Suppression Piping c) VMC VMC Group Middle East
and Equipment Tel: 06-526 1512
d) Vibration Management Meaptashi Corp.,

7. Division 21 – Fire Painting a) Carboline Carboline Middle East.

Section 21 05 53 -
Identification for Fire b) Jotun Jotun UAE Ltd. – Dubai
Suppression System Tel: 04-3395000
a) National National Paints

Tel: 06 513 0000
c) Caparol Dubai Industrial Park

Tel:043687600
8. Division 21 – Fire Steel pipes a) Nippon Steel Nippon Steel, Dubai

Suppression (Galvanized Tel: 04 -8876020
Section 21 11 00 - Steel)
Fire Suppression b) Sumitomo Sumitomo corporation
Piping Middle East FZE, Dubai
Tel: 04-8178000
c) U.S. Steel Co. Trouvay Cauvin Gulf,

Tel: 04-8835848
d) British Steel Corp. Asia Electro-Mech. Co.,

Tel: 04-8818383
e) Saudi Steel Pipe Trouvay Cauvin Gulf,

Tel: 04-8835848
f) Seah Steel Corp Asia Electro-Mech. Co.,

Tel: 04-8818383
g) VM Tubes Trouvay Cauvin Gulf,

Tel: 04-8835848
h) Surya Fittings MBBM\ FIREX
i) Sheild Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -4
_______________________________________________________________________________________

9. Division 21 – Fire a) Angus Juma Al Majid Est Fire
Suppression Protection Dept, Dubai
Section 21 12 26-Fire Tel: 04-2037358
Suppression Valves
& Hose Cabinet b) Siemens Bin Jabr Fire & Safety Est.
Tel: 02-6418284
c) Moyne Roberts Unisafe Fire Protection,

Tel: 04-3339977
d) Norsen Kidde International –

Tel: 04-3372498
e) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai

Tel: 04-8895561
f) Naffco Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
g) Firex\ JY Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Tel: 06-5340300
h) Bristol Corodex Est.

Tel: 04-3472530
i) SFFECO SFFECO, Dubai

Tel: 04- 8809890
j) WEFLO Aikah Est., Dubai

Tel: 04-3478005
10. Division 21 – Fire Grooved Pipe a) Victaulic Victaulic Middle East,

Suppression Fittings Tel.: 04-8838870
Section 21 13 13 - Attn. Mr. Prueez: 050-
Wet Pipe Sprinkler 6672751
System
b) Grinnel Suwaidi Engr. Group
Tel: 02-6727488

Tel: 04-8895561
d) Shield Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
e) Shurjoint Mima international

Building Materials LLC
Tel : 04-3285000
Galvanized Steel a) Nippon Steel Nippon Steel, Dubai

Pipes Tel: 04 -8876020
b) Sumitomo Sumitomo corporation

Middle East FZE, Dubai
Tel: 04-8178000
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -5
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Tel: 04-8835848

Tel: 04-8818383

Tel: 04-8835848
f) Seah Steel Corp. Asia Electro-Mech. Co.,

Tel: 04-8818383

Tel: 04-8835848
h) Surya Fittings MBBM\ FIREX
i) Shield Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
Sprinklers, Alarm a) Grinnell/GEM Suwaidi Engr. Group

Valves Tel: 02-6727488
b) Angus Juma Al Majid Est Fire

Protection Dept, Dubai
Tel: 04-2037358
c) Preussag Bin Jabr Fire & Safety Est.

Tel: 02-6418284
d) Reliable Juma Al Majid Est Fire

Protection Dept, Dubai
Tel: 04-2037358
e) Viking Viking Arabia, Dubai

Tel: 04-8895561
f) Globe Unisafe Fire Protection

Tel: 02 - 5511132
g) Central / Shield Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
h) Firex Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Tel: 06-5340300
i) Aquaplus Corodex Est.

(Fire System Div.)
Tel: 04-3472530
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -6
_______________________________________________________________________________________

11. Division 21 – Fire Foam, NOVEC a) FIKE Naffco, Dubai
Suppression 1230 Tel: 04-8151111
Section 21 22 00 –
Clean Agent Fire b) KIDDE KIDDE, Dubai
Extinguishing Tel. 04 - 3372448
Systems
c) FINWAL TELECTRON
Tel. 02 – 6795333
02 619 5000
d) TYCO At Suwaidi Engineering

Group
Tel: 02- 6727477
e) Magnum \ Fomtec Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Tel: 06-5340300
f) SFFECO SFFECO, Dubai

Tel: 04- 8809890
g) NEVO Corodex Est.

Tel: 04-3472530
h) Bristol Corodex Est., Dubai

Tel: 04-3472530
i) FIREX200 Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Tel: 06-5340300
12. Division 21 – Fire Fire Fighting a) Ingersol - Dresser Danway, Dubai

Suppression Pumps Tel: 04- 3473700
Section 21 30 00 –
Fire Pumps b) Peerless Naffco, Dubai
Tel: 04-8151111
c) SPP At Suwaidi Engineering

Group
TEL: +971 2 6727477
d) KSB KSB Middle East

Tel: 04-8830455
e) Aurora Aikah Est., Dubai

Tel: 04-3478005
f) Ritz Aikah Est., Dubai

Tel: 04-3478005
g) FIREX Emirates Fire Fighting

Equipment
Tel: 06-5340300
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -7
_______________________________________________________________________________________

h) Reddy – Buffaloes Naffco, Dubai
Tel: 04-8151111
i) Armstrong Centaur Security Safety

Trading,
Tel: 04-3961188
j) Naffco Naffco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8151111
k) Bristol Corodex Est.

Tel: 04-3472530
13. Division 22 - Valves (Gate, a) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai
Plumbing Globe Ball, Tel: 04 -2823414
Section 22 05 23 - Check, etc.)
General Duty Valves b) Hattersley Leminar Dubai
for Plumbing Tel: 04-3338700
c) Grinnel Suwaidi Engr. Group

Tel: 02-6727488
d) Pegler Bin Moosa & Daly,

Tel: 04 3285976
Mima International
Building Material LLC
Tel : 043285000
e) NIBCO Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
f) Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 02-6219772
g) Mueller Co. Suwaidi Engr. Group

Tel: 02-6727488
h) Tecofi Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
i) Belven Belven DWC , Dubai

Tel: 04-8872528
j) Oventrop Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
k) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -8
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Balancing Valves a) Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg.
Tel: 02-6219772
b) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Tel: 04 -2823414
c) Hattersley Leminar Dubai

Tel: 04-3338700
d) Tecofi Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
e) Oventrop Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
f) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Control Valves a) OCV Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
b) Frese Technoflow,
Tel: 04-2862037
c) FDI Acsys Control System,

Tel: 04-3375100
d) Oventrop Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
e) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Automatic a) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Airvents Tel: 04 -2823414
b) Spirax Sarco Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Tel: 04 -2823414
c) Nibco Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
d) Honey-well Honeywell, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5091801

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -9
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Pressure a) Honeywell Honeywell, Sharjah
Reducing Valves Brauk Mann Tel: 06-5091801
b) Zurn-Wilkins Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
c) Watts Dutco Tennant

Tel: 04-2220186
d) Spirax Sarco Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Tel: 04 -2823414
e) Tecofi Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
f) Eurobrass Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
g) Zurn SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962
h) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Temperature a) Zurn-Wilkins Majid Bukatara Bldg.

and pressure Materials, Dubai
Relief Valves Tel: 04-5576944
b) Honeywell Honeywell, Sharjah

Brauk Mann Tel: 06-5091801
c) Watts Sarco Int'l Gen.

Trading - Dubai
Tel: 04-2942916
d) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Expansion e) Mason Inter Cool, Dubai

Joints/ Flex Tel: 04-4542308
connections
f) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai
Tel: 04 -2823414
g) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai

Tel: 04-3574469
h) Bockington & Scott Ltd. Dutco Tennant

Tel: 04-2220186
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -10
_______________________________________________________________________________________

i) Proco Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.
Tel: 04-8105105
Strainers a) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Tel: 04 -2823414
b) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
c) Spirax Sarco Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Tel: 04 -2823414

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
14. Division 22 – Hangers & a) Grinnel Suwaidi Engr. Group

Plumbing Section 22 Supports Tel: 02-6727488
05 29 – Hanger and
Supports for b) Mupro Fawaz Trading and
Plumbing Piping Engineering Services-
Tel: 04-2282733
c) PHD Metallic Bldg, Materials,

Manufacturing Tel: 04-2894393

Tel: 04-8895561
e) ANDRE SBM Speciality Building

Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962

Co.
Tel: 04-3338700
g) Hilti Hilti Gulf Office, Dubai

Tel: 04-806 0300

Tel: 04-3957772

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944

Tel: 04-8848414
k) Zip Lock Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
l) Vibration Management Meaptashi Corp.,

________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -11
_______________________________________________________________________________________

15. Division 22 – a) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai
Plumbing Section 22 Tel: 04-3574469
05 48 – Mech. Sound,
Vibration & Seismic b) Mason Inter Cool, Dubai
Control For Plumbing Tel: 04-4542308
& Equipment
c) Pyrotek Century Mechanical
Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
d) Vibration Management Meaptashi Corp.,

16. Division 22 – Closed cell tube a) Aeroflex Fawaz Trading and

Plumbing Section 22 Insulation For Engineering Services-
07 00 – Plumbing Water supply Tel: 04-2282733
Insulation pipes
b) Armaflex-Armacell Leminar Air Conditioning
Co.
Tel: 04-3338700
c) K-Flex Unigulf, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5397099
Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
Adhesives a) Foster Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg

Coatings and Est., Dubai
Sealents Tel: 04-3380111
for Pipe works
b) Childers Fawaz Trading and
Tel: 04-2282733
c) Kooltherm Kingspan Insulation LLC

Tel: 04-889 1000
d) Fitco National Plastic & Bldg.

Materials
Tel: 06-5331830
e) IDEAL VS Ltd-USA Meaptashi Corp.,

Tel: 06-5574756
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -12
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Rigid Fiberglass a) Kimmco Kimmco, Dubai

Tel: 04 2967660
Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
b) Arabian Fiber glass Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
c) Knauf Knauf Exceed Insulation

Tel: 02-5512453
17. Division 22 – Vacuum Breaker a) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Plumbing Section 22 Materials, Dubai
11 13 –Facility Water Tel: 04-5576944
Distribution Piping
b) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co.
Tel: 04-2894670
c) Wade Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
Shock Arrestor a) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
b) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co.

Tel: 04-2894670
c) Wade Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
Water meters a) ABB-Kent Obaid Humaid Al Tayer,

Tel: 04-2825000
b) Sensus Dutco Tennant

Tel: 04-2220186
c) Badger Meter Badger Meter Middle East

Tel: 04-3712503
d) Kimans Inc Kimans Inc, Dubai

Tel: 04-8879596
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -13
_______________________________________________________________________________________
18. Division 22 – UPVC Pipes & a) Hepworth/ George Hepworth Co.

Plumbing Section 22 Fittings Fisher Tel: 04-2894670
11 16 – Domestic (Pressure)
Water Piping and b) Uponor / Dura Pipe Abdulla Ghuloom Ramdan
Fitting Trading, Dubai.
Tel: 04-2225219
c) Gulf Eternit Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-5124600
d) National Plastics National Plastic &

(FIP Fittings) Bldg.Materials
Tel: 06-5331830
e) Omni Plast Al Zubaidi Trad. Est. ,

Tel: 04-2858808
f) Modern Plastic Modern Plastic Industries

Tel: 04-8851300
PEX Pipes a) JRG Sanipex Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
b) Wirsbo Bin Aweidha Trade

Agencies, Dubai
Tel: 04-2584660
c) Viega Taps & More Dubai

Tel: 04-3207300
Steel pipes a) Nippon Steel Nippon Steel, Dubai

(Galvanized Tel: 04 -8876020
Steel)
b) Sumitomo Sumitomo corporation
Middle East FZE, Dubai
Tel: 04-8178000

Tel: 04-8835848

Tel: 04-8818383

Tel: 04-8835848
f) Seah Steel Corp Asia Electro-Mech. Co.,

Tel: 04-8818383

Tel: 04-8835848
h) Surya Fittings Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -14
_______________________________________________________________________________________

i) Viega megapress Century Mechanical
Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
Polypropylene a) Aquatherm Al Sahoo Trdg. Est.,

Pipes for Water Supply, Dubai
(PP-R) for Tel: 04-2690156
Water Supply
b) Coestherm Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-5124600
c) George Fischer Georg Fischer Piping

Systems (Switzerland) Ltd.
(DMCC Branch)
Tel: 04 289 4960
d) Polymutan Khalid Al Mohaisen

Trdg. Est. – Dubai
Tel: 04-2665536
Polyethylene a) George Fischer Georg Fischer Piping

Pipe Systems (Switzerland) Ltd.
(DMCC Branch)
Tel: 04 289 4960
b) Gulf Eternit Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-5124600
c) Union Pipe Industry Union Pipe Industry

Tel: 02- 5500102
19. Division 22 – Pumps (Water a) Pullen Danway,

Plumbing Section 22 supply) Tel: 04-3473700
11 23 – Domestic
Water Pumps b) Ingersol-Dresser Danway,
Tel: 04-3473700
c) KSB KSB Middle East

Tel: 04-8830455
d) Ritz AIKAH Establishment,

Tel: 04-3478005
e) ITT Xylem Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
f) PACO Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
g) Aurora Leminar Air Conditioning

Co.
Tel: 04-3338700
h) Weir Scientechnic
Tel: 04-2666000
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -15
_______________________________________________________________________________________

i) Goulds Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.
Tel: 04-8105105
j) Biral Jangan Est.

Tel: 04- 2208080
k) Flow Serve Flow serve Gulf FZE

04 8104810
l) SPP At Suwaidi Engineering

(DP for stainless steel Group
pumps) Tel : 02 -6727477
m) ITT Industries (Lowara) Ahmed Ramadan Juma

Est
Tel: 04-3331524
n) Grundfos Grundfos Gulf Distributions

Tel: 04-8815166
o) Crane Menasc
Tel: 04-2611167
p) Davey Bin Moosa & Daly,

Tel: 04 328 5976
q) SAER Bin Moosa & Daly,

Tel: 04 328 5976
r) Ebara Fawaz Trading and

Engineering Services
Tel: 04-2282733
s) ESPA ESPA middle East FZE

Tel: 06-5529945
t) SPCO Gulf pump

Tel: 04-328 5976
20. Division 22 – GRP Sectional a) Balmoral Katilink, Dubai

Plumbing Section 22 Tanks Tel: 04-3475444
12 00 Drinking Water
Storage Tanks b) LG Hitank Leadergrate LLC
Tel: 04-8851976
c) Thermoset Thermoset, Dubai,

Tel: 04 -8852228
d) Pipeco Pipeco Tanks Trading,

Tel: 06 -7459878
e) Al Bassam Al Bassam International

Factories Sharjah,
Tel: 06 -7468668
f) Solico Solico - Dubai

Tel: 04-8801800
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -16
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Sunnik Azzano Gulf

Tel: 04-5466632
Potaglas Pipe Link International

Tel: 06 -5311352
21. Division 22 – Drainage a) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Plumbing Section 22 Accessories; Materials, Dubai
13 00 – Facility Metallic (Gully Tel: 04-5576944
Sanitary Sewerage Traps, floor trap,
balcony drain, b) Frost Mac Al Gurg – Dubai
clean out, roof Tel: 04-2661291
vent cap, grease
interceptor, vent c) Wade Fikhree Pipe, Dubai
cap, grease Tel: 04-3377911
interceptor,
roof drain). d) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co.
Tel: 04-2894670
e) Harmer Majid Bukatara Bldg.

(Roof Drains) Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
f) ACO ACO System FZE

Tel: 04-8806998
g) Kessel Bin Moosa & Daly, Dubai

Tel: 04 328 5976
h) MIFAB CORYS PIPING SYSTEM

Tel: 04-2894670
i) Saudi Cast Saudicast

Tel: 04-3428760
Drainage a) Hunter National Plastic &

Accessories; Bldg.Materials
Plastic (Gully Tel: 06-5331830
Traps floor trap,
balcony drain, b) Hepworth Hepworth Co.
vent cap, roof
drain) c) Terrain Fikhree Pipe, Dubai
Tel: 04-3377911
d) Marley Aliaxis, Dubai

Tel: 04-3629423
e) Nicoll Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -17
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Floor Drain, a) SHW Bin Moosa & Daly,
balcony Tel: 04 328 5976
drain & clean
out cover b) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co.
(Stainless Steel) Tel: 04-2894670
c) Ideal Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials
Tel: 04-5576944
d) DRENO (SBM) SBM

Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962
e) Saudi Cast Saudicast

Tel: 04-3428760
f) Dallmer Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
g) Bonomini Taps & More Dubai

Tel: 04-3207300
Trench Grate & a) Frost Mac Al Gurg – Dubai

Frame Tel: 04-2661291
b) Freedrain Hepworth Co.

Dubai
Tel: 04-2894670
c) ACO ACO System FZE

Dubai
Tel: 04-8806998
d) MBBM SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Sharjah
Tel: 06-5579962

Dubai
Tel: 04-3428760
Manhole a) Glynwed Brickhouse ADMMI

frames, Tel: 02-4081454
covers and
gratings
b) Stanton Mac Al Gurg – Dubai
Tel: 04-2661291
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -18
_______________________________________________________________________________________

c) Passavant Obaid Humaid Al Tayer,
Tel: 04-2825000
d) Selflock Gebal, Abu Dhabi

Tel: 02-4464684
e) Elkington Gatic Ltd Mac Al Gurg – Dubai

Tel: 04-2661291
f) Aquacast Majid Bukatara Bldg.

(Recessed Type GI) Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
g) Eccles Al Mamalek Bldg. Materials

(Recessed Type GI) Tel: 04-8804955
h) MBBM SBM Speciality Building

Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962
i) Saudi Cast Saudicast Dubai

Tel: 04-3428760
j) Dallmer Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
22. Division 22 – High Density a) George Fischer Hepworth Co.

Plumbing Section 22 Polyethylene Tel: 04-2894670
13 16 - Sanitary Pipe (HDPE)
Waste and Vent b) Gulf Eternit Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.,
Piping Tel: 04-5124600
c) Dura pipe Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
UPVC Pipes & a) Hepworth Hepworth Co.

Fittings (Gravity) Tel: 04-2894670
b) Terrain Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
c) Marley\Dura pipe Aliaxis, Dubai

Tel: 04-3629423
d) National Plastic National Plastic &

(Hunter Fittings) Bldg.Materials
Tel: 06-5331830
e) Gulf Eternit/OSMA Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-5124600

Tel: 04-8851300
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -19
_______________________________________________________________________________________

g) Cosmoplast Cosmoplast Industry
Tel: 06-5331264
23. Division 22 – UPVC Pipes & a) Hepworth Hepworth Co.

Plumbing Section 22 Fittings (Gravity Dubai
14 00 - Facility Storm Tel: 04-2894670
Drainage
Tel: 04-3377911
c) Marley\Dura pipe Aliaxis, Dubai

Tel: 04-3629423
d) National Plastic (Hunter National Plastic &

Fittings) Bldg.Materials
Tel: 06-5331830

Tel: 04-5124600

Dubai
Tel: 04-8851300
g) Cosmoplast Cosmoplast Industry

Tel: 06-5331264
Drainage a) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Accessories; Materials, Dubai
Metallic (Gully Tel: 04-5576944
Traps, floor trap,
balcony drain, b) Frost Mac Al Gurg – Dubai
vent cap, roof
drain) c) Wade Fikhree Pipe, Dubai
Tel: 04-3377911
d) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co.Dubai

Tel: 04-2894670
e) Harmer Majid Bukatara Bldg.

(Roof Drains) Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
f)ACO ACO System FZE

Tel: 04-8806998
g) Kessel Bin Moosa & Daly, Dubai

Tel: 04 328 5976
h) MIFAB CORYS PIPING SYSTEM,

Tel: 04-2894670

Tel: 04-3428760
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -20
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Drainage a) Hunter National Plastic & Bldg.
Accessories; Materials
Plastic (Gully Tel: 06-5331830
Traps, drain,
clean out, roof b) Hepworth Hepworth Co.
vent cap, roof Tel: 04-2894670
drain)
c) Terrain Fikhree Pipe, Dubai
Tel: 04-3377911
d) Marley Aliaxis, Dubai

Tel: 04-3629423
e) Nicoll Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials
Tel: 04-5576944
Floor Drain, a) SHW Bin Moosa & Daly,

balcony drain & Tel: 04 328 5976
clean out cover
(Stainless Steel) b) Jay R. Smith Hepworth Co.
Tel: 04-2894670
c) Ideal Al Majaz Trdg.

Consultancy
Tel: 06 559 1940
d) DRENO SBM Speciality Building

Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962

Tel: 04-3428760
f) Bonomini Taps & More Dubai

Tel: 04-3207300
Trench Grate & a) Frost Mac Al Gurg – Dubai

Frame Tel: 04-2661291
b) Freedrain Hepworth Co.

Tel: 04-2894670
c) ACO ACO System FZE

Tel: 04-8806998
d) MBBM SBM Speciality Building

Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962

Tel: 04-3428760
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -21
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Manhole a) Glynwed Brickhouse Al Semsam Building
frames, covers Materials
and gratings Tel: 04-2698464
b) Stanton Mac Al Gurg – Dubai

Tel: 04-2661291
c) Passavant Obaid Humaid Al Tayer,

Tel: 04-2825000
d) Selflock Gebal, Abu Dhabi

Tel: 02-4464684
e) Elkington Gatic Ltd. Mac Al Gurg – Dubai

Tel: 04-2661291
f) MBBM SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962
g) Aquacast Majid Bukatara Bldg.

(Recessed Type GI) Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
h) Eccles Al Mamalek Bldg. Materials

(Recessed Type GI) Tel: 04-8804955

Tel: 04-3428760
24. Division 22 – Submersible a) Flygt Xylem UAE

Plumbing Section 22 Sump Pumps Tel: · 04 801 7300
14 29 - Sump Pumps
b) KSB KSB Middle East
Tel: 04-8830455
c) ABS Ahmed Ramadan Juma

Est
Tel: 04-3331524
d) Weir Scientechnic
Tel: 04-2666000
e) Ritz Aikah Est., Dubai

Tel: 04-3478005
f) Grundfos Grundfos Gulf Distributions

Tel: 04-8815166
g) Crane Menasco,
Tel: 04-2611167
h) SAER Menasco,
Tel: 04-2611167
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -22
_______________________________________________________________________________________

i) Aurora Leminar Air Conditioning
Co.
Tel: 04-3338700
j) Ebara Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
k) ESPA ESPA middle East FZE

Sharjah
Tel: 06-5529945
25. Division 22 – Electric Water a) Ariston Santy General Trdg. Co.,

Plumbing Section 22 Heaters (Glass Tel: 04-2821626
33 30 – Domestic lined Storage
Water Heaters type) b) A.O. Smith Hamad R. Al Shamsi
Tel: 04-2666429
c) Braun Abr Al Mutawasit,

Tel: 06-5344417
d) Atlantic Sadara – Dubai

Tel : 042517304
Atlantic International
Tel: 04-3864442
26. Division 22 – Sanitary a) Kohler Kohler middle east, Dubai

Plumbing Section 22 Fixtures and Tel: 04 364 2650
40 00 - Sanitary Accessories
Fixtures b) Armitage Shanks Mac Al Gurg – Dubai
Tel: 04-2661291
c) Twyfords Faraidooni Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-2222947
Mohammed Zainal
Faraidooni,. Dubai
Tel:04 -2626555
Sarieddine Trading
Establishment, Abu Dhabi
Tel:02-6776121
d) American Standard Sulltaco - Dubai

Tel: 04-3385929
e) Jacob Delafon Al Ghandi Bldg. Materials

Tel: 04-2660045
f) Pozzi-Ginori Al Shaya Trading Co

Tel: 04-2629100
g) Ideal Standard Sulltaco - Dubai

Tel: 04-3385929
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -23
_______________________________________________________________________________________

h) Stelrad Doulton Al Shaya Trading Co
Tel: 04-2629100
i) Villeroy & Boch Sara, Trading Est.,

Tel: 04-2659191
j) General Ceramics General Ceramics

(UAE) Ltd., Sharjah
Tel: 06-5582455
k) Laufen German Home, Dubai

Tel: 04-2689993
l) Roca Sanitary Material Co,

Tel: 02-6771363
m)Toto Al Futtaim Engineering

Tel: 02-6592659
n) Gala Manazil Al Sharq Bldg.

Materials LLC, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5391160
o) Catalano Catalano Middle East &

Gulf
Tel: 04-2669940
p) Laufen\ Kaja Taps & More Dubai

Tel: 04-3207300
Fittings & a) Grohe Faraidooni Trdg. Co.,

Fixtures Tel: 04-2222947
b) Kohler Kohler middle east, Dubai

Tel: 04 364 2650
c) Jacob Delafon Al Ghandi Bldg. Materials

Tel: 04-2660045
d) Ideal Standard Sulltaco - Dubai

Tel: 04-3385929
e) American Standard Sulltaco - Dubai

Tel: 04-3385929
f) Hanse Grohe Sanitary Material Co,

Abu Dhabi
Tel: 02-6771363
g) Huber / Bianchi Manazil Al Sharq Bldg.

Materials LLC, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5391160
h) Catalano Catalano Middle East &

Gulf
Tel: 04-2669940
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -24
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Taps & More Dubai
Tel: 04-3207300
i) Viega\ Kaja Taps & More Dubai

Tel: 04-3207300
j) Toto Al Futtaim Engineering

Tel: 02-6592659
Concealed a) Grohe Sarriddine Trading,

Cistern Tel: 02-6776121
Sara, Trading Est.,

Tel: 04-2659191
b) Toto Al Futtaim Engineering

Tel: 02-6592659
c) Tele Sanitary Material Co,

Tel: 02-6771363
d) Ideal Standard (Oliver) Sulltaco - Dubai

Tel: 04-3385929
e) Nicoll SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962
27. Division 22 – Sand Filters a) Culligan Culligan Int’l, Dubai

Plumbing Section 22 Tel: 04-3389880
51 00 – Swimming
Pools & Fountain b) Anthony Pools Bel Hasa Projects
Works Tel: 04-3331445
c) Certikin Cetrikin Middle East.

Tel: 04-8861404
d) Triton United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
e) Astral Astral Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-8835505
f) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5561818
g) International Water Waterman, Sharjah

Tel.: 06-5733400
Ozone Plant a) Certikin Cetrikin Middle East.

Tel: 04-8861404
b) Prozone United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -25
_______________________________________________________________________________________

c) Culligan Culligan Int’l, Dubai
Tel: 04-3389880
d) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5561818
e) Traligaz Waterman, Sharjah

Tel.: 06-5733400
f) Astral Astral Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-8835505
Pumps a) ITT marlow United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
b) Culligan Culligan Int’l, Dubai

Tel: 04-3389880
c) Certikin Cetrikin Middle East.

Tel: 04-8861404
d) Davey Bin Moosa & Daly,

Tel: 04 328 5976
e) Triton United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
f) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5561818
g) International Water Waterman, Sharjah

Tel.: 06-5733400
h) Astral Astral Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-8835505
Swimming pool a) Culligan Culligan Int’l, Dubai

Accessories Tel: 04-3389880
b) Astral Astral Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-8835505
c) PEM United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
d) Rainbow Life Guard United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
e) International Water Waterman, Sharjah

Tel.: 06-5733400
f) Hayward United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
g) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5561818
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -26
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Pool a) Sure-Temp Waterman, Sharjah

Heater/Heat Tel.: 06-5733400
Pump
b) Calorex United Tech & Trad. Co.
Tel: 04-3591015
c) Thermalec United Tech & Trad. Co.

Dubai
Tel: 04-3591015
d) Aquacal United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015

Tel: 04-8835505
Fountains a) Culligan Culligan Int’l, Dubai

Sand Filters Tel: 04-3389880
b) Permutit Vivendi Water (Gulf)

Tel: 06-5570703
c) Bruner Culligan Int’l, Dubai

Tel: 04-3389880
d) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah

Tel: 06-5561818

Tel: 04-8835505
f) Triton United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
Fountain a) Oase - Pumpen Bahri & Mazroei Trading.

Accessories Co.
Tel: 04-2691610
b) Exclusive Acrylic Waterman, Sharjah

Tel.: 06-5733400
c) Mebner Waterman, Sharjah

Tel.: 06-5733400
d) PEM United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
e) Imperial Bronzelite United Tech & Trad. Co.

Tel: 04-3591015
f) Astral Astral Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-8835505
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -27
_______________________________________________________________________________________
28. Division 23 – Heating, Valves (Gate, a) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co.,
Ventilation and Air Globe Tel: 04 -2823414
Conditioning Section Ball, Check,
23 05 23 - General etc.) b) Hattersley Al Amana Trdg. Est. Abu
Duty Valves for HVAC Tel: 02-6723787
c) Grinnell Suwaidi Engr. Group

Tel: 02-6727488
d) Pegler Bin Moosa & Daly,

Tel: 04 328 5976
Mima international
Building Materials LLC
Tel : 04-3285000
e) NIBCO Fikhree Pipe, Dubai
Tel: 04-3377911
Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
f) Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 02-6219772
g) Mueller Co. Suwaidi Engr. Group

Tel: 02-6727488
h) Tecofi Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
i) Belven Belven DWC , Dubai

Tel: 04-8872528
j) Viega Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
k) Oventrop Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
l) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Email:
info@sadarauae.com
Balancing a) Tour and Anderson Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg.
Valves (Double Tel: 02-6219772
Regulator)
b) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co.
Tel: 04- 4550600
c) Hattersley Al Amana Trdg. Est. Abu

Tel: 02-6723787
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -28
_______________________________________________________________________________________

d) Tecofi Bright Central A/C,
Tel: 06-559 9006

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
f) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Email:
info@sadarauae.com
Control Valves a) OCV Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
b) Frese Technoflow, Dubai

Tel: 04 -2862037
c) FDI Acsys Control System,

Tel: 04-3375100

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
e) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Automatic a) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co.,

Airvents Tel: 04 -2823414
b) Spirax Sarco Technical Parts Co.,

Tel: 04 -2823414
c) Nibco Fikhree Pipe, Dubai

Tel: 04-3377911
Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
d) Honey-well Honeywell, Sharjah


Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
PIBCV/PICV a) Flow Control Industries Independent Technical

(FCI) Solutions , Dubai
Tel: 04-2392882
b) IMI-TA DC Serve, Dubai

Tel: 04-8105105
c) Danfoss Wotex FZE, Dubai

Tel: 04-8812 080
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -29
_______________________________________________________________________________________
d) Siemens Siemens Building

Technologies
Tel: 04-3660000
e) Johnson Controls Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
f) Oventrop Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
Temperature a) Zurn-Wilkins Majid Bukatara Bldg.

and Pressure Materials, Dubai
Relief Valves Tel: 04-5576944
b) Honey-well Honeywell, Sharjah

c) Watts Sarco Int'l Gen.

Trading - Dubai
Tel: 04-2942916
d) Conex Banninger Sadara General Trading

Tel: 04-2517304
Strainers a) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai
Tel: 04 -2823414
b) Zurn Majid Bukatara Bldg.

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
c) Spirax Sarco Technical Parts Co., Dubai

Tel: 04 -2823414

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
Expansion a)Mason Inter Cool, Dubai

Joints/ Flex Tel: 04-4542308
connections
b) Crane Co. Technical Parts Co., Dubai
Tel: 04 -2823414
c) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai

Tel: 04-3574469
d) Bockington & Scott Ltd. Dutco Tennant

Tel: 04-2220186
e) Proco Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -30
_______________________________________________________________________________________

f) Viega Century Mechanical
Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
29. Division 23 – Heating, Hangers & a) Grinnell ITT Suwaidi Engr. Group
Ventilation and Air Supports Tel: 02-6727488
Conditioning
Section 23 05 29 – b) Mupro Fawaz Trading and
Hangers and Engineering Services-
Supports for HVAC Tel: 04-2282733
Piping
Tel: 04-2894393

Tel: 04-8895561
e) ANDRE SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC, Sharjah
Tel: 06-5579962

Co.
Tel: 04-3338700
g)Hilti Hilti Gulf Office, Dubai
Tel: 04-806 0300

Tel: 04-3957772

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944

Tel: 04-8848414
k)Etalia Century Mechanical

Systems
l) Zip Lock Tel: 04-3474858
30. Division 23 – Heating, Sound a) Sound Attenuators Ltd. ATAI, RAK

Ventilation and Air Attenuators Tel: 07-2445977
Conditioning
Section 23 05 48 – b) Ruskin Titus Ruskin Titus Gulf, Dubai
Mech. Sound, Tel: 04-3099999
Vibration & Seismic
Control for HVAC and c) Trox Trox Technik ME Office
Equipment Tel: 04-3417448
d) Excelair Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -31
_______________________________________________________________________________________

e) CVS Central Ventilation
Systems Co L.L.C
Tel: 06-5336355
f) Galloway Acoustics Leminar Dubai

Tel: 04-3338700
Duct Liner a) Kimmco Kimmco, Dubai

Tel: 04 2967660
b) Knauf Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
c) Manson Saif Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-2670909
Hangers & a) Grinnell ITT Suwaidi Engr. Group

Supports Tel: 02-6727488
b) Mupro Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733

Tel: 04-2894393

Tel: 04-8895561
e) ANDRE SBM Speciality Building

Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962

Co.Dubai
Tel: 04-3338700
g) Hilti Hilti Gulf Office, Dubai

Tel: 04-806 0300

Tel: 04-3957772

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
j) Etalia Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
k) Vibration Management Meaptashi Corp.,

________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -32
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Vibration a) Kinetics Royal Gulf, Dubai
Isolation Tel: 04-3574469
b) Mason Inter Cool, Dubai

Tel: 04-4542308
c) Vibration Management Meaptashi Corp.,

d) WEICCO-INDIA Leminar Dubai

Tel: 04-3338700
31. Division 23 – Heating, Painting a) Carboline Carboline Middle East.

Ventilation and Air Tel: 04-3470460
Conditioning
Section 23 05 53 – b) Jotun Jotun UAE Ltd. – Dubai
Mechanical Tel: 04-3395000
Identification for
HVAC Piping and
Equipment
32. Division 23 – Heating, Fibre glass a) Kimmco Kimmco, Dubai

Ventilation and Air Insulation Tel: 04 2967660
Conditioning
Section 23 07 00 - b) Arabian Fiber glass Century Mechanical
HVAC Insulation Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
c) Knauf Knauf Exceed Insulation

Tel: 02-5512453
Duct Liner a) Kimmco Kimmco, Dubai

(Fiber glass) Tel: 04 2967660
b) AFICO Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
c) Manson Saif Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-2670909
d) Knauf Knauf Exceed Insulation

Tel: 02-5512453
Duct Liner a) Aeroflex Fawaz Refrigeration & A/C

(Elastomeric Co. Dubai
rubber) Tel.: 04-2282733
b) Armaflex- Armacell Leminar Dubai

Tel: 04-3338700
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -33
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Tel: 06-5397099
Fawaz Refrigeration & A/C

Co. Dubai
Tel.: 04-2282733
d) Aero sound Hira Industries LLC,

Tel.: 04-884 8414
CHW pipe a) Aeroflex Fawaz Refrigeration & A/C

insulation Co. Dubai
Tel.: 04-2282733

Tel: 04-3338700

Tel: 06-5397099

Co. Dubai
Tel.: 04-2282733
d) Aero foam Hira Industries LLC,
Tel.: 04-884 8414
CHW Pipe a) Kooltherm Kingspan Insulation LLC

Insulation Tel: 04-889 1000
(Phenolic)
b) CAPE East CAPE East Ltd.
Tel: 02-5555199
c) Gulf Cooltherm Gulf Cooltherm Factory,

Tel: 06-5257776
Closed cell tube a) Aeroflex Fawaz Refrigeration & A/C

for Refrigerent Co. Dubai
Tel.: 04-2282733

Tel: 04-3338700

Tel: 06-5397099

Co. Dubai
Tel.: 04-2282733
Adhesives, a) Foster Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg

Coatings and Est., Dubai
Sealents (For Tel: 04-3380111
A/C duct and
Pipe works b) Childers Fawaz Trading and
Tel: 04-2282733
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -34
_______________________________________________________________________________________

c) Kooltherm Kingspan Insulation LLC
Tel: 04-889 1000
d) Fitco National Plastic &

Bldg.Materials
Tel: 06-5331830
e) NAPCO Leminar Dubai

Tel: 04-3338700
f) Frego / Xchem Fawaz Refrigeration & A/C

Co. Dubai
Tel.: 04-2282733
g) Premier Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
h) IDEAL VS Ltd- USA Meaptashi Corp.

Tel: 06-5574756
33. Division 23 – Heating, Automatic a) STAEFA-Siemens Staefa Control System

Ventilation and Air Controls Tel: 04-3660000
Conditioning
Section 23 09 00 b) Honey-well Honeywell, Sharjah
Instrumentations and Tel: 06-5091801
Controls for HVAC
c) Invensys Invensys Middle East
Tel: 04-2236200
d) Erie Saif Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-2670909
Thermometers a) Dwyer Westech, Dubai

Tel: 04-2994124
b) Trerice Westech, Dubai

Tel: 04-2994124

Tel: 06-5343477
d) Hunter Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
e) Brannan Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733

Tel: 04-3387111
g) Winters – Canada Leminar Air Conditioning

Co.Dubai
Tel: 04-3338700
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -35
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Pressure a) Dwyer Westech- Dubai
Gauges Tel: 04-2994124
b) Trerice Westech- Dubai

Tel: 04-2994124

Tel: 06-5343477
d) Hunter Intertechno, Dubai

Tel: 04-3354558
e) Brannan Fawaz Refrigeration & A/C

Tel.: 04-2282733

Tel: 04-3387111
g) WIKA Wika ME, Dubai

Tel: 04-8839090
h) Winters – Canada Leminar Air Conditioning

Co.Dubai
Tel: 04-3338700
Flow meters a) Sparling Energy International

Tel: 06-5343477
b) Danfoss Haste, Dubai.

Tel: 04-2223133
c) Smith meter Inc. Petro Gas Agencies,

Tel: 02-5553455
Suwaidi Engr. Group

Tel: 02-6727488
Energy BTU a) Kamstrtup Acsys Control System,

Meter Tel: 04-3375100
b) Siemens Siemens Building

Technologies
Tel: 04-3660000
c) Elster Al Dayer Group

Tel: 04-2011111
d) Sontex Saif Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-2670909
e) Sensus Dutco Tenant

Tel: 04-2220186
f) Landis + Gyr. Al Tayer, Dubai

Tel: 04-2825000
g) Kimans Inc Kimans Inc, Dubai

Tel: 04-8879596
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -36
_______________________________________________________________________________________
34. Division 23 – Heating, Steel pipes a) Nippon Steel Nippon Steel, Dubai
Ventilation and Air (Black Steel) Tel: 04 -8876020
Conditioning
Section 23 21 13 - b) Sumitomo Sumitomo corporation
Hydronic Piping Middle East FZE, Dubai
Tel: 04-8178000
c) Van Leeuwen Van Leeuwen Pipe Tube

ME
Tel: 02-6271840
Copper Pipes a) Mueller Europe Leminar Dubai

(Refrigeration) Tel: 04-3338700
b) Outokumpu Outokumpu Middle East,

Tel: 04 8855661
c) Mettube Cool Ways

Tel: 06- 5300735
UPVC Pipes & a) Hepworth Hepworth Co.

Fittings (Gravity) Tel: 04-2894670
Condensate
Drain b) Terrain Fikhree Pipe, Dubai
Tel: 04-3377911
c) Marley Aliaxis, Dubai

Tel: 04-3629423

Tel: 06-5331830
e) Gulf Eternit Gulf Eternit Trdg. Co.,

Tel: 04-5124600
f) Cosmoplast Cosmoplast Industry

Tel: 06-5331264
35. Division 23 – Heating, Pumps (Chilled a) Pullen Danway, Dubai

Ventilation and Air Water) Tel: 04-3473700
Conditioning
Section 23 21 23 - b) Ingersol-Dresser Danway, Dubai
Hydronic Pumps Tel: 04-3473700
c) KSB KSB Middle East

Tel: 04-8830455
d) PACO Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
e) ITT Xylem Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -37
_______________________________________________________________________________________

f) PACO Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.
Tel: 04-8105105
g) Aurora Leminar Air Conditioning

Co. Dubai
Tel: 04-3338700
h) Flow Serve Arison Gulf Co.,

Abu Dhabi
Tel: 02-5554 144
i) SPP Al Sagar Engineering Co.,

Tel: 04-2669595
j) Grundfos Grundfos Gulf

Distributions, Dubai
Tel: 04-8815166
k) Pattrson Corodex Agencies, Dubai

Tel: 04-347 2910
l) Southern Cross Energy International

Tel: 06-5343477
m) Crane Menasco, Dubai

Tel: 04-2611167
n) Southern Cross Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
o) Davey Bin Moosa & Daly

Tel: 04 328 5976
p) ESPA ESPA middle East FZE

Tel: 06-5529945
q) Ebara Fawaz Trading and
Tel: 04-2282733
Sealed Type a) ITT Xylem Faisal Jasim Gen. Trdg.

Expansion Tel: 02-6219772
Tanks
b) Holden & Brooke Danway, Dubai
Tel: 04-3473700
c) Pillinger Rapid Cool, Dubai

Tel: 04-2274910
36. Division 23 – Heating, Copper Pipes a) Mueller Europe Leminar Air Conditioning
Ventilation and Air (Refrigeration) Co. Dubai
Conditioning Tel: 04-3338700
Section 23 23 00 –
Refrigerant Piping b) Outokumpu Outokumpu Middle East,
Tel: 04 8855661
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -38
_______________________________________________________________________________________

c) Mettube Cool Ways
Tel: 06- 5300735
UPVC Pipes & a) Hepworth Hepworth Co.Dubai

Fittings Tel: 04-2894670

Tel: 04-3377911
c) Marley Aliaxis, Dubai

Tel: 04-3629423

Tel: 06-5331830

Tel: 04-5124600
f) Cosmoplast Cosmoplast Industry

Tel: 06-5331264
37. Division 23 – Heating, Chilled Water a) Metito Metito Overseas, Sharjah

Ventilation and Air Chemical Tel: 06-5561818
Conditioning Treatment
Section 23 25 00 b) Houseman Corodex Trdg. Est. Dubai
HVAC Water Tel.: 04-3472900
Treatment
c) Culligan Culligan Int’l, Dubai
Tel: 04-3389880
d) Water Bird Treatment Chemical L.L.C, Water

Bird Treatment
Tel : 04-3405961
Chilled Water
Filtration Unit
Filter Bag: a) Veolia
b) Corodex
c) Culligan
Pump: Refer to
vendor list of
Section 23 21
23 - Hydronic
Pumps.
Air Separator: a) Taco --
b) Amtrol --
c) Armstrong --
d) Bell & Gossett Rolairtrol --
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -39
_______________________________________________________________________________________

38. Division 23 – Heating, GI Sheet for a) Nisshin --
Ventilation and Air Ducts
Conditioning Section
23 31 00- HVAC Ducts b) NKK --
and Casing c) Kobe --
d) Isokor --
e) Lloyds --
f) Isokor --
g) Gmamco --
h) Nippon --
i) Sabic Hadeed --
j) AGIS --
Stainless\Black a) Safid (KSA) --

Steel Duct
b) Leminar --
c) Weather maker --
d) Emirates duct --
e) Seagull --
f) CMS --
Fire rated duct a) Cape Durasteel --

b) Flamebar --
c) Ocean Fire --
d) Promat --
e) Firespary --
f) Seagull --
g) Galloway Fenland --
h) CMS --
i) CVS (Central Ventilation --
System Co LLC)
j) Flame Safe – --
Liminar Industries
Hangers & a) Grinnel ITT Suwaidi Engr. Group

Supports Tel: 02-6727488
b) Mupro Fawaz Trading and

Tel: 04-2282733
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -40
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Tel: 04-2894393

Tel: 04-8895561
e) ANDRE SBM
Speciality Building
Materials FZC
Tel: 06-5579962

Co.Dubai
Tel: 04-3338700
g) Hiliti Hiliti Gulf Office, Dubai

Tel: 80044584
Tel: 04-3957772

Materials, Dubai
Tel: 04-5576944
j) Etalia Century Mechanical

Tel: 04-3474858
Flexible Ducts a) CCL Dutco Tennant

(With insulation) Tel: 04-2220186
b) Safid Intertechno, Dubai

Tel: 04-3354558
c) Atco Meaptashi Corp.,

Tel: 06-5574756
d) Omniair Unigulf Deve. Dubai

Tel: 04-2223697
e) Duraflex Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
39. Division 23 – Heating, Fire Dampers, a) Trox Trox Technik ME Office

Ventilation and Air Smoke Tel: 04-3417448
Conditioning Dampers,
Section 23 33 00 - Air Motorized b) Ruskin Titus Ruskin Titus Gulf, Dubai
Ducts Accessories Damper Tel: 04-3099999
Pressure Relief
Dampers c) Advanced Air Ambiotech Middle East
Tel: 04-3473703
d) Pottorff Energy International

Tel: 06-5343477
e) Gmamco Gmamco, Dubai

Tel: 04-8802334
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -41
_______________________________________________________________________________________

f) KBE KBE Gulf, Dubai
Tel: 04 -3405600
g) BETA BETA Factory, Dubai

(only fire dampers) Tel: 04-7069777
h) Aerovac Prime Air-Conditioning

Industries
Tel: 04-8856861
i) CMS Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
j) CVS Central Ventilation

Systems Co L.L.C
Tel: 06-5336355
k) Betec Cad Industries Betec Cad Industries FZC,
Sharjah
Tel : 06-5575252
40. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation Fans a) Myson Awazi Gargash - Dubai

Ventilation and Air (Axial, Tel: 04-2282151
Conditioning Centrifugal roof,
Section 23 34 00 - smoke, in-line b) Penn Energy International
HVAC Fans industrial, etc.) Tel: 06-5343477
c) Nuaire Ambience Technology,

Tel: 04-2722393
d) Loren Cook Saif Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-2670909
e) Venta-Axia IMEC – Sharjah

Tel: 06-5568366
f) Greenheck Westech- Dubai

Tel: 04-2994124
g) S & P Al Wasl Engineering

Works., Dubai
Tel: 04-2505056
h) Vectaire Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
i) Rosenberg Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
j) Howden Donkin BETA Trdg. Co. Dubai

Tel: 04-7069777
k) Dynair Maico Gulf

Tel: 07-2589000
l) Flaktwoods Awazi Gargash - Dubai

Tel: 04-2282151
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -42
_______________________________________________________________________________________

Exhaust Fans a) Venta-Axia IMEC – Sharjah
(Domestic Type) Tel: 06-5568366
b) Helios Energy International

Tel: 06-5343477
c) Vortice BETA Trdg. Co. Dubai

Tel: 04-7069777
d) S & P Al Wasl Engineering

Works., Dubai
Tel: 04-2505056
e) Vectaire Bright Central A/C,

Tel: 06-559 9006
f) Xpelair Awazi Gargash - Dubai

Tel: 04-2282151
41. Division 23 – Heating, Air Curtains a) Mars Doors Energy International

Ventilation and Air (Industrial) Tel: 06-5343477
Conditioning
Section 23 35 00 – b) ILG - Coolair Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.
Special Exhaust Tel: 04-8105105
System
c) Leading Edge Meaptashi Corp.
Tel: 06-5574756
d) Berner ATAI, RAK

Tel: 07-2445977
e) VTS Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
Air Curtains a) Sanyo Al Futtaim Engineering

(Domestic) Tel: 04- 211 9111
b) National Panatech Engr. Dubai

Tel: 04-2826700
c) Hitachi Eros Electricals, Dubai

Tel: 04- 2098888
d) VTS Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
42. Division 23 – Heating, Air Distribution a) Trox Trox Technik ME Office

Ventilation and Air Outlets Tel: 04-3417448
Conditioning
Section 23 37 00 - Air b) Barcol-air Danway, Dubai
Outlets and Inlets Tel: 04-3473700
c) Titus Ruskin Titus Gulf, Dubai

Tel: 04-3099999
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -43
_______________________________________________________________________________________

d) KBE KBE Gulf, Dubai
Tel: 04 -3405600
e) Krueger Westech- Dubai

Tel: 04-2994124
f) Excelair Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
Air Distribution a) Air Master Air Master Eqpt. EM,

Outlets (Local Tel: 06-7436900
Make)
b) Beta BETA Trdg. Co. Dubai
Tel: 04-7069777
c) Technalco Technalco - UAQ

Tel: 06-7665661
d) Best Choice Ind. Best Choice Ind. Dubai

Tel: 04-3471571
e) Airtron Airtron, Dubai

Tel: 04-2672477
f) KBE KBE Gulf, Dubai

Tel: 04 -3405600
g) Excelair Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
h) Betec Cad Industries Betec Cad Industries

FZC, Sharjah
Tel : 06-5575252
43. Division 23 – Heating, Air filters a) Vokes Bin Dasmal Gen. Trdg
Ventilation and Air Est., Dubai
Conditioning Tel: 04-3380111
Section 23 40 00 - Air
Cleaning Devices b) AAF AAF – International
Tel: 04-3397688
c) Trox Trox Technik ME Office

Tel: 04-3417448
d) Excelair Century Mechanical

Systems
Tel: 04-3474858
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -44
_______________________________________________________________________________________

44. Division 23 – Heating, Chillers a) Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier - Dubai
Ventilation and Air (Air cooled) Tel: 04 419 9100
Conditioning
Section 23 64 26 - b) Trane Co. Trane S.A., Dubai
Screw Chillers Tel: 04-4285200
c) York Corp. York A/C & Ref. Dubai

Tel: 04-3099 999
d) Daikin Daikin Middle East

Tel : 04-8159300
e) SKM SKM - Dubai

Tel 04-2940900
f) Petra Petra A/C Est. - Abu

Tel: 02-6678644
45. Division 23 – Heating, AHU (Central) a) Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier - Dubai
Ventilation and Air Tel: 04 419 9100
Conditioning
Section 23 73 10 - b) Trane Co. Juma Al Majid Est.
Indoor Air Handling Tel: 04-2851145
Units, Section 23 73
30 – Outdoor c) York Corp. York A/C & Ref. Dubai
Exposed Air Handling Tel: 04-3099 999
Units
Tel : 04-8159300
e) SKM SKM - Dubai

Tel 04-2940900
f) Petra Petra A/C Est.

Tel: 02-6678644
g) Mekar Mekar AC units Trading

LLC
Tel: 04 3574469
h) Midea Taqeef - Dubai

Tel : 04-5065000
i) VTS Clima/Poland (FAHU) VTS Clima LLC

Tel: 04-8811945
j) Trosten Trosten Industries

Company LLC
Tel: 04-8067666
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -45
_______________________________________________________________________________________

46. Division 23 – Heating, Split Units a) Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier - Dubai
Conditioning
Decentralized HVAC Tel: 04-2851145
Equipment
Tel: 04-3099 999
d) Hitachi GIBCA A/C Div.- Sharjah

Tel: 06-5332925
e) Mitsubishi - Electric United Electronics Co.

Tel: 04-2277401
f) Daikin Daikin Middle East

Tel : 04-8159300
g) Petra Petra A/C Est. - Abu

Tel: 02-6678644
h) Lennox Eros Electricals, Dubai

Tel: 04- 2098888
i) Rheem Leminar Air Conditioning

Co. Dubai
Tel: 04-3338700
j) Dunham-Bush Dunham-Bush Middle East

Tel: 04-4439207
k) Cooline Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
l) LG Fortune International Trd.

Tel: 06-5553677
m) Midea Taqeef
Tel : 04-5065000
Mini-split a) Sanyo Al Futtaim Engineering

Systems Tel: 04- 2119111
b) Hitachi Eros Electricals, Dubai

Tel: 04- 2098888
c) Mitsubishi Daiya United Electronics Co.

Tel: 04-2277401
d) Toshiba Al Futtaim Electronics

Tel.: 04-2219328
e) York Corp. York A/C & Ref. Dubai

Tel: 04-3099 999
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -46
_______________________________________________________________________________________

f) Trane Co. Juma Al Majid Est.
(Comm. Div.), Dubai
Tel: 04-2851145
g) Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier - Dubai

Tel: 04 419 9100
h) Westair Saif Middle East, Dubai

Tel: 04-2670909
i) Cooline Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
j) SKM SKM - Sharjah

Tel: 06-5347347
k) Daikin Daikin Middle East

Tel : 04-8159300
l) Dunham-Bush Dunham-Bush Middle East

Tel: 04-4439207
m) General Electric Faisal Jassim Gen. Trdg.

Tel: 04-8105105
n) O General Taqeef
Tel : 04-5065000
o) LG Fortune International Trd.

Tel: 06-5553677
p) Midea Taqeef
Tel : 04-5065000
q) Mitsubishi - Electric United Electronics Co.

Tel: 04-2277401
47. Division 23 – Heating, Fan Coil Units a) Carrier Corp. UTS Carrier - Dubai
Conditioning
Convection Heating Tel: 04-2851145
and Cooling Units
Tel: 04-3099 999

Tel : 04-8159300
e) SKM SKM - Sharjah

Tel: 06-5347347
f) Petra Petra A/C Est. - Abu

Tel: 02-6678644
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -47
_______________________________________________________________________________________

g) Mekar Mekar AC units Trading
Tel: 04 3574469
h) Midea Taqeef
Tel : 04-5065000
i) Trosten Trosten Industries

Company LLC
Tel: 04-8067666
j) VTS Clima/Poland (FAHU) VTS Clima LLC

Tel: 04-8811945
48. Division 25 – a) STAEFA-Siemens Siemens Building

Integrated Technologies
Automation Facility Tel: 04-3660000
Controls Section 25 b) Honey-well Honeywell, Sharjah
50 00 – Integrated Tel: 06-5091801
Automation Facility
Controls c) Invensys Schneider Electric Systems
Middle East, Dubai
Tel: 04-8074700
d) Johnson Controls Johnson Controls

Tel: 04-3841400
e) Sauter Sauter Middle East

Tel: 06-5578303
f) Kieback & Peter Kieback & Peter ME LLC

Tel: 04 577 6821
49. Division 33 – Utilities Natural Gas Looatah BC Gas LLC,
Section 33 52 00 - System Tel: 04-2977741
SNG System
Royal Development
Tel.: 02-6323236
Integrated Gas Services

Tel.: 04-3242828
Al Sabah Modern E/M

Works Est., Dubai
Tel.: 04-8803311
Q Energy, Abu Dhabi

Tel: 02- 6724477
End of Annexure I
________________________________________________________________________________________
Ann -48

Volume 2 Part 3 - Mechanical Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 2 Part 3 - Mechanical Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT PLOT C33

YAS ISLAND, ABU DHABI - UAE

TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

MAIN WORKS CONTRACT

KHATIB & ALAMI (CONSOLIDATED ENGINEERING COMPANY)

RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT PLOT C33

MAIN WORKS CONTRACT

10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING

21 05 19 METER AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

21 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING

22 05 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING

22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

23 05 00 COMMON WORKS RESULTS FOR HVAC

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION FACILITY CONTROLS

25 50 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION FACILITY CONTROLS

33 05 10 GENERAL NATURAL GAS REQUIREMENTS

ANNEXURE-I - LIST OF APPROVED PRODUCTS, MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS

End of Table of Contents.

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES

1.3 Codes and Standards

2.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers

2.2 Trolley Foam Fire Extinguisher

2.3 Trolley Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher

2.4 Fire Blanket

3.1 Maintenance Schedules

3.2 Approved List of Manufacturers

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALITIES

1.3 Codes and Standards

Reference Code Abbreviation Applicable Title of

2.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers

2.2 Trolley Foam Fire Extinguisher

2.2.1 Trolley mounted Fire Extinguisher shall be of capacities shown.

2.3 Trolley Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher

2.3.1 Trolley mounted Fire Extinguisher shall be of capacities shown.

2.4 Fire Blanket

3.1 Maintenance Schedules

3.2 Approved List of Manufacturers

3.2.1 For acceptable Products, Manufacturers and Suppliers, refer to Annexure I.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

1.1 General Requirements

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION

1.1 General Requirements

1.2.1 This section applies to and is part of all Sections of Division 21

1.3 Scope of Works

1.3.6 Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system.

1.4 Quality Assurance

1.5 Related Works Specified Elsewhere

Section 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialists

1.7 Engineer's Drawings

1.8 Shop Drawings and Data to be submitted for Approval

1.9 Approved Materials

1.10.1 The following abbreviations have been mentioned in the specifications.

AGA American Gas Association.

End of Section 21 05 00.

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOP FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING

1.1 General Requirements

1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1.3 Codes and Standards

2.1 Pipe Expansion Joints

3.1 Pipe Installation